JP7362494B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game to be executable based on seven symbols being stopped and displayed on a decorative symbol display device.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-147575

According to the gaming machine described above, during execution of the jackpot start performance, a right-hitting instruction is given to prompt the player to fire the game ball to the right by operating the ball firing handle. There is still room for improvement regarding instructions that prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

The present invention was devised in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably execute an instruction urging a player to shoot a game ball in a predetermined direction. be.

(A) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
a firing means capable of firing a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
A guidance display that uses an image display to prompt the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. a means for displaying guidance;
guiding means that emits a guiding light to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path by moving a light emitting part of the light emitting means;
Sound output means capable of outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission,
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The first guide display is easier for the player to recognize than the second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, performing the second guidance display in a first period of a predetermined period in which a start effect for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed; performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display during a second period that is later than the first period during the predetermined period;
Continuing the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display in a period after the predetermined period;
Continuing the second guidance display in the special state after the control of the advantageous state has ended;
The guide means is
The light emitting means is caused to emit light in a manner different from the guide light emission during the first period, the light emitting means is turned off before the second period starts, and the first light emitting means is turned off when the second period starts. The guide light is emitted in conjunction with the guide display,
performing the guide light emission multiple times in the second period;
The sound output means is
When the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions is performed, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is outputted;
When the last guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions is performed, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is not outputted;
It is characterized by
Furthermore, (1) a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
a firing means capable of firing a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
A guidance display that uses an image display to prompt the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. and a guide display means for
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
During a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, which is part of the start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous state, performing a second guidance display, and after completing the display of the name of the advantageous state, performing the first guidance display and continuing the second guidance display;
Continuing the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display in a period after the predetermined period;
Continuing the second guidance display in the special state after the control of the advantageous state has ended;
The second guidance display is not affected by a switching display of a background image (for example, switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state,
moreover,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance based on a performance control command),
The game control means is
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) that determines the advantageous state;
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) that determines that the advantageous state will be reached before the determination by the determining means;
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) capable of controlling to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state;
Information transmitting means capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information to the effect execution means (for example, effect control (such as a CPU 103 that sends commands);
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, execute the process of step 059AKS025),
The determination means is capable of determining that the special state is reached before the state control means controls the state to the special state (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS001),
The information transmitting means is capable of transmitting special information that can specify that the control is to be in the special state when the determining means determines that the special state is entered (for example, specifying a display result of "loss (time saving)" commands can be sent),
The performance execution means is
When receiving the determination result information, it is possible to execute a prefetch effect based on the determination result information (for example, it is possible to execute the process of step S161),
If the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the prefetch effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, if it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processing in step 059AKS084 and step S1304 ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction urging the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. Further, it is possible to perform control according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Moreover, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include the invention according to the following means 2. Conventionally, in a game machine, a game medium such as a game ball is fired into a game area by a firing device, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2015-80649, and a game medium such as a game ball is fired into a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the gaming area. When a game medium wins and an execution condition (starting condition) is met, multiple types of identification information (hereinafter referred to as display symbols) are variably displayed on a variable display device, and depending on the display result, a predetermined gaming value is awarded or not. There is a pachinko game machine that increases the interest of the game by using a so-called variable display game in which the player decides whether or not to play the game. In such a pachinko game machine, when the variable display of the display symbols in the variable display game is completely stopped and the stopped symbol mode becomes a specific display mode, an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player occurs. Then, after the end of the jackpot game state, there is a game machine that is controlled to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state.
As such a gaming machine, a gaming machine that is controlled to a special state without going through a jackpot gaming state has been proposed.

However, there was room for improvement regarding control during state transition.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the control of state transitions and increase the interest in gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention performs a variable display, and when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. machine 1 etc.),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance based on a performance control command),
The game control means is
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) that determines the advantageous state;
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) that determines that the advantageous state will be reached before the determination by the determining means;
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) capable of controlling to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state;
Information transmitting means capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information to the effect execution means (for example, effect control (such as a CPU 103 that sends commands);
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, execute the process of step 059AKS025),
The determination means is capable of determining that the special state is reached before the state control means controls the state to the special state (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS001),
The information transmitting means is capable of transmitting special information that can specify that the control is to be in the special state when the determining means determines that the special state is entered (for example, specifying a display result of "loss (time saving)" commands can be sent),
The performance execution means is
When receiving the determination result information, it is possible to execute a prefetch effect based on the determination result information (for example, it is possible to execute the process of step S161),
If the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the prefetch effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, if it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processing in step 059AKS084 and step S1304 ),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a feature of the present embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a frame lamp. It is an explanatory view showing a special figure LED board and a 4th pattern unit. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. It is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release post-processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of production processing during jackpot. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during winning fluctuation. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot. It is an explanatory view showing a lighting mode of a lamp. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a child table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a grandchild table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a grandchild table in a lighting data table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is an explanatory view showing a performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage during a fanfare performance due to one winning special figure. It is an explanatory view showing the production mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine recovers from a power outage during one round of jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the first round of jackpot when the player wins the special figure 1. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine returns from a power outage during the second round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the second round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the third round of the jackpot at the time of winning the special figure 1. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine recovers from a power outage during the fourth round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the fourth round of jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is an explanatory view showing the production mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine returns from a power outage during the final round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is an explanatory diagram showing a performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage during the ending performance at the time of winning the special figure 1. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of stop symbol determination processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting regarding a setting suggestion production execution determination table. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example and a setting example regarding a setting suggestion pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of a setting suggestion effect. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of winning random value determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a special figure display result determination table. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a time saving type determination table. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a diagram showing an example of a time-saving promotion effect period. It is a figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a diagram showing an example of main production control commands. It is a flowchart etc. which shows an example of a decoration pattern stop command transmission setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of time saving start time processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of time saving end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of remaining reservation period end determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a pending change determination table. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process when a dropout occurs. It is a flowchart showing an example of stop symbol setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of time-saving promotion production setting processing. It is a diagram showing an example of determining a time-saving effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a return effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. It is a timing chart showing each timing during variable display in the case where the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed and in other cases. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation when a time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, a time-saving promotion performance, etc. are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation when a time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, a time-saving promotion performance, etc. are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation when a time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, a time-saving promotion performance, etc. are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation when a time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, a time-saving promotion performance, etc. are performed. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing within information output processing. 5 is a timing chart showing output timings of various signals output in external information output processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a special figure display result. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine concerning feature part 063AK. It is a diagram showing the configuration of the special variable winning ball device related to the feature part 063AK in a state where the big winning opening is controlled to be closed. (a) to (c) are diagrams for explaining the flow of game balls that have entered the big winning hole related to the feature part 063AK. (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of a distribution section related to the characteristic section 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the distribution member related to the characteristic part 063AK. (a) to (c) are diagrams for explaining the flow of game balls that have entered the distribution section related to the characteristic section 063AK. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation|movement of the distribution member based on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the small hit start performance time related to the characteristic part 063AK and the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution part. (a) is a timing chart of the performance corresponding to small hit fluctuations related to the feature part 063AK. (b) is a diagram for explaining whether or not a performance is executed and the performance mode corresponding to small hit fluctuations related to the feature part 063AK. (a) is a timing chart of the time-saving suggestion performance related to the characteristic part 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing a time-saving suggestion symbol related to the feature part 063AK. (a) is a diagram for explaining the normal passing excitement effect corresponding to the first special figure game related to the feature part 063AK. (b) is a diagram for explaining the normal passing excitement effect corresponding to the second special figure game related to the feature part 063AK. (c) is a diagram for explaining the time-saving time-passing effect related to the characteristic part 063AK. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing related to the feature part 063AK. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the first special figure display result determination table related to the feature section 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the second special figure display result determination table related to the feature section 063AK. (a) is a diagram showing a list of jackpot types related to the feature section 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table related to the feature section 063AK. (a) is a diagram showing a list of small hit types related to the feature part 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small hit type determination table related to the feature section 063AK. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a list of variation patterns related to the characteristic part 063AK. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process related to the characteristic section 063AK. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table related to the feature section 063AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the loss fluctuation pattern determination table based on the characteristic part 063AK. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a normal state time saving variation pattern determination table related to the characteristic section 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a time-saving variation pattern determination table for a time-saving state related to the characteristic section 063AK. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing related to the feature part 063AK. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small hit start performance waiting time determination table related to the feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of small hit opening preprocessing concerning characteristic part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during small hit opening based on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the winning end designation command determination table based on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the passage notification effect waiting time determination table based on the characteristic part 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit end process based on the characteristic part 063AK. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing related to the feature section 063AK. (a) is a diagram showing decorative patterns that are small winning combinations related to the feature part 063AK. (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the normal state small hit fixed decorative symbol determination table related to the feature section 063AK. (c) is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a small hit fixed decorative pattern determination table for time saving state related to the feature section 063AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display regarding the characteristic part 063AK. (a) is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special figure waiting process related to the feature section 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small hit start performance time determination table related to the feature section 063AK. It is a flowchart showing an example of production processing during a small hit related to the feature part 063AK. It is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit end production process related to the feature part 063AK. (a) to (i) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations in a normal state related to the feature section 063AK. (a) to (g) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations in a normal state related to the feature section 063AK. (a) to (e) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations in a time saving state related to the feature section 063AK. (a) to (e) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations in a time saving state related to the feature section 063AK. (a) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a normal-time suspension change determination table according to a modification of the characteristic section 063AK. (b) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a limit hold change determination table according to a modified example of the characteristic section 063AK. (a) to (c) are diagrams illustrating an example of a production operation according to a modification of the characteristic part 063AK. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of characteristic part 065AK. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol process processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a normal symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the normal map display result and the number of times of time saving. It is a figure showing a special figure display result and the number of times of time saving. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process processing of the characteristic part 065AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a common figure interlocking production control process. It is a flowchart etc. which shows an example of special figure interlocking production determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of time saving notification setting processing. It is a timing chart showing the performance contents at the time of time saving transition of the characteristic part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of the characteristic part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of the characteristic part 065AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of the characteristic part 065AK. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing rotating display of a hold display in each hold display area, and (C) is a diagram showing moving display of a subtitle in a subtitle display area. , (D) is a diagram showing the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of a chance up effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns for still image display performance, and (B) is a diagram showing the performance contents of each performance pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns of operation promotion performance, and (B) is a diagram showing the performance contents of each performance pattern. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)1. It is a timing chart showing variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach (beta)3. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 1st reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 1st reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 3rd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 3rd reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 4th reach performance. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the 2nd reach performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the 4th reach production in a modification.

<Basic explanation>
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

[Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.]
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol” or “first special symbol,” and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “first special symbol.” It is also called ``2nd special pattern'' or ``2nd special pattern.'' Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electro luminescence), and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state into which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hitting ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's actions (operations, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17, for example.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged at the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) to the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

[Outline of game progress]
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In a special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-saving number-cutting, variable number-cutting probability, etc.).

A normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern game. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. For example, reach effects include normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) will be stopped and displayed, and the state will be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5, etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). Further, as other performances, for example, a preview performance that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed while the decorative symbols are being displayed variably. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (the jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

[Substrate configuration]
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V DC, 5 V DC, etc.), and the like. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), the game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of pending memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has the function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions on At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishment (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

[motion]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. For example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, a clear signal in an on state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Y), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; N), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, and if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 and The setting change process in step S7 is executed and control becomes possible in the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed along with the recovery process in step S4 and control becomes possible in the setting confirmation state. . When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 is executed. Although it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing for when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying judgment results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and decreasing the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the probability of winning the jackpot. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to a small win game state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to the small win gaming state is determined by the first special figure display result, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It can also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the on-board CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register settings of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; N), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Y), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

[Variation of basic explanation]
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by downloading programs and data via a communication line and storing them in internal memory. Alternatively, the process may be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%."

<Explanation regarding characteristic part 075F>
Next, a gaming machine according to the feature section 075F of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-60.

[Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 related to characteristic part 075F, etc.]
It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature section 075F, a special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided in place of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 10-4), and a big winning hole that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door (hereinafter referred to as (usually referred to as the big winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is installed in the space between the game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. It is equipped with a grand prize opening door, and by sliding the grand prize opening door horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open and close it, the path to the regular big prize opening for game balls is opened. be done. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby closing the regular winning opening, and the game ball enters the regular winning opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides toward the back of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the regular winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the regular winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the normal big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through an area provided inside the normal big winning opening. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23, game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the normal big prize opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V variable winning ball device 075F007B is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 075F083 (see Figure 10-4), and a big winning hole that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as the V-large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is equipped with a big winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this big winning opening door is connected to the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By sliding horizontally between the slots to open and close, the path for the game ball to the V grand prize opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V big prize opening, and the game ball enters the V big prize opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the ON state, the big prize opening door slides to the back of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the V big prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V big winning opening. .

The game ball that enters the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024 (see Figure 10-4) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as the V winning area) provided inside the V big winning opening. . When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, the gaming state is controlled to a variable probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V winning occurs on the condition that a game ball enters the V big winning opening during a round in a jackpot gaming state, and the gaming state is controlled to be in a variable probability state. . In addition, the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole are collectively referred to as the big winning hole. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps on the game board 2. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes, in addition to a movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and an attacker lamp 9c provided near the normal big winning opening and the V big winning opening, there is also a movable body lamp 9d provided above the attacker. the lower left lamp 075F009D provided on the lower left of the game board 2; the board right lamp 075F009F provided on the right side of the image display device 5; Equipped with panel left lamp 075F009E.

The movable body lamp 9d displays characters attached to the movable body 32 (for example, the title of the pachinko game machine 1, in this example) by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED when the movable body 32 is in a stopped state or in an operating state. “XXX”) is emitted. The attacker lamp 9c causes the vicinity of the attacker to emit light by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U causes the area above the attacker to emit light by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D lights up the lower left area of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The panel right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided in a casing imitating a character, and when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks, the casing imitating a character on the right side of the image display device 5 emits light. . The panel left lamp 075F009E lights up the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. Note that the board left lamp 075F009E may be provided in a casing imitating a character, similar to the board right lamp 075F009F. Further, the board right lamp 075F009F and the board left lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (such as the left-right direction or the up-down direction), similarly to the movable lamp 9d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps in the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. Equipped with

Here, FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a frame lamp. The frame left lamp 075F009L has a group of 11 lamps, from the first lamp to the eleventh lamp, running counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 075F009L lights up or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), respectively, to illuminate the left side of the gaming machine frame 3. On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has 11 lamp groups from the first lamp to the eleventh lamp clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 075F009R lights up or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), respectively, to cause the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a special map LED board 075F020 at the lower left of the game board 2. The special figure LED board 075F020 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and is shown in FIG. This is a board that plays the roles of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LEDs. Further, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 and notifies changes in special symbols, the number of reserved memories, right-handed display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED.

Here, FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the fourth pattern unit 075F050. As shown in Figure 10-3(a), the special figure LED board 075F020 has a special figure 1 variable display part 075F021 that shows the variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable display part that shows the variable display of the second special figure. A display section 075F022, a special figure 1 memory display section 075F023 that shows the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 memory display section that shows the second reserved memory number that corresponds to the second special figure game. 075F024, a normal pattern memory display section 075F025 that shows the number of stored normal patterns, a normal pattern display section 075F026 that shows a variable display of the normal pattern, a right-based pattern display section 075F030 that prompts the player to play right, and a probability variable state. A probability change display section 075F028 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, a time saving display section 075F029 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, and a round display section 075F027 indicating the number of rounds of jackpots. Each display section can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and regular symbols, the results thereof, the current gaming status, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking using lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being variably displayed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 075F020 can encourage the player to play right-handed by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the lighting means such as LED in the right-handed hitting display section 075F030. In this embodiment, when the player is urged to play right-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 075F030 lights up (lights up), and when the player is not encouraged to play right-handed, That is, when urging the player to play left-handed, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display section 075F030 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120, and lights up the right-handed display section 075F030, and after the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, A right-hand hit display light-off designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120, and the right-hand hit display section 075F030 is turned off. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or small win that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 075F030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the production control CPU 120, and turns off the right hit display section 075F030.

Here, hitting right means firing the game ball toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. This is how to operate the ball hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit the ball). The first downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the left side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This is a route in which the second starting prize opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the right side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a second starting winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V big prize opening) exists. When a player fires a game ball toward the first downstream path, the game ball flows toward the first starting prize opening through the first downstream path. When a player launches a game ball toward the second downstream path, the game ball passes through the second downstream path and is directed toward the second starting prize opening or the grand prize opening (normal grand prize opening, V grand prize opening). flows into. In this embodiment, in a jackpot game after a jackpot occurs, and in a gaming state (time saving state or variable probability state) after a jackpot game, when the player hits right, a The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning hole or the big winning hole, and during that time, the right-handed display section 075F030 urges the player to hit the right-handed ball. By hitting right while a display prompting the player to hit right, the player enters the game ball into the second starting prize opening and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by entering the game ball into the normal big prize opening. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, the V-big prize opening will be open during the round of the probability jackpot, but the player can win the V-big prize by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right. It is also possible to obtain the right to be controlled in a variable probability state by entering a game ball into the winning hole. For this reason, the player can gain an overall advantage by hitting the ball to the right while a display prompting the player to hit the ball to the right is displayed. Note that, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 has a special symbol 1 memory display section 075F051 indicating the number of first reserved memories corresponding to the first special symbol game, and a special symbol unit 075F051 corresponding to the second special symbol game. A special figure 2 memory display section 075F052 indicating the number of second reserved memories to be stored, a special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 indicating the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and a special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 indicating the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. It includes a special figure 2 variable display section 075F054 that shows the display result, and a right-hitting display section 075F055 that urges the player to play right-handed. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of special symbols, the number of reservations, right-handed instruction, etc. by lighting/flashing/turning off the lights using lighting means such as LEDs.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being variably displayed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means. Below, representing the variation of the stop symbols of the first special symbol by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 is also referred to as a variation display of the first special symbol. In addition, representing the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by lighting means such as LED in the special figure 2 variable display section 075F054 is also referred to as a variable display of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to play right, the lighting means such as an LED in the right play display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (lights up) and prompts the player to play right. If the player is not prompted to play left-handed, that is, if the player is encouraged to play left-handed, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display section 075F055 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the right-handed display section 075F055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103, and the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After that, the right-handed player display unit 075F055 is turned off based on receiving a right-handed player display light-off designation command from the CPU 103. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 075F055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right hit display section 075F055 based on receiving the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 10-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 10-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the panel right lamp 075F009F, the panel left lamp 075F009E, the frame right lamp 075F009R, and the frame left lamp 075F009L. , is connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be turned on (flashing) under the control of the performance control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. In addition, each of these movable lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, and frame left lamp 075F009L, or these together in the game. Also referred to as effect lamp 9.

The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is connected to the production control board 12, and can light up (blink) each display section under the control of the control CPU 120.

The special figure LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display section can be lit (flashing) under the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
FIG. 10-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect. Further, the lower end of the image display device 5 includes a first pending memory display area 075F005D in which the first pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays, and a second pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays. A second display area 075F005Sa including a possible second reserved storage display area 075F005U is configured.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 075F005Sb including a fourth symbol 075F005J indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, a display of the first pending memory number, and a display of the second pending memory number. are doing.

Among these, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F, and it is possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns. It has become. Moreover, a small pattern 075F005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small patterns include the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the "right" decorative pattern display areas. The symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. The small pattern 075F005M is also a pattern that is always displayed within the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, a decorative pattern is arranged at the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 075F005M is located at the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. It is arranged in a smaller size than the decorative pattern in the section. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Further, at the lower center of the first display area 075F005F, an active display area 075F005A is provided for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-8.

(Jackpot type)
FIG. 10-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. As shown in Figure 10-6, in the hit type table, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot game state , and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot are shown.

Specifically, the types of jackpots are 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot. Note that, hereinafter, each round may be denoted by "R". For example, the first round is also called the 1R, and the second round is also called the 2R. 5R normal jackpot is a case where the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win a prize (for example, a control pattern that makes it difficult to win the V jackpot (for example, a control that shortens the time for opening and closing the lid to open and close the V jackpot or a lid). This is a control to prevent the game ball from entering a specific area by repeating opening and closing of the game ball, etc.), and the jackpot is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the completion of 5 rounds of jackpot game state. Normally, in the case of a jackpot, the condition that such a low probability high base state is maintained until the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times, 100 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

5R fixed variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win V (for example, control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V big prize opening, or control to open the lid at a specific time). This is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the case of a variable probability jackpot, the condition that such a high probability high base state is maintained until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, 150 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

10R fixed variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win a V prize (for example, control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V big prize opening, or control to open the lid at a specific time). This is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In the case of a variable probability jackpot, the condition that such a high probability high base state is maintained until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, 150 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R fixed variable jackpot have a common decorative pattern that stops when the jackpot occurs. In addition, both the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R fixed strange jackpot have the same fanfare performance (for example, background, appearing characters, sound effects, etc.) that is performed when a jackpot occurs, and during the round in the jackpot game state. The performance aspects of the round performances (for example, backgrounds, appearing characters, sound effects, etc.) are common to each other, and furthermore, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is also common to each other. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot has occurred, as long as the player sees the stopped decorative symbols, the fanfare performance, and the round performance. Here, in the case of a 5R variable jackpot, the V big prize opening opens in a predetermined round (4th R in this embodiment). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-big winning hole by hitting the ball to the right while aiming at the V-big winning hole, the gaming state is controlled to be a variable probability state.

In this way, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot are also referred to as chance bonuses because it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the probability variable jackpot has occurred until the middle of the round.

As for the 10R variable probability jackpot, similarly to the 5R variable probability jackpot, the V grand prize opening is opened in the predetermined round (in the present embodiment, the 9th round). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-big winning hole by hitting the ball to the right while aiming at the V-big winning hole, the gaming state is controlled to be a variable probability state. However, in the case of a 10R guaranteed variable jackpot, the decorative patterns that stop when the jackpot occurs, the production aspects of the fanfare production (for example, the background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.), and the round production that takes place during the round of the jackpot game state. The performance mode is different from that of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability-variable jackpot. Therefore, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs, the player can recognize that a probability variable jackpot has occurred. Such a 10R probability-variable jackpot is also called a special bonus.

(each random number)
FIG. 10-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in Figure 10-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random R is a random counter for determining whether or not to win a jackpot. The random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, and is added and updated from 0 to the upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. Random 1 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type as one of 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of variation pattern) that determines the type of variation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for determining a fluctuation pattern) that determines a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for normal symbol hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol. Random 5 is a random counter that determines the initial value of Random 4 (for determining the initial value of Random 4).

In the present embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Then, out of the multiple types of jackpots such as 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot game state, which jackpot is to be determined is based on the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type. It is determined. At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of random 1.

First, a variation pattern type is determined using a random number for variation pattern type determination (Random 3), and any variation pattern included in the determined variation pattern type is determined using a random number for variation pattern determination (Random 4). is determined. In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of their variation modes. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a jackpot, the variation patterns are classified into a normal reach variation pattern type with normal reach and a super reach variation pattern type with super reach. Such variation pattern types are selected at a predetermined ratio. In addition, in the case of a loss, it is classified into a normal variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type without reach, a normal reach variation pattern type, and a super reach variation pattern type.

For such fluctuation pattern types, when the display result is a loss, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type is different depending on whether the display result is in a time-saving state or not. Therefore, when the time is in the time-saving state, the rate of selection of the variation pattern type with a short variation display time, such as the normal variation pattern type, is set to be high. Therefore, the variable display time is shortened.

In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different depending on when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol to be displayed as a variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, and when it is less than a predetermined number. When the number of pending memories for each special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, execution of pending number reduction control is performed in which the variable display time is shortened compared to when the number of pending memories for each special symbol is less than a predetermined number. You may also do so. For example, in the pending number reduction control state, the rate of selection of a variation pattern type with a short variation display time, such as the normal variation pattern type, is set to be higher than in the non-retention number reduction control state. , the average time of the variable display time may be made shorter than when the number of reservations is not in the hold count reduction control state. Further, in the reservation number reduction control, even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be made shorter than when the reservation number reduction control is not in the state.

Further, the variation pattern may be determined not by a two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined, but also by a one-stage determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery.

(Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 10-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 10-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the RO 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability variable) jackpot determination table that is used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variable state, that is, a non-probability variable state), and a probability variable jackpot determination table that is used in a probability variable state.

In the normal jackpot judgment table, each numerical value listed in the left column of Figure 10-8 (A) is set as a jackpot judgment value, and in the probability change jackpot judgment table, the values listed in the left column of Figure 10-8 (B) are set as jackpot judgment values. Each numerical value listed in the column is set as a jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at variable probability is the same jackpot judgment value as the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (referred to as the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). By adding the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number of jackpot judgment values (referred to as variable probability jackpot judgment values or second jackpot judgment values) are set than in the variable probability jackpot judgment table. As a result, in the variable probability state, it is determined that the jackpot is hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R). ), it is determined that the special symbol will be a jackpot (normal jackpot or variable probability jackpot). Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 10-8(A) indicates the probability (ratio) of hitting the jackpot.

FIGS. 10-8(B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 10-8(B) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the first special symbol. FIG. 10-8(C) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the second special symbol.

The first special figure jackpot type determination table in FIG. 10-8(B) includes numerical values to be compared with the random 1 value for jackpot type determination, including "5R normal jackpot", "5R probability variable jackpot", and , "10R probability variable jackpot" and corresponding jackpot determination values are set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10-8(C), a jackpot determination value is set which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1 and corresponds to "10R probability variable jackpot".

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-8 (B) and (C), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) for determining the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It will be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to "5R normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "1" of the jackpot symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "5R probability variable jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "10R probability variable jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "7". The special pattern 1 variable display section 075F021 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 075F022 on the special pattern LED board 075F020 display the stopped jackpot pattern by lighting means such as LEDs lighting up or blinking in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot pattern. can be shown. Similarly, the special figure 1 variable display part 075F053 and the special figure 2 variable display part 075F054 in the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are stopped by lighting means such as LEDs lighting or blinking in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. It is possible to show the jackpot symbol.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines, as the jackpot type, the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines, as the jackpot symbol, the type that corresponds to the jackpot type judgment value with which the value of Random 1 matches. Determine the jackpot symbol. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

According to such various jackpot type determination tables, regarding the jackpot of the second special symbol, the percentage of selection of "10R probability variable jackpot" is higher than that of the jackpot type selectable with the first special symbol, and the player There is a high rate of selection of jackpot types that are advantageous for players.

(Production control command)
FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various performance control commands to the performance control CPU 120 depending on the game control state. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10-9 is an example, and other command formats may be used. In addition, although "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number in the following, it may be omitted in this specification.

Command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special figure. When the production control CPU 101 receives the command 8001 (H) or the command 8002 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 81XX(H) is a variation pattern command that specifies a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of special symbols (each corresponds to variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the game has been determined to be a loss. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R normal jackpot has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R probability variable jackpot has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that a 10R probability variable jackpot has been determined. Each of the loss designation command, 5R normal jackpot designation command, 5R probability variable jackpot designation command, and 10R probability variable jackpot designation command, or these commands collectively are also referred to as 8C series commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D series commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates ending the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates displaying the initial screen when the power is turned on) to be sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery designation command that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed and designates recovery from a power outage (specifies displaying a power outage recovery screen). Command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state designation command that designates the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a variable probability state designation command that specifies the background of the variable probability state. Each of the normal state designation command, time-saving state designation command, and variable probability state designation command, or these commands collectively, are also referred to as 95-series commands or background designation commands. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of a 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of a 10R probability variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot start 1 designation command, the jackpot start 2 designation command, and the jackpot start 3 designation command, or these collectively are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command indicating that the big winning hole is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The grand prize opening designation command is also referred to as the A1 series command. A2XX(H) is a specified command after the opening of the grand prize opening indicating the closing of the grand prize opening of the number (round) indicated by XX. The command specified after opening the big prize opening is also referred to as the A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of the 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of the 10R variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot end 1 designation command, the jackpot end 2 designation command, and the jackpot end 3 designation command, or these collectively are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a probability change determination device passage designation command that designates that a V winning has occurred. The probability change determination device passage designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

Command B100 (H) is a first starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a first starting winning. Command B200 (H) is a second starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a second starting winning.

Command C1XX(H) is a first pending storage number designation command that specifies that the first pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that specifies that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2-based command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning judgment results such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, fluctuation pattern type judgment, etc. at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole. This is the production control command shown. Among these, command C4XX(H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot among the winning determination results and the determination result of the type of jackpot. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command that indicates the judgment result (variation pattern type judgment result) in which judgment value range the value of the random number for variation pattern type judgment falls within among the winning judgment results. It is.

C7XX(H) is a grand prize opening designation command that indicates passage of the game ball to the grand prize opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which the MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed player display light-off designation command indicating that the right-handed player display is turned off. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed hitting display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed hitting display. In this embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD-related command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines, at the time of starting winning, whether or not there will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the type of variation pattern falls within. Then, a value that specifies a jackpot and a value that specifies the type of jackpot are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit them to the performance control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as a determination result of the fluctuation pattern type in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and performs control to send it to the performance control CPU 120. The production control CPU 120 can recognize whether the display result is a jackpot or not and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can also recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

[motion]
Next, the operation (effect) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F will be explained. First, processing by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be explained.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 10-10, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 stores the first pending memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing pending memory information of the first special symbol) or the second pending memory buffer (the second special symbol). It is determined whether or not there is pending storage data in the storage buffer for storing pending storage information of symbols (step 075FS001). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (N in step 075FS001), it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation was stopped (step 075FS002). If the predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (N in step 075FS002), the special symbol normal processing is ended. On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (Y in step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the special symbol normal process is ended. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled so that the waiting demo specification command is not sent. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag is reset when the next variable display of special symbols starts.

When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 determines that the first data among the data set in the pending specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether it is data (step 075FS004). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is not data indicating "second" (that is, data indicating "first") (N in step 075FS004), CPU 103 moves the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step 075FS005). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006). ).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of symbols is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the first pending storage buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the second pending storage buffer.

Under the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if even one data of the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the first pending memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. is read out and stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. The data is stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and adds the value of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores data in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each of the items stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a pending memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the pending memory counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction ( Step 075FS009). In this case, if a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the pending storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process of comparing a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 10-8) and a jackpot determination random number, and determining that it is a jackpot if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is non-probable variable state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, there is a jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values is set in advance (the table in which the numbers on the right side of Figure 10-8 (A) are set), and a table in which a large number of jackpot determination values is set in advance. A normal jackpot determination table (table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 10-8(A) are set) is provided, which is set smaller than the regular jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming state is in a variable probability state, and when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the CPU 103 performs processing to determine a jackpot using the variable probability jackpot determination table, and when the gaming state is normal. When the game is in the state or the time saving state, the jackpot judgment process is performed using the normal jackpot judgment table. That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 10-8(A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step 075FS011), the process moves to step 075FS012. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a jackpot means deciding whether to move to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol a jackpot symbol. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state is performed based on whether or not a variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the gaming state is transferred to a variable probability state, and is reset when the variable probability state is ended. Specifically, the probability change flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then either the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (150 times), or the condition that the next jackpot has been determined. It is reset at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed when the earlier condition is satisfied.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) does not match any jackpot determination value (N in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS016, which will be described later.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any jackpot determination value in step 075FS011, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 075FS012). Note that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. The first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-8(B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-8(C) are used to determine the jackpot type to one of the plurality of types. Select one of the special symbol jackpot type determination tables (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-8(B). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10-8(C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in advance in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer, and uses the jackpot type determination table selected in step 075FS013 to determine the pending winnings. The jackpot type and jackpot symbol corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the storage buffer are determined (step 075FS014).

As shown in Figures 10-8(B) and (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol is set so that the jackpot symbol is different for each jackpot type. Since the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the jackpot pattern and the game control according to the jackpot type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, the CPU 103 sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot", "01" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "5R probability variable jackpot", "02" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "10R probability variable jackpot", "03" is set as the jackpot type data.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol as a special symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, a "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "5R normal jackpot", "1" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "5R probability variable jackpot", "3" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "10R probability variable jackpot", "7" is determined as the special symbol stopping symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step 075FS017), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIGS. 10-11 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 10-11, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot variation pattern type determination table according to the jackpot type, and when the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot variation pattern type determination table. Select the type determination table. Then, the CPU 103 reads Random 2 (random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern) from the first reservation storage buffer or the second reservation storage buffer, and selects one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern types by referring to the selected table. decided on.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send the symbol variation designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S112) (step 075FS105). ).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 10-12 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 10-11, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step 075FS202), the CPU 103 changes the value of the special symbol process flag. It is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (S113) (Step 075FS203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N at step 075FS202), the process is ended.

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 10-13 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 10-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and stops the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 or the special symbol 2 variable display section 075F022. Control is performed to derive and display the symbols (step 075FS301). In addition, if the data indicating "1st" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the 1st special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 is ended, and "2nd" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. If the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display section 075F022 is ended. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, a symbol confirmation designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step 075FS303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N at step 075FS303), the process moves to step 075FS309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right hit display lighting command are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

In addition, with reference to the opening pattern data stored in the RO101, the number of openings (for example, 5 times or 10 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval between rounds for the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole. Data indicating the opening mode such as the interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal jackpot in all of 1 to 5R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a 5R probability-variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening the normal big prize opening in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round and opening the V big winning opening in the 4th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a 10R variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening the normal big winning hole in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds and opening the V big winning hole in the 9th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. Data on the number of openings (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of openings.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (for example, the time when the occurrence of the jackpot is announced on the image display device 5) which is the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (step 075FS307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the jackpot opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the jackpot opening is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the process is ended.

If it is determined in step 075FS303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is set (step 075FS309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N at step 075FS309), the process moves to step 075FS316. If the time saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, when a variable display that results in a loss display is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time saving state, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. In step 075FS311, if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS311), the process moves to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether a variable probability flag indicating a variable probability state is set (step 075FS313). If the probability variation flag is set (Y in step 075FS313), the probability variation flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step 075FS315), and proceeds to step 075FS316. move on. If the probability variation flag is not set in step 075FS313 (N in step 075FS313), the process proceeds to step 075FS315 without performing the process in step 075FS314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS316), and the process ends.

(Jackpot release preprocessing)
FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release pre-processing. As shown in FIG. 10-14, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS402), the process is ended.

When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS402), a command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal big prize opening (step 075FS404). As a result, in the 1st round, the normal big prize opening is opened.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step 075FS306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning opening control timer to the maximum time that the big winning opening can be opened (big winning opening opening time). The corresponding big prize opening opening time (29 seconds) is set (step 075FS405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS406), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening process. As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the big prize opening control timer has become 0 (step 075FS502). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS501), the process moves to step 075FS511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS502), it is determined whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is being opened (step 075FS503). Whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open can be determined based on the value of the opening number counter.

In step 075FS503, if it is determined that the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is not open (N in step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (Y in step 075FS503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (N in step 075FS504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is on (Y in step 075FS504), the winning number counter is +1 (updated and updated) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that control is to be performed in a variable probability state when a V winning occurs. If the probability change determination flag is set (Y in step 075FS506), the process moves to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS506), it is determined whether the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS507). If the V winning switch 075F024 is not turned on (N in step 075FS507), the process moves to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (Y in step 075FS507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS508), the probability variation determination device passage designation command is sent (step 075FS509), and the process moves to step 075FS510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning prize counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning prize counter does not reach the predetermined value (N at step 075FS510), the process ends.

When the value of the number of winnings counter reaches a predetermined value (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 to close the normal big winning opening, or drives the solenoid 075F083 to close the V big winning opening. (Step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 performs processing to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning prize counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the process.

(Post-processing after jackpot release)
FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot release post-processing. As shown in FIG. 10-16, in the jackpot release post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the release number counter is 0 (step 075FS601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), a jackpot end designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), and the jackpot end time (indicating that the jackpot game has ended) is sent to the big winning opening control timer. For example, a value corresponding to the time to be notified on the image display device 5) is set (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process end.

In step 075FS601, if the value of the number of openings counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS601), a command specified after opening the big winning opening is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS605), and the round is set in the big winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the round before the V big prize opening is opened (also referred to as the V opening round), that is, the next round is the V opening round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal big prize opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 075F083 to open the V big prize opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 transmits a special winning opening designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. As shown in FIG. 10-17, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer to which the jackpot end time is set (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS702), the process ends. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the jackpot flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step 075FS704). If the probability variation determination flag is not set (N at step 075FS704), the process moves to step 075FS705. In step 075FS704, if the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step 075FS704), a probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a probability change state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), a probability change determination flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process moves to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step 075FS710), and a time saving number counter is set to 150 (step 075FS711). Then, the process moves to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, in step 075FS704, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), in step 075FS705, a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is in effect is set (step 075FS705), and a time-saving number counter is set to 100. (Step 075FS706), and the process moves to Step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game is in a variable probability, time saving, or normal gaming state by a variable probability state designation command transmitted from the CPU 103.

(Jackpot performance processing)
Next, processing by the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 will be explained. FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot production process. As shown in FIG. 10-18, in the jackpot production process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, flags such as the jackpot end designation command reception flag are set by the performance control CPU 120 when the command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121 stores data indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received. It is deleted at a predetermined timing, such as when the game ends.

When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is not set (N in step 075FS651), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). When the process timer times out (Y in step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer (step 075FS656). Further, in accordance with the contents of the process data set next, control of the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is executed (step 075FS657). For example, the performance control CPU 120 reads image data from the ROM 121 according to the contents of the process data, and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5 in order to display an image according to the performance during the round on the image display device 5. . In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9 to turn on/blink/turn off. Further, in order to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output audio, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), control of the production devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, etc.) will continue according to the contents of the set process data. (Step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the above-mentioned process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 executes a process corresponding to the fanfare performance in order to execute the fanfare performance by controlling the performance device. Set the data. Furthermore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, the production control CPU 120 displays the right-handed display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 in order to encourage the player to play right. Turn on a lighting means such as an LED.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A1 series command) from the CPU 103 at the start of each round of the jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance during the round by controlling the performance device as follows. In order to do so, process data corresponding to the performance during the round is set.

When the production control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of the 5R normal jackpot, it executes a V probability variation suggestion production that suggests whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot. Set process data. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R normal jackpot) based on the already received jackpot start specification command (A0 series command), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A102). A jackpot round (in this case, 2R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V probability variable suggestion performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

When the production control CPU 120 receives a command (A102 command) specifying that the big winning hole is open from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, the production control CPU 120 generates process data for executing the V probability variation suggestion production (see Figure 10-41). Set. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A102). A jackpot round (in this case, 2R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V probability variable suggestion performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the production control CPU 120 receives a command (A103 command) specifying that the big prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of 3R of the 5R fixed-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 for performance control receives a V notice that foretells that the next 4R will be the V opening round. Set process data to execute the effect (see Figure 10-42). At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A103). A jackpot round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (in this case, 3R), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V preview performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a command after the opening of the big winning hole (A203 command) from the CPU 103 after 3R of the 5R probability-variable jackpot, the production control CPU 120 causes the game ball to enter the V big winning hole which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data to execute the Aim for V effect (see Figure 10-43). At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot after opening jackpot opening command (A203). The finished jackpot round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a corresponding performance (in this case, aim for V performance) after the round during the specified jackpot is set. The Aim for V effect is a guidance display using an image display related to the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the Aim for V effect, an image is displayed that urges the player to hit the ball to the right so as to fire the game ball aiming at the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. In the Aim for V effect, an image may be displayed pointing to the V grand prize opening itself, which is a specific area, or an image may be displayed pointing to the vicinity of the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. , an image may be displayed that points to the route to the V grand prize opening, which is the specific area.

In addition, when the production control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A104 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 4R of the 5R probability-variable jackpot, it continues to aim for V and executes the production (see Figure 10-44). Set process data for At this time, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A104). A jackpot round (in this case, 4R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (4R in this case), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, an aim for V performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening specifying command (A108 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 8th round of the 10R fixed-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 performs a V preview performance that foretells that the next 9th round will be the V opening round. Set process data for execution. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A108 A jackpot round (in this case, 8R) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V preview performance) corresponding to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a command after opening the big winning hole (A208 command) from the CPU 103 after 8R of the 10R probability-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 for performance control causes the game ball to enter the V big winning hole which is a specific area between rounds. Aim for the V that makes you want to do something. Set the process data to execute the effect. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the specification command after opening the jackpot (A208 The finished jackpot round (in this case, 8R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (in this case, 8R), and process data for executing a corresponding performance (in this case, aim for V performance) is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A109 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 9R of the 10R probability-variable jackpot, it sets process data for continuing to aim for V and execute the performance. . At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the already received jackpot start specification command (A0 series command), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A109). A jackpot round (in this case, 9R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, an aim for V performance) corresponding to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

Furthermore, when the output control CPU 120 receives a probability change determination device passing designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during the jackpot round, the V winning prize control CPU 120 executes the V winning presentation by controlling the presentation device as follows. Set process data that corresponds to the performance.

When the production control CPU 120 receives a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during 4R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning production (see Figure 10-44). .

When the performance control CPU 120 receives a probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00) from the CPU 103 during 9R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning production.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 performs an ending performance indicating the end of the jackpot game state (FIGS. 10-46 and 10). -47)).

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 by setting process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103, and performs various operations. Execute the performance.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature section 075F configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. Furthermore, although the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F also has the content of the game played in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 that has already been explained, below, we will particularly explain the game of the part related to the feature section 075F. do.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward a first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display section 075F021 becomes a display mode showing the jackpot symbol, a jackpot occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed, and a right-hand-hitting promotion performance is also performed to urge the player to play right-handed. The effect to promote right-handed hitting includes characters (for example, "right-handed hitting") and figures (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second downstream path) that encourage right-handed hitting on the screen of the image display device 5. While displaying the image, right-handed hitting is encouraged by lighting means such as LEDs in the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. As a result, the player will play right-handed from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times in the case of a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10 times in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

In the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot opens in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds, but the V big jackpot opens only in the 4th round. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize, a V prize will not be won. In addition, since the player does not win a V prize, the aim for V effect is not executed in the 4th round, and the same background image as in the 1st round is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot is opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds, and in the 2nd round, a V probability variable suggestion performance that suggests whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, it is announced that it is not a probability variation jackpot but a normal jackpot. Thereafter, the V big prize opening is opened in the 4th round, but no V winning prize is generated, and the normal big prize opening is opened in the subsequent 5th round, and when the 5th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of a 5R variable jackpot, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 4th round. Specifically, in the case of a 5R fixed-variable jackpot, the regular jackpot opens in the 1st and 2nd rounds, as in the 5R normal jackpot, and in the 2nd round, a V fixed-variable jackpot that indicates whether or not it is a fixed-variable jackpot is opened. A suggestive performance is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, it is announced that the probability variation jackpot is achieved. Then, in the subsequent 3rd round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 4th round will be a V open round. In the 4th R, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 5th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 5th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of a 10R variable jackpot, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 9th round. Specifically, in the case of a 10R probability-variable jackpot, the regular big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds, and in the 7th round, a V probability-variable suggestion effect that suggests whether or not it is a probability-variable jackpot is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, it is announced that the probability variation jackpot is achieved. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 9th round will be a V open round. In the 9th round, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

When the ending effect after the jackpot game state is finished, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times in the case of 5R normal jackpot, 150 times in the case of 5R probability variable jackpot and 10R probability variable jackpot). be done. Furthermore, in the case of a 5R variable probability jackpot and a 10R variable probability jackpot, and when a V win occurs during the jackpot round, the gaming state remains in a variable probability state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (150 times) that are controlled to be in a time saving state. controlled by. That is, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes a low probability high base state, and in the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 10R probability variable jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes a high probability high base state.

Even in the variable probability state or short-time state after the jackpot round, the image display device 5, the right-hand game display section 075F030, and the right-hand game display section 075F055 continue to perform the right-hand game promotion performance. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also referred to as the first hit) occurs, the player is always urged to play right-handed by the right-handed hitting promotion performance even in a time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the short time state, control is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the special symbol is varied) compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the regular symbol is varied) is executed. Control is performed to shorten the period of time compared to the normal state, and furthermore, control is performed to improve the probability of "hitting the common drawing" in the common drawing game compared to the normal state. In addition, in the time saving state, by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning hole being in the open state, the frequency at which game balls enter the second starting winning hole is increased, and the second starting winning hole is increased. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning into the winning opening (increase the number of entries, increase the frequency).

In the time saving state after the jackpot round, the second special drawing game is started by the fired game ball entering the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display section 075F022 becomes a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot (also referred to as a consecutive winning) occurs.

As described above, the type of jackpot in the second special figure game is the 10R probability variable jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed. Note that the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 continues from the time of the first hit.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

Since it is a 10R variable jackpot, the normal big winning hole is opened in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V big winning hole is opened only in the 9th round. Specifically, similar to the first win, the regular big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 9th round will be a V open round. In the 9th R, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

Then, when the ending effect after the jackpot game state is finished, the game state is controlled to be a time-saving state and a variable probability state (high probability high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times), similar to the first time the winning state. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot round in consecutive winnings, the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 continue to perform the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player may receive consecutive winnings in a variable probability state or time-saving state after the end of the jackpot round, and the player may be in a variable-probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round for the consecutive winnings has ended. Even in this state, the player is always encouraged to hit the ball to the right by the right-hand ball promotion performance.

The variable probability state or short time state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the variable probability state or short time state after the first jackpot round ends, or the variable probability state or short time state after the jackpot round for consecutive wins ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-handed hitting promotion performance by the image display device 5, right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and right-handed hitting display section 075F055 also ends. As a result, the player again hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area.

[Timing chart of example of processing]
With reference to FIGS. 10-19 to 10-21, the timing of the main processes executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F will be explained. FIG. 10-19 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during winning fluctuations. FIG. 10-20 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. FIG. 10-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the jackpot ends. Note that FIGS. 10-19 to 10-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R probability variable jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-19, at t1, when the first special figure game is started by the game ball entering the first starting prize opening, the CPU 103 sends a hold storage number designation command to the performance control CPU 120. (C1 series command), background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the first special symbol, or displays fluctuating performances (for example, ready-to-reach performances, preview performances, etc.) in accordance with the fluctuations in the first special symbol. ) to set the process data to execute.

For example, the production control CPU 120 specifies the first pending memory number based on the pending memory number designation command, and updates the display of the first pending memory display area 075F005D, or changes the lighting mode of the special figure 1 memory display section 075F051. or update it. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the gaming state being controlled based on the background designation command, and controls the image display device 5 to display a background image corresponding to the gaming state. Further, the performance control CPU 120 specifies that the special symbol will start changing based on the symbol change designation command, and sets the start timing of the performance. Further, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the presence or absence of a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the display result designation command, and determines a decorative pattern accordingly. Furthermore, based on the variation pattern designation command, the performance control CPU 120 determines the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern (such as presence or absence of reach), and the performance content during the variable display of the decorative pattern (reach (type of performance, etc.).

Thereafter, when the variation of the special symbols stops at t2, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

When a jackpot occurs as a result of the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol, at the subsequent t3, the CPU 103 issues a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) and a right hit display lighting command (FD series command) to the performance control CPU 120. Send. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the fanfare performance, and lights up the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, as a fanfare performance, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image congratulating the jackpot, or outputs a sound congratulating the jackpot from the speakers 8L and 8R. Set process data for In addition, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image that encourages right-handed hitting, and outputs a sound that encourages right-handed hitting from the speakers 8L and 8R, as a right-handed promoting performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-20, when the jackpot round starts at t4, the CPU 103 opens the normal jackpot and sends a command (A101 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify that the jackpot is open. Send. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the performance during the round in the 1R.

After that, when the 1st round ends at t5, the CPU 103 closes the normal grand prize opening and sends a command (A201 command) to specify after opening the grand prize opening to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 2nd round starts at t6, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and transmits a big winning hole opening designation command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the mid-round performance in the 2R. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V probability change suggestion performance (see FIG. 10-41) based on the large prize opening designation command (A102 command).

After that, when the 2nd round ends at t7, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning hole and sends a special winning hole opening designation command (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 3rd round starts at t8, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and transmits a big winning hole opening designation command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round effect in the 3rd round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V preview performance (see FIG. 10-42) based on the grand prize opening designation command (A103 command).

After that, when the 3rd round ends at t9, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening after opening designation command (A203 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the inter-round performance between rounds from after the 3rd round to the 4th round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the Aim for V effect (see FIG. 10-43) based on the specified command after opening the grand prize opening (A203 command).

As shown in FIG. 10-21, after that, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 opens the normal grand prize opening and sends a command (A104 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify that the grand prize opening is open. Send. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the 4th round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the V preview performance (see Figure 10-42) based on the grand prize opening designation command (A104 command), and then executes the Aim for V performance (see Figure 10-43). Set process data for execution.

After that, when a V winning occurs at t11, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V winning performance (see FIG. 10-44).

After that, when the 4th round ends at t12, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning hole and sends a command after opening the big winning hole (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 5th round starts at t13, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and transmits a big winning hole opening designation command (A105 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round effect in the 5th round.

After that, when the 5th round ends at t14, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening after opening designation command (A205 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the ending effect.

Thereafter, it is controlled to a variable probability state and a time saving state (high probability high base state), but in this state, the CPU 103 changes the production control command depending on whether the number of pending memories exceeds 0 or not.

For example, at t16, if the number of pending memories exceeds 0, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command to the production control CPU 120, if the number of pending memories exceeds 0. A command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs fluctuating performances (for example, ready-to-reach performances, preview performances, etc.) in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol. ) to set the process data to execute.

On the other hand, if the number of pending memories does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration performance (see FIG. 10-60) that can specify that no game is being played. For example, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image with an initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative pattern or a small pattern, or stops the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Note that the customer waiting demonstration performance is not limited to the form shown in Figure 10-60, but may also include character images or the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1, etc., to indicate that no game is being played. Any type of performance may be used as long as the person can be identified.

[Lamp lighting mode]
FIG. 10-22 is an explanatory diagram showing the lighting mode of the lamp. In this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L) , the right-handed display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are all turned off in a blacked-out manner as shown in FIG. 10-22(A). Expressed as

In addition, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-hand display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are lit up by white painting as shown in Figure 10-22 (B). It is expressed in the form of

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-hand display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 light up/flash/blink in a manner according to the effect and the background displayed on the image display device 5. The state in which the light is turned off is represented by hatching as shown in FIG. 10-22(C).

[Production mode of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be explained. FIGS. 10-23 to 10-33 and FIGS. 10-38 to 10-50 are explanatory diagrams showing performance modes of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game.

As shown in FIG. 10-23(a), when the losing symbols stop due to the change in the special symbols of the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols. After that, if there is a first pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C1 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command (8D series command) to the performance control CPU 120. ), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a variation pattern designation command (81 series command). On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with fluctuations in the first special symbol, or performs fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). Note that the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-23 (b1) to 10-24 (b3) as a reservation memory number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), Settings are made based on the symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-23 (b1) to FIG. 10-24 (b3) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-23 (b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (b2), in the case of jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the reach effect.

Thereafter, when the special symbols stop changing, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (b3), when a jackpot occurs as a result of the stoppage of the fluctuation of the special symbols, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120 and lights up the right hit display. Send a command (FD-related command). On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fanfare performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights up the lighting means such as the LED in the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. In addition, the production control CPU 120 inputs the data of each production shown in FIGS. 10-24 (c1) to 10-38 (d2) into a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) and a right hit display lighting command (FD series command). Set based on. In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-24 (c1) to FIG. 10-38 (d2) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

Here, the fanfare performance will be explained in detail. The fanfare production is divided into multiple production parts. In this embodiment, the fanfare performance includes a blessing part, a name display part, and a right-handed driving promotion part. The blessing part is a performance part in which a performance to congratulate the jackpot is performed, and as described later in FIG. 10-24 (c1), an image congratulating the jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5. A sound congratulating the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting mode congratulating the jackpot. The name display part is a production part that not only informs the player that a jackpot round has started by notifying the name of the jackpot gaming state that has occurred, but also informs the player of the type of jackpot gaming state that has occurred, and is shown in FIG. -24 (c2) and (c3), as described later, a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of the jackpot. The right-handed driving promotion part is a performance part that encourages the player to play right-handed, and uses text and graphic image displays as described later in Figures 10-24 (c4) to 10-33 (c29). A big right-handed hitting promotion performance is performed to encourage the player to hit right-handed. The performance control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) from the CPU 103 after the jackpot symbol stops and the symbol is determined, and then receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103. , the fanfare performance is started, and the fanfare is executed until the normal jackpot is opened and the jackpot round starts.

As shown in Figure 10-24 (c1), an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a character image saying "Congratulations!!") is displayed as a celebration part in the fanfare performance. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that it is displayed on the device 5, a sound congratulating the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode congratulates the jackpot. or In addition, as a performance to promote right-handed hitting, a small image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and text (in this example, the words "Right-handed") is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 to promote right-handed hitting. The performance is executed. The image display device 5 has a plurality of layers, and can display a predetermined image in each layer. As shown in Figure 10-24 (c1), the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed promotion performance is an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and "Congratulations!!") character image) is displayed in a layer on the front side (in the direction of the player when viewed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 side). In addition, in the fanfare performance, a sound that encourages right-handed batting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and as a performance to promote right-handed batting, the lighting modes of right-handed batting display section 075F030 and right-handed batting display section 075F055 are designed to encourage right-handed batting. (in this example, it lights up). The starting order of the above-mentioned image display, lighting, etc. is as follows. First, after determining the symbol, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0-based command) and a right-hitting display lighting command (FD-based command), and lights up the right-hitting display section 075F030. The production control CPU 120 lights up the right-handed display section 075F055 based on the received right-handed display lighting command (FD-based command), and at the same time lights up the small-right-based hitting promotion production based on the received jackpot start designation command (A0-based command). An image consisting of figures and characters in , and an image congratulating the jackpot are displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect located closer to the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image congratulating the player on hitting the jackpot. In other words, first, the lamps light up in the order of right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and right-handed hitting display section 075F055, and then an image consisting of figures and letters to promote small right-handed hitting, and an image congratulating the jackpot. The image is displayed. In addition, the display of images consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed promotion effect, and the lighting in the right-handed display section 075F030 and the right-handed display section 075F055, determine the symbol by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. will be carried out until At this time, first, after determining the symbol, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display light-off designation command along with a background designation command, and turns off the right-handed display section 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-hander display section 075F055 based on the received right-hander display extinguishing command, while displaying an image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-hander promotion effect based on the received background designation command. Upon completion, the background image in the normal state is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect and the lighting of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 may start at the same timing and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect matches the lighting period of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055, so that the player can control the right-handed hitting period. becomes easier to understand.

As shown in Figure 10-24 (c2), part of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred (in this example, one of the character images of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is used as the name display part in the fanfare performance. "CHANCE") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of a jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of a jackpot. The lighting mode may change.

As shown in Figure 10-25 (c3), following Figure 10-24 (c2), the remaining part of the name image (in this example Among the character images of "CHANCE BONUS!!", "BONUS!!") is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5. As a result, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off in preparation for the big right-handed hitting promotion performance to be executed in the right-handed hitting promotion part of the fanfare performance starting at the next timing. After that, from Figure 10-24 (c4) to Figure 10-33 (c29), a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and letters (in this example, the words "Right-handed player") are used to promote right-handed players. ) is displayed in a large size at the center of the image display device 5 to promote a big right-handed hit.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare performance and the big right hit promotion performance based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data tables shown in FIGS. 10-34 to 10-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table, the performance control CPU 120 emits a guide light to prompt the player to hit the ball to the right by moving the light emitting location of the frame lamp. In this embodiment, a light-emitting location literally refers to a location that emits light. For example, among a plurality of lamps included in a frame lamp, a location where a lit lamp is located is called a light-emitting location; A location where a lamp that is not lit (that is, a lamp that is turned off) is located is not called a light emitting location. In other examples, a light-emitting location refers to a location that emits light with high brightness; for example, among multiple lamps included in a frame lamp, a location where a lamp that is lit with high brightness is located emits light. A location where a lamp that is lit at a luminance lower than the luminance of a lamp located at the light emitting location is located may not be referred to as a light emitting location. Hereinafter, lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the performance control CPU 120 will be specifically explained.

FIG. 10-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in the lighting data table. As shown in Figure 10-34, the parent table in the lighting data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), movable lamp 9d, lower left lamp 075F009D, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, panel left lamp 075F009E, For each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9, such as the board right lamp 075F009F and the attacker lamp 9c, the performance time of each of the fanfare performance and the big right hitting promotion performance is defined. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 executes a fanfare effect for 9880 msec, and then executes a big right hit promotion effect for 2000 msec. In addition, since the big right-handed hit promotion performance is configured to be repeated multiple times (twice in this embodiment), the game effect lamp 9 repeats the 2000 msec big right-handed hit promotion performance twice. Become.

FIG. 10-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 10-35, in the child table of the lighting data table, each time of the fanfare effect and the big right-handed promotion effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and is referenced in each time period. A grandchild table is specified.

Here, regarding the big right-handed driving promotion effect, the common grandchild table W11 is designated for the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. Further, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left lamp 075F009E of the board are not used in the big right-handed promotion effect and are turned off, so no grandchild table is provided. Therefore, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible. Regarding the attacker lamp 9c, a plurality of grandchild tables are specified by further subdividing 2000 msec, which is the execution time of the big right-handed hit promotion effect, into a plurality of periods. For example, grandchild table A11a is specified for 330 msec, grandchild table A11b is specified for 1350 msec, and grandchild table A11c is specified for 320 msec.

FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of grandchild tables in the lighting data table. FIG. 10-36 shows data in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. As shown in FIG. 10-36, in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data is defined at intervals of 30 msec from T1 to T56, and furthermore, at the final time of 1000 msec (T57), all the lamps are Data indicating that the light is off (0x000000) is specified. In addition, in the grandchild table, the data of the first to eleventh lamps as shown in FIG. 10-2 are defined for each of the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. In addition, in Figure 10-36, in order to clearly indicate the lighting period for each lamp included in the frame lamp, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000) at the timing to end lighting are used. In contrast, a dashed circle is attached.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table W11, first the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T1, then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T2, and then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T3. The second lamp is lit, then at T4 the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit, then at T5 the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, then at T6 the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. The lamp lights up, then at T7 the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T8 the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T9 the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. Then, at T10, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, and then at T11, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. After starting to light up, each lamp continues to light up while changing colors into seven colors. After that, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is first turned off at T46, then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T47, and then the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T48. Next, at T49, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L turns off, then at T50, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T51, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then At T52, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T53 the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T54 the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then at T55. The seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T56 the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Thereafter, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec in one big right-handed hit promotion performance has elapsed. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. In other words, since the time used to turn on the light is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, only about 320 msec remains, but in order to ensure that the remaining time is turned off, the final turn off time is set to 1000 msec (which is longer than the remaining time). T57). Note that the first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the frame right lamp 075F009R are turned off at all times.

If you use the grandchild table W11 in which the data described above is stored, as shown in Figures 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), starting from the lighting of the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L. , up to the 8th lamp of frame right lamp 075F009R, the frame lamps light up in seven colors in an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a big right hit promotion effect using the frame lamp is performed twice.

FIG. 10-37 shows data in grandchild table K11 for movable lamp 9d and grandchild tables A11a to A11c for attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 10-37, in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d, RGB data is defined at intervals of 30 msec from T1 to T56, and furthermore, at the final time of 1000 msec (T57), all RGB data is specified. Data indicating that the lamp is turned off (0x000000) is specified. In addition, in the grandchild table K11, regarding the movable body lamp 9d, among the letters "XXX" attached to the movable body 32, the left X (left X), the middle X (middle X), and the right X (right X) Data is specified for each of the following. In addition, in FIG. 10-37, in order to clearly indicate the lighting period for each lamp included in the movable lamp 9d, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000) at the timing to end lighting are shown. ) is marked with a dashed circle.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table K11, first the left X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is lit at T3, then the middle X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is lit at T4, and then the movable lamp 9d is turned on at T5. The lamp on the right X of 9d lights up. After starting to light up, each lamp continues to light up while changing colors into seven colors. After that, the left X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is first turned off at T48, then the middle X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is turned off at T49, and then the right X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is turned off at T50. Lights out. Thereafter, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec in one big right-handed hit promotion performance has elapsed. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and continue to be turned off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. In other words, since the time used for lighting etc. is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, there is only about 320 msec remaining, but in order to ensure that the remaining time is turned off, the final light off time is 1000 msec, which is longer than the remaining time. (T57). Furthermore, compared to the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable lamp 9d starts to turn on later than the frame lamp (that is, the first T1 and T2 remain off) and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

By using the grandchild table K11 in which the data described above is stored, the fourth and third lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L are While the movable lamp 9d is lit, the movable lamp 9d goes out, and then the left X of the movable lamp 9d lights up at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, and then the middle X and right X lamps turn on. When lit, each lamp continues to light up in seven colors, and at the same timing that the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, the left X of the movable lamp 9d goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out. Lights out. As a result, the movable lamps 9d light up in seven colors starting from the left X lamp, then the middle X lamp, and then the right X lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a large right-handed hit promotion effect using the movable lamp 9d is performed twice.

Further, FIG. 10-37 shows data in grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 10-37, in the grandchild table A11a of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined for a very long time of 600000 msec compared to 330 msec for lighting, and that data is for turning off the light. Data (0x000000) is defined.

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined at intervals of 20 msec for 1350 msec to be lit. However, since the attacker lamp 9c only repeats color changes in a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) over 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b specifies only 280 nsec for one pattern color change. ing. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the attacker lamp 9c for 280 ns each time it refers to the grandchild table A11b once in 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until the end of 1350 msec and performs a predetermined Repeating color changes in a pattern (for example, seven colors).

In the grandchild table A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long time of 600000 msec compared to 320 msec for lighting, and the data for turning off (0x000000) is specified. There is.

When the big right-handed promotion performance is started, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the attacker lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, and then turns off the grandchild table A11b at 280 nsec intervals for 1350 msec. By referring to the table A11c multiple times, the attacker lamp 9c is caused to repeat a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of color change, and then, by referring to the grandchild table A11c for the last 320 msec, the attacker lamp 9c is turned off. As a result, as shown in Figures 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), the frame lamp lights up in an arch from the left side to the right side, and soon the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns on. After reaching the vicinity of the attacker, the attacker lamp 9c lights up, then the frame lamps turn off in an arch from the left side to the right side, and eventually the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then the attacker lamp 9c will turn off. Such a big right hit promotion effect using the attacker lamp 9c is performed twice.

In addition, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, in which the light goes out at the beginning, repeats a predetermined pattern of colors in the middle, and then goes out, the attacker lamp 9c is turned off three times. By creating a scenario in stages and repeatedly referring to the same grandchild table A11b for repeating the color of the predetermined pattern in the middle, there is no need to prepare data for all times from the beginning to the end of the 2000 msec lighting. , it is sufficient to prepare data only for the repeated portion. Therefore, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 10-25 (c4), the presentation mode of the big right-handed hitting promotion performance executed in the right-handed hitting promotion part of the fanfare performance will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-25 (c4), the image display device 5 displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-25 (c5), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c6), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the movable lamp 9d, the left X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c7), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Further, the middle X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c8), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Furthermore, the right X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c9), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c10), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c11), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the panel right lamp 075F009F, the panel right lamp 075F009F starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c12), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c13), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c14), the image display device 5 continues to display an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c15), on the image display device 5, a character image of "RIGHT" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp on the left side of the frame 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker lamp 9c starts lighting. Note that from then on, the attacker lamp 9c repeats turning on and turning off (that is, blinks). The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c16), on the image display device 5, the character image "RIGHT" continues to be displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp on the left side of the frame 075F009L is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c17), on the image display device 5, a character image of "hit right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the left X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c18), on the image display device 5, a character image of "hit right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the middle X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c19), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right-handed" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the right X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c20), on the image display device 5, a character image "Right-handed" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c21), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right-handed hitter" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c22), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit the right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right hit!!" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the panel right lamp 075F009F goes out. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c24), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right hit!!" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right hit!!" is displayed superimposed on the rightward arrow image. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the flashing attacker lamp 9c also turns off. Sound output also stops from the speakers 8L and 8R. This completes the series of first big right-handed hit promotion effects.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c26), the second big right hit promotion performance starts. At this time, regarding the game effect lamps 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. In addition, in the second big right-handed hitting promotion performance, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance. As a result, when transitioning to the jackpot round after the big right-handed hit promotion performance ends, the BGM (sound according to the background of the jackpot round) during the jackpot round and the sound in the big right-handed promotion performance will not overlap. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second big right hitting promotion performance, the game effect lamp 9 lights/blinks/extinguishes in the same manner as the first big right hitting promotion performance. However, during that time, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect.

In this way, the large right-handed hitting promotion performance uses larger text and graphic image displays than the small right-handed hitting promotion performance, and is a performance that encourages the player to play right-handed hitting in a manner that is more emphasized than the small right-handed hitting promotion performance. be. Therefore, by executing the big right-handed hit promotion performance during the fanfare performance, it is possible to encourage the player to play right-handed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the first big right-handed hitting promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds (for example, a sound effect for right-handed hitting) in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance, thereby effectively appealing to the player. While it is possible to encourage right-handed hitting, in the second big right-handed hitting promotion performance, the sound is not output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance, so that the BGM during the jackpot round that starts after that is not output. can be prevented from interfering with

In addition, in the big right-handed driving promotion effect, arrow images and character images are displayed in a manner that gradually appears in stages, and moreover, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes to effectively encourage right-handed hitting. This effect is more flashy than the effect shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2) that displays the name image of the jackpot game state. For example, the character images in the big right-handed promotion effect appear one character at a time, but all the character images in the name image in the jackpot game state appear at once. Furthermore, regarding the size of the character image in the big right-handed promotion performance, the character image in the name image of the jackpot game state is larger than all the character images. Furthermore, the execution time of the effect promoting a big right-handed hit is longer than the execution time of the effect displaying the name image. Thereby, after the name image of the jackpot game state is displayed and the player is informed of the jackpot, it is possible to notify the player by emphasizing right-handed hitting by the big right-handed promoting performance.

The attacker lamp 9c is the place that the player aims at when launching the game ball in order to actually carry the game ball, so it lights up in a flashy color that is easy for the player to recognize, such as seven colors, and also blinks. It is possible to make the player pay more attention to the target area. Note that the attacker lamp 9c may always be lit in a predetermined color, such as seven colors, without blinking.

In the following example, the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when a 5R probability-variable jackpot occurs will be explained. Although the number of rounds is different for the 10R fixed-variable jackpot, other performance aspects are the same as for the 5R fixed-variable jackpot. Furthermore, the 5 normal jackpot is different in that the V preview performance and the V prize winning performance are not executed, but the other performance aspects are the same as the 5R probability-variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 goes out and the second big right-handed promotion effect ends, the switch to the jackpot round starts as shown in FIG. 10-38 (c27). Start. Specifically, the arrow image and the character image "Right hit!!" fade out, resulting in a gradual decrease in visibility. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes completely white. Note that the image promoting small right-handed shots displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-out. As described above, based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command), a series of performance data up to the stage shown in FIG. 10-38 (c28) is set.

When the fanfare performance is finished, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) specifying that the grand prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare performance to the in-round performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round performance in the 1R. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-39 (d3) to 10-40 (e4) based on the large prize opening designation command (A101 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-39 (d3) to FIG. 10-40 (e4) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d3), the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in from a state where the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes pure white. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-in. Note that the image promoting small right-handed shots displayed in the upper right of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, "fade in" and "fade out" will be specifically explained. Fade-in and fade-out are a type of effect in image display called "transition." "Transition" is a transition inserted between the first cut (image) and the second cut (image) when the scene of the video changes from the first cut (image) to the second cut (image) when editing the video. It's about the effect. In addition to fade-ins and fade-outs, transitions include various techniques in video editing, such as wipes and overlaps.

"Fade in" is an effect in which an image representing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific method, fade-in changes the transparency (also called transmittance) of an object (image) from a first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) to a second degree that is lower than the first degree (for example, 0). % or 1%) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, use 1 second between 0 and 1 second to gradually change the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 50%, Using the next 1 to 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually lowered from 50% to 0% (second degree). On the other hand, a method that changes the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) at once to change the object (image) to opaque, A fade-in is not a fade-in if it does not gradually change the rate) to a lower value. Note that when changing opacity (also referred to as opacity) rather than transparency (transmittance), the above-mentioned % value is reversed. That is, in fade-in, the opacity (opacity) of an object (image) is changed from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree that is higher than the second degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) over a predetermined period of time.

"Fade out" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific method, fade-out involves changing the transparency (transmittance) of an object (image) from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree that is higher than the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). %) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 0% (second degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 seconds, Using the next 1 to 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 50% to 100% (first degree). On the other hand, there is a method that changes the transparency (transmittance) of an object (image) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) at once to make it transparent. It is not a fade-out if the rate (rate) does not gradually increase. Note that when changing the opacity (opacity) rather than the transparency (transparency), in fade-out, the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) is changed to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) to a second degree lower than the first degree (for example, 0% or 1%) over a predetermined period of time.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (c26) and (d1), the transparency (transparent By gradually increasing the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen to 100% when the transparency (rate) is 0%, the arrow image and the text "Right hit!!" Make the image transparent in stages and make it difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (d2), only the white image on the second layer of the screen located further back than the first layer of the screen is shown to the player. Then, as shown in Figure 10-38 (d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is reduced to 0%. By gradually lowering the background image to , the background image during the jackpot round becomes gradually opaque and easily visible (fade-in). As a result, the background image during the jackpot round in the first layer located in front of the second layer on the screen is shown to the player.

Note that as a transition, there is also a method called "crossfade." For example, cross-fading is achieved by fading out the first layer of a screen showing some object, while fading in the second layer of the screen showing some object located further back than the first layer. , in appearance, is a method in which the first layer of the screen is shown and then the second layer of the screen is shown. On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, as described above, by fading out the first layer of the screen and then fading in, the white image that is always displayed on the second layer of the screen located on the back side is is shown once during the transition from the image in the first ED period to the image in the second ED period, and is therefore different from a technique such as cross-fade.

In this embodiment, even if the background image switching display such as the above-mentioned transition is executed, the image that promotes small right-handed hits displayed at the top right of the screen is not affected by the background image switching display. The display is maintained without being affected. Here, "affected by the switching display of the background image" means that due to the switching display of the background image such as fade-in or fade-out, the player may not be able to see the image promoting small right-handed shots completely, or the player may The player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting may be obstructed or reduced, such as when the player can see the image promoting small right-handed hitting a little but cannot understand the meaning of the image (promoting right-handed hitting). This means that the player's visibility is affected in some way, such as by On the other hand, in a situation where the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not obstructed or reduced, the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not the background image. It can be said that it is not affected by the switching display.

As shown in Figure 10-39 (d4), after the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in, as shown in Figure 10-39 (e1), when 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens. , a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Note that a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the jackpot round) in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round. Note that, as described above, at the time this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect has already ended.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e2), during 1R, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and an image ( arrows and text) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e3), when the 1st round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A201 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify after opening the grand prize opening. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e4), between rounds, the grand prize opening usually remains closed, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 2R based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-41 (e5) to 10-42 (e8) based on the large prize opening designation command (A102 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-41 (e5) to FIG. 10-42 (e8) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5), when the 2nd round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, a background image corresponding to the performance during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e6), during 2R, a V probability change suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a character image of "PUSH!!" is displayed together with an image prompting the user to operate the push button 31B, overlapping the background image corresponding to the performance during the round. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V probability change suggestion performance, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effects during the round (V-probability change suggestion effects, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B in the V probability change suggestion performance, a V An image of the text "Success!!" is displayed to notify you of a guaranteed jackpot. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V probability change suggestion performance, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effects during the round (V-probability change suggestion effects, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e8), when the 2nd round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A202 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify after opening the grand prize opening. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e9), between rounds, the big prize opening usually remains closed, and a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a message " A text image "Success!!" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 3rd round based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-42 (e10) to 10-43 (e12) based on the large prize opening designation command (A103 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-42 (e10) to FIG. 10-43 (e12) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10), when the 3rd round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened and the V preview effect is executed. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a character image and a character image saying "Catch the V in the next round!!" are displayed so as to overlap the background image according to the effect during the round. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V preview performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the presentation during the round (V preview presentation, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e11), during the 3R, the V preview effect continues to be executed, and is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, overlapping the background image corresponding to the in-round effect, together with the character image. A text image of "Catch the V in the next round!!" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right-hand hit is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V preview performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the presentation during the round (V preview presentation, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e12), when the 3rd round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A203 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify after opening the grand prize opening. do. On the other hand, based on the command from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect aiming for V during the rounds from after the 3rd round to the 4th round.

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), between rounds, the Aim for V effect is executed with the grand prize opening remaining closed, that is, with the game ball unable to enter the grand prize opening. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a V variable winning ball device 075F007B (V large prize ball device 075F007B), which is the target (location) that the player is made to aim at by hitting right, is placed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to overlap the background image according to the performance during the round. An arrow image pointing to the winning opening) and a text image of "Aim" are displayed. In this way, according to the Aim for V effect, by using the image display regarding the V big winning hole, it is possible to urge the player to hit the ball to the right so that the game ball enters the V big winning hole. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A104 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 104. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-44 (e14) and (e15) based on the large prize opening designation command (A104 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-44 (e14) to FIG. 10-44 (e15) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V big prize opening is opened and the Aim for V effect is executed. As a result, the player can aim for the V-big prize opening by hitting the ball to the right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15), during the 4R, an aim for V effect is executed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

When a game ball enters the V big prize opening and a V prize is generated, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the V winning performance. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-44 (e16) to 10-45 (e18) based on the probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-44 (e16) to FIG. 10-45 (e18) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), when the V-winning effect is executed, a " V'' image is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and letters) promoting small right-handed hitting is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V winning performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V winning performance, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e17), when the 4th round ends, the V grand prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command after opening the grand prize opening (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e18), between rounds, the V big prize opening and the normal big prize opening remain closed, and a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In this way, the character image of "V" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and characters) for promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A105 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 5th round based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-45 (e19) to 10-46 (e21) based on the large prize opening designation command (A105 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-45 (e19) to FIG. 10-46 (e21) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, a background image corresponding to the performance during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (e20), during 5R, an in-round effect is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, an image of a small right hit promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right of the screen. (arrow and text) is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (e21), when the 5th round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A205 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify after opening the grand prize opening. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing after that, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-46 (f1) to 10-47 (f4) based on the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-46 (f1) to FIG. 10-47 (f4) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (f1), when the ending effect starts, an image is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to select a stage in a variable probability state after the jackpot game state. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f2), during the ending performance, a name image (in this example, a character image of "Yumemu RUSH!!") indicating the name of the variable state is displayed on the image display device 5 along with the character image. displayed in the center. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f3), during the ending effect, an immersion suppression notification effect is executed. Specifically, an image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as "Be careful not to get addicted to it. Pachinko is a game that should be enjoyed in moderation." Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. In addition, at the time of consecutive winnings, a game result image showing the game result (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) in the jackpot game state is displayed during the ending performance, for example, at the bottom of the screen, but when the first win Also, such a game result image may be displayed during the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f4), a forgetting prevention image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent forgetting to take out a card owned by a player related to a game, such as a prepaid card or a membership card. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

After the ending effect is finished, if there is a second pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends the effect control CPU 120 a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), and a symbol variation specification. A command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command) are transmitted. On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 inputs the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-48 (g1) and (g2) into a pending storage number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), and a symbol variation specification command. (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between (g1) and (g2) in FIGS. 10-48 is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g1), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g2), the second special symbol stops changing and a losing symbol is displayed. At this time as well, the image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stoppage of losing symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the stoppage of the losing symbol.

After the fluctuation of the second special symbol has stopped, if there is a second pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), background specification command (95 series command) to the production control CPU 120. , a symbol variation specification command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command). On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-48 (g3) to 10-49 (g5) as a reservation storage number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), Settings are made based on the symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-48 (g3) to FIG. 10-49 (g5) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g3), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed at the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g4), in the case of jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the reach effect. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), a group preview performance is executed as a preview performance during jackpot fluctuations. The group preview effect refers to objects such as characters appearing in stages or all at once on the screen of the image display device 5, making it difficult to see the ready-to-reach symbols, and then disappearing to make it difficult to see the reach symbols. This is an effect that makes a matching pattern (for example, 777, etc.) appear. Even if a preview effect that makes it difficult to see the symbols in such a reach mode is executed, the image of the small right hit promotion effect ( arrows and text) are displayed. Here, "affected by the display of effect images" means that due to the display of effect images such as group previews, the player cannot completely see the image of the effect promoting small right-handed hits, or the player is affected by the display of effect images such as group previews. Players' visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting may be hindered or reduced, such as when they can see the image of the effect a little but cannot understand the meaning of the image (promoting right-handed hitting). This means that the player's visibility is affected in some way. On the other hand, in a situation where the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not obstructed or reduced, the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not the same as the effect image. It can be said that the results are not affected by the display.

When the variation of the special symbols stops, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g6), when a jackpot (10R variable jackpot) occurs as a result of the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. Send. Note that since the right-handed hitting promotion effect has already been executed, the right-handed hitting display lighting command (FD type command) is not transmitted. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fanfare performance based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-50 (h1) and (h2) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command). In other words, each performance performed between (h1) and (h2) in FIGS. 10-50 is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (h1), as a fanfare performance, an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Yattane!!") is displayed on the image display device 5. A sound congratulating the jackpot is outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode congratulates the jackpot. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), after the fanfare performance has started, a name image (in this example, a character image of "SPECIAL BONUS!!") indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred is displayed on the image display device 5. , a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of the jackpot. In addition, in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, since the big right-hitting promotion performance has already been executed when the special symbol 1 is won, the big right-hitting promotion performance is not executed again. For this reason, as shown in Figures 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect, and furthermore, , the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hit promotion effect.

When the fanfare performance is finished, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) specifying that the grand prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare performance to the in-round performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round performance in the 1R.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (i1), when the jackpot 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

After that, although not shown, various performances such as V preview performance, Aim for V performance, and V winning performance are executed during the round as shown in Figures 10-40 to 10-46, and eventually, when the jackpot round ends, , the ending effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 10-46 and 10-47. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-48, control is again made to the variable probability state after the jackpot game state. In this series of games, in the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hitting is displayed, as well as the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the fourth symbol. Each of the right-handed display parts 075F055 of the unit 075F050 continues to light up. Eventually, when the variable probability state after the jackpot game state ends without a jackpot occurring and the state is controlled to the normal state, a right-hit display light off designation command is sent from the CPU 103 to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120 The CPU 120 erases the image (arrow and text) of the small right-handed promotion effect in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and also erases the right-handed hitting display part 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. Each of the sections 075F055 is turned off. As a result, the player will play left-handed again in the normal state.

[Performance mode of pachinko gaming machine 1 when recovering from power outage]
FIG. 10-51 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the fanfare presentation due to one special drawing win. The power outage shown in Figure 10-51 is assumed to be power outage 1 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during a fanfare performance and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 10-20. .

As shown in FIG. 10-51, an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-51). -24 (c1) state), a state in which a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state (in this example, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-24 (c2)) ), a state in which only the arrow image in the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-28 (c14)), and a state in which the arrow image in the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is displayed together with "Right-handed hitting!" !” character image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23)), if a power outage occurs, the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. Thereafter, when the power is turned on, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting a small right-handed hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-hand game display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-hand game display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-hand game by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A101 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A101 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A101 command), an effect image during 1R as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1) is displayed on the image display device 5. Additionally, an image congratulating you on hitting the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a character image saying "Congratulations!!"), and a name image showing the name of the jackpot gaming state (in this example, "CHANCE BONUS!!") After the power is turned on, all of the images, including the arrow image in the big right-handed driving promotion performance, and the character image ``Right-handed!!'' added to the arrow image in the big right-handed game promotion performance, are canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs before the big right hit promotion performance is executed or before the big right hit promotion performance is completed, the small right hit promotion performance will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards. Therefore, immediately after recovering from a power outage, it is possible to at least encourage the player to hit the ball to the right, and if the player forgets to hit the ball to the right, he or she is unable to enter the game ball into the winning hole. This makes it possible to prevent players from being disadvantaged as much as possible.

FIG. 10-52 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game machine recovers from a power outage during one round of jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-52 assumes a power outage 2 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-20.

As shown in FIG. 10-52, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the performance during 1R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-40 (e2)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting a small right-handed hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-hand game display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-hand game display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-hand game by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 displays a performance image during 2R as shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. If prize balls are obtained during subsequent rounds, points may be added again starting from 0 pt, such as adding 10 points for every 10 balls obtained. Note that the point image is not limited to one that is displayed at 0pt after recovery from a power outage, but may be made so that the point cannot be recognized by a predetermined image such as "??".

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. Can be done.

FIG. 10-53 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the round after the first round of jackpot at the time of winning the special figure 1. The power outage shown in Figure 10-53 is the power outage 3 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 10-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-53, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the performance between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-40 (e4)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting a small right-handed hit continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-hand game display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-hand game display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-hand game by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A102 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 displays a performance image during 2R as shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent players from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during the second round of the jackpot when the first special drawing is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-54 assumes a power outage 4 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-20.

As shown in FIG. 10-54, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the V probability change suggestion effect during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-41 (e7)), the image After the image is no longer displayed on the display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-hand game display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-hand game display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-hand game by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A103 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) after returning from a power outage, the production control The CPU 120 executes a V preview effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) based on the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) and jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured as

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. I can do it.

FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage between rounds after the second round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-55 is the power outage 5 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-55, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the round after 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-42 (e9)), the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) after returning from the power outage, the production control The CPU 120 executes a V preview performance as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) based on the jackpot opening designation command (A103 command) and jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured as

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the ball to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage during the round after the third round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-56 is the power outage 6 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 3R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-56, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the round after 3R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-43 (e13)), the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A104 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A104 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A104 command), the effect image during 4R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A104 command) after returning from a power outage, the production control The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103 and executes an effect aimed at V as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14) based on the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) and the jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command). It can also be configured as follows.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent players from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the V-winning slot in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-57 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during the 4th round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-57 assumes a power outage 7 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21.

As shown in FIG. 10-57, an image corresponding to the Aim for V in 4R effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 10-44 (e15)), or an image corresponding to the V winning effect. If a power outage occurs in a state where is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, when the power is turned on, "Recovering..." will be displayed. The character image is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A105 command), a performance image during 5R as shown in FIG. 10-45 (e19) is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. I can do it. Furthermore, as in the 4R, if a power outage occurs while a small right hit promotion performance is being executed along with the V target performance, or as shown in Figure 10-51 mentioned above, a small right hit promotion performance and a small right hit promotion performance may occur. In the case where a power outage occurs while a right-handed hit promotion performance is being executed, the common thing is that after returning from the power outage, the aim for V performance and the large right-handed hit promotion performance are not executed, while the small right-handed hit promotion performance is performed. is running at least. Therefore, in any situation, it is possible to at least encourage the player to play right-handed immediately after recovering from a power outage, in a manner common to all situations.

FIG. 10-58 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage between rounds after the 4th round of the jackpot at the time of winning the special figure 1. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-58 is the power outage 8 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21. Suppose.

As shown in Figure 10-58, when a power outage occurs in a state where the image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 10-45 (e18)) between rounds after 4R After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image during 5R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the ball to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during the final round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-59 assumes a power outage 9 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 5R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21.

As shown in FIG. 10-59, a state in which an image corresponding to the in-round effect during 5R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state in FIG. 10-46 (e20)), or a state after the end of 5R (in FIG. -46 (state e21)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 type command), the production control CPU 120 executes the jackpot end designation command (A3 type command). Based on this, an effect image corresponding to the ending effect as shown in FIG. 10-46 (f1) is displayed on the image display device 5.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the final round of a jackpot, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the minimum, players will be able to It can encourage players to hit right-handed, and it can prevent them from forgetting to hit right-handed as much as possible.

FIG. 10-60 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the ending performance at the time of winning the special drawing 1. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-60 assumes a power outage 10 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the ending performance and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21. .

As shown in FIG. 10-60, in the ending performance, an image for selecting a stage in a variable probability state after the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 10-46 (f1)), a character A state in which a name image indicating the name of the probability change state is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the image (the state shown in FIG. 10-47 (f2)), an image corresponding to the addictive suppression notification effect, and a game result in the jackpot game state are shown. A game result image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-47 (f3)), and a forgetting prevention image for preventing players from forgetting to take out cards owned by the player is displayed on the image display device 5. If a power outage occurs in any of the displayed states (the state shown in Figure 10-47 (f4)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image "Restoring..." will be displayed when the power is turned on. is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, if there is a pending memory number, the production control CPU 120 sends a pending memory number specification command (C1 series command, C2 series command), background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command) from the CPU 103. , the display result specification command (8C series command), and the fluctuation pattern specification command (81 series command) are received, and when these commands are received, the pending storage number specification command (C1 series command, C2 series command), Based on the background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command), the An image display device 5 displays an effect image corresponding to the variation of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if there is no pending memory number, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103. Based on the specified command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demonstration specification command (9F00 command), the display on the image display device 5 is restored with the initial pattern (in this example, "123" as a decorative pattern and small pattern) stopped. .

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the ending, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so the player will at least be encouraged to hit right right after the power is restored. This prevents as much as possible the players from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the second starting prize slot in a variable state after a jackpot game state. be able to.

[Main effects obtained by characteristic part 075F]
Below, the technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the feature portion 075F described above will be individually listed.

(1-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process for executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)), and A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-hand hit promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)) and an image related to the specific area. including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, while ending the first guidance display, the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the big right hit suggestion effect is ended). (The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, the third guidance display is performed while the game medium cannot enter the specific area, and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), aim for V. (a part that displays an image corresponding to the production and continues to display an image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion production),
Thereafter, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued even after the state where the game medium cannot enter the specific area changes from the state where the game medium cannot enter the specific area (for example, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued). As shown in 10-44 (e15), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the V-aiming effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, when the game medium enters the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), aim for V. (a part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is continued while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is ended),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-hand hitting suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-hand hitting suggestion effect) 10-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed, but the second guidance display is performed (for example, after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57, "Restoring...") (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

(1-2) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process for executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of text and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)); A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area. including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guide display is ended while the second guide display is continued (for example, FIGS. 10-38 (d1), (d2) ), where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed hit suggestion effect is ended while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed shot suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the closing of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that allows entry into the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, in Figure 10-43 As shown in (e13), the part that displays an image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that allows entry into the specific area, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued (for example, in FIG. 10-44). As shown in e15), the part that continues to display the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the game medium entering the specific area, the third guide display is terminated while the second guide display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), (The part where the image display corresponding to the aiming effect ends while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect continues),
While performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-handed hit suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-handed hit suggestion effect) 10-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being displayed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Restoring..." after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57. (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

(1-3) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of text and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)); A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area. including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, by receiving a 1R opening command (for example, the grand prize opening designation command (A101 command)), the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-38). As shown in (d1) and (d2), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed hit suggestion effect ends while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, by receiving a command after the end of 3R (for example, a command after opening the big prize opening (A203 command)), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-43). As shown in (e13), the part that displays an image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, by receiving the 4R opening command (for example, the grand prize opening designation command (A104 command)), the second guide display and the third guide display are continued (for example, in FIG. 10-44 (e15)). As shown, the part that continues to display the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, by receiving a V passage command (for example, a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command)), the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44). As shown in (e16), the part where the image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect ends while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect continues),
While performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-handed hit suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-handed hit suggestion effect) 10-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being displayed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Restoring..." after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57. (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare performance, a large right-handed batting promotion performance and a small right-handed batting promotion performance are executed to emphasize the promotion of right-handed batting, thereby encouraging the player to bat right-handed in subsequent games. After that, it is possible to prevent the player from appealing to the player about excessively hitting the right by making the player recognize it surely, and then continuing the performance promoting the small right-handed hit while ending the big right-handed hitting promotion performance. In addition, the Aim for V effect to make people aim for the V grand prize opening will be executed from the time when the V grand prize opening is still closed, and will continue as it is even after the V grand prize opening is opened. It is possible to appeal to the player the importance of aiming for the big winning hole, and to ensure that the game ball enters the V big winning hole. In addition, by ending the Aim for V effect after a V win occurs and the V big win opening is closed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary promotional notifications from being given to the player. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned flow, the small right-handed promotion performance is continuously executed, so players are encouraged to always play right-handed from before the V-big winning opening opens to after the V-winning occurs. can be encouraged. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right. In addition, when a power outage occurs while displaying an image corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect and the power is restored from the power outage, it also corresponds to the Aim for V effect. If a power outage occurs while the image display and the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed and the power is restored from the power outage, the text image "Restoring..." and the small Since an image promoting right-handed playing is displayed, even if a power outage occurs, the player can be at least encouraged to continue playing right-handed in subsequent games.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. ,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. a process for executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120;
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 (c25)). image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in c1),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and Performing the second guidance display (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting promotion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting promotion performance shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1) to FIG. 10-46 (e21), the jackpot is (The part where the image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is not displayed during the round, while the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance is continued),
In the special state (for example, probability change state, time saving state) after the control of the advantageous state has ended, the second guidance display is continued (for example, after the jackpot as shown in FIGS. 10-48 and 10-49). part that continues to display an image corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect in a variable probability state),
The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display of the background image (for example, the switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 10-38 (d1) to As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out),
The second guidance display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display due to the group preview effect) (for example, the image display due to the group preview effect as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5)) (The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect without being affected by).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare performance, a large right-handed batting promotion performance and a small right-handed batting promotion performance are executed to emphasize the promotion of right-handed batting, thereby encouraging the player to bat right-handed in subsequent games. To ensure that a player is aware of excessive hitting to the right, and during the subsequent jackpot round, to end a big right hitting promotion performance while continuing a small right hitting promotion performance, thereby not appealing to a player that he hits the right excessively. I can do it. In addition, by continuing to perform the small right-handed hit promotion performance even in the variable probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, it is possible to encourage the player to always play right. Furthermore, after a jackpot occurs, the small right hit promotion effect will not be affected by the switching display (fade out, fade in, etc.) that is performed when switching to the jackpot round after the fanfare effect is executed, and the jackpot game state will not be affected. Since the small right-handed hit promotion performance is not affected by the image display such as the group preview performance performed in the probability change state or time-saving state after the game ends, the player can always be encouraged to play the right hit. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-handed hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means repeats the guide light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, displays an image corresponding to a big right-handed hit promotion effect). (The part where the frame lamps are lit twice in an arching motion from the left side to the right side)
The sound output means includes:
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is output in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions (for example, Fig. 10-25 (c4) to Fig. 10-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp is turned on in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
When the last guide light emission is performed among the plurality of guide light emissions, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (c26) to 10-33 (c29)). (The part where no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect when the frame lamp is lit in the big right-handed hitting promotion effect),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, the sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
In a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the same as the specific display result. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R. (the part that does not output sound depending on the mode).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the lighted part of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, so the player is encouraged to hit right more effectively. can be encouraged. Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes right-handed hitting, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. When the frame lamp (second time) is used to promote right-handed hitting, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without overlapping the BGM with the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is not executed, and the sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance is not outputted, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized and the player can be prevented from feeling bothersome. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(3-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means repeats the guide light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, displays an image corresponding to a big right-handed hit promotion effect). (The part where the frame lamps are lit twice in an arching motion from the left side to the right side)
The sound output means includes:
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is output in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions (for example, Fig. 10-25 (c4) to Fig. 10-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp is turned on in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
When the last guide light emission is performed among the plurality of guide light emissions, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (c26) to 10-33 (c29)). (The part where no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect when the frame lamp is lit in the big right-handed hitting promotion effect),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, the sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
The guide means is configured to control the display result of the variable display in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state). When the specific display result is obtained, the guide light is not emitted (for example, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the frame lamp will display a large right-handed hit promotion effect) (the part that does not light up depending on the situation).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the lighted part of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, so the player is encouraged to hit right more effectively. can be encouraged. Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes right-handed hitting, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. When the frame lamp (second time) is used to promote right-handed hitting, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without overlapping the BGM with the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion effect is not executed like this, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized. This can prevent players from feeling bothered. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display after turning off the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, after turning off the light, (The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display corresponding to the promotional effect)
The sound output means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is output in conjunction with the guide light emission (for example, FIG. 10-25 (c4) to FIG. As shown in 10-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is turned on in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
Thereafter, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is changed to the specific display. When a result is obtained, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the speaker 8L, 8R will output a big right-handed promotion effect. parts that do not output sound in a corresponding manner).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp once goes out, and then the lighted part of the lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, making it easier to understand and more effective. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed. Further, when the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed hitting, sounds are outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, so that the player is encouraged to play right-handed by the sound as well. I can do it. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is not executed, and the sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance is not outputted, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized and the player can be prevented from feeling bothersome. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(4-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-handed hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means is
After the light emitting means is turned off, the guide light is emitted in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, after the light is once turned off, it corresponds to a big right-handed drive promotion effect). (The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display)
Thereafter, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is changed to the specific display. When a result is obtained, the guide light is not emitted (for example, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the frame lamp responds to the big right hit promotion effect. (The part that does not light up depending on the mode)

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp once goes out, and then the lighted part of the lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, making it easier to understand and more effective. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed. Further, when the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed hitting, sounds are outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, so that the player is encouraged to play right-handed by the sound as well. I can do it. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion effect is not executed like this, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized. This can prevent players from feeling bothered. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(5) The second guide display is displayed in a manner that is more emphasized than the name display of the advantageous state that is part of the start effect.

Specifically, the image display in the big right-handed driving promotion effects shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33 has a larger character image than the name image display in the fanfare effect shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2). The characters appear one by one in stages, take a long time to execute, and are displayed in an emphasized manner. With this, it is possible to emphasize to the player that he should play right-handed.

(6) The guide means repeatedly emits the guide light a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display,
The sound output means includes:
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
Not outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the intermediate guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
When the last guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the multiple right-handed driving promotion performances using frame lamps, a sound corresponding to the right-handed batting promotion performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed batting promotion, but the second one Regarding the subsequent right-handed driving promotion, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For example, if the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed players three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in conjunction with the first right-handed player promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed players. Also, no sound is output in conjunction with the promotion of right-handed hitting from the second time onwards. In other words, the sound data for promoting right-handed hitting only includes sound data linked to the first right-handed promoting. As a result, the BGM during the jackpot round that is output after the big right-hitting promotion effect is not overlaid with the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, and the player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round. can be heard.

(7) The guide means repeatedly emits the guide light a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display,
The sound output means includes:
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the intermediate guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
When the last guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the multiple right-handed driving promotion performances using frame lamps, a sound corresponding to the right-handed batting promotion performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed batting promotion, and then In conjunction with the promotion of hitting to the right, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds corresponding to the presentation to promote hitting to the right, but regarding the final promotion to hitting to the right, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds corresponding to the presentation to promote hitting to the right. For example, when a frame lamp is used to promote right-handed players three times, the speakers 8L and 8R are linked to the first and second right-handed players based on the sound data for the right-handed players. and outputs a sound in conjunction with the promotion of the third right-handed hit. In other words, the sound data for promoting right-handed hitting includes only sound data linked to the first and second right-handed promoting. Note that the sound data may include only sound data linked to one time's right-handed promotion, and the production control CPU 120 may execute two loops of the sound data linked to one right-handed promotion. . Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data that is linked to promoting two right-handed hits, and the production control CPU 120 may execute the sound data that is linked to promoting two right-handed hits once. . As a result, the BGM during the jackpot round that is output after the big right-hitting promotion effect is not overlaid with the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, and the player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round. can be heard.

(8) The light emitting means is constituted by a plurality of lamps, and emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display after all of the plurality of lamps are turned off (for example, Fig. 10-25 (c3) As shown in , after all the lamps of the frame lamp are once turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect).

Specifically, after all the lamps in the frame lamp are turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner that corresponds to the big right hit promotion effect, so that the player is encouraged to hit right more easily and effectively. I can do it.

(9) The light emitting means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display based on data defined by a lighting data table;
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in FIG. 10-34) that defines the execution time of the guide light emission, and a child table (for example, the grandchild table that defines the data referred to by the light emitting means). , the child table shown in FIG. 10-35) and the grandchild table (for example, the child table shown in FIG. 10-36 and FIG. 10-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamp 9 including the frame lamp specifies the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect by referring to the parent table, and specifies the grandchild table in which lighting data is specified by referring to the child table. It is specified and turned on/blinking/off by referring to the grandchild table. Thereby, the game effect lamp 9 can be efficiently lit in an appropriate lighting manner.

(10) Among the light emitting means, the grandchild table corresponding to the light emitting means that does not emit the guide light is not defined as the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-35, the lower left lamp 075F009D, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and board left lamp 075F009E are not used in the big right-handed promotion effect and are turned off, so a grandchild table is provided. do not have. Thereby, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guide means emits the guide light by sequentially moving the light emitting portion of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player shoots the game medium (for example, FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10- As shown in 33, each lamp included in the frame lamp is turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the gaming area).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, by lighting up each lamp included in the frame lamp in order from the left side to the right side of the gaming area, a big right-handed hit promotion effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to urge the player to play right-handed in an easy-to-understand manner.

(12) The guide means emits the guide light while changing the color of the light emitted from the light emitting means (for example, a part that lights up a frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, since the frame lamp performs a big right-handed hit promotion effect while lighting up in seven colors, it is possible to more effectively encourage the player to play right-handed.

(13) The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display by fade-in and fade-out as the switching display of the background image performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 10-38 (d1) ~ As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out).

Specifically, as shown in Figures 10-38 (d1) to 10-39 (d4), the small right-handed hit promotion effect involves switching the background image by fade-in and fade-out when switching from the fanfare effect to the jackpot round. It continues without being affected by the display. Thereby, even if the fanfare performance is switched to the jackpot round by switching the display of the background image, the player can be encouraged to continue hitting the ball to the right.

(14) The second guide display is not affected by the display in the preview effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result as the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, in FIG. -49 (as shown in g5), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the image display by the group preview effect).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-49 (g5), the small right hit promotion effect affects the display in the preview effect that suggests that a jackpot will occur in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot advantageous state. continues without being affected. As a result, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern becomes difficult due to the execution of the preview effect, the arrow images and text images in the small right-handed promotion effect will continue to be displayed without hindering their visibility. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guide light is not emitted (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2) So, in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp is in a manner that corresponds to the large right-handed promotion effect. parts that do not light up).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, the mode corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect is from speakers 8L and 8R as in the case of the first winning. , the sound is not output, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bothered by the promotion of right-handed play being frequently emphasized.

[Modified example of characteristic part 075F]
A modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the above-described feature section 075F will be explained.

(About turning off the lights before the execution of the big right-handed hit promotion performance)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-25 (c3), after all the lamps in the frame lamp are once turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect. However, it is not limited to turning off all the lamps, and some of the lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp that is lit first in the big right-handed driving promotion performance (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) may be lit. In this way, it is possible to clearly show the connection when the frame lamp is subsequently lit in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hit promotion effect.

(About the switching display during the jackpot round)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (d1) to FIG. 10-39 (d4), as a switching display during the jackpot round, when switching from the fanfare performance to the jackpot round, fade-in and fade-out are used. Although switching display of background images has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a switching display during the jackpot round, a production effect such as a whiteout in which a pure white screen is inserted between the fanfare production and the jackpot round, or a blackout in which a pure black screen is inserted may be used.

Further, the switching display during the jackpot round may be such that a BGM selection screen for selecting BGM (song) is displayed, and the background image is switched to a background image corresponding to the BGM selected by the BGM selection screen.

Further, the switching display during the jackpot round may be such that a mode selection screen for selecting a performance mode is displayed, and the background image is switched to a background image corresponding to the mode selected by the mode selection screen.

In either case, even if a special switching display is performed during the jackpot round, it is sufficient to ensure that the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance is not affected.

(Regarding the display of the performance image in the probability change state after the jackpot game ball state)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), as the display of the performance image in the probability change state after the jackpot game ball state, the image display based on the group preview performance is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, to display the performance image in the variable probability state after the jackpot game ball state, a whiteout effect that inserts a pure white screen during the reach effect, or a blackout effect that inserts a pure black screen may be used. You may use the effect of a pseudo-continuous notice that repeats the fluctuation and temporary stop of the decorative pattern multiple times, or you can make the visibility of the decorative pattern difficult by lighting or blinking the light guide plate provided on the front side of the game area. You may also use a production effect that makes you feel In any case, even if a special performance display is performed in a probability change state after a jackpot game ball state, it is sufficient to prevent the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance from being affected.

(About the production aiming for V)
In this embodiment, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is exemplified as the specific area, and as an effect of aiming for V, As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), an image pointing to the V-large prize opening was displayed. However, the image display in the Aim for V effect, which is the third guide display using image display related to a specific area, is not limited to this, and the image display in the Aim for V effect does not only point to the V grand prize opening itself, but also refers to the vicinity of the V grand prize opening. Alternatively, it may refer to a route leading to the V-sized winning opening, for example, a lid portion that opens and closes the V-sized winning opening located upstream of the V-sized winning opening.

(About the promotion of big right-handed hits)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-25 (c4) to FIG. 10-31 (c23), an arrow graphic image appears first, and then a text image of "Right hit!!" appears. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a text image of "Right hit!!" may appear first, and then a graphic image of an arrow may appear. In addition, the image display for promoting a large right-handed hit, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image, whereas the image display for promoting a small right-handed hit, which is an example of the second guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image. However, it may be composed of only arrow images or only character images.

(About advantageous conditions)
In this embodiment, the periods shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) to FIG. 10-47 (f4) (from t3 in FIG. 10-20 to t16 in FIG. ), but the example is not limited to this. For example, the period of "advantageous state" is the period excluding the fanfare performance period, that is, the period shown in Figure 10-39 (d3) to Figure 10-47 (f4) (from t4 in Figure 10-20 to Figure 10-21 (up to t16). Further, the fanfare performance and the big right hit promotion performance may be performed during a period in which a symbol in which a jackpot occurs is determined (symbol determination period).

(About the promotion of right-handed hitting in case of first hit)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot with one special figure, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the frame lamp is outputted in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect. However, this is not limited to this. For example, depending on the type of jackpot in one special drawing, the aspects of the big right-hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be made different. For example, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. is not output, and if the jackpot for one special drawing is a variable jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the big right-handed hit promotion performance. The sound may be output in different ways. In addition, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp will not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R will not emit sound in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect. You may also choose not to output it.

(About the right-handed promotion promotion in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special drawings)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect. Or, the frame lamp may not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, while the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the presentation that promotes a big right-handed hit, the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sound in a manner that corresponds to the presentation that promotes a large right-handed hit.

Further, depending on the type of consecutive winnings in the special figure 2 winnings, the aspect of the big right-hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be changed. For example, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. is not output, and if the consecutive winnings on 2 special drawings are a guaranteed strange jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the big right-handed promotion effect. Sound may be output in a corresponding manner. In addition, if the consecutive winning of the special figure 2 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect from speakers 8L and 8R. You may also choose not to output any sound. If the consecutive winnings on special drawings 2 are a guaranteed strange jackpot, unlike the first winning on special drawings 1, the frame lamp will appear in a special manner according to the big right-handed promotion effect (for example, gold, seven colors, etc.) ) may be turned on, or the speakers 8L and 8R may output sound in a special manner in accordance with the effect of promoting a big right-handed hit. Also, on the screen of the image display device 5, a big right-hitting promotion effect may be performed in a special manner (for example, a special character appears) that is different from the first hit for one special figure. .

(About the third information display)
In the present embodiment, as the third guide display using the image display regarding the specific area, an image pointing to the V big prize opening during the jackpot round in the variable probability jackpot is exemplified, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, as the third guidance display, an image may be displayed that prompts the player to fire the game ball at the second starting prize opening in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, or a variable winning ball may be displayed as the third guidance display. Displaying an image that prompts the player to shoot a game ball at the device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) may be applied. For example, after the ending performance is finished, the production control CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103 a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command (8D series command), a display result command, etc. Based on the reception of the specified command (8C series command) and the variable pattern specification command (81 series command), an arrow image pointing to the second starting winning hole and the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) is displayed along with the message "Aim!" ” may be displayed on the image display device 5. Even if such an image display is performed, the figures and character images in the small right-handed driving promotion effect may continue to be displayed.

(About time-saving state control by displaying losing symbols)
In each of the above-mentioned features and modifications, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always via the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A operates. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device It is also possible to shift to the time saving state (high base state) without operating 075F007A.

In addition, as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the losing symbols or may be part of the small winning symbols.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using special random numbers for the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols or jackpot symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for a small winning symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot lottery, or a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor to determine the number of time saving times.

In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol at all setting values. are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether using a special random number or another random number, the starting opening (first starting winning opening), It is sufficient to win at the time of winning in the second starting prize opening).

In addition, for winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and the small winning symbol is used in the time-saving symbol lottery. When using random numbers, the random number of a specific small winning symbol can be used as the winning value, and when the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the time saving symbol lottery, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time-saving symbol.

In addition, when drawing time-saving symbols using structures, when the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (time-saving number) is set so that it does not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Make it.

In addition, regarding winning when drawing a time-saving symbol, if a losing symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and if a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, no matter which random number the random number used for the lottery is, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state. . However, even if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time-saving state, the difference between resetting the time-saving number and not drawing a lottery may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed can be a plurality of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time saving granting conditions can be made different for each time saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Further, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings awarded may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

Alternatively, a lottery for deriving a time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-savings may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

Further, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small winning state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after hitting a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability low base state is controlled when the gaming hall opens. After the high probability low base state is finished after variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated. Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to be a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to characteristic part 075F, in order for the gaming state to be controlled to the time-saving state, the game state must go through the jackpot gaming state, so in order to encourage the player to play right in the time-saving state. The big right hit promotion performance and the small right hit promotion performance could be performed during the fanfare performance performed when a jackpot occurs. However, if a losing symbol as described above is used as a time-saving symbol, the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state without going through the jackpot gaming state. It is necessary to secure time for executing the large right-handed hit promotion performance and the small right-handed hit promotion performance from the time the symbol is displayed until the time-saving state is controlled. Therefore, a large right-handed hit promotion performance or a small right-handed hit promotion performance may be performed using the method described below.

For example, if the symbol confirmation time until the fluctuation of losing symbols that are not time-saving symbols stops is 0.5 seconds, the symbol confirmation time until the variation of losing symbols that are time-saving symbols stops is set to 30 seconds, which is longer than that. During this time, a time-saving fanfare effect may be executed to notify the start of the time-saving state control. In addition, in the display result specification command (8C series command), the CPU 103 uses, as a loss specification command, a display result specification command that indicates a normal loss variation to which no time saving is given, as well as a loss variation for time saving to which a time saving is given. It is sufficient to prepare a display result designation command indicating , and send the production control command to the production control CPU 120 by using both commands depending on whether or not it is a losing variation of the time saving symbol. Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the symbol confirmation time to 0.5 seconds if it receives a display result designation command indicating a normal loss variation, and sets the symbol confirmation time to 0.5 seconds if it receives a display result designation command indicating a time-saving loss variation. may be set to 30 seconds.

The production control CPU 120 displays a name image indicating the name of the time-saving state (for example, "Time-saving RUSH") on the image display device 5 during the 30 seconds of the symbol confirmation time, and also displays the time-saving state control from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output in a corresponding manner, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the time saving state control. A part of such a time-saving fanfare performance can be made to correspond to a part of a fanfare performance as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2).

As in the example shown in Figure 10-24 (c1), even before the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") created by this time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, an image congratulating the time-saving state (for example, "O ``Congratulations!!'' (character image) is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound congratulating the time-saving state is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a light is turned on to congratulate the time-saving state. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed to match the game effect lamp 9. In addition, as a small right-handed hitting promotion performance, a small right-handed hitting promotion performance is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (arrow indicating the right direction) and text (letters "right-handed hitting") is displayed in a small size at the upper right of the image display device 5, A sound that encourages right-handed hitting may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and right-handed hitting display section 075F055 may be changed to a mode (lighting) that encourages right-handed hitting. Note that the image in the small right-handed driving promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 and the lighting of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 start at the same timing and end at the same timing. That is, both encourage the player to play right-handed over the same period of time.

After that, similar to the example shown in Figure 10-24 (c2), the small right hit promotion performance is continued while the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") is displayed due to the time-saving fanfare performance, and then, after that, as shown in Figure 10-24 After turning off the game effect lamp 9 once as in the example shown in (c3), the big right hit is promoted during the time-saving fanfare performance as in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26). You may also perform a performance. During this time, the small right hit promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after executing the large right-handed hit promotion performance, the gaming state may be controlled to a time-saving state and the small right-handed hit promotion performance may be continued, similarly to the examples shown in FIGS. 10-48 to 10-50.

In this way, even if the time-saving state is controlled due to a losing symbol, by securing a symbol confirmation time that is longer than the symbol confirmation time for a losing symbol that is not a time-saving symbol, it is possible to make a big difference in the symbol confirmation time. It is possible to perform a hitting promotion performance and a small right hitting promotion performance.

In addition, in the case where the time-saving state is controlled due to a losing symbol, it is not limited to the one that uses the symbol confirmation time to execute the large right-handed promotion performance or the small right-handed promotion production as described above, but also the loss pattern that gives time savings. If there is a pending memory corresponding to a loss for playing the next game (variation) after the game in which the symbols have been determined, in the next game (variation), a time-saving fanfare performance is executed, as well as a large right hit promotion performance and a small right strike promotion performance. A hitting promotion performance may also be performed. Specifically, if the next game (fluctuation) after a game in which a losing pattern has been confirmed is a losing fluctuation, a time-saving fanfare performance is performed instead of executing a performance that makes you expect a hit, such as a reach performance or a preview performance. At the same time as this, a large right-handed hit promotion performance or a small right-handed hit promotion performance may be executed. However, if the next game (variation) after the game in which the losing symbols have been determined is a jackpot, then the fanfare performance as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) is executed, so the time-saving fanfare performance is not executed.

On the other hand, if there is no pending memory for playing the next game (variation) after the game in which the losing symbol with time saving is confirmed, the time saving fanfare performance is executed with the symbol not changing, and the big right hit promotion performance and the small A right-handed hitting promotion effect may be performed. However, in this case, in order to prevent the customer waiting demonstration performance from being executed and hindering the time-saving fanfare performance, the CPU 103 does not send the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. . Alternatively, even if the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) is received from the CPU 103, the performance control CPU 120 may execute the time-saving fanfare performance without executing the customer waiting demonstration performance.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to a characteristic part may be combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other features, as appropriate.

The embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiments and other embodiments described below, even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims are included.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
a firing means capable of firing a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
A guidance display that uses an image display to prompt the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. and a guide display means for
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
During a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, which is part of the start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous state, performing a second guidance display, and after completing the display of the name of the advantageous state, performing the first guidance display and continuing the second guidance display;
Continuing the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display in a period after the predetermined period;
Continuing the second guidance display in the special state after the control of the advantageous state has ended;
The second guidance display is not affected by a switching display of a background image (for example, switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state,
moreover,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance based on a performance control command),
The game control means is
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) that determines the advantageous state;
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) that determines that the advantageous state will be reached before the determination by the determining means;
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) capable of controlling to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state;
Information transmitting means capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information to the effect execution means (for example, effect control (such as a CPU 103 that sends commands);
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, execute the process of step 059AKS025),
The determination means is capable of determining that the special state is reached before the state control means controls the state to the special state (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS001),
The information transmitting means is capable of transmitting special information that can specify that the control is to be in the special state when the determining means determines that the special state is entered (for example, specifying a display result of "loss (time saving)" commands can be sent),
The performance execution means is
When receiving the determination result information, it is possible to execute a prefetch effect based on the determination result information (for example, it is possible to execute the process of step S161),
If the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the prefetch effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, if it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processing in step 059AKS084 and step S1304 ), and gaming machines.
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction urging the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. Further, it is possible to perform control according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In other words, during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, the instruction to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction is emphasized on the first guide display and the second guide display, and after that, the first guide display is By instructing to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction by taking over the second guidance display without taking over, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience by not emphasizing the instruction too much, and also to display the second guidance display first. and modestly instruct the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction, then have the player recognize the name of the advantageous state, and after having the player recognize it, use the first guidance display to firmly instruct the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction. In addition, when the performance execution means receives the determination result information after receiving the special information that can identify that the special state is controlled, the performance execution means limits the execution of the pre-read performance based on the determination result information. For example, the execution of the pre-read effect may actually reduce the interest in the game, such as the judgment result information determined after the special state is controlled being a judgment result that will result in the end of the special state. It is possible to avoid a situation where the performance deteriorates. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which, when installed in a gaming parlor, instructions on the direction in which the game ball should be launched in an advantageous state are easy to understand, and the interest in playing the game is less likely to decrease.

Further, the pre-read notice and the guidance display may be associated with each other. For example, when displaying a band-shaped pre-read notice over multiple variations as a pre-read notice, it may be moved in the left-right direction. In this case, if the player is in a game state where he or she should aim at the left side gaming area, it is preferable to move the advance notice band from right to left. By doing so, it becomes possible to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine in which the area to be fired can be specified from the display mode of the pre-read notice.

Furthermore, as another example of a game machine that can suitably execute an instruction that prompts the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction, and can also improve interest, there is a variable display and a variable display. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player when a specific display result is displayed as a display result,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance based on a performance control command),
The game control means is
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) that determines the advantageous state;
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) that determines that the advantageous state will be reached before the determination by the determining means;
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) capable of controlling to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state;
Information transmitting means capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information to the effect execution means (for example, effect control (such as a CPU 103 that sends commands);
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, execute the process of step 059AKS025),
The determination means is capable of determining that the special state is reached before the state control means controls the state to the special state (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS001),
The information transmitting means is capable of transmitting special information that can specify that the control is to be in the special state when the determining means determines that the special state is entered (for example, specifying a display result of "loss (time saving)" commands can be sent),
The performance execution means is
When receiving the determination result information, it is possible to execute a prefetch effect based on the determination result information (for example, it is possible to execute the process of step S161),
If the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the prefetch effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, if it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processing in step 059AKS084 and step S1304 ), and gaming machines. An example of the form of this gaming machine will be explained below as another example of the form.

(Explanation of features related to setting suggestion effects)
Hereinafter, the characteristic parts regarding the setting suggestion performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. In this characteristic part, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate while the variable display is being executed.

FIG. 11-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the production control process process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of decorative symbols, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of decorative symbols, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, a preview performance determination process is executed (step S202). The preview performance determination process allows the preview performance included in the advantageous suggestion performance to be determined.

After the preview performance determination process is executed, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The performance control pattern may include a special symbol variation performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various performance executions. For example, in response to a variation pattern indicated by a variation pattern designation command, one of a plurality of prepared special symbol variation performance control patterns is selected and set as the pattern to be used. Further, one of the plurality of prepared preview performance control patterns may be selected and set as the pattern to be used in accordance with the determination result of the preview performance determination process in step S202. In addition, the performance control pattern at the time of special figure change and the advance notice performance control pattern are not limited to those that set separate performance control patterns, but one performance control pattern that corresponds to the combination of execution settings of each performance. There may be.

When the production control pattern is determined in step S203, for example, the initial stage of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (production control timer setting section, etc.) corresponds to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. A value is set (step S204). Further, settings are made to start changing decorative patterns and the like on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S205). At this time, by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure variation production control pattern) determined in step S203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, It is sufficient to start the variation of the decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the pending display update setting at the time of starting the variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display area corresponding to the hold number "1" (leftmost display area) is erased (disappeared), and other hold numbers "2" to The pending display in the display area corresponding to "4" etc. is moved (shifted) to the left one by one. As a result, the pending display is shifted. The active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5 may display an active display corresponding to the pending display that has been erased (expired) in the pending display area. In addition, if the number of pending memories is "0" and the variable display starts immediately based on the occurrence of the first starting prize or the second starting winning, the active display area will not be updated without updating the pending display. Settings may be made to update the active display in . Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S207), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether a super reach effect is to be executed (step S221). Whether or not the super reach effect is executed can be determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example.

If the super reach effect is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol at the time of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is ended. When there is no reach, the variable display result will be "losing". At the time of normal reach, there are cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot" and cases where the variable display result is a "loss". When the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is not a ready-to-reach mode, a determined decorative symbol of a non-reachable combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined so that the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R have different (inconsistent) decorative symbols. At the time of a normal reach where the variable display result is "lose", the determined decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R have the same (matching) decorative symbol. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determined decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the jackpot. The final stopped symbol at the time of a jackpot is determined so that the same (matching) decorative symbol is displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the reach effect of super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol at the time of super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and cases where the variable display result becomes a "loss". At the time of super reach where the variable display result is "lose", the determined decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. At the time of a jackpot where the variable display result is a "jackpot", the final decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the jackpot.

At the time of super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "loss", the same (matching) decorative pattern will be displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. It will be stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern. The left and right decorative symbols that constitute such reach-loss combinations and jackpot combinations are also referred to as reach-to-reach symbols. Decorative patterns that can be determined as ready-to-reach symbols may include a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as seven types of decorative patterns corresponding to numbers 1 to 7, for example. The decorative pattern corresponding to the number may be only a presentation image showing the number, or may be a presentation image showing various characters in addition to the number. The ready-to-win symbol is determined to be one of a plurality of decorative symbols by referring to the ready-to-reach symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the ready-to-win symbol. Just do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the ready-to-win symbol may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the ready-to-win symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to decorative symbols that are ready-to-win symbols may vary depending on whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot." For example, when the variable display result is a "lose", the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is highest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As it becomes, the determination rate of the decorative pattern becomes lower, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of the decorative patterns corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As the number increases, the determination rate of the decorative pattern increases, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. With such a determination ratio setting, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the percentage of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state becomes the highest, and 6 , 5, 4, 3, and 2, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" when it is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and the percentage of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is low. Therefore, the variable display result when the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern becomes a "jackpot", and the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state becomes the lowest. In addition, in the ready-to-win symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols that are ready-to-win symbols may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "lose" or "jackpot". The number of judgment values assigned may be different for each decorative pattern that becomes a ready-to-win pattern, or the number of judgment values allocated may be the same regardless of the decorative pattern that becomes a ready-to-win pattern. Depending on the jackpot type, the determination ratio of decorative symbols that become reach symbols may be different.

Following step S223, it is determined whether the determined ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is ended. If the ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of a setting suggestion performance is determined depending on whether or not the setting suggestion performance is to be executed (step S225). Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared, based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. All you have to do is make it so. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance is determined to be either "no performance", which does not execute the setting suggestion performance, or "with performance", which executes the setting suggestion performance.

Based on the determination result in step S225, it is determined whether or not it has been determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed (with effect) (step S226). If it is determined that the setting suggestion performance is not executed (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is ended. If it is determined that "with effect" (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S227). The performance control CPU 120 receives the setting value notification command sent from the main board 11 when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and stores the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Thereby, in step S227, the setting value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, a setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and then the stop symbol determination process is ended. The setting suggestion pattern is selected from among a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating random values for setting suggestion pattern determination. It would be better if it were decided accordingly. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 11-3 shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance table data constituting the determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 11-3 as a setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of setting suggestion performance is determined by referring to the determination table TA01. In the decision table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance differs depending on whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of "with effect" for performing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is a "loss". With such setting of the determination ratio, when the setting suggestion performance is executed, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher than when the setting suggestion performance is not executed. In addition, in the setting suggestion performance execution determination table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot". .

FIG. 11-4(A) shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as the plurality of setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggestion contents depending on whether or not to change the symbol display color and the display color when changing. The symbol display color is the display color of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggested display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is the normal display color. Pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color and suggests that the level of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is low. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, indicating that the set value is 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the level of expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, indicating that 6 is the highest set value. In this manner, in the setting suggestion performance using the ready-to-reach symbols, it is possible to make suggestions regarding the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1, depending on whether the symbol display color has changed or not, and the symbol display color after the change.

FIG. 11-4(B) shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 11-4(B) as a setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, a setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11. In the determination table TA11, there are parts where the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When a setting suggestion performance using a ready-to-win symbol is executed, since the ready-to-win symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-0, the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low, and when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-1, the setting value is 2 or more. One thing is certain. Furthermore, when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-2, the expectation level is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-3, the setting value is the highest. It is confirmed that it is 6. In this way, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the reach mode includes a symbol display mode that gives a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a 7. It includes a pattern display mode that provides suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state, such as decorative patterns corresponding to numbers, and also provides suggestions regarding the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. If the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the symbol display color is changed after the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. Suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state will be continuously made, and suggestions regarding the setting values will be made.

The setting suggestion performance can be executed in different manners depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-1, so the symbol display color is not changed to copper color. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color is changed as the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. The difference is whether or not it is changed to copper color. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-3, so the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko game machine is 6 or not, the symbol display color is gold as the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. The difference is whether or not it is changed.

The setting suggestion effect is instead of changing the display color of a decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol, or in addition to changing the display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, the display of background images, outer frame images, and other arbitrary performance images, the output of audio from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, the operation of movable performance members, and the like, It may be possible to change the performance mode by an arbitrary performance device, such as a combination of some or all of them. Setting suggestion effects and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be performed using arbitrary data related to effect control, arbitrary data not related to effect control, or data that is a combination of these, predetermined for execution of the effect. It only needs to be executable when one or more conditional expressions are satisfied. The effect of changing the symbol display color is also referred to as a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns that can be determined only when controlled to a jackpot gaming state and patterns that can be determined even when not controlled to a jackpot gaming state. For example, patterns RE-0 and RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined rate even if the variable display result is a "loss", whereas patterns RE-2 and RE-3 can be determined with a variable display result. It may be possible to make a determination at a predetermined rate only when the result is a "jackpot", and to make it impossible to determine when the variable display result is a "loss". In this case, pattern RE-2 is determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas pattern RE-3 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at different rates depending on the set value.

FIG. 11-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the performance control process process as the variable display process. In the variable display production process, it is determined whether or not a special figure variation time, which is a variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, for example (step S241). If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The performance control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the performance control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, audio control board 13, lamp control board 14, etc. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, turned off, or blinked. It is only necessary that a predetermined performance device can perform various performances by operating a movable member for performance such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of these.

In the variable display performance process, it is determined whether or not it is a preview performance period (step S242). If it is the preview performance period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the preview performance (step S243). If it is not the preview performance period (step S242; No), or after performing the control in step S243, it is determined whether it is the ready-to-reach performance period (step S244). If it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S244; Yes), control is performed to execute the ready-to-win effect (step S245). By the control in step S245, when executing the ready-to-win effect after changing the symbol display color after the decorative symbols that become ready-to-win symbols are stopped and displayed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are made, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Suggestions regarding setting values can be made.

If it is not the ready-to-win performance period (step S244; No), or after performing the control in step S245, it is determined whether or not it is the change performance period (step S246). The change performance period may be predetermined as an execution period of a performance that changes the symbol display color when a setting suggestion performance using a ready-to-win symbol is executed. If it is the change performance period (step S246; Yes), control is performed to execute the change performance (step S247). If it is not the change performance period (step S246; No), or after the control in step S247 is performed, the decorative pattern may be changed in other ways based on the settings in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, for example. After performing control to execute the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect processing during the variable display is ended.

The change performance period may be set to different lengths of time depending on the performance mode of the change performance. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period, which is longer than the first period, and pattern RE- In the case of pattern 2, the change effect period may be set to a third period which is longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest period, the fourth period. Generally, when a performance that informs an advantageous situation (advantageous performance) is executed, a player takes an image or video of that performance with a mobile terminal owned by the player, and posts it on SNS (Social Media). They tend to post on membership-based websites such as Networking Service) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, a problem arises in that an appropriate photographing time cannot be secured. On the other hand, effects that are often performed even in unfavorable situations (unfavorable effects) do not stimulate the desire to take pictures, so if the unfavorable effects are carried out for a long time, they may end up making players feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period of disadvantageous effects is made shorter than that of advantageous effects to reduce discomfort. Thereby, when a performance advantageous to the player is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing it, and it is also possible to secure time for taking pictures. Further, by securing the shooting time, the captured images and videos can be made public by the players on the Internet, and the public's interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, the photos taken at which pachinko machine 1 in which gaming parlor are made public, and from the perspective of the gaming parlor, the player is advertising the gaming parlor. become. In this way, by securing the photographing time when a suggestion regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 is made, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the players but also to the game parlor side.

If the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S249; No), the variable display performance process is ended and the process waits. In addition, after the variable display time has elapsed, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving a symbol confirmation command, a predetermined error process will be executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may also do so. When the symbol confirmation command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (confirmed ornamental symbol) that will be the display result in the variable display of decorative symbols (step S250). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as a waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step S251). Further, after updating the value of the production process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S252), the variable display production process is ended.

FIG. 11-6 shows an example of execution of setting suggestion effect. FIG. 11-6(A) shows an example of performance execution HD101 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a ready-to-win mode and a ready-to-win is achieved. Decorative symbols corresponding to the number 7 are stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, whereby a reach is established and a reach effect of normal reach is executed. FIG. 11-6(B) shows a performance execution example HD102 in which the reach performance of normal reach progresses to the reach performance of super reach. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, and the effect image in the reach effect of super reach is displayed. FIG. 11-6(C) shows a performance execution example HD 103 in which a change performance that is a setting suggestion performance is executed. A production display corresponding to the change production is displayed superimposed on the reach-to-reach symbol that is being stopped and displayed. Furthermore, a suggestion to change the symbol display color is made by displaying an effect image that notifies the user of a message such as "Change symbol display color!!".

FIG. 11-6 (D1) shows a performance execution example HD111 in which the symbol display color does not change due to pattern RE-0. FIG. 11-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the symbol display color changes to copper color by pattern RE-1. FIG. 11-6 (D3) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to silver according to pattern RE-2. FIG. 11-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to gold according to pattern RE-3. In the performance execution example HD111, the display color of the ready-to-win symbol does not change due to the pattern RE-0, and remains unchanged at the normal display color of red. In this way, a failed performance (falsified performance) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the level of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is low. In the effect execution example HD112, the display color of the ready-to-reach symbol is changed to copper color by pattern RE-1, thereby indicating that the set value is 2 or more. In the performance execution example HD113, the display color of the ready-to-win symbol is changed to silver by pattern RE-2, which suggests that the level of expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. In the effect execution example HD114, the display color of the ready-to-reach symbol is changed to gold by pattern RE-3, thereby suggesting that 6, which is the highest set value, is confirmed.

Setting suggestion effects include not only changing effects that can change the display color of the reach symbols, but also suggesting the expected level of jackpot through arbitrary effects such as pseudo-continuous effects and look-ahead preview effects, as well as setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may also be possible to make suggestions regarding. During execution of the variable display, a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. When executing any performance, there are two cases in which suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are continuously made after making suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, and cases in which suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are continuously made and the pachinko player It may also include a case where suggestions regarding setting values of the gaming machine 1 are made. When executing an arbitrary performance, there are two cases in which the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then the suggestion ends, and another case in which the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continued and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is concerned. It may also include a case where a suggestion is made.

The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether or not setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the effect is made so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed by giving a suggestion based on the effect mode of the pattern that is determined at a high rate. It is possible to diversify the game and improve the interest in the game.

While the variable display is being executed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be made, but suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "Jackpot", the pachinko game machine A suggestion regarding the setting value of 1 may be made. There may be cases where a suggestion regarding the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made without making any suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of part or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or together with some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions are made regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and is different from the jackpot gaming state. It may be something. For example, it may provide a suggestion regarding a variable probability state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a suggestion may be made depending on whether or not to be controlled regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is awarded.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 059AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature section 059AK of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 12-1 to 12-35. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature section 059AK of this embodiment, the time saving control is performed not only after the jackpot game state but also when the time saving symbols are stopped and displayed as a variable display result (the time saving state is entered). As for the display result of the special figure game, although the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in both the normal state and the time-saving state, in the time-saving state, even if the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed, time-saving control is not newly performed. On the other hand, regarding the decorative symbols, different symbols are stopped and displayed in the normal state and in the time saving state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 059AK having such features will be described below. Note that the description of the same parts as those explained in the basic explanation above will be omitted.

FIG. 12-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, and shows the arrangement layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and ordinary symbols, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation. In addition, the "variable display" of the special design includes one in which multiple LEDs are turned on or flashed in sequence, and a predetermined lighting combination of LEDs may be displayed as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display). included.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When the game ball enters the first starting prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81. The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory. In addition, in the time saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole is executed, and the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved. In the time-saving state, if a so-called right-handed hit is performed in which the game ball is fired into the gaming area on the right side for the player so as to win the game ball into the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. good.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), a predetermined ball rest is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82, and forms a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. In the jackpot game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the jackpot game state, a so-called right-handed hit may be performed in which the game ball is fired into the right-hand gaming area so that the game ball enters the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is turned into a big winning hole. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 12-1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 12-1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 12-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of FIG. When starting the starting winning prize determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is on ( Step S1201). When it is determined that the first starting port switch 22A is on (step S2101; Yes), for example, it is determined that the first starting port switch 22A is on in the switch processing, the CPU 103 turns on the first special symbol. It is determined whether the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of pending memories of the used special figure game, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") (step S1202). At this time, the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol which is the stored value of the first special symbol pending memory number counter (counter that counts the first special symbol pending memory number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (gaming control counter setting section, etc.). It is only necessary that the first special figure pending memory number can be specified by reading the special figure pending memory number count value. If it is determined in step S1202 that the first special symbol pending storage number is not the upper limit value (step S1202; No), the CPU 103 stores the starting opening buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (gaming control buffer setting section, etc.) The starting port buffer value, which is the value, is set to "1" (step S1203).

If it is determined in step S1201 that the first starting port switch 22A is off (step S1201; No), or if it is determined in step S1202 that the number of stored first special symbols has reached the upper limit (step S1202; If Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second starting hole switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B is on (step S1204). When it is determined that the second starting port switch 22B is on (step S1204; Yes), for example, the second starting port switch 22B is determined to be on in the switch processing, the CPU 103 switches the second special symbol to It is determined whether the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of pending memories of the used special figure game, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") (step S1205). At this time, the CPU 103 selects a second special symbol, which is a stored value of a second special symbol pending storage number counter (a counter that counts the number of second special symbol pending memories) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting section, etc.). It is only necessary that the second special figure pending memory number can be specified by reading the special figure pending memory number count value. When it is determined in step S1205 that the second special symbol pending storage number is not the upper limit value (step S1205; No), the CPU 103 sets the starting opening buffer value to "2" (step S1206). If it is determined that the second starting port switch 22B is not on (step S1204; No) or if it is determined that the second special symbol reservation memory number is the upper limit value (step S1205; Yes), the CPU 103: The starting prize determination process ends.

After executing either the process of step S1203 or S1206, the CPU 103 updates the special symbol pending storage number count value according to the starting opening buffer value to add 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the first special figure pending memory number count value is added by 1, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second special figure pending memory number count value is added. Add 1. In this way, the first special figure pending memory number count value increases by 1 when the game ball enters the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. (increment). In addition, the second special figure pending storage number count value increases by 1 when the game ball enters the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. (increment). At this time, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (gaming control counter setting section, etc.), is updated to add 1 (step S1208).

After executing the process of step S1208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined gaming random number corresponding to the occurrence of the starting prize (step S1209). As an example, in the process of step S1209, a random number for determining the special figure display result is selected from numerical data updated by a random counter provided in the random number circuit 104 or a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (gaming control counter setting section, etc.). Numerical data indicating a numerical value MR1, a random numerical value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and a random numerical value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored as pending data by being set at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure pending storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (step S1210). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", pending data is set in the first special figure pending storage section. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the pending data is set in the second special figure pending storage section. In addition, at this time, when the reservation data is set in the first special symbol reservation storage section, the CPU 103 can control the first reservation display 25A to specify the number of first special symbol reservation memories added by one. The first hold display 25A may display the following information (for example, the number of LEDs lit may be increased by one). In addition, when the reservation data is set in the second special figure reservation storage section, the CPU 103 controls the second reservation display 25B to display a display that can specify the second special figure reservation memory number that has been added by one. It is also possible to have the second hold indicator 25B do this (for example, increase the number of LEDs lit by one).

The first special figure holding storage unit stores the special figure game (first special Stores pending data of a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the pattern display device 4A. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the holding number with the winning order (the detecting order of game balls) to the first starting prize opening, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., are stored as pending data, and the number of stored data is stored. is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage section indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result in this special figure game. (Special figure display result) to make it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to a jackpot gaming state, and whether or not the variable display mode of decorative symbols will be a specific mode (for example, reach effect), etc. It becomes memory information.

In addition, the reservation number of the 1st special figure reservation memory|storage part and the display position of a reservation display pattern (controlled by the performance control board 12 side) fundamentally correspond. Therefore, when the reservation data is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section, the reservation display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the reservation number associated with this reservation data. For example, when pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "1", a pending display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the first pending display section 5HL. For example, when pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "2", the pending display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the first pending display section 5HL. do.

The second special figure holding storage unit stores the special figure game (second Stores the pending data of the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 4B. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the holding number with the winning order (the detecting order of game balls) to the second starting prize opening, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition due to the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., are set as pending data, and the number is It is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage section indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result in this special figure game. (Special figure display result) to make it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to a jackpot gaming state, and whether or not the variable display mode of decorative symbols will be a specific mode (for example, reach effect), etc. It becomes memory information.

In addition, the reservation number of the second special figure reservation storage section and the display position of the reservation display symbol (controlled on the production control board 12 side) basically correspond. Therefore, when the reservation data is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage section, the reservation display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the reservation number associated with this reservation data. For example, when pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "1", a pending display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the second pending display section 5HR. For example, when pending data is newly stored in association with the pending number "2", the pending display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the second pending display section 5HR. do.

After executing the process of step S1210, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a pre-prepared starting opening winning designation command to the production control board 12 (step S1211). Thereafter, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a pre-prepared pending storage number notification command to the production control board 12 (step S1212).

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a prize winning random number determination process (step S1213). As mentioned above, the random number value determination process at the time of winning is a process for determining the time of starting winning, and based on the random numbers MR1 and MR3 of the random numbers MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S1209, the random number value determination process is This is a process of determining whether the variable display result of the variable display to be executed is a "big hit" or "small win" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 11-5). After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the starting port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S1214). At this time, if it is determined that the starting port buffer value is "2" (step S1214; "2"), the CPU 103 clears the starting port buffer, initializes its stored value to "0", and then ( Step S1215), the starting prize winning determination process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the starting port buffer value is "1" (step S1214; "1"), the CPU 103 clears the starting port buffer and initializes its stored value to "0". From there (step S1216), the process advances to step S1204. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 12-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S1213 of FIG. 12-2 as the winning random value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing is performed so that the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is treated as a "big hit" or "small win" and a jackpot game is played. A decision is made as to whether to control the state or the small winning game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern corresponding to the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, in the winning random value determination process, the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), and the winning timing is extracted at this timing. The random number value (random number value extracted in the process of step S1209) is used to determine whether the variable display result of the variable display to be executed is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the variable display of the decorative pattern. It determines which fluctuation pattern will occur (so-called "look ahead"). As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting prize opening starts (before the special symbol game starting conditions are established), the special symbol display result will become a "jackpot" or It is predicted in advance that there will be a "small hit" and that the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be changed to a predetermined display mode, and based on this pre-reading result, the performance control CPU 120 etc. on the performance control board 12 side will suspend the display. Display mode etc. can be determined.

In the winning time random value determination process shown in FIG. ) and the state of the variable probability flag (a flag that is turned on when the probability variable state is present), the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S351). The CPU 103 determines whether the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a jackpot gaming state by checking the value of the special pattern process flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (gaming control flag control unit, etc.). Identify. For example, when the value of the special figure process flag is "4" to "7", it is sufficient to specify that the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a jackpot gaming state.

Following the process of step S351, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the specified gaming state is a jackpot game state (step S352). If it is determined that the jackpot has not been hit (step S352; No), the CPU 103 further determines whether or not the high base is being executed in which the high opening control accompanying the time saving control is being performed in the variable probability state or the time saving state (step S353). ). If it is determined that the base is high (step S353; Yes), or if it is determined that the jackpot is hit in the process of step S352 (step S352; Yes), the CPU 103 determines that the starting opening buffer value is "2". It is determined whether there is one (step S354). If it is determined that the starting opening buffer value is not "2" (step S354; No), the CPU 103 performs settings for restricting winning determination (step S356).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step S354; Yes), or if it is determined that the high base is not in the process of step S353 (step S353; No), the CPU 103 From the 1st special figure display result determination table or the 2nd special figure display result determination table, the special figure used to determine the special figure display result is determined in accordance with the starting opening buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current gaming state. A diagram display result determination table is selected (step S355).

Following the process of step S355, the CPU 103 determines whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S357). For example, the CPU 103 compares each determined value included in the jackpot determining range point by point with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by the process of step S1209 shown in FIG. 12-2. It may be determined whether there is a determined value that matches the random value MR1. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the determined value included in the jackpot determination range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it may be determined whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot" (jackpot start determination) can.

In addition, in the process of step S357, for example, the CPU 103 may read the random number value MR1 stored in the special figure reservation storage unit in step S1210, and perform the above determination using the read random number value MR1. Further, the CPU 103 stores the random number MR1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (an area other than the special map reservation storage section) or the storage area of the CPU 103 separately from step S1210, and makes the above judgment based on the held random number. You may do so. This also applies to the random number value MR3, which will be described later. In this way, the random number value used in the winning random number value determination process does not have to be the random number value stored in the special figure reservation storage section.

If it is determined in the process of step S357 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S357; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination (step S358). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from the jackpot type determination table. The CPU 103 determines which of the plurality of jackpot types will be determined as the jackpot type by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data.

Following the process of step S358, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 12-11), which will be described later, prepared by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance, and sets it as the table to be used (step S358). S359). The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot", and each fluctuation pattern is assigned a determined value to be compared with the random value MR3.

If it is determined in the process of step S357 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step S357; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step S360). The CPU 103 executes the same process as in the case of the jackpot determination range for the determined value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table selected in the process of step S305. , it is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range.

If it is determined that it is within the small hit determination range (step S360; Yes), the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (see FIG. 12-11(B)) is selected and set in the usage table (step S362). The small hit fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a "small win", and each fluctuation pattern is assigned a determined value that is compared with the random value MR3. .

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the small hit determination range (step S360; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined time saving determination range (step S360; No). 059AKS001). The CPU 103 executes the same process as in the case of the jackpot determination range regarding the determined value assigned to the special figure display result of "loss (time saving)" in the special figure display result determination table selected in the process of step S355. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the time saving determination range. In addition, the special symbol display result of "Loss (time saving)" refers to the variable display result in which the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed, and the time saving control is performed from the variable display performed after the stop display, although it is "Loss". show.

If it is determined that it is within the time saving determination range (step 059AKS001; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the time saving type based on the random number MR2 (step 059AKS002). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , select table data for time saving type determination from the time saving type determination table shown in FIG. 12-7. The CPU 103 determines which of the plurality of time-saving types is determined as the time-saving type by referring to the selected table data for determining the time-saving type.

Following the process of step 059AKS002, the CPU 103 stores in advance a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in a loss fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIGS. 12-12 (A) and (D)) when the time saving start flag is turned on, which will be described later. is selected and set in the usage table (step 059AKS002A). The loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is on is a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the variable display in which the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, although the variable display result is "loss", and each fluctuation pattern has a random value MR3. A decision value is assigned that is compared with. In step 059AKS002A, depending on the time saving type, either the time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-12(A) or the time saving start flag on time loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-12(D) is selected. do it.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the time saving determination range (step 059 AKS001; No), the time saving start flag off failure fluctuation pattern determination table (Figure 12-12 ( B)) is selected and set in the usage table (step 059AKS002B).

After executing any one of step S309, step S312, step 059AKS002A, and step 059AKS002B, the CPU 103 sets the random value MR3 in the usage table based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted in step S1209. Refer to any of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is on, or loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is off, and select the determined value that matches the random value MR3. The assigned variation pattern is determined (step S363). The CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern by, for example, comparing each determined value assigned to each fluctuation pattern and the random number value MR3 one by one to determine whether there is a determined value that matches the random number value MR3. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the determined value assigned to each fluctuation pattern may be set, and the CPU 103 selects the random value MR3 and the minimum determined value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by comparing the maximum value and the maximum value.

After executing either of the processes in steps S356 and S363, the CPU 103 performs transmission settings for a start-up winning command whose contents are in accordance with the determination results in steps S358, step 059AKS002, and step S363 (step S364), and The numerical value judgment process ends. The starting winning command is composed of a starting opening winning designation command, a special figure pending memory number designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern determination result designation command. When the starting opening buffer value is "1", the starting winning commands are the 1st starting opening winning designation command, the 1st special figure pending memory number specification command, the symbol judgment result specification command, and the fluctuation pattern judgment result specification. Configure commands and sending settings. When the starting opening buffer value is "2", the starting winning commands are the 2nd starting opening winning designation command, the 2nd special figure pending storage number designation command, the symbol judgment result specification command, and the fluctuation pattern judgment result specification. Configure commands and sending settings. The command set for transmission is transmitted in command control processing.

The 1st special figure pending memory number designation command and the 2nd special figure pending memory number designation command to be sent are the commands that specify the current 1st special figure pending memory number and 2nd special figure pending memory number (the number of memory (command including the corresponding EXT data), and the specified special figure pending memory number may be specified by the count value of the first special figure pending memory number counter and the second special figure pending memory number counter. The symbol designation command to be sent is a command that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is a "jackpot" ("jackpot") when the determination result of step S357 is within the jackpot determination range (step S357; Yes). If the determination result in step S357 is within the small hit determination range (step S360; Yes), a command (including the corresponding EXT data) that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is a "small hit" (" When the judgment result of step 059AKS001 is within the time saving determination range (step 059AKS001; Yes), the judgment result of the variable display result is ``loss (time saving)''. When the specified command (a command including EXT data corresponding to "loss (time saving)") is determined, and the judgment result of step 059AKS001 is outside the time saving determination range (step S360; No), the judgment result of the variable display result is "loss". A command that specifies a certain thing (a command including EXT data corresponding to a "lose") is used, and when the determination result in step S354 is that the starting opening buffer value = 1 (step S354; No), a determination is made at the time of starting winning. The command may be a command that specifies "no determination" (a command including EXT data corresponding to "no determination"). The fluctuation pattern determination result designation command to be sent is a command that designates the fluctuation pattern that is the determination result determined in step S363 (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern that is the determination result), and the determination result in step S354 is a command that specifies the fluctuation pattern that is the determination result determined in step S363. When the starting opening buffer value = 1 (step S354; No), a command (command including EXT data corresponding to "no judgment") specifying that there is no judgment at the time of starting winning and "no judgment" is executed. do it.

In the winning random number value determination process, as described above, for the variable display corresponding to the random numbers MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S1209 this time, the variable display result of the variable display (special figure game) is "big hit" or "small win". It is determined whether there will be a "win" or "loss (time saving)" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 12-10), and so-called pre-reading is performed. In addition, in this process, the determination is made based on the current gaming state and not the gaming state when the variable display is actually executed, so the determination is not necessarily accurate, but there is a certain degree of accuracy. Variable display results and fluctuation patterns can be predicted with precision. In addition, in the winning time random number determination process, based on whether it is determined that the jackpot is being won in the process of step S352 or that the time saving control is being performed in the process of step S353, the start is started by the process of step S354. It is determined whether the mouth buffer value is "2". At this time, if the starting opening buffer value is "1" and not "2", the process proceeds to step S364 without executing the processing such as step S355, and the determination of starting winning is not made. In this way, when the high opening control associated with the time saving control is performed or when the jackpot game state is in effect, each of the above-mentioned points is determined based on the occurrence of a starting prize (first starting winning) due to the game ball entering the first starting winning opening. Limit so that no judgment is made. As a result, when the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, when the time saving control is in progress or the jackpot game state is in progress, the first starting prize is The soundness of the game can be ensured by restricting the execution of prefetching based on .

FIG. 12-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 12-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step S1231). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step S1231, the second pending storage number count value stored in the RAM 102 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation memory number is other than "0" in step S1231 (step S1231; No), the reservation stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B corresponding to the reservation number "1" As data, numerical data indicating a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S1232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step S1232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second pending memory count value by 1, the second special figure pending memory number is updated to subtract 1, and the second special figure pending memory count value is updated by subtracting 1. In the unit 151B, the pending data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the pending number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the pending numbers "2" to "4") are shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step S1233). Further, in the process of step S1233, the total pending storage count value stored in the total pending storage counter in the RAM 102 may be updated by subtracting one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S1234).

When the second special figure pending memory number is "0" in step S1231 (step S1231; Yes), it is determined whether the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step S1235). The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S1235, the first pending memory count value stored in the first pending memory counter in the RAM 102 may be read out, and it may be determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step S1235 is executed when it is determined in step S1231 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

It should be noted that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening may be executed. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings have occurred, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if it could be determined.

When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step S1235 (step S235; No), the reservation stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A corresponding to the reservation number "1" As data, numerical data indicating a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S1236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step S1236, for example, by subtracting and updating the first pending memory count value by 1, the first special figure pending memory number is updated to subtract 1, and the first special figure pending memory count value is updated by subtracting 1. In the unit 151A, the pending data indicated by the random numbers MR1 and MR2 stored in the entries lower than the pending number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the pending numbers "2" to "4") are shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step S1237). Further, in the process of step S1237, the total pending storage count value stored in the total pending storage counter in the RAM 102 may be updated by subtracting one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S1238).

After executing either of the processes in steps S1234 and S1238, the variable display result is used as a table to be used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or a "loss". A special figure display result determination table corresponding to the special figure designation buffer value is selected and set (step S1239). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-5(A) is set in the use table. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-5(B) is set in the use table. Further, the CPU 103 may select the table data for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the current gaming state.

The first special symbol display result determination table determines the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not to control to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot", whether to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win", and whether to control the variable display result to a "loss (time saving)" and subsequent changes. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the display to the time saving state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The second special symbol display result determination table determines the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Whether or not to control to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot", whether to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win", and whether to control the variable display result to a "loss (time saving)" and subsequent changes. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the display to the time saving state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is determined depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determination is assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "small hit", "loss (time saving)", and "miss". In the second special figure display result determination table, a random value for determining the special figure display result is determined depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with MR1 is assigned to the special figure display results of "Jackpot", "Lose (time saving)", and "Lose".

In the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the table data indicating the determined value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is based on the special figure display result as a "jackpot". This is decision data that is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state, or whether to treat the special figure display result as a "loss (time-saving)" and control from the next variable display to a time-saving state. In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), it is higher than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). A large number of determined values are assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, compared to the normal state or time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game is played. If the state is controlled, the probability of a decision will be increased. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the variable probability state, the jackpot is more likely to be achieved than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. Determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of determining to control to the gaming state is high. Also, between the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the second special figure display result determination table treats the special figure display result as a "loss (time saving)" and starts from the next variable display. Determination data is assigned so that the probability of determining that the time-saving state is controlled is increased. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state, the rate of the special figure display result being "loss (time saving)" is high.

In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table, a determined value in a predetermined range (a value in the range of "30000" to "30350") is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, no determination value is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". With such settings, the variable display result is determined based on the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A; The special pattern display result is determined based on the satisfaction of the second start condition for starting the special pattern game using the second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B. The ratio determined to be controlled into a small win gaming state as a "small win" can be varied.

In particular, in a special pattern game using the second special pattern, the special pattern display result is not determined to be a "small win" and is controlled to a small win game state, so for example, the time saving state (low probability high base state) or probability change In a game state where a game ball easily enters the second starting prize opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B, such as a high-accuracy, high-base state, the frequent occurrence of a small winning game state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball is prevented. By avoiding this, it is possible to prevent a decline in game interest due to a prolongation of the game. In addition, also in the second special figure display result determination table, a determination value in a predetermined range different from the setting in the first special figure display result determination table may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". . For example, in the second special figure display result determination table, a smaller determination value than in the first special figure display result determination table may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small win". In this way, when the state is in a high base state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state, the ratio of control to the small winning gaming state is lower than when it is in a low base state such as a normal state or a variable probability state with no time saving. good. Alternatively, regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result may be determined by referring to a common special figure display result determination table.

Following the process of step S1239 shown in FIG. 12-4, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is changed to "big hit", "small hit", "missing" ( Compare the special figure display results with the determined value assigned to each special figure display result of ``Save time)'' and ``Loss'' to determine whether the special figure display result is ``Jackpot'', ``Small hit'', ``Loss (time saver)'' or ``Loss''. (Step S1240).

Since the table data for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the current gaming state is selected in step S1239, in the process of step S1240, the gaming state when the variable display such as the special figure game is started is a probability variable state. Depending on whether or not, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" using different determining data. For example, if the gaming state when a variable display such as a special figure game is started is the normal state or the time saving state, the gaming state is the normal state in the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table. Alternatively, the table data corresponding to the time saving state is selected as the normal determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 is determined with reference to this. On the other hand, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state when a variable display such as a special figure game is started, the gaming state is in the variable probability state in the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table. The table data corresponding to the case is selected as the special determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 is determined by referring to this.

After determining the special figure display result in step S1240, it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" (step S1241). If it is determined that it is a "jackpot" (step S1241; Yes), the jackpot flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step S1242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-6 is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step S1243).

The jackpot type determination table is for determining the jackpot type to be one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table referenced by In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (fluctuation) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the second special symbol). Depending on whether the game is a special pattern game using the symbol display device 4B, the number (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot may be of multiple types such as "non-probable", "probable", or "suddenly". is assigned to the jackpot type.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table, the assignment of the determined value to the jackpot type of "suddenly certain" differs depending on whether the fluctuating special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. In other words, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the determined value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "82" to "99") is assigned to the jackpot type of "suddenly certain", while the variable special figure When is the second special figure, no determined value is assigned to the jackpot type of "suddenly certain". With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Accordingly, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be "suddenly certain" can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "suddenly certain" and the short-term opening jackpot state is not determined. In the game state where the game ball easily enters the second starting prize opening formed by 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of a short-term open jackpot state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decline in game interest due to a prolongation of the game. .

In addition, even if the variable special figure is the second special figure, a determined value in a predetermined range that is different from the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "suddenly certain". good. For example, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a smaller determination value may be assigned to the "suddenly certain" jackpot type than when the variable special figure is the first special figure. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the fluctuating special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure.

By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in step S1243 shown in FIG. 12-4, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the fluctuation random number buffer is changed to "non-probable variable", The jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types depending on which of the determined values assigned to each jackpot type of "probable change" and "suddenly certain" matches (step S1244).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step S1244, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a variable probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. Whether to control or not is determined before the fixed special symbol as a variable display result is derived. The determined jackpot type is stored, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value in a jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102 (step S1245), corresponding to the jackpot type thus determined. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variation", the jackpot type buffer value may be set to "0", if it is "probable variation", it may be set to "1", and if it is "probable", it may be set to "2".

If it is determined in step S1241 that it is not a "big hit" (step S1241; No), it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step S1246). When it is determined that it is a "small win" (step S1246; Yes), the small win flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state (step S1247).

If it is determined in step S1246 that it is not a "small hit" (step S1246; No), the special figure display result is a "loss (time saving)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "time saving"). It is determined whether there is one (Step 059AKS003). If it is determined that the time saving type is "time saving" (step 059 AKS003; Yes), the CPU 103 uses the time saving type determination shown in FIG. Similar to the case where a table is selected and set and the jackpot type is determined, the time saving type is determined based on the random value MR2 (step 059AKS004).

The time-saving type determination table shown in FIG. 12-7 is based on MR2, which is the same random value as the random number for determining the jackpot type, when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "loss (time-saving)" and the time-saving state is controlled. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of time saving types. In the time saving type determination table, whether the special symbol variablely displayed (varied) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the second special symbol) The numerical value (determined value) compared with the random number MR2 for determining the time saving type can be used for multiple types of jackpots such as "time saving A" to "time saving D" is assigned to. As shown in the figure, in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, when the special symbol that is variablely displayed (varied) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol, "time saving A" or "time saving B" is displayed. When the special symbol variablely displayed (fluctuated) in the special symbol game is the second special symbol, the time-saver type is determined to be “time-saver C” or “time-saver D”. "Time saving A" and "Time saving C" are time saving types that are controlled to be in a time saving state while the special symbol game is played 100 times. "Time saving B" is a time saving type that is controlled to be in a time saving state while the special symbol game is played 50 times. "Time saving D" is a time saving type that is controlled to be in a time saving state while the special figure game is played 20 times.

After executing the process of step 059AKS004 in FIG. 12-4, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving type buffer value, which is the value stored in the time-saving type buffer provided in the RAM 102, for example, corresponding to the time-saving type determined in step 059AKS004. (Step 059AKS005), the determined time saving type is stored. As an example, if the time-saving type is "Time-saving A", the time-saving type buffer value is set to "0", if "Time-saving B", it is set to "1", if "Time-saving C", it is set to "2", and "Time-saving D". ”, then “3” is sufficient.

After executing the process of step 059AKS005, the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step 059AKS006). The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that time-saving control is currently in progress (sometimes simply referred to as a time-saving flag). If the time saving flag is in the off state (step 059AKS006; No), the time saving start flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step 059AKS006A). The time saving start flag is a flag indicating that time saving control is to be started from the next special figure game.

If it is determined in step 059AKS003 that it is not a "loss (time saving)" (step 059AKS003; No), or if it is determined that the time saving flag is on in step 059AKS006 (step 059AKS006; Yes), After executing any of the processes of S1245, S1247, and step 059AKS006A, the predetermined result of whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state or small winning gaming state, or whether to control to the time saving state next time, and furthermore, the jackpot A confirmed special symbol is set in accordance with the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the gaming state and the determination result of the time saving type in the case of the time saving state (step S1248). As an example, if it is determined in step 059AKS003 that the special pattern display result is not a "loss (time saving)", the losing pattern is A special symbol showing a "-" symbol is set as a confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 059AKS003 that the special symbol display result is "lose (time-saving)", the time-saving symbol "1", " Any of the special symbols showing the numbers ``4'', ``6'', and ``8'' is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, in accordance with the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving A", a special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, in accordance with the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving B", a special symbol showing the number "4" is set as a confirmed special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving C", a special symbol showing the number "6" is set as a confirmed special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the time saving type is "time saving D", a special symbol showing the number "8" is set as a confirmed special symbol.

If it is determined in step S1246 that the special pattern display result is a "small hit", the special pattern display result will be a "small win" corresponding to the pre-determined result that the special pattern display result will be a "small win". A special symbol showing the number ``2'' is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" in step S1241, the jackpot symbols "3", "5", and "7" are determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type in step S1244. ” is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, in accordance with the determination result that the jackpot type is "non-probable variable", a special symbol showing the number "3" which is a normal jackpot symbol among the normal open round jackpot symbols is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, in accordance with the determination result of setting the jackpot type as "probable variable", a special symbol showing the number "7", which is a probability variable jackpot symbol among the normal open round jackpot symbols, is set as a fixed special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the jackpot type is "suddenly certain", a special symbol showing the number "5", which is a short-term open jackpot symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step S1248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S1249), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. . If the number of pending memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step S1235 (step S1235; Yes), after performing predetermined demo display settings (step S1250), the special symbol End normal processing. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if it has been sent, the demo display setting is ended. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

FIG. 12-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 shown in FIG. When the fluctuation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is on (step S261). If it is determined that the jackpot flag is in the ON state (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 refers to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. A variation pattern corresponding to the time is determined (step S262).

FIG. 12-10 shows an example of a variation pattern in the characteristic portion 059AK of this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "Lose (time saving)" and "Lose", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "Non-reach" and "Reach", respectively. Correspondingly, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lose" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), and the variable display pattern is called a "non-reach variation pattern". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "Lose (time saving)" or "Lose" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "Reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). . Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern. In addition, in the characteristic part 059AK, there is a special variation pattern (the variation pattern of PB2-4 shown in the figure) for loss (time saving), which is selected only when the variable display result is "loss (time saving)", and a variable display There is a fluctuating pattern of time-saving fakes that incites the result to be a "lose" (time-saving), but which results in a "lose". For example, the variable display result is "Loss (time saving)", and the dedicated variation pattern for losing (time saving) is selected only when the variable display result is "Loss (time saving)", such as the variation pattern of Super Reach D. There may be a variation pattern of the type of super reach effect that is executed only when ``.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach effect is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach effect is executed. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "small win" is referred to as a small win variation pattern. The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the small hit fluctuation pattern are included in the winning fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "small win." The super reach variation pattern includes reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C, regardless of whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "loss."

The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 12-11 (A) changes the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type when it is decided (predetermined) that the special figure display result will be a "jackpot". This table is referred to to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3 for pattern determination. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 12-11(A), the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is determined depending on whether the jackpot type determination result is "non-probable variable", "probable variable", or "suddenly certain". The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with MR3 is any of fluctuation pattern PA4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, fluctuation pattern PB4-3, and fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to fluctuation pattern PC1-3. Assigned to crab.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table 132A shown in FIG. 12-11(A), the determined value is set for each fluctuation so that the proportion determined for each fluctuation pattern differs depending on which of the plurality of jackpot types is determined. Some parts are assigned to patterns. For example, depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable variable” or “probable variable”, the determined values for variable pattern PA4-1, variable pattern PB4-1, variable pattern PB4-2, and variable pattern PB4-3 are The assignments are different. Thereby, depending on the result of determining which of a plurality of jackpot types to use, it is possible to vary the ratio of the same variation pattern.

In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, there are portions in which determined values are assigned to different fluctuation patterns depending on which of a plurality of jackpot types is determined. For example, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variation" or "probable variation", the determined value is assigned to variation pattern PA4-1, variation pattern PB4-1, variation pattern PB4-2, and variation pattern PB4-3. On the other hand, no determined value is assigned to variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "suddenly certain", a determined value is assigned to variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3, while variation patterns PA4-1 and variation patterns PB4 -1, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and fluctuation pattern PB4-3 are not assigned determined values. As a result, when the special figure display result is "Jackpot" and the jackpot type is "Suddenly certain" and the short-term open jackpot state is controlled, a different fluctuation pattern is determined from the case where it is controlled to the normal open jackpot state. be able to.

In addition, when the jackpot type is determined to be "non-probable", "probable", or "sudden", depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a variable-probability state, or a time-saving state. Therefore, the determination value may be assigned differently to each variation pattern. Thereby, it is possible to vary the ratio determined to the same variation pattern depending on which of a plurality of types the gaming state is. In addition, when the jackpot type is determined to be "non-probability variable", "probability variable", or "sudden probability", depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state, a variable probability state, or a time-saving state. In this way, determined values may be assigned to different variation patterns. Thereby, different fluctuation patterns can be determined depending on which of a plurality of types the gaming state is. In addition, in this embodiment, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variation", more decision values are assigned to the variation pattern PA4-1 indicating the variation pattern of normal reach than in the case of "probability variation". . Therefore, when the reach effect of Super Reach is executed, there is a higher possibility that the jackpot type will be ``probable variable'' than ``non-probable variable''. It can improve your interest. In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-11(A), the fluctuation pattern PB4-2 that performs the reach effect of Super Reach B is better than the fluctuation pattern PB4-1 that performs the reach effect of Super Reach C. , more decision values are assigned to the variation pattern PB4-3 that performs the reach effect of super reach A than to the variation pattern PB4-2, that is, as the variation time becomes longer (see variation time in Figure 12-10). It is being

Returning to FIG. 12-8, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is in the off state in the process of step S261 (step S261; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the small win flag is in the on state (step S263). ). If it is determined that the small hit flag is in the on state (step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 refers to the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to the small hit is determined (step S264).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag is in the off state (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving start flag is in the on state (step 059AKS007). If it is determined that the time saving start flag is in the on state (step 059 AKS007; Yes), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table when the time saving start flag is on shown in FIGS. 12-12 (A), (C) and (D). (Step 059AKS008). On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving start flag is in the off state (step 059AKS007; No), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table when the time saving start flag is off shown in FIGS. 12-12(B) and (E) (step 059AKS009).

After executing the process of step 059AKS008 or step 059AKS009, the CPU 103 performs the following depending on the type of the special figure, such as whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and whether or not the time is being reduced. A variation pattern corresponding to a loss in which the special figure display result is "loss (time saving)" or "loss" is determined (step 059AKS010). Specifically, in step 059AKS010, if the special figure display result is "Loss (time saving)" and the variable special figure is the first special figure, regardless of whether time saving control is being performed, the display shown in FIG. 12(A), and depending on the type of time saving, set the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern stored in the random number buffer for variation etc. Based on this, one of multiple types of variation patterns is determined. On the other hand, if the special figure display result is "Loss (time saving)" and the variable special figure is the second special figure, depending on whether time saving control is being performed, Figure 12-12 (C) or (D ), and determines one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. In addition, if the special figure display result is "lose" and the variable special figure is the first special figure, refer to the time-saving start flag off loss variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 12-12 (B), and the time-saving control is Depending on whether or not the time-saving state is being performed, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is determined based on numerical data indicating the random number MR3. In addition, if the special figure display result is "Loss" and the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the time is being reduced, the loss variation pattern determination table when the time saver start flag is off shown in Figure 12-12 (B) is displayed. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is determined. On the other hand, in the normal state, the change pattern is set to one of multiple types based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR3, etc. by referring to the time saving start flag off loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 12-12 (E). decide. As shown in the figure, in the feature section 059AK of this embodiment, when the variable display result is "loss (time saving)" (when the loss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time saving start flag is on is selected), the type of super reach is Determination values are assigned so that the time saving type is determined at different rates accordingly. Specifically, the decision value is assigned so that when Super Reach, which has a high jackpot expectation, is executed, it becomes a time saving type that has a greater number of time savings (Super Reach B is more likely than "Time Saving A" than Super Reach C). (assigned so that the percentage of time-saving types is high). In addition, as shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "loss (time saving)" (when the losing fluctuation pattern determination table when the time saving start flag is on is selected), the decision value is set for Super Reach A, which has the highest jackpot expectation. Not assigned. That is, in the feature section 059AK, determination values are assigned so that the rate of "loss (time saving)" differs depending on the type of super reach. In addition, in the feature section 059AK, for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-11 and 11-12, when the reach effect of Super Reach B or Super Reach C is executed, when it becomes a jackpot, when it becomes a loss (time saving), Decision values are assigned so that there are a plurality of variable display results, such as when the game simply loses. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of performance results and improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, as described above, the variable winning ball device 6B that forms the second starting winning hole is provided in the gaming area on the right side of the player, and the game ball will win only when the ball is hit to the right. ing. Therefore, in the characteristic part 059AK, the second special symbol changes in the time saving state due to the player hitting right in the time saving state. On the other hand, when the time saving control ends and the pending memory corresponding to the second special figure remains, the second special figure will change in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the second special symbol changes only when the time saving control ends and the pending memory corresponding to the second special symbol remains. Therefore, in the characteristic part 059AK, as shown in FIG. This is a variable display (fluctuation) fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to "4".

Returning to FIG. 12-8, after executing the process of step 059AKS010, the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving start flag is set to the on state (step 059AKS011). If the time saving start flag is on (step 059 AKS011; Yes), the CPU 103 displays PB2-4 indicating that the determined variation pattern is a confirmed variation pattern for time saving (that is, a variation pattern exclusively used for losing (time saving)). It is determined whether or not (Step 059AKS012). If the determined variation pattern is not PB2-4, a time-saving promotion period as a period for executing the time-saving promotion to be described later is added to the special figure variation time indicated by the determined variation pattern (step 059AKS013). . Specifically, in step 059AKS013, as shown in FIG. 12-9, a time-saving promotion period may be added according to the time-saving type. In addition, PB2-4, which is a special fluctuation pattern for losing (time-saving), and PB2-5, which is a fluctuation pattern for time-saving tricks, has a time-saving effect period (10 seconds) in the special symbol fluctuation time shown in Figure 12-10. )It is included. The time-saving promotion performance is a performance that stimulates whether or not the time-saving symbol, which is a decorative symbol indicating that the time-saving state will be controlled from the next variable display, will be stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, and 059AKS013 in FIG. 12-8, the CPU 103 sets a special symbol fluctuation time (also referred to as fluctuation time) that is a variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from when the special symbol starts changing in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is derived and displayed. It is. As shown in Figure 12-10, the special figure fluctuation time is predetermined in correspondence with a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance, but when the process of step 059AKS013 is executed, the time-saving excitement effect period has been added to the period. The CPU 103 sets the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected in each process of steps S262, S264, and 059AKS013 (when the process of step 059AKS013 is executed, the period in which the time-saving promotion effect period is added). By this, it is possible to set the timing at which the variable display results of special symbols and decorative symbols are derived. The setting of the special figure fluctuation time is performed, for example, by setting a timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. In addition, in the feature part 059AK of this embodiment, when the time-saving start flag is in the on state and the determined fluctuation pattern is not PB2-4, the time-saving promotion effect period as a period for executing the time-saving promotion effect is set. , we have shown an example of adding to the special figure fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern, but in addition to this, for example, when the variable display result becomes a "big hit" or a "small hit", a predetermined period can be added. It may be added to the special figure fluctuation time. In this case, just like the time saving type, a period corresponding to the jackpot type may be added, and the process may be the same as step 059AKS013. Specifically, the periods corresponding to "time saving A", "time saving B", and "time saving C" shown in Figure 12-9 are added as periods corresponding to "non-definite variable", "definite variable", and "sudden definite". do it.

Following the process of step S266, one of the special symbol games using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so that one of the special symbol games for which the conditions are met is started (step S267). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. As a result, the special figure game is started. In addition, when starting the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first reservation display 25A to display a display that can specify the first special figure reservation memory number subtracted by one. It is also possible to have the hold display 25A perform the process (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one). In addition, when starting the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second reservation display 25B to display a display that can specify the second special figure reservation memory number subtracted by one. It may be possible to have the hold display 25B do this (for example, reduce the number of lit LEDs by one).

After executing the process of step S267, the CPU 103 sends a command at the start of the variation of the special symbol (command at the start of variation) in order to notify the production control board 12 of the special symbol display result, the determination result of the variation pattern, etc. Transmission settings are performed (step S268). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends the first fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command ( command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S262, S264, or S265), display result specification command (command containing EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), 1st special figure pending storage number specification command ( Sequentially send a command containing the first special figure pending memory number count value decremented by 1, that is, EXT data indicating the first special figure pending memory number when one pending memory is used up by starting the execution of the special figure game. Configure sending settings to On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a second fluctuation start designation command, a fluctuation pattern designation command ( command including EXT data indicating the variable pattern determined in step S262, S264 or S265), display result specification command (command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), second special figure pending storage number specification command (1 Sequentially transmits the reduced count value of the second special figure pending memory number (in other words, a command containing EXT data indicating the second special figure pending memory number when one pending memory is used up by starting the execution of the special figure game) Configure sending settings for

After executing the process of step S268, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "2" (step S267), and then ends the fluctuation pattern setting process.

FIG. 12-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stopping process shown in FIGS. 12-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the special symbol confirmed display flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (gaming control flag setting section, etc.) is on, for example. (Step S291). Here, the special symbol confirmed display flag is set to the on state by the process of step S295, which will be described later, in response to the derived and displayed confirmed special symbol that is a variable display result in the special symbol game.

When the special symbol confirmed display flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), settings are made for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol (step S292). At this time, a decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process for transmitting a decorative pattern stop command to the production control board 12 is performed (step 059AKS021). The decorative pattern stop command is also referred to as the pattern confirmation command, and is a command that specifies that the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern is ended and the display result (stop pattern) is derived and displayed, and the derived and displayed decoration is This is a command that specifies the period (determined period) for displaying the symbol.

Here, the main effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the command control process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 12-14. Note that "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number.

Command 80XX(H) is an effect control command (variation pattern designation command) that specifies a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. In this embodiment, a variation pattern designation command corresponding to each variation pattern is set. For example, a unique number (variation pattern number) is assigned to each variation pattern, and that number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "01" for variation pattern PA1-1). Further, the variation pattern designation command is also a command for designating the start of variation of decorative symbols.

Command 8A01 (H) is an effect control command (first starting opening winning designation command) that specifies that a first starting winning has occurred due to the game medium entering the first starting winning opening. Command 8A02(H) is an effect control command (second starting opening winning designation command) that specifies that a second starting winning has occurred due to the game medium entering the second starting winning opening. The first starting slot winning designation command and the second starting slot winning designation command may be collectively referred to as the starting slot winning designation command.

Command 8CXX (H) specifies whether or not it is a jackpot, whether it is a loss (time saving), the type of jackpot, the type of time saving, etc. In other words, the production control command (display result specified command). In this embodiment, a display result designation command corresponding to each display result is set. For example, a unique number is assigned to each display result, and that number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "00" for "Loss", "Loss" for "Time Saving A" when the time saving type is "Time Saving A"), and that number is set to "XX" in the command. ``01'' for ``time saving)'', ``05'' for ``jackpot'' with jackpot type of ``probable variable'', etc.).

Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first fluctuation start designation command) that designates to start variable display (fluctuation) of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a production control command (second variation start designation command) that specifies to start variable display (fluctuation) of the second special symbol. The first fluctuation start designation command and the second fluctuation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a fluctuation start designation command. Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern determination result designation command described later.

Command 8FXX (H) is a production control command (design confirmation designation command) that specifies ending the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative design and deriving and displaying the display result (stop design), as well as the design finalization designation command. This is a command that specifies the period (determined period) for displaying decorative patterns. The feature section 059AK of this embodiment determines whether the variable display result is "loss (time saving)" and the display result corresponding to each time saving type when the variable display result is "loss (time saving)". The specified command is set. For example, if the variable display result is not "Loss (time saving)", "XX" in the command is set to "00", and if the variable display result is "Loss (time saving)", the time saving type is set. A unique number is assigned accordingly, and that number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, if the time saving type is "Time saving A", "01", if the time saving type is "Time saving B", "02", If the type is "Time saving C", it is "03", if the time saving type is "Time saving D", it is "04", etc.).

Command 95XX (H) is a performance control command (gaming state designation command) that designates a gaming state. In this embodiment, gaming state designation commands corresponding to each gaming state are set. For example, if the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base), "XX" is set to "00". For example, if the gaming state is a high probability low base state, "XX" is set to "01". For example, if the gaming state is a high probability high base state, "XX" is set to "02". For example, if the gaming state is a low probability high base state, "XX" is set to "03".

Command A000(H) is an effect control command (jackpot start designation command) that specifies the start of the jackpot gaming state (start of fanfare). Note that the fanfare is an effect that is executed at the start of the jackpot gaming state to notify that the jackpot gaming state has entered. Command A100 (H) is a performance control command (small win start designation command) that specifies the start of a small win game state.

Command A2XX(H) is a production control command (big winning hole open designation command) that specifies opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 for the number of rounds (round) indicated by XX. A3XX(H) is a performance control command (designated command after opening the big winning hole) that designates closing of the special variable winning ball device 7 for the number of rounds (round) indicated by XX.

Command A601 (H) is a production control command (jackpot end designation command) that designates the end of the jackpot gaming state (start of ending). Note that the ending is an effect that is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state to notify that the jackpot gaming state has ended. Command A602 (H) is a performance control command (small win end designation command) that specifies the end of the small win gaming state.

Command C1XX (H) is a production control command (first special figure pending memory number specification command) that specifies the first special figure pending memory number. "XX" indicates the number of stored first special symbols. Command C2XX (H) is a production control command (second special figure pending memory number designation command) that specifies the second special figure pending memory number. "XX" indicates the number of second special figures pending storage. The first special figure pending memory number designation command and the second special figure pending memory number designation command may be collectively referred to as the special figure pending memory number designation command.

Command C4XX (H) is a performance control command (symbol determination result designation command) that designates the display result among the determination results at the time of starting winning. Command C5XX (H) is a production control command (variation pattern determination result designation command) that designates a fluctuation pattern among the determination results at the time of starting winning. In this embodiment, in the process of step S101 which will be described later, random numbers MR1 to MR3 are extracted when a first starting prize or a second starting winning occurs. Regarding the variable display corresponding to the extracted random numbers MR1 to MR3, before the variable display start condition is satisfied, the variable display is changed based on the random numbers MR1 and MR3 of the extracted random numbers MR1 to MR3. It is determined whether the display result is a "jackpot" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display. The determination at the time of starting winning refers to these determinations, and is executed in the winning random number value determination process (see FIG. 12-3) in step S1213. Note that in certain cases, this determination may not be made. A unique number is assigned to the judgment result (including the case of no judgment) regarding the display result, and that number is set to "XX" in the symbol designation command (for example, if it is "no judgment", " 00", "01" etc. are set if it is a "loss", a unique number is assigned according to the type of time saving if it is a "loss (time saving)", and a unique number is assigned according to the type of jackpot if it is a "jackpot". number will be assigned). A unique number is assigned to the judgment result for the fluctuation pattern (including the case of no judgment), and that number is set to "XX" in the fluctuation pattern specification command (for example, if there is no judgment, "00", "11" for "PA1-1", "12" for "PA1-2", etc.).

FIG. 12-15(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS021 of FIG. 12-13 as the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process. The decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process is a process that performs settings for transmitting a decorative pattern stop command according to the variable display result and the time saving type. In the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is set to the on state (step 059AKS041). If the time saving flag is in the off state (step 059AKS041; No), it is determined whether the time saving start flag is set in the on state (step 059AKS042). If the time saving start flag is on (step 059 AKS042; Yes), the current variable display result is "Loss (time saving)", so the CPU 103 sets the sending of the decorative pattern stop command according to the time saving type. (Step 059AKS043), the decoration pattern stop command transmission setting process is ended.

Specifically, in step 059AKS043, as shown in FIG. 12-15(B), a predetermined decorative pattern stop command (symbol confirmation command) is set according to the time saving type. As shown in the figure, the fixed time is 10 seconds for "Time saver A" and "Time saver B", while the fixed time is 5 seconds for "Time saver C", and 2 seconds for "Time saver D". The time saving types of "Time saving A" and "Time saving B" are the time saving types that are determined only when the variable display result of the first special map is "Loss (Time saving)", and "Time saving C" and "Time saving The time-saving type of ``D'' is a time-saving type that is determined only when the variable display result of the second special figure is ``Loss (time saver)'', so the variable display result of the 1st special figure is ``Loss (time saver)''. Since the confirmation time is different depending on whether the result of the variable display of the second special symbol is "Loss (Time Saving)" or "Loss (Time Saving)", variations in the variable display can be increased and the game's interest can be improved. Further, when the variable display result of the second special figure is "lose (time saving)", the fixed period differs depending on the time saving type, so the fixed period can attract the player's attention. In addition, in the feature section 059AK, since the process of step 059AKS043 is performed only when the time saving state is not in effect, the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special symbol remaining after the time saver ends is Only in the case of "missing (time saving)", the process of step 059AKS043 is performed, so that the determined time is determined according to the time saving type of "time saving C" and "time saving D" shown in the figure. In other words, in a short period of time after the end of the time reduction (at most, after the end of the period of variable display of the maximum number of reserved memories of the second special symbol four times), the time reduction state is again controlled. C" and "Time Saving D"), as shown in the figure, when the variable display result corresponding to the first special symbol is "Loss (Time Saving)" in the normal state ("Time Saving A" and "Time Saving B") The confirmation time is shorter than that of Therefore, by lengthening the confirmation period for the variable display of the normal state and the first special symbol, which requires clear notification to the player that the time-saving state will be controlled, it is necessary to clearly notify the player that the time-saving state will be controlled. It is possible to set a period for clearly informing players. In addition, if the time reduction state is to be controlled again in a short period of time after the end of the time reduction, there is a risk that the interest in the game will decrease if the confirmation period is long. This prevents a decline in

If the time saving flag is in the on state at step 059AKS041 in FIG. makes settings to transmit command 8F00 (determination period 0.5 seconds) as a decorative pattern stop command (step 059AKS044), and ends the decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process.

Returning to FIG. 12-13, after executing the process of step 059AKS021, the CPU 103 executes the confirmation period (10 seconds, 5 seconds, 2 seconds, 0 .5 seconds) as the special figure confirmation display time (step 059AKS022). In addition, in the process of step 059AKS022, a timer initial value predetermined according to the variable display result and the time saving type may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting section 153. Then, after setting the special symbol confirmation display flag to the on state (step S295), the special symbol stopping process is ended. In this way, after the confirmed special symbol is derived and displayed through the process of step S292, until the special symbol confirmed display time set in step 059AKS022 has elapsed, the special symbol is displayed in the special symbol process according to the occurrence of the timer interrupt. Every time the stop process is executed, it is determined in step S291 that the special figure confirmed display flag is on.

When the special figure confirmed display flag is on in step S291 (step S291; Yes), it is determined whether the special figure confirmed display time has elapsed (step S296). For example, in the process of step S296, the game control process timer value, which is the stored value of the game control process timer whose timer initial value was set in the process of step S294, is read, and whether or not the timer value has become "0" is determined. Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed. Furthermore, if the timer value is a value other than "0", the game control process timer value must be updated so that it is decremented by 1 each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of a timer interrupt. Bye. If the special symbol confirmed display time has not elapsed in step S296 (step S296; No), the special symbol stop process is ended and the CPU waits until the special symbol confirmed display time has elapsed.

When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S296 (step S296; Yes), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag and turning it off (step S297), check whether the jackpot flag is on or not. Determination is made (step S298). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step S298; Yes), a predetermined period of time is set as a performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot (step S299). Also, settings are made to send a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command according to the jackpot type buffer value is stored in the transmission command buffer as the transmission command. It is only necessary to store it in the buffer area specified by the pointer.

Following the process of step S300, the jackpot flag is cleared and turned off (step S301). In addition, settings are made to end the variable probability state, time saving state, and remaining pending period, which will be described later (step 059AKS023). For example, as the process of step 059AKS023, the process of clearing the variable probability flag, the time-saving flag, and the remaining pending period flag to turn them off, or the number of time-saving times to count the remaining number of special symbol games to be executed in the time-saving state. It suffices if a process such as clearing a counter is executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-process (step S303), the special symbol stop process is ended.

If the jackpot flag is off in step S298 (step S298; No), it is determined whether the small win flag is on (step S304). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S304; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as a production waiting time at the start of the small hit (step S305). Next, settings are made for transmitting a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 in response to the special figure display result being a "small win" (step S306). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S307). Moreover, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8" which is a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S308).

If the small hit flag is off in step S304 (step S304; No), it is determined whether the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS024). If the time saving start flag is on (step 059AKS024; Yes), the time saving start process is executed (step 059AKS025). Details of the time saving start process will be described later. After executing the process in step 059AKS025, or if the time saving start flag is off in step 059AKS024 (step 059AKS024; No), the CPU 103 clears the special map process flag and initializes its value to "0". (Step S309). After executing either of the processes in steps S308 and S309, it is determined whether or not to end the time saving state (step 059AKS027). Specifically, in the process of step 059AKS027, when the time saving flag is on, the time saving number count value, which is the value stored in the time saving number counter, is updated by, for example, subtracting 1. Then, it is determined whether the updated time saving number count value matches a predetermined time saving end determination value (for example, "0", etc.). At this time, if it matches the time saving end determination value, it is determined as Yes. On the other hand, if it does not match the time saving end determination value, the determination is No.

When ending the time saving state (step 059AKS027; Yes), the CPU 103 performs time saving end processing (step 059AKS028). Details of the time-saving end processing will be described later. After executing the process of step 059AKS028, or if the time saving state is not ended in step 059AKS027 (step 059AKS027; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a remaining reservation period (step 059AKS030). Whether or not it is the remaining pending period may be determined by checking whether a remaining pending period flag, which will be described later, is set to an on state. If it is the remaining pending period, that is, if the remaining pending period flag is on (step 059AKS030; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the remaining pending period end determination process (step 059AKS031), and then ends the special symbol stop processing. . Details of the remaining reservation period end determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it is not the remaining pending period, that is, if the flag is off during the remaining pending period (step 059 AKS030; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop processing as it is.

FIG. 12-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS025 of FIG. 12-13 as the time saving start process. The time saving start process is a process in which the variable display result is "loss (time saving)" and settings are made for performing time saving control from the next variable display. In the time saving start process shown in FIG. 12-16, the CPU 103 first clears the time saving start flag to the off state (step 059AKS051), and sets the time saving flag to the on state (step 059AKS052). Subsequently, it is determined whether the remaining pending period flag is on (step 059AKS053). The remaining pending period flag is a flag indicating that a variable display is in progress corresponding to the holding of the second special symbol remaining after the end of the time reduction (remaining pending), and is a flag indicating that a variable display is in progress corresponding to the holding (remaining holding) of the second special symbol remaining after the time reduction ends, and is a flag that is displayed in a variable manner in step 059AKS063 (see Figure 12-17), which will be described later. When the variable display corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special symbol that is set to the on state in the process and remains after the end of the time reduction is finished (step 059AKS072 described later), When the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the reservation (remaining reservation) of the 2 special drawings becomes "loss (time saving)", it is cleared to the off state (step 059 AKS055 described later).

If it is determined in step 059AKS053 of FIG. 12-16 that the remaining pending period flag is in the off state (step 059AKS053; No), the CPU 103 fires the game ball into the gaming area on the right side for the player. Settings are made to send a right-handed instruction command for instructing (step 059AKS054), and the time saving start process is ended. By transmitting the right-handed instruction command set in the process of step 059 AKS054 to the production control board 12 side, the right-handed instruction display in the form shown in FIG. 12-33 (F) is displayed on the production control board 12 side. It will be done.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 059AKS053 of FIG. 12-16 that the remaining pending period flag is in the on state (step 059AKS053; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the remaining pending period flag to the off state (step 059AKS055). , clears various count values (step 059AKS056). In the process of step 059AKS056, it is sufficient to clear the values of the remaining pending count value and the post-time saving variation count value, which will be described later, to the initial value "0". The post-time saving variable count value, like the remaining pending count value, may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and is a count value indicating the number of variable displays performed after the time saving state ends. Although illustration is omitted, the fluctuation count value after the end of the time saving is, for example, in the special symbol fluctuation processing in step S112 of FIG. It is enough if it is +1.

After executing the process of step 059AKS056 in FIG. 12-16, the CPU 103 makes settings to transmit the simple mode right-hand hitting instruction command (step 059AKS057), and ends the time saving start process. By transmitting the simple mode right-handed instruction command set in the process of step 059 AKS057 to the production control board 12 side, the production control board 12 side instructs the right-handed strike in the mode shown in FIG. 12-35 (O). Display is performed. The simple format right-handed instruction command set for transmission in step 059AKS057 of FIG. 12-16 is different from the right-handed instruction command set for transmission in step 059AKS054, and this is because This is due to the variable display result being a "loss (time saving)". Specifically, in a short period of time after the end of the time saving (at most, after the end of the period of variable display of the maximum number of reserved memories of the second special symbol four times), the time saving state will be controlled again, so step 059AKS057 In the process of step 059AKS054, if the right-hand hit instruction command is transmitted, there is a risk that the player will be bothered. Therefore, in the process of step 059AKS057, a command for displaying the right-hand hit instruction is sent in a simple manner, thereby preventing the player from being bothered and losing interest in the game. .

FIG. 12-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS028 of FIG. 12-13 as the time saving end process. The time-saving termination process is a process for terminating the time-saving control and setting the remaining reservation period. In addition, regarding the variable probability state where the time saving flag is on and the probability variable flag is also on, the time shortening control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes "jackpot". Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to end the time reduction control even in the variable probability state, and the time reduction control may be ended based on the determination result that it is to be ended. When ending the time reduction control in this way, the variable probability control may also be terminated to return to the normal state, and the variable probability control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot" or further. It may be continued until the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times.

In the time saving end process shown in FIG. 12-17, the CPU 103 first clears the time saving flag to the off state (step 059AKS061). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a second special figure on hold (remaining hold) (step 059AKS062). In step 059AKS062, by checking the reservation information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, it may be determined whether or not there is a reservation (remaining reservation) of the second special symbol.

If the second special figure is on hold (remaining hold) (step 059AKS062; Yes), the flag is set to ON during the remaining hold period (step 059AKS063), and the second special figure is on hold (remaining hold). A count value for the number of remaining reservations is set according to the number (step 059AKS064). Specifically, in step 059AKS064, if the number of reservation information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is "4", the remaining reservation number count value is set to "4", and " If it is "3", set it to "3", if it is "2", set "2", and if it is "1", set it to "1".

After executing the process of step 059AKS064, the CPU 103 initializes the post-time saving variation count value by setting it to "0" (step 059AKS065). Note that the post-time saving fluctuation count value is initialized to "0" at step 059AKS056 in Figure 12-16, so if it is "0", the processing at step 059AKS065 can be skipped. good. After executing the process of step 059AKS065, the CPU 103 makes a setting to transmit a right-handed hit erasing command for erasing the right-handed hit instruction display (step 059 AKS066), and ends the time saving end process. By transmitting the right hit erase command set in the process of step 059AKS066 to the production control board 12 side, the process of step 059AKS136 shown in FIG. 12-30 is executed on the production control board 12 side. , the right-handed hitting instruction display will be deleted.

If it is determined in step 059AKS062 of FIG. 12-17 that there is no hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure (step 059AKS062; No), the CPU 103 launches the game ball into the game area on the left side for the player. Settings are made to transmit a left-handed batting instruction command for instructing to return to so-called left-handed batting (step 059AKS067), and the time saving end process is ended.

FIG. 12-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS031 of FIG. 12-13 as the remaining reservation period end determination process. The remaining reservation period end determination process determines whether the remaining reservation period has ended, that is, whether all the variable displays corresponding to the reservation (remaining reservation) of the second special symbol remaining after the time reduction end have ended. This process ends the remaining hold period when the hold period ends. In the remaining reservation period end determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the post-time-saving change count value matches the remaining reservation number count value set in step 059AKS064 of FIG. 12-17 (step 059AKS071). . If the post-time saving variation count value does not match the remaining reservation number count value (step 059AKS071; No), the CPU 103 directly ends the remaining reservation period end determination process.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation count value after the end of time saving matches the remaining hold number count value (step 059AKS071; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the remaining hold period flag to the off state (step 059AKS072), and sets various count values. (Step 059AKS073). In the process of step 059AKS073, similarly to the process of step 059AKS056, the values of the remaining pending count value and the fluctuation count value after time reduction end may be cleared to the initial value "0". After executing the process of step 059AKS074, the CPU 103 performs settings to transmit a left-handed batting instruction command to instruct the player to return to so-called left-handed batting, in which the game ball is fired into the left-hand playing area (step 059 AKS074). , ends the remaining reservation period end determination process. By transmitting the left-handed instruction command set in the process of step 059AKS074 to the production control board 12 side, the production control board 12 side can perform left-handed production as shown in FIG. 12-34 (N-2). Instructions will be displayed.

FIG. 12-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot ending process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 12-19, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot end performance waiting time has elapsed (step S321). As an example, when updating the value of the special figure process flag to "7" in the jackpot release post-processing of step S116 shown in FIG. A determined timer initial value is set in the game control process timer. Then, in the process of step S321, the game control process timer value is updated by, for example, subtracting 1, and the game control process timer value after the update matches a predetermined waiting time elapse judgment value (for example, "0", etc.). Depending on whether or not, it may be determined whether or not the performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot has elapsed. If the performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot has not elapsed in step S321 (step S321; No), the jackpot end processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if the performance waiting time at the end of the jackpot has elapsed in step S321 (step S321; Yes), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting section 155 is read out (step S322). , to specify whether the jackpot type was "non-probable", "probable" or "sudden". At this time, it is determined whether the specified jackpot type is "non-probable variation" (step S323).

If it is determined in step S323 that the jackpot type is "non-probable variable" (step S323; Yes), settings are made to start control to change the gaming state to a time-saving state (step S324). For example, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag to the ON state, and sets the time-saving number counter to a predetermined initial count value (for example, "100") corresponding to the upper limit of the special game that can be executed in the time-saving state. Set to . On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is "probable variable" or "suddenly certain" (step S323; No), settings are made to start control to change the gaming state to a variable probability state (step S325). For example, the CPU 103 sets both the probability change flag and the time saving flag to the ON state.

In addition, settings may be made to control to different types of probability variable states depending on whether the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable" or when the jackpot type is determined to be "suddenly certain." As an example, if the jackpot type is determined to be "probability change", both the probability change flag and the time-saving flag are set to ON, the initial value of the time-saving count value is not set, and the special figure display result is then It is set so that both probability variable control and time saving control are continuously performed until a "big hit" is achieved. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is determined to be "suddenly certain", both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set to the on state, and the initial value of the time saving number count value is set as in the case where the time saving state is controlled. Settings are made, and the probability change control continues until the next special figure display result becomes a "jackpot", while the time saving control continues until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, "100"). You can also set it as follows. Alternatively, if the jackpot type is determined to be "sudden certainty" and the predetermined time saving medium sudden certainty flag is on, settings are made to start the time saving control together with the probability variable control, while the time saving medium sudden certainty flag is off. If so, settings may be made to start only variable probability control. Here, the time saving medium sudden certainty flag indicates that, for example, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is on in step S298 shown in FIG. 12-13, the jackpot type is "sudden certainty" and that the time saving flag is on. It may be set to the on state in response to the time saving control being performed.

After executing either of the processes in steps S324 and S325, the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to "0" (step S326), and then the jackpot end process is ended.

Next, processing in the effect control board 12 of the feature section 059AK in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 12-20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 receives starting winning commands from the main board 11 (starting winning opening designation command, special figure pending storage number designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command). It is determined whether there is one (step S401).

If it is determined that the starting winning command has been received (step S401; Yes), the received command is stored in the starting winning command buffer (step S402). When receiving the 1st starting opening winning prize designation command or the 1st special figure pending memory number designation command as the starting winning command, the starting winning command (1st starting opening winning prize designation command, 1st special figure pending memory number designation command) , symbol determination result designation command, and variation pattern determination result designation command) are stored in a first start winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. When a 2nd starting opening winning prize designation command or a 2nd special figure pending storage number designation command is received as a starting winning command, the starting winning command (2nd starting opening winning prize designation command, 2nd special drawing pending storage number designation command) , symbol determination result designation command, and variation pattern determination result designation command) are stored in a second starting winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

FIG. 12-21(A) is an example of the configuration of the command buffer at the time of first start winning. The first start winning command buffer stores various command data constituting the start winning command received at the first starting winning. The first starting winning command buffer has a storage area (corresponding to each of the pending display numbers 1 to 4) that can store various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the first special figure pending storage number. area) is provided. In addition, in the first start winning command buffer in the feature section 059AK in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, there is an area where various command data corresponding to the variable display being executed is stored as the pending display number "0". (The same applies to the second start winning command buffer).

When there is a starting prize in the 1st starting winning hole, four commands: 1st starting hole winning designation command, 1st special figure pending memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command are executed in one. The set production control command (start winning command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition to these 1st starting opening winning designation command, 1st special figure reservation memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command, the 1st starting winning command buffer stores other information for each pending prize. A storage area is secured so that the information can be stored in association with the storage information.

The performance control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the starting winning command from the beginning of the free area of the first starting winning command buffer in accordance with the order of reception. The data in the free area of the command buffer at the time of first start winning, that is, the area where no data is stored, is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when receiving the starting winning command, the performance control CPU 120 corresponds to the smallest pending display number in which the storage area of the starting winning command is all "0000 (H)" in the first starting winning command buffer. Each performance control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of a first starting opening winning prize designation command, a first special symbol reservation storage designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern determination result designation command.

Further, FIG. 12-21(B) is an example of the configuration of the command buffer at the time of the second starting winning. The second starting winning command buffer stores various command data constituting the starting winning receiving command received at the second starting winning. The second start winning command buffer has a storage area (corresponding to each of the pending display numbers 1 to 4) that can store various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the second special figure pending storage number. area) is provided. In addition, similar to the first starting winning command buffer, the second starting winning command buffer in the characteristic section 059AK in this embodiment has a pending display number "0" as a variable display during execution. An area is provided in which various types of corresponding command data are stored.

When there is a starting prize in the 2nd starting winning hole, four commands: 2nd starting hole winning designation command, 2nd special figure pending memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command are executed. The set production control command (start winning command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition to these 2nd starting opening winning designation command, 2nd special figure reservation memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command, the 2nd starting winning command buffer stores other information for each pending prize. A storage area is secured so that the information can be stored in association with the storage information.

The performance control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the starting winning command from the beginning of the empty area of the second starting winning command buffer in accordance with the reception order. The data in the empty area of the command buffer at the time of second start winning, that is, the area where no data is stored, is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when receiving the starting winning command, the performance control CPU 120 corresponds to the smallest pending display number in which the storage area of the starting winning command is all "0000 (H)" in the second starting winning command buffer. Each performance control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of a second starting opening winning prize designation command, a first special figure reservation storage designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern determination result designation command.

In addition, the second starting winning command buffer, like the first starting winning command buffer, has a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each pending display number, and displays the display step change pattern described later. A storage area is provided for storing. The example shown in FIG. 11-8(B) shows an example in which no production control command data is stored in any of the storage areas of pending display numbers "0" to "4".

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 12-20, after executing step S402, or if it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S401; No), the production control CPU 120 , it is determined whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received (step S403). If it is determined that the gaming state designation command has been received (step S403; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 switches the on/off state of the high accuracy flag and the high base flag based on the content of the received gaming state designation command. (Step S404).

The high accuracy flag is, for example, provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting section), and is turned on in response to the probability change state, and is set in the high probability change flag on the main board 11 side. In response to switching between the on state and off state, the on state and off state are switched. The high base flag is, for example, provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the production control flag setting section), and is turned on in response to the time saving state, and is set in the time saving flag on the main board 11 side. In response to switching between the on state and off state, the on state and off state are switched. For example, when the gaming state designation command specifies the high probability high base state (for example, when specifying that the probability change flag and the time saving flag are in the ON state), the performance control CPU 120 selects the high probability flag and the high Both base flags are turned on (if they are already on, they are kept on; hereinafter, the same applies to the on/off states of both flags). If the gaming state specification command specifies a high-accuracy, low-base state (for example, when specifying that the probability change flag is on and the time-saving flag is off), the high-accuracy flag is turned on, and the high base is Turn the flag off. If the gaming state specification command specifies a low-accuracy low-base state (normal state) (for example, when specifying that the probability change flag and time-saving flag are in the off state), both the high-accuracy flag and the high-base flag are set. Turn off.

After executing step S404, or if it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S403; No), the production control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S405), and command analysis processing. end.

FIG. 12-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the reservation display setting process shown in FIG. 12-22, the production control CPU 120 first executes production control commands (starting opening winning designation command, winning determination result command, pending storage number notification command, etc.) transmitted at the time of starting winning. It is determined whether or not there has been reception (step S1301). In the process of step S1301, for example, whether or not a starting opening winning designation command, a winning judgment result command, and a pending storage number notification command are newly stored in the first starting winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer. By checking this, it is sufficient to determine whether or not a command has been received at the time of starting winning.

If no command is received in step S1301 (step S1301; No), the prefetch notice setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command has been received (step S1301; Yes), the winning determination result corresponding to the received winning determination result command is specified (step S1302). At this time, it is determined whether "limited prize winning determination" has been specified (step S1303). If the winning determination result is other than "Winning determination restricted" (step S1303; No), whether or not the first starting opening winning designation command is included in the production control command transmitted at the time of starting winning; That is, it is determined whether the received starting opening winning command is a first starting opening winning designation command (step 059AKS081).

If it is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 059 AKS081; Yes), the production control CPU 120 selects a pending state in which the variable display result is "jackpot" or "loss (time saving)" in the stored pending state, or It is determined whether the variable display result is "lost" and a hold, which is a variable pattern of time-saving tricks, is stored (step 059AKS082). In the process of step 059AKS082, by checking the contents of the first start winning buffer shown in Figure 12-21(A), the variable display result is pending or variable display as "jackpot" or "loss (time saving)". It is only necessary to determine whether or not the result is a "loss" and a hold, which is a variation pattern of time-saving tricks, is stored.

If the variable display result is a "jackpot" or "loss (time-saving)" hold, or the variable display result is a "lose" and there is no hold that is a time-saving fake fluctuation pattern, it is not stored (step 059 AKS082; No ), the normal pending change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23(A) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS083).

On the other hand, if either a hold whose variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "loss (time-saving)" or a hold where the variable display result is a "loss" and a time-saving fluctuating pattern is stored (step 059AKS082; Yes), the limit pending change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23(B) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS084).

If it is determined in step 059AKS081 that it is not the first starting opening winning command (step 059AKS081; No), it is the second starting opening winning command and the time saving state is in progress. The time-saving reservation change determination table for special drawing 2 shown in C) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS085).

After executing any one of steps 059AKS083, 059AKS084, and 059AKS085, the production control CPU 120 pre-reads according to the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern according to the determination ratio shown in the pending change determination table selected as the table to be used. Whether or not to execute a pending display change effect as a preview effect and the manner of execution are determined (step S1304).

In the normal pending change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23(A), the received starting opening winning command is the first starting opening winning designation command, and the variable display result is "Jackpot" or This table is selected when a hold that is a "loss (time-saving)" or a variable display result is a "lose" and no hold that is a variation pattern of a time-saving fake is stored. As shown in the figure, in the normal pending change determination table, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", when the variable display result is a "loss" and a variation pattern of super reach loss, or when the variable display result is a "small hit" , if it is a variable display result of "loss (time saving)" or "loss" and it is a fluctuating pattern of time saving crap, in other cases, correspondingly, if you execute it, you will be more likely to hit the jackpot than if you do not execute it. The determination ratios are assigned as shown in the figure, so that the expectation level is high and, when executed, the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of "red">"green">"blue". If the normal suspension change determination table is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 12-22, whether or not to execute the suspension display change effect and the manner of execution are determined in accordance with the determination ratio shown in the normal suspension change determination table. .

The limit pending change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23(B) shows that the received starting opening winning command is the first starting opening winning designation command, and the variable display result is "jackpot" or This table is selected when either a hold that results in a "loss (time-saving)" or a hold that the variable display result is a "loss" and a change pattern of a time-saving fake is stored. In such a case, after the variable display executed first ends, that is, before the execution of the variable display corresponding to the suspension of the target of the advance notice, the normal state changes to a time-saving state (which may become a variable probability state). Therefore, the variable display results and fluctuation patterns may differ between when reading ahead and when executing variable display corresponding to the suspension of the target of the advance notice. Therefore, in the limit pending change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23(B), execution of the pending display change effect in which the jackpot expectation level is equal to or higher than a certain value (in this example, "green" or higher) is restricted. In the illustrated example, the hold display change effect that is in the "blue" mode can be executed, but it may also be possible to only not execute it. For example, if the variable display result in the stored hold is "Loss" and the hold is stored as a time-saving change pattern, the display format of the hold display subject to the notice is initially changed to "Blue". ", and after the end of the variable display corresponding to the hold of the fluctuation pattern of the relevant time-saving gag, the display mode of the hold subject to notice (the hold displayed in "blue") will be changed to a hold display of "green" or higher mode. It may be changed. Furthermore, the active display may be changed to "green" or higher. When the limit time hold change determination table is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 12-22, whether or not to execute the hold display change effect and the execution mode are determined in accordance with the determination ratio shown in the limit time hold change determination table. .

In addition, in the normal time hold change determination table shown in Figure 12-23 (A) and the limit time hold change determination table shown in Figure 12-23 (B), when the variable display result is "loss (time saving)", etc. , we have shown an example that is similar to the case where it becomes a "jackpot", but for example, when the variable display result is "loss (time-saving)", or when the variable display result is "loss" and the time-saving spurious change If it is a pattern, it may have a specific aspect (for example, "time?"). According to this, the variation of the hold display change effect is increased, and it is possible to attract the attention of the players.

The time-saving reservation change determination table for special drawing 2 shown in FIG. 12-23(C) is a table that is selected when the received starting opening winning command is the second starting opening winning designation command. As shown in the figure, the short time reservation change determination table for special drawing 2 is different from the normal time reservation change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23(A) and the limit time reservation change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23(B). Differently, a determination ratio is not assigned when the variable display result is a "loss (time-saving)" or when the variable display result is a "loss" and the variation pattern is a fake time-saving variation pattern. If the received starting opening winning command is a second starting opening winning designation command and the winning determination is not restricted, the gaming state is in a time saving state (high base control is in progress). In the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, even if the time-saving symbol (special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the time-saving state, time-saving control is not performed anew, and furthermore, the time-saving state is controlled in the remaining pending state by the return effect described later. Since the performance is performed to suggest whether or not the time will be shortened, there is no need to perform a hold display change performance that foretells that the time will be shortened. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the time-saving time reservation change determination table for special drawing 2, there are cases where the variable display result is a "loss (time-saving)" and the variable display result is a "loss", which is a fluctuation pattern of a time-saving fake. No determination percentage is assigned in the case. When the time-saving reservation change determination table for the special figure 2 is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. The presence or absence and execution mode are determined.

Returning to FIG. 12-22, after executing the process in step S1304, or if it is determined in step S1303 that the winning determination is restricted (step S1303; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines the result of the determination in step S1304. data that specifiably indicates is stored in the reservation display data storage unit in association with the reservation number corresponding to the new starting prize (step S1311). At this time, if it is determined in step S1303 that the winning determination is restricted, data corresponding to "no execution (white)" in the pending change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23 may be stored.

Following the process of step S1311, the pending display at the time of starting winning is updated (step S1313), and then the pre-read notice setting process is ended. For example, when the first special figure pending storage number increases by 1 due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, the first pending display in the first pending display section 5HR is increased by 1, Add a new first pending display. On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number increases by 1 due to the game ball passing (entering) the second starting prize opening, the second pending display in the second pending display section 5HL is increased by one. Add a new second pending display. The first hold display and second hold display added at this time may be the hold display determined in step S1304 and stored in step S1311.

FIG. 12-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. When the variable display start setting process is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the time is being shortened (step 059AKS086). In step 059AKS086, it is determined whether or not the time is being reduced by checking whether the high base flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the production control flag setting section) is set to the on state. good.

If the time is being shortened (Step 059AKS086; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the number of time reductions to update the number of time reductions (Step 059AKS086A). Note that the number of time saving times is set in the process of step 059AKS133 (see FIG. 12-30), which will be described later, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. After executing the process of step 059AKS086A, or if it is determined in step 059AKS086 that the time is not being shortened (step 059AKS086; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether a left-handed batting instruction command has been received from the main board 11 side. (Step 059AKS087), and if received (Step 059AKS087; Yes), a left-handed hitting instruction display (see M6 in FIG. 12-34 (N-2)) is performed to instruct the player to play left-handed (see M6 in FIG. 12-34 (N-2)). Step 059AKS088). Note that the left-handed hitting instruction display may continue for 5 seconds each time, for example, from the time the left-handed hitting instruction command is received until the variable display is performed four times. . If the left-handed instruction command is not received (step 059AKS087; No) or if the process of step 059AKS088 is executed, the production control CPU 120 sends the right-handed instruction command or the simple mode right-handed instruction command to the main board 11 side. It is determined whether or not it has been received from (step 059AKS089).

If either of the right-handed instruction command and the simple mode right-handed instruction command is received (step 059AKS089; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 displays a right-handed instruction according to each command (step 059AKS090). Specifically, when a right-handed batting instruction command is received, a right-handed batting instruction display M3 is performed in the mode shown in FIG. A right-handed hitting instruction display M3 is performed as shown in 35(O). In addition, after the right hit instruction display is performed according to each command in step 059AKS090, other effects are displayed in the variable display each time until the time saving state ends, as shown in Figure 12-33 (G). It is only necessary that the right-handed hitting instruction display be performed in a manner that does not interfere with the player's performance.

After executing the process of step 059AKS090, or if it is determined in step 059AKS089 that neither the right-handed instruction command nor the simple mode right-handed instruction command has been received (step 059AKS089; No), the production control CPU 120 , it is determined whether the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command are successfully received (step 059AKS090A). In step 059AKS090A, for example, by checking the contents of the production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, it may be determined whether the display result designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command are successfully received.

If either the display result designation command or the variation pattern designation command cannot be received normally (step 059AKS090A; No), the production control CPU 120 executes a process at the time of failure (step 059AKS090B).

FIG. 12-25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step 059AKS090B of FIG. 12-24 as the process at the time of failure. In the process at the time of failure shown in FIG. 12-25, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern designation command is normally received, that is, whether the missed command is a display result designation command (step 059AKS093). If the variation pattern designation command has not been received normally (step 059AKS093; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the missed event process. In this case, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not performed, and the previous variable display result remains as is, and the system waits until the pattern confirmation designation command is sent from the main board 11 side. , it is sufficient to stop displaying the decorative pattern according to the display result designation command.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern designation command is successfully received (step 059AKS093; Yes), that is, if the missed command is the display result designation command, the production control CPU 120 receives the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command. It is determined whether or not it is a fixed time saving variation pattern or a time saving variation pattern, that is, a variation pattern of PB2-4 or PB2-5 (step 059AKS094). If it is a fixed time saving variation pattern or a time saving fake variation pattern (step 059AKS094; Yes), since the variation pattern includes a time saving effect period, a stop symbol setting process to be described later is performed (step 059AKS095), Ends the process when the data is missed. Note that in the characteristic section 059AK of this embodiment, even if the display result specification command is missed, if the variation pattern specification command is successfully received, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is If it is a time-saving fixed variation pattern or a time-saving false variation pattern, the stop symbol setting process described later is performed to make it possible to execute a time-saving effect, but if either the display result specification command or the variation pattern specification command is missed. In this case, it may be possible to prohibit the performance of time-saving effects such as a time-saving promotion effect, such as stopping and displaying a predetermined decorative pattern at the time of failure.

On the other hand, if it is not a fixed time saving variation pattern or a time saving fake variation pattern (step 059 AKS094; No), the performance control CPU 120 sets the combination of decorative symbols according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command as the final stop symbol. It is determined (step 059AKS096), and the process at the time of failure is completed. In step 059AKS096, the combination having the lowest advantage for the player may be determined among the combinations of decorative symbols that can be selected in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. According to this, it is possible to prevent an inconsistency in which a combination of decorative symbols with a high advantage is stopped and displayed, but the result is actually a result with a low advantage, thereby preventing a decrease in gaming interest. be able to. In this case, since the display result designation command is missed, the production control board 12 cannot determine whether the variable display result is a "miss (time saving)" or not. Therefore, after executing the performance according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command (for example, the reach performance of super reach), the performance control CPU 120 is configured to perform a performance control such that the variable display result is "loss (time saving)". In this case, until the symbol confirmation designation command is received, for example, a decorative symbol such as "???" may be displayed, or a predetermined losing symbol may be displayed shaking.

Returning to FIG. 12-24, if the display result designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command are successfully received (step 059AKS090A; Yes), the production control CPU 120 receives the display result designation command ( It is determined whether the special figure display result (variable display result) is a "loss" based on the command stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S551). If it is determined that the special figure display result (variable display result) is a "loss" (step S551; Yes), the production control CPU 120, for example, uses the fluctuation pattern determination result designation command (variable pattern determination) transmitted from the main board 11. Non-reach variation patterns (PA1-1, PA1 -2) (step S552).

If it is determined in the process of step S552 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of determined ornamental symbols that will be the final stop symbols forming the non-reach combination (step S553). ). For example, the performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative symbol of a non-reach combination that is updated by a random number circuit 124 or a performance random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and stores it in the ROM 121. A determined decorative pattern (decorative pattern of a non-reach combination) is determined by referring to a pre-stored decorative pattern determination table for a non-reach combination.

If it is determined in the process of step S552 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; No), the performance control CPU 120 executes a stop symbol setting process (step 059AKS092).

FIG. 12-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the stop symbol setting process executed in step 059AKS092 of FIG. 12-24. In the stop symbol setting process, execution settings for time-saving inciting effects and return effects are performed, and if the special symbol display result (variable display result) is a "loss (time-saving)", the time-saving symbol is finally stopped. Processing to create a pattern is performed. In addition, the time-saving symbols that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbols are referred to as time-saving symbols to distinguish them from the time-saving symbols that are special symbols.

In the stop symbol setting process in FIG. 12-26, the performance control CPU 120 displays special symbols based on the display result designation command (command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether the result is a "loss (time-saving)" or a "loss" and a time-saving fluctuating pattern (step 059AKS101).

If the special figure display result is "Loss (time saving)" or "Loss" and it is a fluctuation pattern of time saving crap (step 059 AKS101; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not time saving is in progress. (Step 059AKS102). In step 059AKS102, it is determined whether or not the time is being reduced by checking whether the high base flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the production control flag setting section) is set to the on state. good. If the time is not being shortened (step 059AKS102; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines the losing symbol of the reach combination as a temporary stop symbol (step 059AKS103). Specifically, in the feature section 059AK, if the special figure display result is a "loss (time-saving)" or a "loss" and a time-saving fluctuating pattern, the reach effect of super reach is executed, and then A time-saving provocation performance is carried out. Therefore, in step 059AKS103, the symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed as a result of the super reach effect is determined as the losing symbol of the reach combination. In step 059AKS103, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative pattern of a reach combination that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or a random counter for presentation, etc. is extracted, and the decoration of a reach combination stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is extracted. The temporary stop symbol (decorative symbol of the ready-to-win combination) may be determined by referring to the symbol determination table.

After executing the process of step 059AKS103, the performance control CPU 120 executes a time-saving effect setting process for making settings for executing the time-saving effect (step 059AKS104).

FIG. 12-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059 AKS104 of FIG. 12-26 as the time-saving effect setting process. In the time-saving effect setting process shown in FIG. As shown in 12-28, a time-saving effect effect pattern is determined (step 059AKS113), and the time-saving effect setting process is ended. Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 12-28, if the time-saving effect setting process is executed as a result of the stop symbol setting process being performed in the missed-capture process in FIG. 12-25, the time-saving effect setting process is executed. If it is other than the false variation pattern, since the time saving type is unknown, it is only necessary to decide on a time saving performance pattern that is a pattern only for failures (for example, a "success D" performance pattern with a performance time of 5 seconds, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 12-28, when the time saving types are "time saving A" and "time saving B", the time saving effect pattern of "success A" with a presentation time of 10 seconds is determined. When the time saving type is "time saving C", the time saving performance pattern of "success B" with a performance time of 2 seconds is determined. When the time saving type is "time saving D", the time saving performance pattern of "success C" with a performance time of 1 second is determined. If it is a time-saving fluctuating pattern, the time-saving performance pattern of "failure" with a performance time of 10 seconds is determined. The presentation time corresponds to the time-saving presentation period added in step 059AKS013 of FIG. 12-8 (see FIG. 12-9), and the presentation control CPU 120 uses the display results transmitted from the main board 11. Based on the specification command and the variation pattern specification command, the time corresponding to the time-saving promotion performance period is determined as the time-saving promotion performance time. In addition, in the characteristic part 059AK, since the production time is the same for the time-saving production pattern of "Success A" and the time-saving production pattern of "Failure", for example, the same character is displayed, and the time-saving pattern is displayed for "Success A". is a success pattern in which the symbols are finally stopped and displayed, and in the case of "failure", the time-saving symbols are not finally stopped and displayed, and the failure pattern is in which the decorative symbols of the reach combination are stopped and displayed. Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn to whether or not the game is successful (whether or not the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed). In addition, in the feature part 059AK, as shown in Figure 12-12, the rate at which the variable display result is "loss (time saving)" differs depending on the type of reach effect executed, so regarding the time saving effect. Similarly, the execution rate differs depending on the type of reach effect to be executed. That is, regarding the reach effect of Super Reach A, which has a high expectation of a jackpot, the variable display result will not be a "loss (time saving)" and the time saving effect will not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special effect from being executed excessively, and it is possible to maintain expectations for a specific display result. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-12 (B), regarding the fluctuation pattern of time-saving tricks where the variable display result does not become "loss (time-saving)" even if the time-saving promotion effect is executed, there are cases where the jackpot expectation level such as super reach C is A low reach effect is executed. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving promotion effect is executed differs depending on the type of ready-to-reach effect to be executed, and the rate at which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed as a result of the execution of the time-saving promotion effect also differs.

Returning to FIG. 12-26, after executing the process of step 059AKS104, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the special figure display result is "loss (time saving)" (step 059AKS105). If the special symbol display result is "lose (time-saving)" (step 059AKS105; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines a decorative symbol of the reach combination including the time-saving symbol as the final stop symbol (step 059AKS106), and stops. The symbol setting process ends. In addition, in step 059AKS106, it is sufficient to determine a time-saving symbol in an aspect according to the time-saving type as the final stop symbol (see FIG. 12-32 (D-1) and FIG. 12-34 (M-1)).

In step 059AKS101, if the special figure display result is neither a "loss (time-saving)" or a "loss" and is not a fluctuation pattern of a time-saving fake (step 059AKS101; No), the performance control CPU 120 controls the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed this time. It is determined whether the variable display corresponds to the variation of the first (first) second special figure performed after the end of the time saving (step 059AKS107). For example, in step 059AKS107, after the number of time saving is subtracted by 1 and becomes "0" in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 12-24, the time saving end flag is set to ON, and the variable display performed immediately after Whether or not it is a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol may be determined based on whether or not a second symbol variation start designation command has been received.

If the variable display (fluctuation) corresponds to the first (first) second special symbol performed after the end of the time reduction (step 059AKS107; Yes), the production control CPU 120 displays the second special symbol stored after the end of the time reduction. Executes a return effect setting process to execute a return effect that indicates whether or not a hold in which the special figure display result is a "loss (time saving)" is stored in the hold memory corresponding to the variable display of the figure. (Step 059AKS108).

FIG. 12-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS108 of FIG. 12-26 as the return effect setting process. In the return effect setting process shown in FIG. 12-29, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether there is a hold in which the special figure display result is "loss (time saving)" in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure. This is determined by checking the contents of the production control command reception buffer corresponding to the second special figure among the production control command reception buffers provided in the RAM 122 (step 059AKS115).

If there is a hold whose special figure display result is "loss (time saving)" in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure (step 059 AKS115; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 controls the hold corresponding to the second special figure. A return success pattern is set to notify that there is a hold in the memory where the special symbol display result is "lost (time-saving)", that is, the time-saving symbol will be stopped and displayed again in any of the remaining holds (step 059AKS116). ), the return effect setting process ends. On the other hand, if there is no hold in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure where the special figure display result is "loss (time saving)" (step 059 AKS115; No), the performance control CPU 120 corresponds to the second special figure. A recovery failure pattern that informs that there is no hold in the hold memory where the special symbol display result is "lost (time-saving)", that is, the time-saving pattern will not be stopped and displayed again in any of the remaining holds. is set (step 059AKS117), and the return effect setting process is completed. In addition, in the characteristic part 059AK, both the return performance of the return success pattern and the return performance of the return failure pattern execute a common performance (performance that encourages whether or not the time will be shortened again), and as a result, a stop display is performed. The combination of decorative patterns used is different.

Returning to FIG. 12-26, after executing the process of step 059AKS108, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the return performance pattern set at step 059AKS108 is a return success pattern (step 059AKS109). If it is a successful return pattern (Step 059AKS109; Yes), a decorative symbol of a reach combination including a time-saving return symbol is determined as the final stop symbol (Step 059AKS110), and the stop symbol setting process is ended. The time-saving return symbol is a symbol different from the time-saving symbol determined as the final stop symbol in step 059AKS106 according to the time-saving type (see FIG. 12-34 (K-1)). On the other hand, if it is not a successful return pattern (step 059AKS109; No), if it is determined in step 059AKS102 that the time is being reduced (step 059AKS102; Yes), or if the special figure display result is "missing (time saving)" in step 059AKS105. (Step 059AKS105; No), or if it is determined in Step 059AKS107 that the variable display does not correspond to the first (first) second special symbol change performed after the end of the time reduction (Step 059AKS107; No). ), the production control CPU 120 determines the combination of final decorative symbols that constitute the ready-to-go combination (step 059AKS111). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 extracts, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative pattern of a reach combination that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or a performance random counter, and stores it in the ROM 121 in advance and prepares it. The determined decorative pattern (decorative pattern of the ready-to-win combination) is determined by referring to the decorative pattern determination table for the ready-to-reach combination. In this way, in the stop symbol setting process, even if it is determined in step 059 AKS105 that the special symbol display result is a "loss (time saving)", if the time is being reduced (step 059 AKS102; Yes), the decorative symbol The final stop symbol becomes the decorative symbol of the ready-to-win combination by the process of step 059AKS111.

Returning to FIG. 12-24, after executing the process of step 059AKS092, the production control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display based on the settings in the production control pattern determined in response to the fluctuation pattern. After making settings for executing performances during variable display, including variable display operations of decorative symbols, such as productions and mini-games (step S559), the production control pattern is selected from one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. (Step S560). For example, the production control CPU 120 selects and uses one of a plurality of prepared production control patterns (special pattern variation production control pattern) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern determination result designation command. Set as a pattern. Further, when it is determined to perform a time-saving promotion performance or a return performance, a performance control pattern corresponding to the time-saving promotion performance or return performance is selected and set as a usage pattern. In addition, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern designation command has not been received normally in the process at the time of failure in step 059AKS090B, it is not necessary to select the production control pattern. In this case, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not performed and the previous variable display result remains the same, but the main board 11 side waits until the pattern confirmation designation command is sent, and the pattern confirmation designation command is not received. At the same time, the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result designation command may be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 059AKS090B that the fluctuation pattern designation command has not been received normally in the process for missing items, then in step S560, a production control pattern exclusively for missing items may be selected. .

Following the process of step S560, the performance control CPU 120 controls a predetermined area of the RAM 122 ( The initial value of the performance control process timer provided in the performance control timer setting section (such as a performance control timer setting section) is set (step S561). Specifically, in step S561, if execution of the time-saving effect is set in the time-saving effect setting process of step 059AKS104 of FIG. 12-26, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern determination result designation command The initial value of the performance control process timer is set by adding the production time of the time-saving promotion production to the time. After executing step S561, the performance control CPU 120 performs settings for starting variations in decorative patterns and the like on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step S562). At this time, the production control CPU 120, for example, sends a display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special symbol variation production control pattern) determined in the process of step S560 to the VDP of the display control unit 123. By transmitting the information to That's fine.

After executing the process of step S562, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production process flag to "2", which is the value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S563), and then performs the variable display start setting process. end.

FIG. 12-30 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of FIG. When the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 12-30 is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed based on the timer value of the performance control process timer (step S801). ). For example, the production control CPU 120 updates the timer value of the production control process timer (for example, subtracts 1), and when an end code is read from the production control pattern in response to the updated production control process timer value. It may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

If it is determined in the process of step S801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S801; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether it is the time reduction number display period for displaying the number of time reductions (step 059 AKS121 ). The time saving number display period is a period for displaying the time saving number updated in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 12-24, and may be predetermined in the performance control pattern determined in step S560. If it is determined that it is the time saving number display period (step 059AKS121; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 controls the time saving number display control to display the number of time saving updated in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 12-24 as the remaining time saving number. (Step 059AKS122).

After executing the process of step 059AKS122, or if it is determined in step 059AKS121 that it is not the time reduction number display period (step 059AKS121; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the ready-to-win production period for executing the ready-to-win production. (Step 059AKS123). The ready-to-win performance period may be determined in advance, for example, in the performance control pattern determined according to the fluctuation pattern. When it is determined that it is the ready-to-win performance period (step 059AKS123; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute the ready-to-win performance (step 059AKS124).

After executing the process of step 059AKS124, or if it is determined in step 059AKS123 that it is not the ready-to-reach production period (step 059AKS123; No), the production control CPU 120 at the pattern temporary stop timing which is the timing to temporarily stop display the decorative pattern. It is determined whether there is one (Step 059AKS125). The symbol temporary stop timing may be predetermined in the performance control pattern determined when the temporary stop symbol of the ready-to-win combination is determined in the stop symbol setting process of FIG. 12-26 (step 059AKS103). If it is determined that it is time to temporarily stop the symbols (step 059AKS125; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 displays a temporary stop of the decorative symbols (step 059AKS126), and temporarily stops the decorative symbols of the reach combination determined in step 059AKS103. Display.

After executing the process of step 059AKS126, or if it is determined in step 059AKS125 that it is not the symbol temporary stop timing (step 059AKS125; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines that the time-saving stimulation performance period is in order to execute the time-saving stimulation performance. It is determined whether or not (Step 059AKS127). The time-saving promotion performance period may be predetermined, for example, in the performance control pattern determined according to the pattern set in the time-saving promotion setting process of FIG. 12-27. When it is determined that it is the time-saving promotion performance period (step 059AKS127; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs time-saving promotion control for executing the time-saving promotion performance (step 059AKS128).

After executing the process of step 059AKS128, or if it is determined in step 059AKS126 that it is not the time-saving promotion performance period (step 059AKS126; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it is the return performance period for executing the return performance. (Step 059AKS129). The return performance period may be predetermined, for example, in the performance control pattern determined according to the pattern set in the return performance setting process of FIG. 12-29. When it is determined that it is the return performance period (step 059AKS129; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs return performance control to execute the return performance (step 059AKS130).

After executing the process of step 059AKS130, or when it is determined that it is not the return performance period (step 059AKS129; No), the performance control CPU 120, based on the settings in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, etc. In addition, control is performed to execute effects during variable display, including effects that change the display mode of the active display, mini-games, etc., including variable display operations of decorative symbols (step S808), and effects processing during variable display is performed. finish.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been normally received (step S809). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command cannot be received normally (step 809; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the special symbol display result (variable display result) is a "loss (time saving)". (Step 059AKS137). If the special figure display result (variable display result) is not a "loss (time saving)" (step 059 AKS137; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the variable display performance process.

On the other hand, if the special figure display result (variable display result) is "Loss (time saving)" (step 059 AKS137; Yes), the production control CPU 120 sets "XXX" as the special time saving number to the time saving number (step 059AKS137; Yes). 059AKS138), a special time reduction number notification control is performed to display "??? times" as a notification of the number of time reductions (059AKS139), and then the variable display performance process is ended. Incidentally, if the symbol confirmation command cannot be received normally, the performance itself for notifying the number of time reductions may not be executed. In addition, even if the data is received normally, but if an inconsistency occurs, for example, the content indicated by the symbol confirmation command and the content indicated by the display result specification command do not match, the time saving number will be notified as "?". A special time saving number notification control may be performed to display "?? times", or the performance itself for notifying the number of time reductions may not be executed.

When the symbol confirmation command is normally received in step S809 (step S809; Yes), the production control CPU 120 performs decoration such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (determined decorative symbol) that is the display result in the variable display of symbols (step S810). After executing the process of step 810, the production control CPU 120 sets a confirmed symbol display time according to the received symbol confirming command (step 059AKS131). In step 059AKS131, the fixed time indicated by the commands 8F00 to 8F04 set for transmission in step 059AKS043 or step 059AKS044 shown in FIG. 12-15 may be set.

After executing the process of step 059AKS131, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the special figure display result (variable display result) is a "loss (time saving)" (step 059AKS132). If the special figure display result (variable display result) is "Loss (time saving)" (step 059AKS132; Yes), the production control CPU 120 will change the number of time saving times specified by the received symbol confirmation command (Figure 12-15 (B) ) is set (step 059AKS133), and the time reduction number notification control is performed to display the number of time reductions (notify the number of time reductions) (step 059AKS134).

After executing the process of step 059AKS134, or if it is determined in step 059AKS132 that the special figure display result (variable display result) is not a "loss (time saving)" (step 059AKS132; No), the production control CPU 120 It is determined whether an erase command has been received from the main board 11 side (step 059AKS135), and if it has been received (step 059AKS135; Yes), the right-hand hitting instruction display is erased (step 059AKS136). After executing the process of step 059AKS136, or if it is determined in step 059AKS135 that the right-hit erasing command has not been received (step 059AKS135; No), the production control CPU 120 waits for the value of the production process flag to be detected per special figure. It is updated to "3", which is a value corresponding to the process (step S812), and the variable display performance process is ended.

FIG. 12-31 is a timing chart showing each timing during variable display in the case where the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed and in other cases. FIGS. 12-31(A) to (C) all show examples where the variable display result is a "loss" (including a "loss (time saving)"). Specifically, FIG. 12-31(A) shows an example in which a time-saving symbol (with "time-saving A" as the time-saving type) is displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol. (B) shows an example where the time-saving effect is not executed and the time-saving symbol is not displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and Figure 12-31 (C) shows the case where the time-saving effect is not executed and the time-saving symbol is not displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol. An example of a fluctuating pattern is shown. In addition, in the illustrated example, in order to facilitate understanding, all of FIGS. 12-31 (A) to (C) show examples in which super reach C is executed, and FIGS. 12-31 (A) and ( B) shows an example in which the variation pattern of PB2-1 is selected, and FIG. 12-31(C) shows an example in which the variation pattern of PB2-5 is selected.

As shown in Figure 12-31 (A), when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbols, when the variable display starts, it becomes a reach state, and then the reach effect of super reach C is executed. Ru. Then, when the symbol temporary stop timing comes, the decorative symbols of the reach combination are temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in the figure (in this example, the decorative symbol 757). Then, a short-time provocation performance is performed. The time-saving promotion performance period L4 is 10 seconds, similar to the time-saving promotion performance period L5 shown in FIG. 12-31(C) (see FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10). When the symbol confirmation command is received after the end of the time-saving stimulation effect, the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol (in this example, the combination of 7:07 decorative symbols), and after the confirmed symbol display period L1 has elapsed, the fluctuation is stopped. finish. The confirmed symbol display period L1 is 10 seconds (see FIG. 12-15(B)).

As shown in Figure 12-31 (B), when the time-saving effect is not executed and the time-saving symbol is not displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbols, when the variable display starts, it becomes a reach state. , After that, the reach effect of super reach C is executed. After that, when the symbol confirmation command is received (767 in this example). Then, after the confirmed symbol display period L2 has elapsed, the fluctuation ends. The confirmed symbol display period L2 is 0.5 seconds (see FIG. 12-15(A)), and is the same as the confirmed symbol display period L3 shown in FIG. 12-31(C).

As shown in FIG. 12-31(C), when the variable display is started in the case of the time-saving variable pattern, the ready-to-reach state is entered, and then the ready-to-reach effect of super reach C is executed. Then, when the symbol temporary stop timing comes, the decorative symbols of the reach combination are temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in the figure (in this example, the decorative symbol 757). Then, a short-time provocation performance is performed. The time-saving promotion period L5 is 10 seconds, similar to the time-saving promotion period L4 shown in FIG. 12-31(A) (see FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10). When the symbol confirmation command is received after the end of the time-saving promotion, the losing symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol (767 in this example). Then, after the confirmed symbol display period L3 has elapsed, the fluctuation ends. The confirmed symbol display period L3 is 0.5 seconds (see FIG. 12-15(A)), and is the same as the confirmed symbol display period L2 shown in FIG. 12-31(B).

Next, an example of the operation of the performance when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed or when the time-saving promotion performance is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-32 to 12-35.

As shown in Figure 12-32 (A), after the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed, if the gaming state is in the normal state, when the symbol temporary stop timing comes, Figure 12-32 (B-1) As shown, the decorative symbols of the reach combination are temporarily stopped and displayed. In the illustrated example, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern 5La is "7", the decorative pattern 5Ca is "5", and the decorative pattern 5Ra is An example is shown in which "7" is displayed as a temporary stop. In addition, as shown in the figure, the symbol "5" as the decorative symbol 5Ca may be displayed in a manner that allows it to be visually recognized that it is a temporary stop while being swayed. Further, the display is not limited to the decorative patterns 5Ca in each "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C, and all the decorative patterns may remain swaying. On the other hand, if the gaming state is in the time saving state, the determination in step 059AKS102 in FIG. 12-26 is negative, so the process in step 059AKS111 is performed without temporarily stopping the decorative symbols of the reach combination. , as shown in FIG. 12-32 (B-2), the lose symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. In addition, in the illustrated example, the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result (the illustrated example shows an example of the special symbol display result of "1", which is the time-saving type of time-saving A), while the decorative symbol 3 shows an example in which the time-saving symbols are not displayed in a stopped state. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-32 (B-2), after the losing symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the confirmed symbol display period.

When the time-saving promotion effect period starts from the state shown in FIG. 12-32(B-1), the time-saving promotion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 12-32(C). In the illustrated example, the message M1 "Maybe it's time saving!?" is displayed to encourage whether or not the time saving symbol should be stopped and displayed. Depending on whether or not the player wins, the time-saving symbols may be stopped and displayed or not.

When the symbol confirmation command is received, the final stop symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 12-32 (D-1) or (D-2). In Fig. 12-32 (D-1), the variable display result is "Loss (time saving)", and the symbol confirmation command of 8F01 shown in Fig. 12-15 (B) is received as the symbol confirmation command, and "Time saving A" is displayed. This shows an example where the time-saving symbol 5Cb of the time-saving type is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol, and the special symbol display result also shows the number "1", which is the time-saving symbol of the time-saving type of "time-saving A". An example is shown in which a special symbol is displayed as a special symbol display result. In the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display AHA changes to a "green" display mode before the time-saving symbol 5Cb stops displaying. The display mode may change immediately after the start of the performance, or may change during the super reach performance. On the other hand, in the case of a time-saving fluctuating pattern, in order to receive the symbol confirmation command of 8F00 shown in Figure 12-15 (A), as shown in Figure 12-32 (D-2), as the final stop symbol. Loss symbols of reach combinations are stopped and displayed. In addition, as a special figure display result, the special figure which shows the symbol of "-" which becomes a loss pattern as shown in figure is displayed as a special figure display result. Then, the variation ends 0.5 seconds after the confirmed symbol display period. In addition, in the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display AHA changes to a "blue" display mode before the losing symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed. The display mode may change immediately after the start of the promotion effect, or may change during the super reach effect. In addition, regarding the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display, depending on which display mode the active display mode changes to, the time-saving symbol will be displayed as a stop display even if it is the same type of super reach reach effect. What is necessary is to change the display mode of the active display so that the ratio of active display differs. Note that the change destination of the display mode in the active change effect may be the same as the determination ratio in the normal time pending change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23(A). In addition, unlike the normal time pending change determination table shown in Figure 12-23 (A), the variable display result is different between cases where the variable display result is a "loss (time saving)" and cases where the variable display result is a false time saving variation pattern. The display mode may be set to have a higher proportion of "green" or "red" when it is a "miss (time saving)".

In the state shown in FIG. 12-32 (D-1), the process of step 059AKS134 in FIG. 12-30 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 12-33 (E), the number of time reductions is displayed as time reduction number notification control. M2 is performed. In this case, since the symbol confirmation command 8F01 shown in FIG. 12-15(B) has been received as the symbol confirmation command, "100 time savings!" is displayed as the time reduction number display M2. In addition, when the process of step 059AKS139 in FIG. 12-30 is executed, as special time reduction number notification control, "time reduction??? times" is displayed and notification of the number of time reduction (number of time reduction) is limited. Bye. Then, when 10 seconds, which is the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F01, has elapsed, as shown in Figure 12-33 (F), the time saving state is controlled and a new variable display (pending display variable display corresponding to HL1) is started. At that time, the hold displays HL3 and HL2 are shifted to the right. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (F), the time saving number display M4 of "99 remaining time saving times" is displayed by the process of step 059AKS122 in FIG. 12-30. Further, in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 12-24, a right-handed hitting instruction display M3 as shown in FIG. 12-33(F) is performed.

Thereafter, variable display will be performed multiple times in the time saving state. FIG. 12-33 (G) shows an example of the 81st variable display after the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed. In the time saving state, since it becomes easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening, a variable display corresponding to the second special figure is performed and a reservation corresponding to the second special figure is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 12-33 (G), the maximum number of four pending memories corresponding to the second special symbol is stored, and four pending displays HR1 to HR4 are displayed. Further, an example is shown in which a time reduction number display M4 of "19 time reductions remaining" is displayed. Note that the right-hitting instruction display in the form shown in Figure 12-33 (F) ends with the first variable display after the time-saving symbol stops displaying, and from the second time onwards, ), it is displayed as a right-hitting instruction display M3 in a manner that does not interfere with other effects.

Then, when the 100th variable display (100th variation in the time saving state) after the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed ends, the time saving state ends. Figure 12-33 (H) is an example where decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols constituting a non-reach combination, are stopped and displayed in the 100th variable display after the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed. It shows. After the final stop symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra are stopped and displayed, the variation ends 0.5 seconds after the final symbol display period specified by the 8F00 symbol confirmation command, and the time saving state ends. When the time saving state ends, in order to receive a right-handed erase command from the main board 11 side, the process of step 059AKS136 shown in FIG. 12-30 is performed, and as shown in FIG. 12-33 (H), the right-handed The instruction display M3 will be erased. In addition, in this state, as shown in the figure, the maximum number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure is stored, four, and four pending displays HR1 to HR4 are displayed, and the variable corresponding to the pending display HR1 is displayed. The period from the start of the display to the end of the variable display corresponding to HR4 is the remaining pending period).

Subsequently, the time saving state ends and the normal state is entered, and as shown in FIG. 12-33(I), a variable display corresponding to the hold display HR1 is started. Note that the illustrated example shows an example where the variable display result is a "loss" (an example is also shown where it is not a "loss (time saving)"). In the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, although it is in the normal state, the special figure display result becomes "lose (time saver)" in the variable display corresponding to the hold of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saver state. Since the ratio is high (see FIGS. 12-5(A) and (B)), the ratio of being controlled to the time saving state again is high. Therefore, during the remaining reservation period, although it is in the normal state, the left-handed hitting instruction display will not be displayed as shown in the figure, and the player will be confused because the right-handed hitting instruction display and the left-handed hitting instruction display will be repeated. This prevents this from happening. Note that the left-handed hitting instruction display is performed in the first variable display performed after the end of the remaining reservation period, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (N-2).

This variable display is the first variable display in the second special figure that was performed after the end of the time reduction, and since the execution setting for the return effect was made in the process of step 059AKS108 in FIG. 12-26, the return effect is When the period comes, a return effect is executed as shown in FIG. 12-34 (J). In the return performance, for example, depending on whether or not a predetermined mission is cleared, it is determined whether or not a hold is stored in which the special figure display result is a "loss (time saving)" (variable corresponding to HR2 to HR4 which are remaining holds). It is only necessary to perform an effect that suggests whether the display result will be a "loss (time saving)", that is, whether the time saving return symbol will be stopped and displayed. If it is a return success pattern, the predetermined mission is cleared and the time-saving return symbol is stopped and displayed, while if it is a return failure pattern, the predetermined mission ends in failure and the time-saving return symbol is not stopped and displayed. It is only necessary that the combination of decorative symbols constituting the reach is displayed as the final stop. Further, there may be a plurality of types of predetermined missions, and the success rate may differ depending on the type of the mission. Note that if the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR1 is "lost (time saving)", it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS101 of FIG. 12-26, so the return effect is not executed, but the return effect is executed. You may also do so. In this case, the time saving effect may be executed after the return effect.

If a hold is stored in which the special figure display result is "lost (time saving)", that is, if it is a return success pattern, the process in step 059AKS110 in FIG. 12-26 causes the display to change to FIG. As shown, a combination of decorative symbols including the time-saving return symbol 5Cc as the final stop symbol is displayed in a stopped state, and it is notified that there is a pending among the stored pending that has a variable display result of "loss (time-saving)". be done. Note that this example shows a case where the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold display HR4 is "loss (time saving)" (more specifically, the time saving type of "time saving D").

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (L-1), a variable display corresponding to the hold display HR2 is executed. At this time, as shown in the figure, the time-saving return small symbol M5 that makes it visible that the time-saving return symbol 5Cc is stopped and displayed may be displayed in a manner that does not interfere with other effects. According to this, it becomes possible to visually recognize that the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed while the remaining balance is on hold, so it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

Then, in the variable display corresponding to the pending display HR4, the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the pending display HR4 is "loss (time saving)" (the time saving type is "time saving D"), so the symbol confirmation command is The symbol confirmation command of 8F04 shown in Figure 12-15 (B) is received, and as shown in Figure 12-34 (M-1), the time saving symbol 5Cb of the time saving type of "Time saving D" is stopped as the final stop symbol. Is displayed. Regarding the special figure display result, unlike in Figure 12-32 (D-1), a special symbol indicating the number "8" corresponding to the time saving symbol of the time saving type of "time saving D" is displayed as the special symbol display result. Ru. In the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display AHA changes to a "green" display mode before the time-saving symbol 5Cb is stopped and displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 12-34 (M-1), by executing the process of step 059AKS134 in FIG. 12-30, as shown in FIG. The number of times display M2 is performed. In this case, since the symbol confirmation command 8F04 shown in FIG. 12-15(B) has been received as the symbol confirmation command, "20 time savings!" is displayed as the time reduction number display M2. Then, when 2 seconds, which is the confirmed symbol display period specified by the symbol confirmation command of 8F04, has elapsed, the fluctuation ends, and as shown in Figure 12-35 (O), the time saving state is controlled and the new symbol is displayed. A variable display (a variable display corresponding to the pending display HL3) is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-35(O), the time saving number display M4 of "19 remaining time saving times" is displayed by the process of step 059AKS122 in FIG. 12-30. Further, at step 059AKS090 in FIG. 12-24, as shown in FIG. 12-35(O), a right-hand hitting instruction display M3 in a simple mode that is less conspicuous than the mode shown in FIG. 12-33(F) is displayed. be done.

On the other hand, if there is no storage in which the special figure display result is "lost (time saving)", that is, if it is a recovery failure pattern, then the process of step 059AKS111 in FIG. 12-34 (K-2 ), the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra of the reach combination are stopped and displayed as the final stop symbols, and the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the confirmed symbol display period specified by the 8F00 symbol confirmation command. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (L-2), a variable display corresponding to the hold display HR2 is executed. At this time, since it was a return performance of a return failure pattern, the time-saving return small symbol M5 is not displayed, unlike in FIG. 12-34 (L-1).

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (M-2), the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination, are stopped and displayed, and the final symbols specified by the 8F00 symbol confirmation command are displayed. The fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the display period, and the remaining hold period ends. When the remaining reservation period ends, a left-handed batting instruction command is transmitted from the main board 11 in step 059AKS074 of FIG. 12-18.

Then, when the variable display corresponding to the hold display HL3 is started, the process of step 059AKS088 in FIG. 12-24 causes the message "Please return to left-handed hitting!" to be displayed as shown in FIG. 12-34 (N-2). A left-handed batting instruction display M6 is displayed. In this way, the left-hand hit instruction display is performed in the variable display that is executed next after the variable display corresponding to the reservation (remaining reservation) of the second special symbol remaining after the end of the time reduction is completed.

FIG. 12-36 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing within the information output processing performed in the information output processing of step S23 in FIG. The processing in the information output processing shown in FIG. 12-36 includes processing for outputting signals such as jackpot information, starting information, probability fluctuation information, etc., which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. I do. When the information output process shown in FIG. 12-36 is started, the CPU 103 outputs a signal indicating the special figure display result or the general figure display result as a display signal output process (step S1801). After executing the process in step S1801, the CPU 103 executes a drive signal output process (step S1802), and outputs a drive signal for the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82.

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes external information output processing (step S1803), and ends the processing within the information output processing. In step S1803, a jackpot signal 1 indicating that a jackpot is in progress, a jackpot signal 2 indicating that a jackpot is in progress or in a time-saving state (a special prize is in progress), a jackpot signal 3 indicating that a time-saving state is in progress, and Various signals such as a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the variation has ended are output.

FIG. 12-37 is a timing chart showing the output timing of various signals output in the external information output process in step S1803 of FIG. 12-36. Specifically, FIG. 12-37 (A) shows the output timing of various signals when the time-saving state is entered due to the end of the jackpot game state, and FIG. 12-37 (B) shows the output timing of various signals when the time-saving state is entered due to the stop of the time-saving symbols. It shows the output timing of various signals in the case where the following occurs.

As shown in FIG. 12-37 (A), when the time saving state occurs due to the end of the jackpot gaming state, first, a symbol confirmation signal indicating the stop of the jackpot symbol is output, and then (the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped). ), jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 are output at the same timing. Then, in accordance with the end of the jackpot game state, the jackpot signal 1 stops outputting, but at that timing, the time saving state is entered, so the jackpot signal 3 is output. Then, as time passes, a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the losing symbol has stopped is output, and when the symbol confirmation signal indicating that the jackpot symbol has stopped is output again without the time saving state ending, the jackpot signal 1 is output, and the jackpot signal 3 is output. stops output. Note that since this is a jackpot during the time saving state, the jackpot signal 2 continues to be output as shown in the figure. Then, in accordance with the end of the jackpot game state, the jackpot signal 1 stops outputting, but at that timing, the time saving state is entered, so the jackpot signal 3 is output. After that, as time passes, when the last variable display of the predetermined number of time-savings ends, a symbol confirmation signal indicating the stop of a losing symbol is output, and the time-saving state ends at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal stops. , output of jackpot signal 2 and jackpot signal 3 is stopped at the same timing.

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 12-37 (B), when the time saving symbol is stopped and the time saving state is entered, first, a symbol confirmation signal indicating the time saving symbol stop is output, and then (the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped). ), jackpot signal 2 and jackpot signal 3 are output at the same timing. Then, as time passes, a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the losing symbol has stopped is output, and if the symbol confirmation signal indicating that the jackpot symbol has stopped is output without the time saving state ending, the jackpot occurs at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal stops. At the same time as the signal 1 is output, the output of the jackpot signal 3 is stopped. Then, in accordance with the end of the jackpot game state, the jackpot signal 1 stops outputting, but at that timing, the time saving state returns again, so the jackpot signal 3 will be output. In addition, as shown in the figure, the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output. After that, as time passes, when the last variable display of the predetermined number of time-savings ends, a symbol confirmation signal indicating the stop of a losing symbol is output, and the time-saving state ends at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal stops. , output of jackpot signal 2 and jackpot signal 3 is stopped at the same timing. In this way, since the output of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 is stopped at the same timing, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of discrepancies and prevent confusion, and also to use external equipment to suitably save time and connect. It is possible to identify the state of affairs. After that, when the symbol confirmation signal indicating the time saving symbol stop is output again, the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are output at the same timing at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped.

As explained above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 having the characteristic part 059AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

In the process of step S1240 shown in FIG. 12-4, the CPU 103 can determine "loss (time saving)" as the special figure display result regardless of whether the gaming state is in the time saving state, and the special figure display result If "Loss (time saving)" (special display result) is derived and displayed, in the normal state, the next special map game (variable display) will be controlled to the time saving state (travel-specific state), and the time saving state will be changed. When the game is in the current state, control regarding the gaming state based on the derivation and display of the "loss (time saving)" is not performed (no new time saving control is performed). In addition, when "Loss (time saving)" is derived and displayed as a special symbol display result, in the normal state, the performance control CPU 120 sets the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol as the time saving symbol in step 059 AKS106 of FIG. 12-26. While the final stop symbols constituting the ready-to-win combination are stopped and displayed, if the time is shortened, the final stop symbols constituting the ready-to-win combination are stopped and displayed in step 059AKS111 of FIG. 12-26. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-32 (B-2) and (D-1), a "loss (time saving)" (special display result) is displayed depending on whether the gaming state is normal or time saving. The special figure display result is a common display result (the special figure display result showing the number "1" corresponding to the time saving type of "time saving A"), while the variable display result of the decorative pattern is different from the game state. When is in the normal state, the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbols in step 059AKS106 of FIG. 12-26, while when the time-saving symbol is in the time-saving state, the reach The final stop symbols constituting the combination are stopped and displayed. According to this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

In addition, in the process of step 059AKS104 in FIG. 12-26, execution settings of a time-saving effect that incites whether or not a time-saving symbol indicating that the time-saving state will be controlled from the next variable display are stopped and displayed are performed. Then, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the time-saving excitement performance. Then, the performance control CPU 120 performs the processing of step 059AKS104 when the gaming state is the normal state, and does not perform the processing of step 059AKS104 when the gaming state is the time saving state. Therefore, when in a time-saving state (special state), the time-saving promotion effect is not performed. According to this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

In addition, when "Loss (time saving)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special figure display result, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 12-15, in the process of step 059 AKS043, While transmitting the decorative pattern stop command with the fixed time shown in FIG. 12-15(B), if it is determined Yes in step 059AKS041, the decorative pattern stop command with the fixed time of 0.5 seconds is transmitted. In other words, when a "loss (time saving)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as a special figure display result, the variable display result is displayed until it is confirmed in the normal state and in the special state. The times (determined times) are different. According to this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

In addition, in the process of step S1240 shown in FIG. 12-4, the CPU 103 can determine "loss (time saving)" as the special figure display result regardless of whether the gaming state is the time saving state or not. When "Loss (time saving)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the display result, when it is in the normal state, the next special map game (variable display) will be controlled to the time saving state (travel-specific state). , when in the time-saving state, control regarding the gaming state based on the derivation and display of the "loss (time-saving)" is not performed (no new time-saving control is performed). And, as shown in FIG. 12-5, between the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the second special figure display result determination table is better than the first special figure display result determination table. The decision data is assigned so that there is a high probability that the next variable display will be controlled to the time saving state. In addition, the production control CPU 120 returns based on whether or not a "loss (time saving)" pending is stored in the pending stored at the end of the time saving state through the process of step 059AKS108 in FIG. 12-26. It is possible to perform the performance. Then, the performance control CPU 120 can display a right-handed hitting instruction in the process of step 059AKS090 in FIG. 12-24, and until it receives the left-handed hitting instruction command transmitted in step 059AKS074 in FIG. 12-18, The left-handed hit instruction display is not performed until all the variable displays corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special figure stored at the end of the time saving state are completed. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, by receiving a left-handed instruction command in the normal state, the performance control CPU 120 can display a left-handed instruction display in step 059AKS088 of FIG. 12-24. Then, the left hitting instruction command is transmitted in step 059AKS074 of FIG. 12-18, that is, when all the variable displays corresponding to the hold of the second special symbol stored at the end of the time saving state are completed. The performance control CPU 120 displays the left-handed instruction display in step 059AKS088 of FIG. 12-24 in the variable display performed after receiving the left-handed instruction command, that is, after the variable display corresponding to the remaining reservation ends. . According to this, suitable firing notification can be made and the game can proceed smoothly.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a different right-hand hitting instruction command depending on whether or not it is the remaining reservation period, as in the processing of steps 059AKS054 and 059AKS057 in FIG. 12-16. Then, on the side of the performance control CPU 120, in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 12-24, a right hit instruction display is performed in a manner corresponding to the received command. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being bothered and losing interest in the game.

In the return performance, for example, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hold is stored in which the special figure display result is a "loss (time saving)" depending on whether or not a predetermined mission is cleared (remaining hold HR2 ~Whether or not the variable display result corresponding to HR4 will be a "loss (time-saving)"), that is, whether the time-saving return symbol will be stopped and displayed. The return performance includes a return performance for a successful return pattern and a return performance for a return failure pattern, and both have the same performance (for example, the purpose is to clear a predetermined mission to see whether or not the time will be shortened again). The combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed differs depending on whether or not a predetermined mission is cleared as a result. According to this, the player's attention can be drawn to what happens after the common performance is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-7, when the variable display result of the remaining reservation is "loss (time saving)", the CPU 103 determines "time saving C" or "time saving D" as the time saving type. Then, in the process of step 059AKS113 of FIG. 12-27, the performance control CPU 120 determines a time-saving performance pattern for executing different patterns of time-saving performance according to the time-saving type, as shown in FIG. 12-28. In other words, the time-saving inciting effect that is executed when the variable display result corresponding to the first special figure in the normal state is "losing (time saving)" and the variable display result corresponding to the remaining pending second special figure is "losing". (time saving)'' is executed, and a different pattern of time-saving promotion performance is executed. According to this, different patterns of performances are executed depending on the situation, so that the game can be more interesting.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a right-hitting erasure command in the variable display of the time-saving end time through the process of step 059AKS066 in FIG. 12-17. Then, the performance control CPU 120 erases the right hit instruction display based on the command at the end of the variable display of the time saving end time by the process of step 059AKS136 of FIG. 12-30. Therefore, the right hit instruction display is erased during the remaining hold period. In addition, the CPU 103 transmits different right-hand hitting instruction commands depending on whether or not it is the remaining reservation period, as in the processing of steps 059AKS054 and 059AKS057 in FIG. 12-16. Then, on the side of the performance control CPU 120, in the first variable display to be controlled to the time-saving state (the variable display performed next to the variable display in which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed), in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 12-24, the relevant A right-handed hitting instruction is displayed in a manner according to the received command. According to this, suitable firing notification can be made and the game can proceed smoothly.

In addition, through the process of step S1803 in FIG. 12-36, the CPU 103 generates a jackpot signal 1 indicating that a jackpot is in progress, a jackpot signal 2 indicating that a jackpot is in progress or in a time-saving state (a special prize is in progress), and a time-saving signal. Various signals such as a jackpot signal 3 indicating that the game is in progress and a pattern confirmation signal indicating that the variation has ended can be outputted to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1. Then, when the time-saving symbol stops and the time-saving state occurs, as shown in Figure 12-37 (B), a symbol confirmation signal indicating the time-saving symbol stop is output, and a jackpot signal is issued at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped. is output. According to this, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state or the consecutive home use state using the external device.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-37(B), at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal corresponding to the end of the time saving state is stopped, the CPU 103 outputs the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 at the same timing. Stop. According to this, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state or the consecutive use state using the external device.

Further, the CPU 103 determines a fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12-12. As shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "Loss (time saving)" (special display result) (when the losing fluctuation pattern determination table when the time saving start flag is on is selected), the Super Reach A with the highest jackpot expectation is selected. No decision value is assigned, and decision values are assigned so that the percentage of "losses (time saving)" differs depending on the type of super reach executed. Then, the CPU 103 transmits different right-hand hitting instruction commands depending on whether or not it is the remaining reservation period, as in steps 059AKS054 and 059AKS057 of FIG. 12-16. Then, on the side of the performance control CPU 120, in the first variable display to be controlled to the time-saving state (the variable display performed next to the variable display in which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed), in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 12-24, the relevant A right-handed hitting instruction is displayed in a manner according to the received command. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-11 and 11-12, when the reach effect of Super Reach B or Super Reach C is executed, there will be a case where it will be a jackpot, a case where it will be a loss (time saving), a case where it will simply be a loss. Decision values are assigned so as to result in a plurality of variable display results. According to this, it is possible to increase the variation of performance results and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a variation pattern specification command indicating the determined variation pattern and a display result specification command indicating the determined special figure display result (variable display result), and the production control CPU 120 performs production based on these commands. . For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the received variation pattern designation command is a variable pattern for performing a reach effect of Super Reach B, and even if the determination is No in step S552 of FIG. 12-24, the display Based on the result specifying command, whether or not to execute the processing in step 059AKS104 and step 059AKS106 differs depending on whether the determination is Yes or No in 059AKS101 of FIG. 12-26. That is, even when receiving a variation pattern command with a common performance content such as executing a super reach B or super reach C reach effect, different effects are executed depending on the content of the display result designation command. According to this, it is possible to increase the variation of performance results and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the process of step 059AKS104 in FIG. 12-26, the execution setting of the time-saving promotion effect (special production) that incites whether or not the time-saving symbol indicating that the time-saving state will be controlled from the next variable display is stopped or not is displayed. By performing this, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the time-saving excitement performance. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes the time-saving promotion performance after executing the common reach performance whether the time-saving promotion performance is executed or not. According to this, since a special performance is executed, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figure 12-12, the rate at which the variable display result is "loss (time-saving)" differs depending on the type of reach effect that is executed. The execution rate differs depending on the type of reach effect. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special performance from being executed excessively, and it is possible to maintain expectations for a specific display result.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-12 (B), regarding the fluctuation pattern of time-saving tricks where the variable display result does not become "loss (time-saving)" even if the time-saving promotion effect is executed, there are cases where the jackpot expectation level such as super reach C is A low reach effect is executed. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving promotion effect is executed differs depending on the type of ready-to-reach effect to be executed, and the rate at which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed as a result of the execution of the time-saving promotion effect also differs. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special performance from being executed excessively, and it is possible to maintain expectations for a specific display result.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display mode so that the rate at which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed differs even in the same type of super reach reach performance depending on which display mode the active display changes to. Change the display mode of active display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the special performance from being executed excessively, and it is possible to maintain expectations for a specific display result.

In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a variation pattern specification command indicating the determined variation pattern and a display result specification command indicating the determined special figure display result (variable display result), and the production control CPU 120 performs production based on these commands. . For example, even if the content of the received display result designation command is different, if the received variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that performs the reach performance of Super Reach B, the performance control CPU 120 controls the special figure display result (variable A common reach effect of super reach B is executed regardless of the display result). According to this, the performance can be suitably executed.

In addition, as shown in Figure 12-7, the number of times the time saving state is controlled differs depending on the time saving type, and as shown in Figure 12-12, the number of times the time saving state is controlled is different depending on the time saving type. The proportions are different. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-28, the patterns of the time-saving effect that are executed differ depending on the time-saving type. According to this, the number of subsequent time reductions differs depending on the performance executed, so it is possible to attract the attention of the players.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command in step S268 of FIG. 12-8, and sets the transmission of a decorative pattern stop command in step 059AKS021 of FIG. 12-15. The performance control CPU 120 performs performance execution settings based on the contents of the received display result designation command in the stop symbol setting process of FIG. Set the number of time saving specified by. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform production control.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 checks the content of the production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 in the process of step 059AKS090A in FIG. Determine whether or not the data has been received normally. If it cannot be received normally, execute the process for missing data shown in Figure 12-25, and if either the display result specification command or the fluctuation pattern specification command is missed. , Prohibits execution of time-saving effects such as time-saving promotion effects, such as stopping and displaying a predetermined decorative pattern when the item is missed. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform the performance while preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 determines that the fluctuation pattern specification command cannot be received normally in the process of step 059AKS090A in FIG. If the fluctuation pattern is a time-saving confirmation fluctuation pattern or a time-saving fake fluctuation pattern, by executing the stop symbol setting process in step 059AKS095 of FIG. 12-25, a performance related to the time-saving state, such as a time-saving incitement performance, for example, is executed. It is possible. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform the performance while preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 specifies the number of time reductions based on the received symbol confirmation command in the process of step 059AKS133 in FIG. 12-30. If the symbol confirmation command cannot be received normally, execution of the time saving number notification is performed by performing special time saving number notification control that displays "??? times" as the time saving number notification in the process of step 059AKS139. Restrict. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform the performance while preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a pending display change performance in the prefetch notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-22. Then, in step 059AKS082, the variable display result in the currently stored pending memory is a pending that is a "jackpot", a pending that is a "loss (time saving)", and a pending that is a "loss" and the fluctuation pattern is a "time saving fake". If the suspension of the fluctuation pattern is stored, the limit suspension change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23(B) is selected and the suspension display change effect is executed. That is, when a hold whose variable display result is "loss (time saving)" is stored in the currently stored hold memory, the execution of the hold display change performance is restricted. According to this, it is possible to perform control according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the pending memory currently stored in step 059 AKS082, there are pendings where the variable display result is a "jackpot", a pending where the result is a "loss (time saving)", and a pending where the variable display result is a "loss" and the fluctuation pattern is a "time saving fake". If the hold of the fluctuation pattern is stored, the limit hold change determination table shown in Figure 12-23(B) is selected and the hold display change effect is executed. Even when a hold whose display result is a "jackpot" is stored, the same holds as in the case where a hold whose variable display result is a "loss (time saving)" is stored in the currently stored hold memory, as shown in FIG. -23(B) is selected to limit the execution of the hold display change effect by selecting the hold change determination table shown in (B). According to this, it is possible to suppress deviations in performance due to state transitions and prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

In addition, in the pending memory currently stored in step 059 AKS082, there are pendings where the variable display result is a "jackpot", a pending where the result is a "loss (time saving)", and a pending where the variable display result is a "loss" and the fluctuation pattern is a "time saving fake". If the hold of the fluctuation pattern is stored, the limit hold change determination table shown in Figure 12-23(B) is selected and the hold display change effect is executed. Even when the display result is "lost" and the variation pattern is stored as "time-saving crap", the execution of the pending display change performance is restricted. According to this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a performance related to the state transition is performed.

As shown in FIG. 12-23 (B), the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the pending display change performance when the pending display change performance is limited, or even if it is executed, the pending display change in the display mode of "blue" is executed. Execute the performance. In other words, a pending display change effect that indicates an expectation higher than the "green" display mode is not executed. According to this, it is possible to suppress deviations in performance due to state transitions and prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-23 (B), the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the type of pending display change performance that changes the display mode to "green" or "red" when the pending display change performance is limited. . According to this, since the execution of a specific type of preview performance is restricted, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unnecessary anticipation.

(Modified example of characteristic part 059AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-5, an example was shown in which the time-saving symbols as a special symbol display result are part of the "loss", but this is just an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-38, some of the small winning symbols may be made into time-saving symbols. In this case, the time saving control may be performed after the end of the small winning game state, and a right hit instruction display may be performed in the first variable display performed after the end of the small winning gaming state. In addition, similarly to the above embodiment, even if the small hit symbol, which is a time-saving symbol, is stopped and displayed again in the special figure game in the time-saving state, the time-saving state is not newly controlled, and the performance control CPU 120 Instead of the small winning symbols including the time-saving symbols, it is sufficient to simply stop and display the combination of decorative symbols constituting the small winning.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when all the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reservations are finished, a left-handed instruction command is transmitted in the process of step 059AKS074 in FIG. 12-18, and the production control CPU 120 Although an example has been shown in which a left-handed hitting instruction display is performed in the first variable display after the end of the variable display corresponding to There may be a second mode that is not noticeable to the player, and the second mode of left-handed hitting instruction display may be performed in the first variable display after the end of the variable display corresponding to the remaining balance. Note that the left-handed batting instruction display is performed for 5 seconds each time from the reception of the left-handed batting instruction command until the variable display is performed, for example, four times, but as time passes, the display changes from the second mode to You may change to a 1st aspect. Further, the left-handed hitting instruction display is not limited to a simple display, and may include sound, lighting of a lamp, etc. (that is, it may be a left-handed hitting notification that notifies the player of left-handed hitting). For example, in the first mode, the sound notifying the left-handed player is output by erasing other output sounds, while in the second mode, the sound notifying the left-handed player is output without erasing the other output sounds. do it.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a return effect is performed when the variable display (fluctuation) corresponds to the first (first) second special figure performed after the end of the time reduction, but this is just an example. It is. The execution timing of the return performance is not limited to the first variable display after the end of the time reduction. For example, if any of the reservations in the reservation memory corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol stored after the end of the time reduction is a "loss (time reduction)" ”, one of the timings of the first to third variable displays performed after the end of the time reduction may be determined by lottery as the execution timing of the return performance. In addition, after executing the return performance of the return failure pattern, the pattern switches to the return success pattern, and after the execution of the return performance of the return failure pattern, the return performance of the return success pattern is performed in the next variable display, etc. Multiple recovery regressions may be performed throughout the display until a successful pattern is reached.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the pattern of the time-saving effect that is executed depending on the time-saving type is different, that is, a case where the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reservation is "loss (time-saving)" (time-saving C or D We have shown an example in which the pattern of the time-saving promotion effect differs depending on the type and the case where the variable display result of the first special figure during the normal state is "loss (time-saving)" (time-saving types of time-saving A and B), This is an example.The case where the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reservation is "Loss (time saving)" and the case where the variable display result of the first special symbol during the normal state is "Loss (Time saver)". , the pattern of time-saving promotion may be common.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-15, when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reservation is "lost (time saving)" (time saving type C or D) and during the normal state, An example in which the time from when the variable display result is displayed until it is confirmed (confirmation time) differs depending on the case where the variable display result of the first special drawing is a "loss (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving A or B) is shown, but this is just an example. When the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reservation is "Loss (time saving)" (time saving type C or D), and the variable display result of the first special map during normal state is "Loss (time saving)" The fixed time may be the same depending on the case (time saving type A or B). According to this, it is possible to suppress the control data from increasing.

For example, the confirmation time when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reservation is "Loss (time saving)" is the same as when the variable display result of the first special symbol during the normal state is "Loss (time saving)". It can also be used as time. According to this, by lengthening the period between the normal state and the time saving state, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the time saving state will be entered.

In addition, when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reservation is "Loss (time saving)" (Time saving type C or D), the variable display result of the first special map during the normal state is "Loss (Time saving)" Examples (Figure 12-35 (N-1), Figure 12-33 (E)) of reporting the number of time reductions in a common manner at the fixed time in the case where (time reduction type A and B) are shown. However, these may be in different embodiments.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, an example was shown in which the right-hand hitting instruction display is erased after the time-saving state ends, and the right-hand hitting instruction display is not performed during the remaining pending period, but this is just an example. The right-handed hitting instruction display is not limited to a mere display, and may include a sound, lighting of a lamp, etc. (In other words, it is sufficient if it is a right-handed hitting notification that notifies the right-handed hitting), and during the remaining reservation period, an image display For example, a right-handed lamp indicating that the player is playing right-handed may be turned on without displaying or outputting sound on the device 5.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-37(B), when the last variable display of the predetermined time saving number is completed, a symbol confirmation signal indicating the stop of a losing symbol is output, and the symbol is confirmed. Since the time saving state ends at the timing when the output of the signal stops, an example has been shown in which the output of the jackpot signal 3 is stopped at the timing, but this is just an example. For example, since the variable display result corresponding to the hold (remaining hold) of the second special symbol stored at the end of the time saver has a high rate of "loss (time saver)", even when the time saver ends, the remaining The output of the jackpot signal 3 may not be stopped until the variable display corresponding to the hold is finished. The same applies to the jackpot signal 2. According to this, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state or the consecutive use state using the external device.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example has been shown in which the time-saving promotion performance is performed after the super-reach performance and it is suggested whether or not the time-saving symbols will stop, but this is just an example. For example, as a result of the reach effect, the results of jackpot (including small win), time-saving symbol stop, and loss may be displayed. According to this, variations in the execution results of the ready-to-win performance can be increased, and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when the variable display result is "loss (time saving)", the time saving effect period is added to the variable pattern. A display result is provided, the same variation pattern as when the variable display result is "loss (time saving)" can be selected, and a revival performance period to be executed after the reach performance is added (for example, 20 seconds), and a jackpot is configured after the revival performance. The symbols (special symbols and corresponding decorative symbols) may be stopped and displayed. According to this, it is possible to increase the variety of performances and improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, if the variable display result is "resurrection jackpot", it is only necessary to execute the process of adding the resurrection performance period after step S262 in FIG. 12-8, and it is possible to increase the variation of the performance with a simple process. can.

In the above embodiment, an example is performed in which a super reach reach effect is used to incite whether or not the variable display result will be a jackpot, and then a time saving incitement effect is performed to incite whether or not time saving symbols will be stopped and displayed. However, in addition to this, for example, in a time-saving promotion, in addition to whether or not the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed, there are also other advantages that go beyond time-saving, such as whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. You may be notified of this. According to this, it is possible to maintain the expectation that a specific display result will be obtained.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the symbol confirmation command cannot be received normally in step S809 and step 059AKS137 of FIG. If it is a confirmed command, an example has been shown in which the notification of the number of time reductions is limited by performing special time reduction number notification control in which "??? times" is displayed as the number of time reductions in step 059AKS139. The background image may be changed according to the number of time reductions, so that the player can specify the number of time reductions to a certain extent even when special time reduction number notification control is performed. Specifically, the main board 11 side sends a background designation command according to the number of remaining time reductions, and the production control board 12 side displays the background image specified by the received background designation command. do it. According to this, the player can specify the number of time reductions to a certain extent based on the background image, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, each time the variable display is executed, a time reduction number designation command indicating the remaining time reduction number is transmitted from the main board 11 side, and the production control board 12 side transmits the remaining time reduction number designation command according to the time reduction number designation command. The number of times may be notified. According to this, even if the special time reduction number notification control is performed, the player can specify the remaining number of time reductions, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. For example, if the number of time reductions is 100 times, a special fluctuation pattern may be sent from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side at the timing when 50 times remain. On the other hand, in response to receiving the special variation pattern, the user may notify the remaining 50 time saving times. According to this, even if the special time reduction number notification control is performed, the player can specify the remaining number of time reductions, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, the variable display result in the pending memory currently stored in step 059AKS082 of FIG. , and when a suspension of a variation pattern with a variation pattern of "time-saving trick" is stored, an example of selecting the limit-time suspension change determination table shown in FIG. 12-23(B) and executing a suspension display change effect, i.e. , if a hold whose variable display result is a "loss (time saving)" is stored in the currently stored hold memory or a hold whose variable display result is a "jackpot" is stored, the hold shown in FIG. Although an example has been shown in which the common limit-time hold change determination table shown in 23(B) is selected and the execution of the hold display change effect is restricted, this is just one example. There are differences between the case where a hold whose variable display result is a "loss (time saving)" is stored in the currently stored hold memory and the case where a hold whose variable display result is a "jackpot" is stored. The execution of the hold display change performance may be restricted by selecting the limit hold change determination table. For example, on the one hand, a pre-read preview effect of the pending display change effect may be executed, and on the other hand, a pre-read preview effect of the dialogue preview may be executed. In this case, it is sufficient to perform a type of performance with a low level of expectation. In addition, if a hold is stored in the currently stored hold memory where the variable display result is a "loss (time saving)", the hold display change effect will not be executed and the variable display result will be a "jackpot". If a hold is stored, whether or not to execute a hold change performance may be determined based on a hold change determination table that does not have a display mode of "green" or higher shown in FIG. 12-23(B).

In addition, in the above embodiment, the variable display result in the pending memory currently stored in step 059AKS082 of FIG. If the suspension of the fluctuation pattern of "Loss" and the fluctuation pattern of "Time-saving crap" is stored, select the limit suspension change determination table shown in Figure 12-23 (B) and set the expectation level of "Green" or higher. Although an example is shown in which the pending display change effect is not executed, this is just an example. For example, in addition to the pending display change performance as a pre-reading notice performance, multiple types of pre-reading notice performances such as dialogue notices and pre-reading zone notices can be executed, and if it is determined Yes in step 059 AKS082 of FIG. It may also be possible not to perform a pre-read preview performance of the zone notice type. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being diverted from the reservation stored before the pre-read preview target.

In the above embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of 7-segment LEDs, and the special symbols include numbers indicating "0" to "9", "-", etc. Although an example represented by a lighting pattern etc. has been shown, this is just one example. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of eight LEDs, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-39, and the special symbol is represented by a lighting combination of these eight LEDs. Good too. Specifically, as shown in the figure, when the variable display result is a "big hit" or "small win", it is indicated by lighting up three of the eight LEDs, and the variable display result is a "loss (time saving)". ” and “loss” may be indicated by lighting of two LEDs.

Further, in the above embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 12-34 (L-1), as shown in FIG. 12-34 (M-1), the "time saving D" Although an example has been shown in which the time saving symbol 5Cb of the time saving type is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol, this is just an example. For example, as shown in Figure 12-40, after the state shown in Figure 12-40 (L-1) (same as Figure 12-34 (L-1)), the time-saving return symbol 5Cc stops displaying. The time-saving return small symbol M5 that is made visible is displayed, and since it has already been announced that the time-saving symbol will stop during the remaining hold period, the decorative symbol M5 is displayed as shown in Figure 12-40 (M-3). The variable display may be reduced and displayed (as a reduced symbol M8), and the result display M7, which is the result of whether or not the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, may be displayed in a large size in the center of the image display device 5. According to this, it is possible to add variety to the game and improve the interest in the game. In addition, since it has already been reported that the time-saving symbols will stop during the remaining pending period, the execution of the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display may be restricted during the remaining pending period. Restrictions may include not executing, executing in a manner with low expectations, or executing in an inconspicuous manner such as making the display smaller or transparent.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 059AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to feature part 059AK is:
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result,
a state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) capable of controlling to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state;
A production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172, etc.) capable of executing a production corresponding to the variable display,
The state control means includes:
If a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a "lost (time-saving)" special figure display result, etc.) is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, based on the special display result, the normal control from the state to the special state (for example, executing the process of step 059AKS025),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the special state, no control is performed based on the special display result (for example, if it is determined Yes in step 059AKS006, the process in step 059AKS006A is not executed),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the effect execution means can execute different effects depending on the normal state and the special state (for example, by performing the processing in step 059AKS092). ),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
As the variable display, the identification information is displayed variably, and in response to the variable display of the identification information, the production identification information is also variably displayed (for example, the variable display of the first special figure and the second special figure, the variable display of the decorative pattern, etc.). (e.g. variable display),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the identification information common to the normal state and the special state is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-32 (B-2) and As shown in (D-1), the special figure display result as "Lose (time saving)" (special display result) when the gaming state is normal state and when the time saving state is the common display result ( (e.g., a special figure display result showing the number “1” which is a time-saving symbol of the time-saving type of “time-saving A”), the presentation identification information that is different between the normal state and the special state. (For example, regarding the variable display result of decorative symbols, if the gaming state is the normal state, in step 059AKS106 of FIG. 12-26, the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbols, while the time-saving symbol is When the state is, the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is stopped and displayed in step 059AKS111 of FIG. 12-26),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
When in the normal state, the performance execution means can execute a special performance that suggests that the special display result will be displayed as the variable display result (for example, the performance control CPU 120 may If it is determined to be Yes in step 059AKS102, the process in step 059AKS104 is not executed, etc.), and in the special state, the special effect is not executed (for example, if it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS102, the process in step 059AKS104 is not executed, etc.) ),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the time from when the variable display result is displayed to when it is confirmed is different depending on whether the result is in the normal state or the special state (for example, when the result is in the normal state) If so, in the process of step 059AKS043, a decorative pattern stop command with the fixed time shown in FIG. (e.g., sending a decorative pattern stop command to
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 060AK)
The feature section 059AK includes the following feature section 060AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 060AK is:
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result,
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) capable of controlling to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state;
A production execution means (for example, a production control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172, etc.) capable of executing a production corresponding to the variable display,
The state control means includes:
If a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a "lost (time-saving)" special figure display result, etc.) is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, based on the special display result, the normal control from the state to the special state (for example, executing the process of step 059AKS025),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the special state, no control is performed based on the special display result (for example, if it is determined Yes in step 059AKS006, the process in step 059AKS006A is not executed),
As the variable display, first identification information and second identification information are variably displayed, and production identification information is variably displayed in correspondence with the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information. , the ratio of the special display result being displayed is higher in the variable display result of the second identification information than in the variable display result of the first identification information (for example, the first special figure display result determination table and the second special Compared to the figure display result determination table, the second special figure display result determination table has a higher probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "loss (time saving)" and the next variable display will be controlled to a time saving state. , decision data is assigned, etc.),
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether or not the information regarding the variable display stored at the end of the special state includes information in which the variable display result becomes the special display result (for example, it is possible to execute different effects for effect control). The CPU 120 is capable of executing the process of step 059AKS108, etc.),
During the control in the special state, a notification is given to eject gaming media to a specific path in the gaming area (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS090), and the second identification information is stored at the end of the special state. The information regarding the variable display includes information that makes the variable display result the special display result, and when the information that makes the special display result does not include the information, the information is stored at the end of the special state. Until the variable display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information is completed, the notification to fire the game media to a normal route different from the specific route is not issued (for example, if the right Until the hitting instruction display is possible and the left hitting instruction command transmitted in step 059AKS074 is received, that is, until all the variable displays corresponding to the hold of the second special symbol stored at the end of the time saving state are completed. (e.g., not displaying left-handed batting instructions),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The performance execution means is
In a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, notify that game media should be ejected to the normal route (for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS088, etc.);
game media to the normal route in the first variable display of the first identification information that is executed after the variable display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state; (In the variable display that is performed after receiving the left-handed batting instruction command, that is, after the variable display corresponding to the remaining reservation ends, the left-handed batting instruction display is displayed in step 059AKS088, etc.),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, suitable firing notification can be made and the game can proceed smoothly.

(3) The gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The effect execution means stores information when the special display result is displayed as a variable display result of the first identification information in a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, and when the special state ends. In the case where the special display result is displayed as a variable display result corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information, the notification that game media should be fired to the specific route that is performed during control in the special state. The mode is different (for example, right-handed hitting instruction is displayed in a mode according to the command received in step 059AKS090, etc.),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent players from being bothered and losing interest in the game.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The effect executing means is configured to perform the special display when the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state includes information in which the variable display result becomes the special display result. In the variable display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state, in the case where no resultant information is included, after the common effect is executed, a different effect is generated. (For example, there are return performances for a successful return pattern and return performances for a return failure pattern, and both perform a common performance (for example, a performance whose purpose is to clear a predetermined mission). However, as a result, the combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed differs depending on whether or not a certain mission is cleared).
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, the player's attention can be drawn to what happens after the common performance is executed.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The effect execution means stores information when the special display result is displayed as a variable display result of the first identification information in a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, and when the special state ends. The effect when controlled to the special state is different depending on the case where the special display result is displayed as a variable display result corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-28) (e.g., the pattern of the time-saving promotion effect that is executed depending on the time-saving type is different),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, different patterns of performances are executed depending on the situation, so that the game can be more interesting.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
When the special display result is displayed as a variable display result of the first identification information in a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, and when the second identification information is stored at the end of the special state. In the case where the special display result is displayed as a variable display result corresponding to information regarding variable display, the display time of the special display result is the same (for example, the variable display result corresponding to remaining pending is "losing (time saving)"). ” (time saving types such as time saving C and D) and when the variable display result of the first special symbol during the normal state is “Loss (time saving)” (time saving types such as time saving A and B). common time),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in control data.

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The performance execution means is
During execution of the variable display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state, no notification to fire the game media to the specific route is made (for example, the process in step 059AKS136) ),
In the first variable display executed after the special display result is displayed, a notification is given that the game medium should be fired to the specific route (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS090, etc.);
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, suitable firing notification can be made and the game can proceed smoothly.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
a first signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 1) capable of outputting a first signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state;
a second signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 2) capable of outputting a second signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state or the special state;
a third signal output means capable of outputting a third signal in response to being controlled in the special state (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 3);
A fourth signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a symbol confirmation signal) capable of outputting a fourth signal in response to the end of the variable display,
When the special display result is displayed as a variable display result, the fourth signal output means outputs the fourth signal at the end of the variable display, and the third signal output means outputs the third signal. (For example, when the time-saving symbol is stopped due to a time-saving symbol stop, the symbol confirmation signal indicating the time-saving symbol stop is output, as shown in FIG. 12-37 (B), and the timing at which the output of the symbol confirmation signal is stopped. jackpot signal is output),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state or the consecutive home use state using the external device.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
a first signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 1) capable of outputting a first signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state;
a second signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 2) capable of outputting a second signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state or the special state;
A third signal output means (for example, a CPU 103 that outputs a jackpot signal 3) capable of outputting a third signal in response to being controlled in the special state,
The third signal output means continues to output the third signal until the variable display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state ends (time saving). Even if the state ends, the output of the jackpot signal 3 will not be stopped until the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold ends, etc.),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state or the consecutive home use state using the external device.

(10) The gaming machine according to (8) or (9) above,
The output of the second signal and the third signal are stopped at the same time (for example, at the timing when the output of the symbol confirmation signal corresponding to the end of the time saving state is stopped, the output of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 is output at the same time). (stopping at a certain timing, etc.)
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably specify the time saving state or the consecutive home use state using the external device.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 061AK)
The feature section 059AK includes the following feature section 061AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 061AK is:
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result,
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) capable of controlling to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state;
A production execution means (for example, a production control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172, etc.) capable of executing a production corresponding to the variable display,
When a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a special figure display result of "loss (time saving)") is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls the special display result. control from the normal state to the special state based on the above (for example, executing the process of step 059AKS025),
The performance execution means is
A plurality of types of common specific effects can be executed in cases where the variable display result is the specific display result and a case where the variable display result is the special display result (for example, multiple types of reach effects can be executed),
The ratio of the special display results differs depending on which type of specific effects are executed among the plurality of types of specific effects (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-12, depending on the type of super reach, (e.g., the percentage of failures (time savings) differs),
While controlling to the special state, a notification is given that game media should be fired to a specific route in the gaming area, and the game media should be launched to the specific route in the first variable display that is executed after the special display result is displayed. Start notification (for example, display a right-hand hit instruction in a manner corresponding to the command received in step 059AKS090),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect executing means is configured to perform a common specific display result in a case where the variable display result becomes the specific display result, a case where the variable display result becomes the special display result, and a case where the variable display result becomes a predetermined display result that is different from the specific display result and the special display result. It is possible to perform multiple types of effects (for example, as shown in Figures 12-11 and 11-12, if the reach effect of Super Reach B or Super Reach C is executed, it will result in a jackpot or a loss (time saving). (e.g., the decision value is assigned to have multiple variable display results, such as when the result is simply a loss),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, variations in performance results can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Variable display of identification information as the variable display, and variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the identification information (for example, variable display of decorative patterns);
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) that determines the variable display result;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, CPU 103, etc. that executes the process of step S111) for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means;
Command transmitting means for transmitting a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means (for example, (CPU 103, etc.) that transmits a pattern specification command and a display result specification command,
The variable display pattern determining means determines whether the variable display result determined by the determining means is the specific display result, the special display result, or a predetermined display result that is different from the specific display result and the special display result. A common variable display pattern can be determined in each case (for example, it is possible to determine a variable pattern that performs super reach B or super reach C regardless of the variable display result),
variably displaying the production identification information based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmitting means (for example, executing the processing of step S171 and step S172);
When the effect execution means receives a variable display pattern command indicating the common variable display pattern, the effect executing means executes a different effect depending on the type of the received variable display result command (for example, if it is determined No in step S552) Even if 059AKS101 is determined as Yes, different effects will be executed depending on whether it is determined as No),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, variations in performance results can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a special performance that indicates whether or not the special display result will be obtained after performing the specific performance (for example, it is possible to execute a time-saving promotion performance after performing a reach performance of super reach). ),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, since the special performance is executed, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a special performance that suggests whether or not the special display result will be obtained after executing the specific performance, and whether or not the special performance is executed differs depending on the type of the specific performance (for example, (e.g., the rate at which time-saving promotions are performed differs depending on the type of reach production performed),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special performance from being executed excessively, and it is possible to maintain expectations for a specific display result.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect that indicates whether or not the special display result will be obtained after executing the specific effect, and depending on the type of the specific effect, when the special effect is executed, the The proportion of special display results differs (for example, the proportion of time-saving incitement effects that are executed differs depending on the type of reach effect that is executed, and the rate that time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed as a result of the execution of the time-saving incitement effect also differs. different),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special performance from being executed excessively, and it is possible to maintain expectations for a specific display result.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above,
The performance execution means is
It is further possible to perform a predetermined performance different from the specific performance (for example, a performance that changes the display mode of the active display, etc.),
Depending on the execution mode of the predetermined effect, the proportion of the special display result when the specific effect is executed differs (for example, depending on which display mode the active display changes to, the same type of super Even if it is a reach effect, the rate at which time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed is different),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special performance from being executed excessively, and it is possible to maintain expectations for a specific display result.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect that suggests whether or not the special display result will be obtained after executing the specific effect, and executes an effect that notifies the specific display result after executing the special effect. Possible (for example, in a time-saving promotion, in addition to whether or not the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed, it is also reported whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, which is more advantageous than time-saving). ,
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, expectations for a specific display result can be maintained.

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (8) above,
Variable display of identification information as the variable display, and variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the identification information (for example, variable display of decorative patterns);
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) that determines the variable display result;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, CPU 103, etc. that executes the process of step S111) for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means;
Command transmitting means for transmitting a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means (for example, (CPU 103, etc.) that transmits a pattern specification command and a display result specification command,
The variable display pattern determining means determines whether the variable display result determined by the determining means is the specific display result, the special display result, or a predetermined display result that is different from the specific display result and the special display result. A common variable display pattern can be determined in each case (for example, it is possible to determine a variable pattern that performs super reach B or super reach C regardless of the variable display result),
In the variable display of the identification information, the variable display time of the identification information is set based on the variable display result determined by the determining means and the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable display time in step 059AKS013). processing, etc.),
In the variable display of the performance identification information, the variable display time of the performance identification information is specified based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means (for example, performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step S561, etc.),
When the types of the received variable display result commands are different, the effect execution means can execute a common effect if the received variable display pattern command is a variable display pattern command indicating the common variable display pattern. (For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the reach performance of Super Reach B even if the content indicated by the display result specification command is different.)
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, effects can be suitably executed.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (9) above,
There are multiple types of special display results (for example, "time saving A" to "time saving D", etc.),
The state control means is capable of controlling the special state with a different period depending on the type of the special display result (for example, it is capable of controlling the time saving state with a number of working hours depending on the time saving type),
The effect executing means is capable of executing different types of effects depending on the type of the special display result in the variable display resulting in the special display result (for example, the effect of "time saver B" is higher than the time saver type of "time saver A"). The execution rate of Super Reach C is higher in the time-saving type, and the pattern of time-saving promotion effects that are executed depending on the time-saving type is different, etc.)
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, the number of subsequent time reductions differs depending on the performance executed, so it is possible to attract the attention of the players.

(11) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (10) above,
There are multiple types of special display results (for example, "time saving A" to "time saving D", etc.),
The state control means is capable of controlling the special state to have a different period depending on the type of the special display result (for example, can be controlled to the time saving state with a number of working hours depending on the time saving type),
It is possible to transmit a first command indicating the number of variable displays to be executed while controlling the special state, and after transmitting the first command, it is possible to transmit a second command different from the first command (for example, (CPU 103, etc. that transmits a display result designation command in step S268 and sets the transmission of a decorative pattern stop command in step 059AKS021),
The effect execution means determines the effect during the variable display based on the received first command, and specifies the number of times the variable display is executed while the special state is controlled based on the received second command. (For example, in addition to executing an effect according to the contents of the display result specification command, in step 059AKS133, setting the number of time saving specified by the received symbol confirmation command, etc.)
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control the performance.

(12) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (11) above,
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) that determines the variable display result;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, CPU 103, etc. that executes the process of step S111) for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means;
Command transmitting means for transmitting a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means (for example, (CPU 103, etc.) that transmits a pattern specification command and a display result specification command,
The effect executing means executes an effect based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmitting means, and executes an effect based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command, and selects one of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command. If one cannot be received normally, restricting the execution of the performance related to the special state (for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS090B, etc.);
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the performance while preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

(13) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (12) above,
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) that determines the variable display result;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, CPU 103, etc. that executes the process of step S111) for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result of the determining means;
Command transmitting means for transmitting a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determining means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means (for example, (CPU 103, etc.) that transmits a pattern specification command and a display result specification command,
The performance execution means is
Executing an effect based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmitting means (for example, executing the process of step S171),
If the variable display pattern command is normally received but the variable display result is not normally received, the effect related to the special state can be executed when the received variable display pattern command is a specific variable display pattern. Yes (for example, the process of step 059AKS095 can be executed),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the performance while preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

(14) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (13) above,
There are multiple types of special display results,
The state control means is capable of controlling the special state to have a different period depending on the type of the special display result (for example, can be controlled to the time saving state with a number of working hours depending on the time saving type),
It is possible to transmit a first command indicating the number of variable displays to be executed while controlling the special state, and after transmitting the first command, it is possible to transmit a second command different from the first command (for example, (CPU 103, etc. that transmits a display result designation command in step S268 and sets the transmission of a decorative pattern stop command in step 059AKS021),
The effect execution means determines the effect during the variable display based on the received first command, and notifies the number of times the variable display is executed while the special state is controlled based on the received second command. , if the second command cannot be received normally, the notification of the number of variable displays executed during control in the special state is limited (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step 059AKS139, etc.);
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the performance while preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 062AK)
The feature section 059AK includes the following feature section 062AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 062AK is:
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103, etc.) that controls the progress of the game,
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance based on a performance control command),
The game control means is
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110) that determines the advantageous state;
A determining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S213) that determines that the advantageous state will be reached before the determination by the determining means;
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) capable of controlling to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state;
Information transmitting means capable of transmitting a plurality of types of information to the effect execution means (for example, effect control (such as a CPU 103 that sends commands);
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result ( For example, execute the process of step 059AKS025),
The determination means is capable of determining that the special state is reached before the state control means controls the state to the special state (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS001),
The information transmitting means is capable of transmitting special information that can specify that the control is to be in the special state when the determining means determines that the special state is entered (for example, specifying a display result of "loss (time saving)" commands can be sent),
The performance execution means is
When receiving the determination result information, it is possible to execute a prefetch effect based on the determination result information (for example, it is possible to execute the process of step S161),
If the determination result information is received after receiving the special information, the execution of the prefetch effect based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, if it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082, the processing in step 059AKS084 and step S1304 ),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the gaming state when the special display result is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The performance execution means is
If the judgment result information is newly received after receiving the judgment result information indicating that the control is in the advantageous state, further restricting the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the newly received judgment result information ( For example, if a hold whose variable display result is a "jackpot" is stored in the currently stored hold memory, it is determined Yes in step 059 AKS082, etc.)
While the prefetch effect is limited, the prefetch effect can be executed in the same manner as the prefetch effect that can be executed when the determination result information is received after receiving the special information (for example, in step 059AKS084 and step S1304). processing, etc.),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress deviations in performance due to state transitions and prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The performance execution means is
If the judgment result information is newly received after receiving the judgment result information indicating that a suggestion effect indicating whether or not to be controlled by the special state is to be executed, the newly received judgment result information further restricting the execution of the original pre-reading effect (for example, if a hold for executing a time-saving effect is stored in the currently stored hold memory, it is determined Yes in step 059AKS082),
While the prefetch effect is limited, the prefetch effect can be executed in the same manner as the prefetch effect that can be executed when the determination result information is received after receiving the special information (for example, in step 059AKS084 and step S1304). processing, etc.),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a performance related to a state transition is performed.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The effect execution means does not execute the prefetch effect in a manner that indicates that the advantage controlled to the advantageous state is equal to or higher than a specific advantage while the prefetch effect is limited (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-23(B)). (e.g., do not execute a pending display change effect of "green" or higher as shown in ),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress deviations in performance due to state transitions and prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
The effect execution means does not execute a specific type of prefetch effect while the prefetch effect is limited (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-23(B), when the pending display change effect is limited, "green" or (e.g., not executing the type of pending display change effect that changes the display mode to "red"),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, since the execution of a specific type of preview performance is restricted, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game without giving him unnecessary expectations.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 063AK)
The characteristic section 063AK according to this embodiment will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 13-1, the game area 2 formed on the board surface of the game board includes a left game area 063AK1 on the left side of the top of the image display device 5, and a left game area 063AK1 on the right side of the top of the image display device 5. A right gaming area 063AK2 is provided. The left gaming area 063AK1 and the right gaming area 063AK2 may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 inside the gaming area 2, the nail arrangement PL, or the like. When the game ball (game medium) fired from the ball launcher and hit into the game area 2 is guided to the left game area 063AK1, it is guided along the nail arrangement PL, for example, to the right game area. It becomes impossible or difficult to guide to 063AK2. In addition, when the game ball fired from the ball launcher and hit into the game area 2 is guided to the right game area 063AK2, for example, by being guided along the nail arrangement PL, the game ball is directed to the left game area 063AK1. and becomes impossible or difficult to guide.

The left gaming area 063AK1 is provided with a general winning hole 10 and a winning ball device 6A. On the other hand, the right game area 063AK2 is provided with a variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) and a special variable winning ball device 7 (variable means). The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the variable winning ball device 6B.

The general winning hole 10 is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can be won by a predetermined ball receiving member. When game balls enter (enter) the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state in which game balls can win by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number of winning balls (for example, three) are paid out, and the first starting condition, which is a condition for executing the first special drawing game, can be satisfied. . The variable winning ball device 6B forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started.

As shown in FIG. 13-2, the special variable winning ball device 7 includes a big winning opening door 063AK3 that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2) for the big winning opening door (for special electric accessories). The grand prize opening door 063AK3 has a grand prize opening 063AK4 that changes between an open state (first state) in which the game ball can easily win a prize, and a closed state (second state) in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win. ing. FIG. 13-2 shows a state where the big winning opening door 063AK3 closes the big winning opening 064AK4.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door 063AK3 closes the big winning hole 063AK4, and the game ball enters the big winning hole 063AK4. becomes impossible or difficult to win. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the ON state, the big winning hole door 063AK3 opens the big winning hole 063AK4, and the game ball easily enters the big winning hole 063AK4. becomes. When game balls enter the big prize opening 063AK4, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball wins in the big winning hole 063AK4, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball wins in the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole or the general winning hole 10, for example.

The big winning hole 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 derives and displays (stops display) a jackpot symbol (specific display result) as a confirmed special symbol in a special symbol game, and the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot". , when controlled to be in a jackpot gaming state (advantageous state), it is controlled to be in an open state in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 29 seconds) elapses and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 063AK4 reaches a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 9 balls). , whichever is earlier. One cycle in which the big prize opening 063AK4 is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (in this embodiment, 15 times).

In addition, in the big winning hole 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, a small winning pattern (special display result) is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special pattern game, and the display result of the variable display becomes a "small winning". , when controlled to the small winning game state, it is controlled to the open state in a predetermined manner. Specifically, in the small winning game state, the open state and closed state of the large winning hole 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 are repeated. For example, in the small winning game state, an open state for 0.1 seconds and a closed state for 1.0 seconds are repeated. The operation in which the open state and the closed state of the big winning opening 063AK4 are repeated is also referred to as opening and closing of the big winning opening. The opening/closing of the grand prize opening is repeated until the open state of 0.1 seconds is repeated until the predetermined upper limit number of openings (in this embodiment, 10 times), or the game balls are placed in the grand prize opening 063AK4 until the predetermined upper limit winning number (in this embodiment). In this case, the game ends when one of the conditions is met (up to 10 prizes).

The characteristic part 063AK allows the player to perform a gaming method (hereinafter referred to as "left-handed hitting") in which a game ball is launched into the left gaming area 063AK1 in a normal state (low probability low base state). A game method in which the game ball is launched into the right game area 063AK2 in the time saving state (low probability high base state) while aiming to win the general winning hole 10 or the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A. Hereinafter, it is configured so that by making the ball hit the right hand (hereinafter referred to as "right-handed hitting"), the player can aim to win a prize into the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the player is controlled to the jackpot game state or the small win game state, by making the player hit the right ball, the special variable winning ball device 7 forms a jackpot 063AK4. It is designed to make you aim to win a prize.

A characteristic part 063AK performs a right-handed game promoting performance to encourage the player to play right-handed game during a period where the game is controlled to a time-saving state, a jackpot game state, and a small-win game state in which right-handed game is advantageous.

The game ball that has won in the big winning hole 063AK4 formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 passes (enters) the big winning hole switch 063AK5, is detected by the big winning hole switch 063AK5, and then falls into the recess 063AK6. The game ball that has fallen into the recess 063AK6 is guided backward by a guide piece (not shown) and passes through the passage port 063AK7. Behind the passage port 063AK7, a distribution section supply path 063AK8 extending toward the lower left and a discharge path 063AK9 extending toward the lower right are provided.

In the jackpot game state, all the game balls that have won the big winning hole 063AK4 are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. On the other hand, only one game ball among the game balls that entered the big prize opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state flows down to the distribution section 063AK18, which will be described later, through the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and the one game ball is The balls other than the balls are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9.

FIGS. 13-3(a) to 13-3(c) are diagrams showing the configuration of the special variable winning ball device 7 regarding the characteristic part 063AK, as seen from arrow II in FIG. 13-2. The case is shown below. As shown in FIG. 13-3(a), the special variable winning ball device 7 moves the plunger 063AK11 in the left-right direction by switching between an on state and an off state with a substantially dogleg-shaped rotating piece 063AK10. The distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is provided. The rotating piece 063AK10 has a connecting protrusion 063AK13 connected to a plunger 063AK11, and rotates about a rotating shaft 063AK14 by switching the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 between an on state and an off state.

As shown in FIG. 13-3(a), when the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is in the on state, the bent surface 063AK15 of the rotating piece 063AK10 faces forward. Further, the lower surface of the distribution section supply path 063AK8 is located at a lower position (provided below) than the lower surface of the discharge path 063AK9. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13-3(a), the game ball A1 that first passed through the passage port 063AK7 falls into the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and its movement is restricted by the curved surface 063AK15 of the rotating piece 063AK10. be done. Thereby, the game ball A1 is held by the rotating piece 063AK10. Game ball A2, which passed through 063AK7 following game ball A1, is blocked by game ball A1 and cannot enter the distribution section supply path 063AK8, so it advances to the right. Change direction. The game ball A2 flows down the discharge path 063AK9 as it is. Note that the discharge path 063AK9 is provided with a discharge count switch 063AK16, and the game balls that have passed through the discharge path 063AK9 are detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16. The game balls that have passed through the discharge path 063AK9 are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. When the rotating piece 063AK10 holds the game ball A1 and controls the distribution part supply solenoid 063AK12 from the on state to the off state, the plunger 063AK11 supplies the distribution part as shown in FIG. 13-3(c). Solenoid 063AK12 pops out from the main body. As a result, the rotating piece 063AK10 rotates around the rotating shaft 063AK14, and flips the game ball A1 toward the distribution section supply path 063AK8. The repelled game ball A1 flows down the distribution section supply path 063AK8.

As shown in FIG. 13-4(a), the game ball A3 that has flowed down the distribution section supply path 063AK8 passes through the distribution section passage switch 063AK17, is detected by the distribution section passage switch 063AK17, and then is sorted. Enter section 063AK18.

The distribution part 063AK18 is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and guides the game balls flowing down through the distribution part supply path 063AK8 to the jackpot area 063AK19 (specific area) and the time saving area 063AK20 (special area). ) or the losing area 063AK21.

The jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21 are all areas (members) configured to allow game balls to pass through, and are provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. The jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21 are provided below the distribution section 063AK18.

The game ball that has entered the jackpot area 063AK19 passes through the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22, is detected by the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22, and then passes through the jackpot area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. is discharged to. The game balls discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the jackpot area discharge path are detected by a jackpot area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the special drawing game, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, the small winning game state is controlled, and the big winning hole 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball that entered the big winning hole 063AK4 passed through the jackpot area 063AK19. Based on this, the jackpot gaming state is controlled after the small winning gaming state ends.

The game ball that has entered the time saving area 063AK20 passes through the time saving area passing switch 063AK23, is detected by the time saving area passing switch 063AK23, and then passes through the time saving area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. is discharged to. The game balls discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the time-saving region discharge path are detected by a time-saving region discharge count switch (not shown).

In the normal state, the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special drawing game, the small winning game state is controlled, and the game ball that won the big winning hole 063AK4 when the big winning hole 063AK4 was controlled to be in the open state, Based on passing through the time saving area 063AK20, time saving transition control is performed for a predetermined period of time after the end of the small winning game state to control the time saving state (special state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state. be exposed. On the other hand, in the case of the time saving state, the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special drawing game, the small winning game state is controlled, and the game ball that won the big winning opening 063AK4 when the big winning opening 063AK4 was controlled to be in the open state. However, when the vehicle passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. In other words, if the time saving state is already controlled, even if the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small winning game state, the time period is controlled to the time saving state by performing the time saving transition control. The structure is such that no control is performed to extend the period.

In this embodiment, in the normal state, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special drawing game, the small winning game state is controlled, and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, the winning opening 063AK4 is won. When the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, after the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be closed and the small winning game state ends, when the next variable display starts, time-saving transition control based on the passing occurs. is performed, and the normal state is controlled to a time-saving state. That is, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, it is configured not to be controlled to the time saving state until the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the closed state. . According to such a configuration, after one game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, another game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 or the loss area 063AK21, thereby changing the gaming state after the small winning gaming state ends. It is possible to suppress the possibility that inconsistency occurs between control and performance, confuses players, and reduces interest in gaming. That is, according to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed depending on the state.

The game ball that has entered the losing area 063AK21 passes through the losing area passing switch 063AK24, is detected by the losing area passing switch 063AK24, and then passes through the losing area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. is discharged to. The game balls discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the losing area discharge path are detected by a losing area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the special figure game, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed and the small winning game state is controlled and the big winning hole 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball that entered the big winning hole 063AK4 passed through the losing area 063AK21. In this case, after the end of the small winning game state, no control is performed to change the game state based on the passage.

Jackpot area light emitting parts 063AK25 are provided at the upper and lower ends of the jackpot area 063AK19. A time saving area light emitting section 063AK26 is provided at the upper end and the lower end of the time saving area 063AK20. A losing area light emitting section 063AK27 is provided at the upper end and the lower end of the losing area 063AK21. The jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26, and the losing area light emitting unit 063AK27 are configured to be visible to the player, and are equipped with light emitting elements such as LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) and configured to be able to emit light. . Although details will be described later, in the characteristic section 063AK, an effect is performed in which the jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26, and the losing area light emitting unit 063AK27 emit light in a predetermined manner. FIG. 13-4(a) shows a state in which the jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26, and the losing area light emitting unit 063AK27 are all turned off.

The distribution section 063AK18 includes a distribution member 063AK28. The distribution member 063AK28 is formed with a left inclined surface 063AK29 facing diagonally upward to the right and a right inclined surface 063AK30 facing diagonally upward to the left. The game ball that has entered the distribution section 063AK18 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and passes through any of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21.

Specifically, the distribution unit 063AK18 is provided with a jackpot area entrance 063AK31, a time saving area entrance 063AK32, and a losing area entrance 063AK33, as shown in FIG. 13-4(b). The jackpot area entrance 063AK31, the time saving area entrance 063AK32, and the losing area entrance 063AK33 are all configured to allow game balls to pass through, and are arranged along the left-right direction. The jackpot area entrance 063AK31 communicates with the jackpot area 063AK19, and the game ball that has passed through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. The time-saving area entrance 063AK32 communicates with the time-saving area 063AK20, and the game ball that has passed through the time-saving area entrance 063AK32 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. The losing area entrance 063AK33 communicates with the losing area 063AK21, and the game ball that has passed through the losing area entrance 063AK33 passes through the losing area 063AK21.

The distribution member 063AK28 is arranged above the jackpot area entrance 063AK31, the time saving area entrance 063AK32, and the losing area entrance 063AK33. A passage opening 063AK34 through which game balls can pass is formed in the distribution member 063AK28. Hereinafter, in order to facilitate understanding, the P coordinate axis shown in FIG. 13-4(b) will be set. The P coordinate axis is set parallel to the left-right direction. The distribution member 063AK28 is driven by a distribution member motor (not shown), and is moved in the left-right direction between a position P6 as a left end position and a position P3 as a right end position shown in FIG. 13-4(b). move back and forth along the FIG. 13-4(b) shows a state in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located at position P0, which is the center position (origin position).

When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P0 shown in FIG. 13-4(b), the game ball A4 that has entered the distribution part 063AK18 is not distributed as shown in FIG. 13-5(a). It passes through the passage port 063AK34 formed in the member 063AK28, and passes through the time saving area entrance port 063AK32. The game ball A4 that has passed through the time saving area entrance 063AK32 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P3 shown in FIG. 13-4(b), the game ball A5 that has entered the distribution section 063AK18 is not distributed as shown in FIG. 13-5(b). It collides with the left inclined surface 063AK29 formed on the member 063AK28, moves to the left along the inclined direction, and passes through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 formed on the left side of the distribution part 063AK18. The game ball A5 that has passed through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at the position P6 shown in FIG. 13-4(b), the game ball A6 that has entered the distribution section 063AK18 is not distributed as shown in FIG. 13-5(c). It collides with the right side inclined surface 063AK30 formed on the member 063AK28, moves to the right along the inclined direction, and passes through the losing area entrance 063AK33 formed on the right side of the distribution part 063AK18. The game ball A6 that has passed through the losing area entrance 063AK33 passes through the losing area 063AK21.

The distribution member 063AK28 is configured to be able to perform an operation according to the distribution member operation pattern shown in FIG. 13-6. Figure 13-6 shows the transition of the position of the distribution member 063AK28 over time when the distribution member 063AK28 is performing an operation according to the distribution member movement pattern, and the time of the area through which the game ball passes. The changes over time are shown. Note that when the distribution member 063AK28 is not performing an operation according to the distribution member operation pattern, it is stopped at the position P0 shown in FIG. 13-4(b).

As shown in FIG. 13-6, when the distribution member 063AK28 starts operating according to the distribution member operation pattern, it stops at position P0 for a predetermined central standby time, and then moves rightward from position P0 at a constant speed. , passes through position P1 on the right side of position P0 shown in Figure 13-4(b), passes through position P2 on the right side of position P1 shown in Figure 13-4(b), and moves to Figure 13-4( The position P3 shown in b) is reached. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P3 from the position P0 may be predetermined as the center-right movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P3 stops at the position P3 for a predetermined right-end waiting time. Subsequently, the distribution member 063AK28 moves leftward at a constant speed from position P3, passes through position P2, passes through position P1, and reaches position P0. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P0 from the position P3 may be predetermined as the middle right movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P0 stops at the position P0 for the central standby time. Next, the distribution member 063AK28 moves leftward at a constant speed from position P0, passes through position P4 on the left side of position P0 shown in FIG. 13-4(b), and moves to FIG. 13-4(b). It passes through position P5 on the left side of position P4 shown in FIG. 13-4(b) and reaches position P6 shown in FIG. 13-4(b). The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the position P6 from the position P0 may be predetermined as the middle left movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P6 stops at the position P6 for a predetermined left end standby time. Thereafter, the distribution member 063AK28 moves rightward at a constant speed from position P6, passes through position P5, passes through position P4, and reaches position P0. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the center position P0 from the position P6 may be predetermined as the left-center movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached the position P0 repeats the above-described operation again. In this way, the distribution member 063AK28 moves back and forth in the left-right direction between the positions P3 and P6 by operating according to the distribution member operation pattern.

When the distribution member 063AK28 operates according to the distribution member operation pattern, as shown in FIG. 13-6, the game balls that have entered the distribution section 063AK18 are However, it also changes which of the jackpot area 063AK19, time saving area 063AK20, and loss area 063AK21 is passed through. Specifically, during the period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P2 and P3, the game balls that have entered the distribution section 063AK18 are guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and pass through the jackpot area 063AK19. This is the period when the jackpot area passes. The period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P0 and P1 and the period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P0 and P4 are defined as the period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P0 and P4. It becomes a time saving area passing period in which the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. During the period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P5 and P6, the game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 are guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and pass through the loss area 063AK21. period. The period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P1 and P2 and the period in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between the positions P4 and P5 are the periods when the distribution member 063AK28 enters the distribution section 063AK18. When the game ball is guided by the distribution member 063AK28, it becomes a passing area uncertainty period in which it is not determined which of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21 it will enter.

In this embodiment, when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in a special figure game and the small winning game state is controlled, a small winning start effect (small winning) that notifies that control to the small winning gaming state has started The distribution member 063AK28 is configured to be able to perform a fanfare performance), and the distribution member 063AK28 is configured to start an operation according to the distribution member operation pattern in response to the start of the small win start performance. As shown in Figure 13-6, the small hit start effect is started in response to the elapse of a predetermined special pattern confirmation display time after the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special pattern game, and then the small winning starts. It ends when the performance time has elapsed.

In this embodiment, in the small winning game state, as shown in FIG. 13-6, opening and closing of the big winning opening is started in response to the completion of the small winning start effect. As mentioned above, the opening/closing of the grand prize opening depends on whether the open state of 0.1 seconds is repeated until the predetermined upper limit number of openings, or the game ball enters the grand prize opening 063AK4 up to the predetermined upper limit winning number. The process ends when any of the conditions is satisfied.

In this embodiment, in the small winning game state, as shown in FIG. 13-6, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is turned on in response to the completion of the small winning start performance and the start of opening and closing of the big winning opening. The rotating piece 063AK10 is in a state where it can hold the game balls that have entered the distribution section supply path 063AK8. The distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to be in the on state, and then controlled to be in the off state in response to the elapse of a predetermined game ball holding time. As a result, the rotating piece 063AK10 repels the game ball it is holding toward the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and the repelled game ball flows down the distribution section supply path 063AK8 and enters the distribution section 063AK18. . With such a configuration, in this embodiment, only one game ball among the game balls that entered the big prize opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state flows down to the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8. However, the balls other than the one game ball are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the jackpot game state, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is not controlled to be in the on state. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, all the game balls that have won in the big winning hole 063AK4 in the jackpot gaming state are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. In the example shown in FIG. 13-6, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the OFF state at time t0 when the game ball holding time has elapsed after the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the ON state, and the rotation The game ball repelled by the piece 063AK10 enters the distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 13-6, the time t0 when the game ball enters the distribution section 063AK18 is included in the jackpot area passing period. Therefore, the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 at time t0 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28.

In addition, the game ball holding time is set longer than the time required to open and close the big winning opening a predetermined upper limit number of times in the small winning gaming state. That is, the game ball enters the distribution section 063AK18 after the opening and closing of the grand prize opening is completed.

As shown in FIG. 13-6, the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution section 063AK18 (time t0 in the example shown in FIG. 13-6) is determined by the special figure confirmation display time, the small hit start performance time, and the game ball. The retention time is specified by .

In this embodiment, when the small hit game state is controlled, the special figure confirmation display time and the game ball holding time are set to the same time regardless of the small hit type, while the small hit start performance time is It is set to one of multiple types of time depending on the type of small hit. With such a configuration, the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution section 063AK18 is configured to differ depending on the type of small hit.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when the small win game state is controlled, the small win start performance time is set to a predetermined first specific time to third specific time shown in FIG. 13-7 according to the small win type. Set it to any time. As shown in FIG. 13-7, the second specific time (eg, 12 seconds) is longer than the first specific time (eg, 11 seconds), and the third specific time (eg, 13 seconds) is longer than the second specific time.

As shown in Figure 13-7, when the small hit start performance time is set to the first specific time, the special pattern confirmation display time has elapsed after the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special pattern game. After the small win start performance is started, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to be in the ON state at the timing when the small win start performance ends in accordance with the elapse of the first specific time. After that, at time t1 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the ON state, the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the OFF state, and the game was rejected by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 13-7, since time t1 is included in the loss area passing period, the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 at time t1 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28, and is therefore lost. Pass through area 063AK21. That is, when the small winning start performance time is set to the first specific time, the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state passes through the losing area 063AK21.

When the small hit start performance time is set to the second specific time, the small hit start performance is started in response to the elapse of the special pattern confirmation display time after the small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special pattern game. Thereafter, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to be in the ON state at the timing when the small hit start performance is finished in accordance with the elapse of the second specific time. After that, at time t2 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution part supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the ON state, the distribution part supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the OFF state, and the game was rejected by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 13-7, since time t2 is included in the time-saving region passage period, the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 at time t2 is guided to the distribution member 063AK28, thereby reducing the time-saving region. Pass through area 063AK20. That is, when the small winning start performance time is set to the second specific time, the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state passes through the time saving area 063AK20.

When the small hit start performance time is set to the third specific time, the small hit start performance is started in response to the elapse of the special pattern confirmation display time after the small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special pattern game. Thereafter, the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to be in the ON state at the timing when the small hit start performance is completed in accordance with the passage of the third specific time. After that, at time t3 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution part supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the ON state, the distribution part supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the OFF state, and the game was rejected by the rotating piece 063AK10. The ball enters the distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 13-7, since the time t3 is included in the jackpot area passing period, the game ball that entered the distribution part 063AK18 at the time t3 is guided to the distribution member 063AK28 and hits the jackpot. Pass through area 063AK19. That is, when the small hit start performance time is set to the third specific time, the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state passes through the jackpot area 063AK19.

As mentioned above, depending on which of the first specific time to third specific time the small hit start performance time is set, the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state will be placed in the jackpot area 063AK19. , the time saving area 063AK20 and the losing area 063AK21 are different. In the feature section 063AK, by setting the small hit start performance time to any of the first specific time to the third specific time depending on the small winning type, the game ball that won the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state. Then, among the jackpot area 063AK19, time saving area 063AK20, and loss area 063AK21, the area corresponding to the small winning type is passed through.

The characteristic part 063AK is based on the execution of a variable display (hereinafter referred to as "small win fluctuation") in which small winning symbols are derived and displayed in the special pattern game and the display result of the variable display is a "small winning". As shown in Figure 13-8 (a), as a performance that corresponds to small hit fluctuations, in addition to the above-mentioned right hit promotion performance and small hit start performance, there is a time saving suggestion performance, a passing promotion performance, and a passing notification performance. It is configured to be able to perform.

In this embodiment, as a right-handed driving promotion performance, a performance is performed in which a right-handed hitting promotion image showing an arrow pointing to the right is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. As described above, the right-handed driving promotion effect is executed during the period when the time saving state and the jackpot gaming state are controlled, and as shown in FIG. 13-8(a), the performance is controlled to the small winning gaming state. Executed during the period.

Further, in this embodiment, as a small win start effect, a effect is executed in which a right arrow image and a small win start image are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The right arrow image is an effect image that has the shape of an arrow pointing to the right and shows the message "Aim to the right!". The small hit start image shows the shape of the special variable winning ball device 7, and also shows the message “Put the ball here!” to prompt the player to place the game ball into the special variable winning ball device 7. It is an image. As mentioned above, the small hit start performance is started in response to the small winning symbol being derived and displayed in the special figure game and control to the small winning game state being started, and then the small winning start performance time elapses. Finish depending on what you did.

The time-saving suggestion performance is a performance that suggests that the time-saving state is controlled, and is configured to be executable during execution of the small winning fluctuation. As described above, in the normal state, based on the fact that the game ball that entered the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state passed through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving state is controlled after the small winning gaming state ends. Ru. Correspondingly, in the feature section 063AK, in the normal state, when the small winning variation is executed, as an effect that suggests that the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special pattern game, It is configured such that the time-saving suggestion performance can be executed during execution of the small hit variation. According to such a configuration, in the normal state, in the variable display when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, various effects can be executed and the game enjoyment can be improved. can.

As shown in Figure 13-8 (a), when the normal reach performance that is the reach performance of normal reach, the super reach performance that is the reach performance of super reach, and the time-saving suggestion performance are executed in the small hit fluctuation, the time-saving suggestion performance is executed. The suggestion effect starts after the reach is established, the normal reach effect is executed, and the super reach effect is executed, and then in response to the small winning symbol being derived and displayed in the special pattern game and the small winning fluctuation ending. finish. Details of the time-saving suggestion effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 13-9(a) and 13-9(b).

As shown in FIG. 13-9(a), when the time-saving suggestion effect is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 , a predetermined losing symbol (in this embodiment, "767") is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner different from that in which it is derived and displayed. Next, variable display of the decorative pattern is executed again in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and then in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as shown in FIG. A time-saving suggestion symbol indicating that the time-saving state is controlled as shown in -9(b) is temporarily stopped and displayed. As for the time-saving suggestive pattern, a decorative pattern showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a "chance" symbol is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. This is a combination of decorative patterns in which a decorative pattern indicating a message is displayed. Returning to FIG. 13-9(a), after the time-saving suggestion symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is again variablely displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. This is executed, and the time-saving suggestion performance ends in response to the small winning symbols being derived and displayed in the special figure game and the small winning variation being completed.

Returning to FIG. 13-8(a), the passing promotion effect suggests that the game ball that enters the big winning hole 063AK4 in the small winning game state will pass through any of the jackpot area 063AK19, time saving area 063AK20, or loss area 063AK21. This is an effect that suggests passing through the jackpot area 063AK19, time saving area 063AK20, and loss area 063AK21. After the passing promotion effect is started in response to the completion of the small hit start effect and the opening/closing of the big winning hole, the game ball that has entered the big winning hole 063AK4 in the small winning game state enters the jackpot area 063AK19 and saves time. The process ends when either the area 063AK20 or the losing area 063AK21 is passed.

The passing notification performance is a performance that notifies which of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 has been passed by the game ball that won the big prize opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state. In the present embodiment, the passage notification performance is executed as a small win end performance (small win ending performance) that notifies that the control to the small win game state ends. The passage notification performance is started in response to the game ball that entered the big winning opening 063AK4 passing through the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 in the small winning game state, and then after a predetermined passage notification performance time End depending on what has passed.

In this embodiment, the passing notification performance time is set to a predetermined number depending on whether the game ball that entered the big winning opening 063AK4 passed through the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 in the small winning gaming state. It is set to any one of the 1st special time to the 3rd special time. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21, the passing notification performance time is set to the first special time (for example, 5 seconds). In addition, when the game ball is in the time saving state, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control is not performed based on the passage, and the passing notification performance time is set to indicate that the game ball is in the losing area 063AK21. The first special time is set in the same way as when passing through. In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the passing notification performance time is set to the second special time (for example, 20 seconds). When the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the passing notification performance time is set to a third special time (for example, 10 seconds). According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed depending on the state.

In the characteristic part 063AK, as shown in FIG. 13-8(b), the time-saving suggestion effect and passage stimulation are performed in the case where the small hit variation is executed in the normal state and the case where the small winning variation is executed in the time-saving state. The performance and the passing notification performance are configured to be executed or not or the performance mode is different.

Specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-8(b), when a small hit variation is executed in the normal state, it is possible to execute a time-saving suggestion effect while the small hit variation is being executed; When the small winning variation is executed in the time saving state, the time saving suggestion effect is not executed during the execution of the small winning variation. That is, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small hit variation is executed in the normal state and the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, and when the small winning variation is executed in the time saving state and the small winning symbol is derived and displayed. It is configured such that different effects can be executed while the small winning variation is being executed.

In the characteristic part 063AK, in the normal state, when a small winning variation is executed, the time-saving suggestion performance can be executed, so that the player can receive a message based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time-saving area 063AK20. It is configured to create a sense of expectation that the time-saving transition control will be performed and to be controlled to a time-saving state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, by configuring it so that the time saving suggestion effect is not executed when the small hit fluctuation is executed, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving suggestion effect is not executed. Even though the time saving transition control based on the game ball is not performed, it is possible to prevent the player from having a feeling of expectation that the game ball will be controlled to the time saving state based on the passage of the time saving area 063AK20, The system is configured to suppress a decline in interest in gaming.

In this way, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small hit variation is executed in the normal state and the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, and when the small winning variation is executed in the time saving state and the small winning symbol is derived and displayed. By being configured to be able to perform different performances during execution of small winning fluctuations, it is possible to perform suitable performances depending on the state.

In the characteristic part 063AK, as shown in FIG. 13-8(b), when a small winning variation is executed in the normal state, after the small winning variation ends, the small winning gaming state is controlled and the opening/closing of the big winning opening is performed. At this time, a normal passing promotion performance (special performance) is performed as a passing promotion performance, which is a performance that suggests passage between the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21. On the other hand, when the small winning variation is executed in the time saving state, when the small winning opening is opened and closed by being controlled to the small winning gaming state after the small winning variation ends, the passage of the time saving area 063AK29 is performed as a passage stimulation effect. A time-saving passing promotion performance (specific performance), which is a performance that gives a suggestion regarding passage between the jackpot area 063AK19 and the losing area 063AK21, is executed without making any suggestion.

In this embodiment, the normal passing promotion effect suggests that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21. It is a performance that On the other hand, in this embodiment, the time-saving time pass promotion effect is such that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 without suggesting that the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, and that the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21. It is a performance that suggests passing through.

In the characteristic part 063AK, when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state after the small winning fluctuation ends in the normal state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the player The game ball is configured to create a sense of expectation that the time saving state will be controlled based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state after the small winning variation ends in the time saving state and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game Despite the fact that when the ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, no control is performed based on the passage, the player expects that the game ball will be controlled to the time saving state based on the passing of the time saving area 063AK20. The structure is designed to prevent players from feeling anxious and suppress a decline in interest in the game.

In this way, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state after the small winning variation ends in the normal state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the normal passing promotion effect is executed. By being configured so that the time saving time passing promotion effect is executed when the small winning game state is controlled and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state after the small winning variation ends in the time saving state. A suitable performance can be performed depending on the situation.

In this embodiment, as a normal passing promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 13-10(a), a normal passing promotion image AK1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 has The jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26, and the losing area light emitting unit 063AK27 are made to emit light, and a normal time pass promotion sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R indicating the message "Is it a jackpot? Is it a time saver? Is it a loss?" Perform the performance.

The normal passing promotion image AK1 shows the message "Jackpot" and the jackpot area passing promotion image AK2 suggests that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, and the message "Time saving" shows the game ball passing through the time saving area. It includes a time-saving area passing promotion image AK3 suggesting that the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK20, and a losing area passing promotion image AK4 indicating the message "Lose" and suggesting that the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21.

In the characteristic part 063AK, based on the display mode of the normal pass promotion image AK1, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the small winning gaming state, it is expected that the small winning gaming state will be controlled to the jackpot gaming state after the small winning gaming state ends. Based on the degree (proportion) and the fact that the game ball passed through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small winning game state, the expectation level that the game ball will be controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small winning gaming state and the game ball in the small winning gaming state It is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation of passing through the failure area 063AK21. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of the normal passing agitation image AK1, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the normal passage promotion image AK1, the jackpot area passage promotion image AK2 is based on the expectation that the game ball will pass through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the small hit gaming state (the jackpot will be reached after the small winning gaming state ends). The time-saving area passage promotion image AK3 is displayed in a display area according to the expectation level (the degree of expectation controlled by the game state), and the time-saving area passage promotion image AK3 is displayed in accordance with the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small-hit game state (the end of the small-win game state). It is displayed in a display area according to the degree of expectation that the game ball will pass through the loss area 063AK21 in the small winning gaming state. will be displayed.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure), the first special figure game (the first special figure is The game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small winning game state at a higher rate than when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special pattern game used), and is controlled to the time saving state after the small winning game state ends. . Correspondingly, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the first special pattern game and the small winning game state is controlled, the normal state is set in the normal state. While displaying the time passing inciting image AK1 in the display mode shown in FIG. 13-10(a), when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the second special pattern game and the small winning game state is controlled, the normal In the time passing agitation effect, the normal time passing agitation image AK1 is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 13-10(b). In the display mode shown in FIG. 13-10(b), the display area of the time-saving area passing bias image AK2 is larger than in the display mode shown in FIG. 13-10(a). In addition, the normal passing promotion effect shown in FIG. 13-10(b), which is executed when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the second special figure game and the small winning game state is controlled, is the normal passing promotion image. Except that the display mode of AK1 is different, the normal time passage shown in FIG. 13-10(a) is executed when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the first special pattern game and the small winning game state is controlled. This is the same style of performance as the inciting performance.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-10(c), as a time-saving time pass promotion effect, a time-saving time pass promotion image AK5 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a time-saving time pass promotion image AK5. The jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25 and the losing area light emitting unit 063AK27 are made to emit light without causing the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26 to emit light, and the speakers 8L and 8R then emit a time saving time passing inciting voice indicating the message "Is it a jackpot? Is it a loss?" Perform the output. The time-saving time passage promotion image AK5 includes a jackpot area passage promotion image AK2 and a losing area passage promotion image AK4, but does not include the time-saving area passage promotion image AK3.

Returning to FIG. 13-8(b), in the normal state, when the game ball that has entered the jackpot area 063AK4 in the small winning game state passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, a passing notification effect is shown in which the game ball hits the jackpot area. 063AK19, and after the end of the small win gaming state, a normal jackpot area passage notification effect is executed to notify that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. In this embodiment, as the normal jackpot area passing notification effect, an effect is performed in which a normal jackpot area passing notification image showing a message "V" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the normal state, when the game ball that entered the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small winning game state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 as a passing notification effect, and the small winning game state After the end, a time-saving area passing notification effect is executed to notify that the time-saving state is controlled. In this embodiment, as a time-saving area passing notification effect, an effect is performed in which a time-saving area passing notification image showing a message "Lucky!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the normal state, when the game ball that entered the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the losing area 063AK21 in the small winning game state, the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21 as a passage notification effect, and the small winning game state After the end of the game, a losing area passing notification effect is executed to notify that the control for changing the game state is not performed. In the present embodiment, as a losing area passing notification effect, an effect is performed in which a losing area passing notification image showing a message "Unfortunate!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 13-8(b), when the game ball that entered the big winning hole 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, as a passing notification effect. , A short-time jackpot area passing notification performance is executed, which is different from the normal jackpot area passing notification performance, which notifies that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state after the small win gaming state ends. Ru. In this embodiment, as a time-saving jackpot area passing notification effect, an effect is performed in which a time-saving jackpot area passing notification image showing a message "BONUS!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the case of the time saving state, when the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small winning game state, the passing notification effect is produced in response to the fact that the time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. As a result, the above-mentioned losing area passing notification effect is executed.

In the case of the time saving state, when the game ball that has entered the big prize opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state passes through the losing area 063AK21, a losing area passing notification performance is executed as a passing notification performance.

As shown in FIGS. 13-8(a) and 13-8(b), in the characteristic part 063AK, small winning symbols are derived and displayed as confirmed special symbols in the special symbol game, and the special variable winning ball device 7 forms After the big winning hole 063AK4 is controlled to be open, when the big winning hole 063AK is controlled to be closed, the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, and the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. , is configured to be able to perform different effects. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance that is performed when the grand prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the closed state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 063AK, as shown in FIG. 13-8(b), when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the normal state, and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state. When the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, by executing the time saving area passing notification effect, the player is informed that the time saving state is entered after the small winning game state ends based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game by making the player aware that the player is being controlled by the player.

On the other hand, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the time saving state and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, if the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. , by executing the losing area passing notification effect, the game ball is informed to the player that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20, even though the time saving transition control based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20 is not performed. Based on this, it is possible to prevent the player from getting excited about being controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small winning game state, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In this way, in the characteristic section 063AK, the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the normal state, and when the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. and when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special pattern game in the time saving state and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state. By being configured to be able to execute different effects, suitable control can be performed depending on the state when the small winning symbols are derived and displayed.

More specifically, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state, and when the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21 in the time saving state, it also passes through both the jackpot area 063AK19 and the time saving area 063AK20. It is configured to be able to perform the same effect as when the player fails to pass the losing area. According to such a configuration, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 during the time saving state, the player cannot In addition, to prevent the player from having a sense of expectation that the game ball will be controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small winning game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time-saving region 063AK20, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. I can do it.

In addition, in the characteristic part 063AK, as shown in FIG. 13-8(b), when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the time saving state, and when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the normal state, It is configured to be able to execute a time-saving jackpot area passing notification effect that is different from the normal jackpot area passing notification effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player's attention to the performance performed when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, small winning symbols are derived and displayed in the second special game that is likely to be executed in a time saving state, and when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball enters the jackpot area. If the game ball passes through 063AK19, the small winning symbol will be derived and displayed in the first special game that is likely to be executed in the normal state, and when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state. Also, at a high rate, after the end of the small win game state, the game is controlled to be "Jackpot A" which is more advantageous for the player than "Jackpot B". With this configuration, when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the player pays attention to which of the time-saving jackpot area passing notification effect and the normal jackpot area passing notification effect is executed, and the game It can improve your interest.

FIG. 13-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of the special symbol process process as the special symbol normal process regarding the feature part 063AK.

When the special symbol normal processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 063AKS101). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 063AKS101, the second pending storage count value stored in the second pending storage counter in the RAM 102 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

In this embodiment, a second special figure reservation storage section is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The second special figure holding storage unit stores the special figure game (second special figure game) that has not yet been started, although a game ball enters the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a second starting prize is generated. The pending data of the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the pattern display device 4B is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the holding number with the winning order (the detecting order of game balls) to the second starting prize opening, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition due to the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. are set as pending data, and the number is It is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage section indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result in this special figure game. A hold that allows you to determine whether or not it is decided to control the jackpot game state based on the (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be a specific mode (for example, reach effect), etc. It becomes memory information.

When the second special figure reservation memory number is other than "0" in step 063AKS101 (step 063AKS101; No), the CPU 103 stores the number stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit in correspondence with the reservation number "1". Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out as pending data (step 063AKS102). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 063AKS102, for example, by subtracting and updating the second pending memory count value by 1, the second special figure pending memory number is updated to subtract 1, and the second special figure pending memory count value is updated by subtracting 1. The pending data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the pending number "1" (for example, entries corresponding to pending numbers "2" to "4") is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step 063AKS103). Further, in the process of step 063AKS103, the total pending storage count value stored in the total pending storage counter in the RAM 102 may be updated by subtracting one. After that, the CPU 103 updates the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step 063AKS104).

When the second special figure pending memory number is "0" in step 063AKS101 (step 063AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 063AKS114). The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 063AKS114, it is sufficient to read the first pending memory count value stored in the first pending memory counter in the RAM 102 and determine whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 063AKS114 is executed when it is determined in step 063AKS101 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern (special pattern 2) starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (special pattern 1).

It should be noted that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be executed. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if it could be determined.

In this embodiment, a first special figure reservation storage section is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The first special figure holding storage unit stores special figure games that have not yet been started (first special figure Stores pending data of a special figure game (using the first special figure) on the display device 4A. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the holding number with the winning order (the detecting order of game balls) to the first starting prize opening, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., are stored as pending data, and the number of stored data is stored. is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage section indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result in this special figure game. (Special figure display result) to make it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to a jackpot gaming state, and whether or not the variable display mode of decorative symbols will be a specific mode (for example, reach effect), etc. It becomes memory information.

When the first special figure reservation memory number is other than "0" at step 063AKS114 (step 063AKS114; No), the reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the reservation number "1" Then, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 063AKS115). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 063 AKS115, for example, by subtracting and updating the first pending memory count value by 1, the first special figure pending memory number is updated to subtract 1, and the first special figure pending memory count value is updated by subtracting 1. The pending data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the pending number "1" (for example, entries corresponding to pending numbers "2" to "4") is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step 063AKS116). Further, in the process of step 063AKS116, the total pending storage count value stored in the total pending storage counter in the RAM 102 may be updated by subtracting one. After that, the CPU 103 updates the variable special figure designation buffer value to "1" (step 063AKS117).

After executing either of the processes in steps 063AKS104 and 063AKS117, the CPU 103 determines whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "big hit," "small hit," or "loss." The special figure display result determination table corresponding to the fluctuating special figure designation buffer value is selected and set as the table used for the purpose (step 063AKS105). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12(a) is set in the use table. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12(b) is set in the use table.

The first special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12(a) is a table in which fixed special symbols are derived and displayed as variable display results in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. The special figure display result is determined before the variable display result is determined as a "jackpot" and whether or not to control the jackpot game state, or whether or not the variable display result is treated as a "small win" and is controlled as a small win gaming state. This table is referred to in order to make a determination based on the random value MR1. The second special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12(b) is a table in which fixed special symbols are derived and displayed as variable display results in a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The special figure display result is determined before the variable display result is determined as a "jackpot" and whether or not to control the jackpot game state, or whether or not the variable display result is treated as a "small win" and is controlled as a small win gaming state. This table is referred to in order to make a determination based on the random value MR1.

In the first special figure display result determination table shown in Figure 13-12(a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in Figure 13-12(b), the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is compared. The numerical value (determined value) is assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "loss".

In the first special figure display result determination table shown in Figure 13-12(a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in Figure 13-12(b), the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is compared. The table data indicating the decision value determines whether or not to control the special figure display result to be a "jackpot" and enter the jackpot gaming state, and whether or not to control the special figure display result to a "small win" and to control the jackpot gaming state. This is decision data that is assigned to the decision result.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12(b), more determination values than in the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12(a) are "small hit". It is assigned to the special figure display result. That is, between the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12(a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12(b), the second special figure display result determination table is The determining data is assigned so that the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "small win" and the control is controlled to a small win gaming state is increased.

Returning to FIG. 13-11, following the process of step 063AKS105, the CPU 103 transfers the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation to the special figure selected in step 063AKS105. By comparing it with the determination value assigned to "jackpot" in the display result determination table, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is to be "jackpot" (step 063AKS106).

After executing the process of step 063AKS106, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it has been determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" in step 063AKS106 (step 063AKS107). When it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" (step 063AKS107; Yes), the jackpot flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step 063AKS108). Thereafter, the CPU 103 selects and sets the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 13-13(b) as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 063AKS109). By performing a random number lottery using the jackpot type determination table set in step 063AKS109, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type such that the special symbol that is variablely displayed in the special symbol game ("variable special symbol") is the first one. Depending on whether it is a special figure or a second special figure (whether the variable special figure buffer value is "1" or "2"), "Jackpot A" shown in Figure 13-13 (a) or "Jackpot B" (step 063AKS110).

“Jackpot A” and “Jackpot B” shown in FIG. 13-13(a) are both “non-probable variable jackpots” that are not controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. When controlled to be "Jackpot A", after the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving state is controlled for a period until the variable display is executed five times. When controlled to "Jackpot B", after the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving state is controlled for a period until the variable display is executed once. ``Jackpot A'', in which the time-saving state is controlled for a longer period after the end of the jackpot gaming state than ``Jackpot B'', is more advantageous for the player than ``Jackpot B''. In the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 13-13(b), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the jackpot type is determined to be either "jackpot A" or "jackpot B". On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot A" and not determined to be "jackpot B." With this configuration, when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the second special symbol game, it is more appealing to the player than "Jackpot B" at a higher rate than when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the first special symbol game. It is controlled to "Jackpot A" with a high advantage.

Returning to FIG. 13-11, after executing the process of step 063AKS110, the CPU 103 generates a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102, for example, corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step 063AK110. (Step 063AKS111), the determined jackpot type is stored. As an example, if the jackpot type is "Jackpot A", the jackpot type buffer value may be set to "0", and if it is "Jackpot B", it may be set to "1".

If it is determined in step 063AKS107 that the variable display result was not determined to be a "jackpot" in step 063AKS106 (step 063AKS107; No), the CPU 103 selects the special figure display result determination stored in the variable random number buffer. By comparing the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 with the determined value assigned to "small win" in the special figure display result determination table selected in step 063AKS105, the special figure display result is determined as a "small win". It is determined whether or not (Step 063AKS118).

After executing the process of step 063AKS118, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it has been determined that the special figure display result is a "small hit" in step 063AKS118 (step 063AKS119). When it is determined that the special figure display result is a "small win" (step 063AKS119; Yes), the small win flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state (step 063AKS120). Thereafter, the CPU 103 selects and sets the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 13-14(b) as a table to be used for determining the small hit type to one of a plurality of types (step 063AKS121). The CPU 103 determines the type of small hit by performing a random number lottery using the small hit type determination table set in step 063AKS121, and determines whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (variable special figure). Depending on whether the special figure buffer value is "1" or "2", one of "Small hit A" to "Small hit E" shown in Figure 13-14 (a) is determined ( Step 063AKS122).

As shown in FIG. 13-14(a), "small win A" and "small win B" are generated when the game ball that enters the big prize opening 063AK4, which is controlled to be open in the small win gaming state, is This is a small win type that passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 by being guided by 063AK28. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the small win type is "small win A" or "small win B", the small win start performance time is set to the third specific time described above. As described above, when the small hit start performance time is set to the third specific time, the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. Therefore, when the small winning type is "small winning A" or "small winning B", the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. When the game ball that enters the jackpot 063AK4 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the small winning gaming state of "Small winning A", after the small winning gaming state ends, it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of "Jackpot A". . On the other hand, if the game ball that enters the jackpot area 063AK19 in the small winning gaming state of "Small winning B" passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, after the small winning gaming state ends, the jackpot gaming state of "Jackpot B" controlled by.

"Small win C" and "Small win D" are generated when the game ball that enters the big winning hole 063AK4, which is controlled to be open in the small win game state, is guided to the distribution member 063AK28, thereby entering the time saving area 063AK20. This is the type of small hit that passes. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the small win type is "small win C" or "small win D", the small win start performance time is set to the above-mentioned second specific time. As described above, when the small hit start performance time is set to the second specific time, the game ball that enters the big winning hole 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. Therefore, when the small winning type is "small winning C" or "small winning D", the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20. If the game ball that won the big prize opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small winning game state of "Small winning C", after the end of the small winning gaming state, the variable display will continue for a period until the variable display is executed 5 times. Controlled to shorten time. On the other hand, when the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small winning game state of "small winning D", the variable display is executed once after the small winning gaming state ends. It will be controlled to shorten the time for the period up to.

"Small win E" is a small win type in which the game ball that enters the big winning hole 063AK4, which is controlled to be open in the small win gaming state, passes through the losing area 063AK21 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. be. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the small win type is "small win E", the small win start performance time is set to the above-mentioned first specific time. As described above, when the small hit start performance time is set to the first specific time, the game ball that enters the big winning hole 063AK4 passes through the losing area 063AK21. Therefore, when the small winning type is "small winning E", the game ball that has won the big winning opening 063AK4 passes through the losing area 063AK21.

In the small hit type determination table shown in Figure 13-14(b), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the small hit type is higher at a higher rate than when the variable special figure is the first special figure. When the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, it is configured to be determined as "small win A" which is controlled to "jackpot A" which is more advantageous for the player than "jackpot B". With such a configuration, if the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the second special pattern game and the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 when the big winning hole 063AK4 is controlled to be open, the small winning pattern will be displayed in the first special pattern game. When the small winning symbol is derived and displayed and the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be open, the game is played from "Jackpot B" after the small winning gaming state ends at a higher rate than when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. It is controlled to "Jackpot A" which is highly advantageous for the player.

In the small hit type determination table shown in Figure 13-14(b), the sum of the percentage where the small hit type is determined to be "small hit A" and the percentage where the small hit type is determined to be "small hit B" The value corresponds to the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the small winning gaming state, based on the fact that the game ball passed through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the small winning gaming state. In addition, the total value of the percentage where the small win type is determined to be "small win C" and the percentage where the small win type is determined to be "small win D" is the time saving area 063AK20 when the game ball is in the small win gaming state. This corresponds to the expectation that the time-saving state is controlled after the small winning gaming state ends based on the fact that the small winning game state has passed. In addition, the rate at which the small win type is determined as "small win E" is determined by the control that changes the game state after the end of the small win game state based on the game ball passing through the losing area 063AK21 in the small win game state. It does not meet expectations.

As shown in Figure 13-14 (b), when the fluctuating special figure is the second special figure, the percentage (15%) where the small hit type is determined as “small hit C” and the small hit type is “ The percentage (15%) that is determined as "small hit D" and the total value (30%) is the percentage that is determined as "small hit C" when the variable special drawing is the first special drawing. It is larger than the total value (25%) of the percentage (15%) and the percentage (10%) where the small win type is determined to be "small win D". That is, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the second special pattern game, the small winning pattern is displayed at a higher rate in the small winning game state than when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the first special pattern game. The game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 and is configured to be controlled to the time saving state after the small winning game state ends. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol of the second special symbol game, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 13-11, after executing the process of step 063AKS122, the CPU 103 executes the small hit, which is the value stored in the small hit type buffer provided in the RAM 102, for example, in response to the small hit type determined in step 063AK122. By setting the type buffer value (step 063AKS123), the determined small winning type is stored. As an example, if the small win type is "Small win A", the small win type buffer value is set to "0", if it is "Small win B", it is set to "1", and if "Small win C", the small win type buffer value is set to "2". If it is a "small win D", it may be set to "3", and if it is a "small win E", it may be set to "4".

In step 063AKS119, if it is determined in step 063AKS118 that the special figure display result is not determined to be a "small hit" (step 063AKS119; No), or after executing the process in step 063AKS111 or step 063AKS123, the CPU 103, A fixed special symbol is determined in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether to control the jackpot game state or the small win game state, the decision result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot game state, etc. (step 063AKS112).

After executing the process of step 063AKS112, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "1", which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 063AKS113), and then ends the special symbol normal process. If the first special symbol pending storage number is "0" in step 063AKS114 (step 063AKS114; Yes), the CPU 103 performs predetermined demonstration display settings (step 063AKS124), and then ends the special symbol normal processing.

In this embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, the variation pattern is determined to be any of the variation patterns PA1-1 to PB5-3 shown in FIG. 13-15.

As shown in FIG. 13-15, in this embodiment, the variation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 correspond to the case where the variable display result is a "loss", and the variation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 correspond to the case where the variable display result becomes a "jackpot". Variation patterns PA3-1 to PB3-3 and variation patterns PA4-1 to PB5-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small win" are set in advance.

In this embodiment, three types of super reach are set: super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C, and a normal reach effect is executed for the fluctuation pattern shown in Figure 13-15. together with the variation patterns PA2-1, PA3-1, PA4-1, PA5-1, the variation patterns PB2-1, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB5-1 in which the reach effect of super reach C is executed, Variation patterns PB2-2, PB3-2, PB4-2, PB5-2 in which the super reach B reach effect is executed, and variation patterns PB2-3, PB3-3, PB4 in which the super reach A reach effect is executed. -3 and PB5-3 are included. In this embodiment, as a reach effect for super reach A, a character image representing character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and as a reach effect for super reach B, a character image representing character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Then, an effect is performed to display a character image representing character B, and as a reach effect for super reach C, an effect is performed to display a character image representing character C on the screen of the image display device 5.

In addition, the variation patterns PA4-1 to PB5-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small hit" include the variation patterns PA4-1, PB4-1 to PB4-3 in which a time-saving suggestion effect is executed, Variation patterns PA5-1 and PB5-1 to PB5-3 in which the time-saving suggestion effect is not executed are included.

FIG. 13-16 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process as a variation pattern setting process regarding the feature part 063AK.

When starting the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is in the on state (step 063AK201). If it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step 063 AKS201; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. One of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PB3-3 corresponding to the case of "jackpot" is determined (step 063AK202).

As shown in FIG. 13-17, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PB3- in which the reach effect of super reach C is executed at a higher rate than the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 in which the normal reach effect is executed. 1, and the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed at a higher rate than the variable pattern PB3-1.The variable pattern PB3-2 is determined, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed at a higher rate than the variable pattern PB3-2. The variation pattern PB3-3 is determined to be executed. With this configuration, the expectation level of jackpot is higher when the reach effect of super reach A is executed than when the reach effect of super reach B is executed; The time is higher than when the super reach C reach effect is executed, and the time is higher when the super reach C reach effect is executed than when the normal reach effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 13-16, if it is determined in step 063AK201 that the jackpot flag is not on (step 063AKS201; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small win flag is on (step 063AKS207). If it is determined that the small hit flag is not on (step 063AK207; No), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. One of the variation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 corresponding to the case of "losing" is determined (step 063AKS208).

As shown in FIG. 13-18, in the loss variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern is the variation pattern PB2- in which the reach effect of super reach C is executed at a lower rate than the variation pattern PA2-1 in which the normal reach effect is executed. 1, and the reach effect of super reach B is executed at a lower rate than the variable pattern PB2-1.The variable pattern PB2-2 is determined, and the reach effect of super reach A is executed at a higher rate than the variable pattern PB2-2. is determined as the variation pattern PB2-3 to be executed.

Returning to FIG. 13-16, if it is determined in step 063AKS207 that the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS207; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state. Determination is made (step 063AKS209). The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is controlled.

If it is determined that the time saving flag is not set to the on state (step 063AKS209; No), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the normal state time saving fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-19(a). , Depending on whether the small win type is "small win A" to "small win E", a variable pattern is displayed, and a time-saving suggestion effect is executed in response to the case where the variable display result is "small win". One of the fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PB4-3 is determined (step 063 AKS210). Which of the small win types is "small win A" to "small win E" may be specified based on the small win type buffer value. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving flag is set to the on state (step 063AKS209; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 13-19(b). By doing so, depending on which of the small winning type is "small winning A" to "small winning E", the variable display result is changed to correspond to the case where the variable display result is "small winning", and the time-saving suggestion effect is created. One of the variation patterns PA5-1 to PB5-3 that will not be executed is determined (Step 063AKS211). With such a configuration, when a small hit variation is executed in the normal state, it is possible to execute a time-saving suggestion effect while the small hit variation is being executed, while when a small hit variation is executed in a time-saving state, the small hit variation The time-saving suggestion effect is not executed during execution.

In both the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 13-19(a) and the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 13-19(b), the small hit type is the game ball. is a "small win A" or "small win B" that passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the fluctuation pattern has a higher rate than the fluctuation patterns PB4-1 and PB5-1 in which the reach effect of super reach C is executed. Variation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2 are determined in which the reach effect of super reach B is executed, and variation pattern PB4 in which the reach effect of super reach A is executed at a higher rate than the variation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2. -3, determined to be PB5-3. With this configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball will pass through the jackpot area 063AK19 (the degree of expectation of passing the jackpot area) is higher when the reach effect of super reach A is executed than when the reach effect of super reach B is executed. It is higher when the reach effect of super reach B is executed than when the reach effect of super reach C is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the super reach effects from super reach A to super reach C will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In both the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 13-19(a) and the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 13-19(b), the small hit type is the game ball. If it is a “small hit C” or “small hit D” that passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the fluctuation pattern is a higher rate than the fluctuation patterns PB4-3 and PB5-3 in which the reach effect of super reach A is executed. Variation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2 are determined in which the reach effects of Super Reach B are executed, and variation patterns PB4 in which the reach effects of Super Reach C are executed at a higher rate than in the variation patterns PB4-2 and PB5-2. -1, PB5-1. With this configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 (the degree of expectation of passing through the time-saving area) is higher when the reach effect of super reach C is executed than when the reach effect of super reach B is executed. It is higher when the reach effect of super reach B is executed than when the reach effect of super reach A is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the super reach effects from super reach A to super reach C will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 13-16, after executing the processing of steps 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211, the CPU 103 sets the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern (step 063AKS203). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from when the special symbol starts changing in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is derived and displayed. It is. By setting the special symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, the CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display results of the special symbols and decorative symbols are derived. The setting of the special figure fluctuation time is performed, for example, by setting a timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Following the process of step 063 AKS203, the CPU 103 plays a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A and a special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so that one of the special symbol games for which the start condition is satisfied is started (step 063AKS204). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. As a result, the special figure game is started. In addition, when starting the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first reservation display 25A to display a display that can specify the first special figure reservation memory number subtracted by one. It is also possible to have the hold display 25A perform the process (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one). In addition, when starting the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second reservation display 25B to display a display that can specify the second special figure reservation memory number subtracted by one. It may be possible to have the hold display 25B do this (for example, reduce the number of lit LEDs by one).

After executing the process of step 063AKS204, the CPU 103 sends a command at the start of the variation of the special symbol (command at the start of variation) in order to notify the performance control board 12 of the special symbol display result, the variation pattern determination result, etc. Transmission settings are made (step 063AKS205). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends the first fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command ( (Command containing EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211), Display result specification command (Command containing EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), 1st special figure pending storage number specification command (A command including EXT data indicating the first special figure pending memory number count value decremented by 1, that is, the number of first special figure pending memories when one pending memory is consumed by starting the execution of the special figure game) Configure the sending settings for sending. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a second fluctuation start designation command, a fluctuation pattern designation command ( (Command containing EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211), Display result specification command (Command containing EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), 2nd special figure pending storage number specification command (Command that includes EXT data indicating the second special figure pending memory number count value reduced by 1, that is, the second special figure pending memory number when one pending memory is consumed by starting the execution of the special figure game) Configure the sending settings for sending. In this embodiment, in the display result specification command (variable display result notification command), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is a "loss", "big hit", or "small hit", , Result of determining which of multiple jackpot types to use when the variable display result is a "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), Multiple types of small win types when the variable display result is a "small win" Different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (small hit type determination result).

After executing the process of step 063AKS205, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 063AKS206), and then ends the special symbol normal process.

FIG. 13-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of the special symbol process process as the special symbol stop process regarding the feature part 063AK.

When the special symbol stop process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a special symbol confirmed display flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is on (step 063AKS301). Here, the special symbol confirmed display flag is set to an on state by the process of step 063AKS305, which will be described later, in response to the derived and displayed confirmed special symbol that is a variable display result in the special symbol game.

When the special symbol confirmed display flag is off (step 063 AKS301; No), the CPU 103 makes settings for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol (step 063 AKS302), and sends a decorative symbol stop command to the production control board 12. Settings for transmission are made (step 063AKS303). The decorative pattern stop command is also referred to as a pattern confirmation command, and is a command that specifies that the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern is ended and the display result (stop pattern) is derived and displayed.

After executing the process of step 063AKS303, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the special figure confirmation display time (step 063AKS304). In the process of step 063AKS304, the special figure confirmed display time timer value, which is the stored value of the special figure confirmed display time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined special figure confirmed display time. Thereafter, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol confirmed display flag to the on state (step 063AKS305), and then ends the special symbol stop processing.

In step 063AKS301, when the special figure confirmed display flag is on (step 063AKS301; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the special figure confirmed display time has elapsed (step 063AKS306). For example, in the process of step 063AKS306, the special figure confirmed display time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and the special figure confirmed display time timer value is updated depending on whether the updated special figure confirmed display time timer value is "0" or not. It is sufficient to determine whether the display time has elapsed. If the special symbol confirmed display time has not elapsed in step 063AKS306 (step 063AKS306; No), the special symbol stop process is ended and the process waits until the special symbol confirmed display time has elapsed.

When the special pattern confirmation display time has elapsed in step 063AKS306 (step 063AKS306; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the special pattern confirmation display flag to turn it off (step 063AKS307), and then checks whether the jackpot flag is on or not. It is determined whether or not (step 063AKS308). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 063AKS308; Yes), a predetermined time is set as a jackpot start performance waiting time (step 063AKS309). The jackpot start performance waiting time corresponds to the jackpot start performance time during which the jackpot start performance (jackpot fanfare performance) is executed. In the process of step 063AK309, the jackpot start performance waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot start performance waiting time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined jackpot start performance time. After executing the process of step 063AKS309, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a winning start designation command (jackpot fanfare command) corresponding to the jackpot from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 063AKS310).

After executing the process of step 063AKS310, the CPU 103 clears the jackpot flag to turn it off (step 063AKS311), and clears the time saving flag to turn it off (step 063AKS312). After that, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating the normal state (a performance control command that designates the current game state in Pachinko game 1) from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS313).

Next, the CPU 103 converts the opening number count value, which is the stored value of the opening number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of rounds (in this embodiment, 15 times) in the jackpot gaming state. In this embodiment, it is set to "15" (step 063AKS314).

After executing the process of step 063AKS314, the CPU 103 clears the time saving counter (063AKS315). The time saving number counter is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and counts the number of time saving times, which is the remaining number of times the variable display is controlled to be in a time saving state. In the process of step 063AKS315, by clearing the time saving number counter, the time saving number count value, which is the stored value of the time saving number counter, is set to "0" as an initial value. Thereafter, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "4", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-process (step 063AKS316), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS308 that the jackpot flag is not on (step 063AKS308; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS317). When it is determined that the small hit flag is not on (step 063AKS317; No), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 063AKS318).

In step 063AKS317, if it is determined that the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS317; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the small hit start effect waiting time to any of the above-mentioned first specific time to third specific time. (Step 063AKS319). The small hit start performance waiting time corresponds to the small win start performance time. Specifically, in step 063AKS319, the CPU 103 determines the small hit start performance waiting time when the small win type is "Small win A" to "Small win A" by referring to the small hit start performance waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 13-21. The small hit E is determined to be one of the first specific time to the third specific time depending on which of the small win A winning start performance waiting time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the determined small winning start performance waiting time. The small hit type may be specified based on the small win type buffer value.

As shown in FIG. 13-21, in this embodiment, when the small win type is "small win A" or "small win B", the small win start performance time is set to the third specific time. Then, the small winning start performance waiting time is also determined to be the third specific time. When the small hit type is "small win C" or "small win D", corresponding to the small hit start performance time being set to the second specific time, the small hit start performance waiting time is also set to the second specific time. Time will decide. When the small win type is "small win E", the small win start performance waiting time is also determined to be the first specific time in response to the small win start performance time being set to the first specific time.

After executing the process of step 063AKS319, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a winning start designation command (small winning fanfare command) according to the small winning from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 063AKS320) .

After executing the process of step 063AKS320, the CPU 103 controls the distribution member 063AK28 to start an operation according to the distribution member operation pattern (step 063AKS321). After that, the CPU 103 clears the small win flag to turn it off (step 063AKS322), and sets the opening number count value to correspond to the upper limit number of openings (10 times in this embodiment) for opening and closing the big winning opening in the small winning gaming state. (step 063AKS323). After executing the process of step 063AKS323, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "8", which is the value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 063AKS324).

After executing the process of step 063AKS318 or step 063AKS324, the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS325). If it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS325; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop processing.

If it is determined that the time saving flag is on (step 063 AKS325; Yes), the CPU 103 updates the time saving number count value by subtracting 1 (step 063 AKS326), and the updated time saving number count value is "0". It is determined whether or not (Step 063AKS327). When it is determined that the time saving number count value is not "0" (step 063 AKS327; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop processing.

If it is determined that the time saving number count value is "0" (step 063AKS327; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the time saving flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS328), and sends a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state. Settings are made to do so (step 063AKS329), and the special symbol stop processing is completed.

FIG. 13-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S118 of the special symbol process process as a small hit pre-release process regarding the feature part 063AK.

When starting the small win release pre-processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the small win start performance waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS401). In the process of step 063AKS401, the small hit start performance waiting time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and the small hit starts depending on whether the updated small hit start performance waiting time timer value is "0" or not. It is determined whether the performance waiting time has elapsed. If it is determined that the small hit start performance waiting time has not elapsed (Step 063 AKS401; No), the CPU 103 ends the small win opening preprocessing.

In step 063AKS401, when it is determined that the small winning start performance waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS401; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 to be in the ON state (step 063AKS402). After that, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the game ball holding time (Step 063AKS403). In step 063AKS403, the CPU 103 sets a game ball holding time timer value, which is a stored value of a game ball holding time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to a predetermined game ball holding time. After executing the process of step 063AKS403, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "9", which is the value corresponding to the small hit opening process (step 063AKS404), and ends the small hit opening preprocessing.

FIG. 13-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S119 of the special symbol process process as the small hit opening process regarding the feature part 063AK.

When the small winning opening process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the opening number count value is "0" (step 063AKS501). If it is determined that the number of openings count value is not "0" (step 063AKS501; No), the CPU 103 determines that the number of game balls that entered the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state is equal to or less than the predetermined upper limit in the small winning gaming state. It is determined whether the number of prizes won (in this embodiment, 10) or more is greater than or equal to the number of prizes won (Step 063AKS502). In step 063AKS502, the CPU 103 determines whether the number of game balls detected by the big winning port switch 063AK5 (the number of times game balls are detected by the big winning port switch 063AK5) is greater than or equal to the upper limit winning number.

In step 063AKS502, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 063AK4 is less than the upper limit winning number (step 063AKS502; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is the timing to open the grand prize opening 063AK4. (Step 063AKS503). When it is determined that it is the timing to open the big winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the opening state of the big winning opening 063AK4 by controlling the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door to the ON state. (Step 063AKS504), and settings are made to send a command for specifying when the big prize opening is open (Step 063AKS505). After performing the process of step 063AKS505, the CPU 103 updates the open count value by subtracting 1 (step 063AKS506).

After executing the process of step 063AKS506, or when it is determined in step 063AKS503 that it is not the timing to open the big winning hole 063AK4 (step 063AKS503; No), the CPU 103 determines whether it is the timing to close the big winning hole 063AK4. (Step 063AKS507). When it is determined that it is not the timing to close the big winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507; No), the CPU 103 ends the small winning opening process. When it is determined that it is time to close the big winning opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the big winning opening 063AK4 to be in a closed state by controlling the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door to an OFF state. (Step 063AKS508). After executing the process of step 063AKS508, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting the command after opening the big winning opening (step 063AKS509), and ends the small winning opening process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS501 that the number of openings count value is "0" (step 063AKS501; Yes), or if it is determined in step 063AKS502 that the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 063AK4 is greater than or equal to the upper limit winning number. (Step 063AKS502; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the game ball holding time has elapsed (Step 063AKS510). In step 063AKS510, the CPU 103 updates the game ball holding time timer value by subtracting 1, and depending on whether the updated game ball holding time timer value is "0" or not, the game ball holding time elapses. Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the game ball holding time has not elapsed (step 063 AKS510; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit opening process.

In step 063AKS510, when it is determined that the game ball holding time has elapsed (step 063AKS510; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution unit supply solenoid 063AK12 to be in the OFF state (step 063AKS511).

After executing the process of step 063AKS511, the CPU 103 determines whether the game ball that entered the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state passed through any of the jackpot area 063AK19, time saving area 063AK20, or loss area 063AK21. (Step 063AKS512). In step 063AKS512, the CPU 103 selects whether or not the jackpot area passage flag, time saving area passage flag, or loss area passage flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is on in the small hit game state. It is determined whether the game ball that entered the big winning hole 063AK4 passed through any of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the losing area 063AK21.

If it is determined that the game ball has not passed through any of the jackpot area 063AK19, time saving area 063AK20, or loss area 063AK21 (step 063AKS512; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22 is turned on (jackpot area It is determined whether the passage switch 063AK22 has detected a game ball (step 063AKS518). If it is determined that the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22 is turned on (step 063AKS518; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot area passing flag to the on state (step 063AKS519), and ends the small winning opening process.

In step 063AKS518, if it is determined that the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22 is not on (step 063AKS518; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 is turned on (the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 detects a game ball). (step 063AKS520). If it is determined that the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 is turned on (step 063AKS520; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS521). When it is determined that the time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS521; No), the CPU 103 sets the time saving area passage flag to the on state (step 063AKS522) and ends the small winning opening process.

In step 063AKS520, if it is determined that the time saving area passing switch 063AK23 is not on (step 063AKS520; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the losing area passing switch 063AK24 is turned on (the losing area passing switch 063AK24 detects a game ball). (step 063AKS523). If it is determined that the loss area passage switch 063AK24 is not on (step 063AKS523; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit opening process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS523 that the loss area passing switch 063AK24 is turned on (step 063AKS523; Yes), or if it is determined in step 063AKS521 that the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS521; Yes), the CPU 103 The area passage flag is set to the on state (step 063AKS524), and the small winning opening process is ended.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if it is determined that the time saving area passing switch 063AK24 is turned on (step 063AKS520; Yes), it is determined that the time saving flag is on (step 063AKS521; Yes). Sometimes, the losing area passing flag is set to the on state without the time saving area passing flag being set to the on state.

In step 063AKS512, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through any of the jackpot area 063AK19, time saving area 063AK20, or loss area 063AK21 (step 063AKS512; Yes), the CPU 103 determines that the game ball has entered the jackpot slot 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state. It is determined whether all the game balls have been ejected to the outside of the special variable prize winning ball device 7 (Step 063AKS513). In step 063AKS513, the CPU 103 calculates the number of game balls detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16 (the number of times game balls were detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16) and the number of game balls detected by the jackpot area discharge count switch (the number of game balls detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16). The number of game balls detected by the area discharge count switch), the number of game balls detected by the time saving area discharge count switch (the number of times game balls were detected by the time saving area discharge count switch), and the losing area discharge count switch Whether or not the total value of the number of game balls detected by (the number of times game balls were detected by the losing area discharge count switch) matches the number of game balls detected by the big winning opening switch 063AK5. Accordingly, it is determined whether all the game balls that won in the big winning hole 063AK4 have been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7.

In step 063AKS513, if it is determined that all the game balls that entered the big winning hole 063AK4 have not been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513; No), the CPU 103 ends the small winning opening process. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the game balls that entered the big winning hole 063AK4 have been discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513; Yes), the CPU 103 adjusts the distribution member operation pattern by the distribution member 063AK28. Control is performed to end the corresponding operation (step 063AKS514).

After executing the process of step 063AKS514, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a winning end designation command (small winning ending command) according to the small winning from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 063AKS515).

In step 063AKS515, the CPU 103 sends a winning end designation command corresponding to the small winning to determine whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state or time saving state after the small winning gaming state ends, and to enter the jackpot gaming state after the small winning gaming state ends. A performance control command indicating the type of jackpot when controlled and the number of variable displays controlled to the time saving state when controlled to the time saving state after the end of the small winning game state is transmitted.

Specifically, in step 063AK515, the CPU 103 refers to the winning end designation command determination table shown in FIG. Accordingly, any one of the small win end designation command 1 to the small win end designation command 5 is selected as the win end designation command according to the small win, and settings are made for transmitting the selected command.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-24, if the jackpot area passing flag is set to the on state and the small win type is "small win A", after the small win game state ends, "jackpot A" is set. The small win end designation command 1 indicating that the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of `` is selected. If the jackpot area passage flag is set to the on state and the small win type is "small win B", the small win indicates that the jackpot game state will be controlled to "jackpot B" after the small win game state ends. End designation command 2 is selected. If the time saving area pass flag is set to ON state and the small win type is "Small win C", the time saving state is controlled for a period until the variable display is executed 5 times after the small winning game state ends. The small winning end designation command 3 indicating that the small winning is to be executed is selected. If the time-saving area pass flag is set to ON state and the small win type is "Small win D", the time-saving state is controlled for a period until the variable display is executed once after the small win game state ends. A small winning end designation command 4 indicating that the small winning is to be executed is transmitted. When the losing area passing flag is set to the ON state, regardless of the type of small win, after the small win gaming state ends, the small winning end designation command 5 is sent indicating that the control to change the gaming state is not performed. be done.

Returning to FIG. 13-23, after executing the process of step 063AKS515, the CPU 103 sets the passing notification effect waiting time to any one of the above-mentioned first special time to third special time (step 063AKS516). The passage notification performance waiting time corresponds to the passage notification performance time. In step 063 AKS516, the CPU 103 sets the passing notification effect waiting time to the states of the jackpot area passing flag, time saving area passing flag, and losing area passing flag by referring to the passing notification effect waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 13-25. Accordingly, one of the first to third special times is determined, and the passing notification performance waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the passing notification performance waiting time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is determined. Set to a value corresponding to the passing notification effect waiting time.

As shown in FIG. 13-25, in this embodiment, when the jackpot area passage flag is set to the ON state, the passage notification effect waiting time is set to the third special time, and the time saving area passage flag is set to the ON state. When the passing notification effect waiting time is set to the second special time, and when the losing area passing flag is set to the on state, the passing notification effect waiting time is set to the first special time. Ru.

Returning to FIG. 13-23, after executing the process of step 063AKS516, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "10", which is the value corresponding to the small hit ending process (step 063AKS517), and releases the small hit. Finish intermediate processing.

FIG. 13-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S120 of the special symbol process process as the small hit end process regarding the feature part 063AK.

When starting the small hit end process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the passing notification performance waiting time has elapsed (Step 063AKS601). In step 063AKS601, the CPU 103 updates the passing notification performance waiting time timer value by subtracting 1, and depending on whether the updated passing notification performance waiting time timer value is "0" or not, the CPU 103 waits for the passing notification performance. Determine whether time has elapsed. If it is determined that the passing notification performance waiting time has not elapsed (step 063KS601; No), the CPU 103 ends the small hit end process.

When it is determined that the passage notification performance waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS617), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot area passage flag is on (step 063AKS602). If it is determined that the jackpot area passing flag is on (step 063AKS602; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS603).

After executing the process of step 063AKS603, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot type buffer value according to the small hit type (step 063AKS604). Specifically, in step 063AKS604, if the small win type is "small win A" which is controlled to the jackpot game state of "jackpot A" after the end of the small win game state, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "jackpot A". On the other hand, if the small win type is "Small win B" which is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of "Jackpot B" after the end of the small win gaming state, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "Jackpot B". ” is set to “1”. The small hit type may be specified based on the small win type buffer value.

After executing the process in step 063AKS604, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the waiting time for the jackpot start effect (step 063AKS605), and sends a hit start designation command according to the jackpot from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Settings are made to do so (step 063AKS606). After executing the process of step 063AKS606, the CPU 103 clears the time saving flag to turn it off (step 063AKS607), and sends a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. Settings are made (step 063AKS608). Next, the CPU 103 sets the opening number count value to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state (step 063AKS609), and clears the time saving number counter (063AKS610). Thereafter, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "4", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step 063AKS611), and then ends the small-hit end processing.

If it is determined in step 063AKS602 that the jackpot area passage flag is not on (step 063AKS602; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving area passage flag is on (step 063AKS612). If it is determined that the time-saving area passing flag is on (step 063AKS612; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the time-saving area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS613).

After executing the process of step 063AKS613, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag to ON state (step 063AKS614), and sets the time saving number count value according to the small hit type (step 063AKS615). Specifically, in step 063AKS615, if the small win type is "small win C" which is controlled to be in the time saving state for a period until the variable display is executed 5 times after the end of the small win gaming state, the time saving number count value is set to "5", and if the small win type is "Small win D", which is controlled in the time saving state for the period until the variable display is executed once after the end of the small win game state, the time saving number is counted. Set the value to "1". The small hit type may be specified based on the small win type buffer value. After executing the process of step 063AKS615, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating a time saving state from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 063AKS616).

If it is determined in step 063AKS612 that the time saving area passing flag is not on (step 063AKS612; No), the CPU 103 clears the losing area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS617).

After performing the process of step 063AKS616 or step 063AKS617, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 063AKS618), and then executes the small hit end process. finish.

As described above, in this embodiment, the small winning ending process is started in response to the completion of the small winning opening process in which the big winning opening is opened, and when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 (step 063AKS612 ;Yes), the time-saving flag is set to the on state in the small hit end process (step 063AKS614). With such a configuration, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the time saving state is not controlled until the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state. It is configured.

In the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4, the characteristic part 063AK executes each process described above as a process in the special symbol process process of step S25, and as the information output process of step S23, the characteristic part 059AK Similarly, the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12-36 is executed. With such a configuration, in the information output process of step S23, the feature section 063AK, like the feature section 059AK, outputs the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot is in progress, and the jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot is in progress or the time is being shortened (in the special prize). In addition to the jackpot signal 2 indicating that the pachinko game machine 1 is in a time saving state, a jackpot signal 3 indicating that the pachinko game machine 1 is in a time saving state is output to external equipment such as a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1.

According to such a configuration, when the time saving state is controlled based on the end of the jackpot gaming state, and in the normal state, the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 063AK4 in the small winning gaming state enters the time saving area 063AK4. In both the case where the time saving state is controlled after the end of the small winning game state based on the passing, the time saving state and the consecutive game state can be suitably specified in the external device.

FIG. 13-27 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S171 of the production control process process as a variable display start setting process regarding the characteristic part 063AK.

When the variable display start setting process is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the sub-side time saving flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on (step 063AKS701). The sub-side time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is being controlled. If it is determined that the sub side time saving flag is on (step 063 AKS701; Yes), the production control CPU 120 stores the sub side time saving number count value which is the stored value of the sub side time saving number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. It is updated by subtracting 1 (step 063AKS702). The sub-side time saving number counter counts the number of time saving times (the remaining number of times the variable display is controlled to be in the time saving state).

After executing the process of step 063AKS702, the performance control CPU 120 performs settings for executing a time reduction number notification performance that notifies the number of time reductions (step 063AKS703). The present embodiment is configured to be capable of displaying, on the screen of the image display device 5, a time reduction number notification image indicating the number of time reductions as the time reduction number notification effect. In the time reduction number notification effect, the time reduction number notification image is displayed in a display mode showing the current number of time reductions based on the sub-side time reduction number count value. In this embodiment, the time saving number notification effect is executed when the variable display is being executed in the time saving state.

After executing the process of step 063AKS703, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the right-handed driving promotion performance flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on (step 063AKS704). If it is determined that the right-handed hitting promotion performance flag is not on (step 063 AKS704; No), the performance control CPU 120 sets the right-handed hitting promotion performance flag to the on state (step 063 AKS705), and controls to start the right-handed hitting promotion performance. (Step 063AKS706).

After executing the process of step 063 AKS706, the performance control CPU 120 sets the settings for executing the time-saving entry performance that notifies that the control to the time-saving state has started (the control has been changed from the normal state to the time-saving state). (Step 063AKS707). In this embodiment, as a time-saving rush effect, a first time-saving rush image showing the message "Save time!" and a message "Aim to the right and put the ball in the electric chew!" are shown on the screen of the image display device 5. An effect that displays the second time-saving entry image is executed. The second time saving entry image is an effect image that urges the player to win a game ball to the variable winning ball device 6B. In this embodiment, the time-saving entry effect is executed when the variable display is executed for the first time after being controlled from the normal state to the time-saving state.

After executing the process of step 063AKS707, or if it is determined in step 063AKS701 that the sub side time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS701; No), or if it is determined in step 063AKS704 that the right-handed hitting promotion effect flag is on. (Step 063AKS704; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" based on the display result designation command etc. transmitted from the main board 11 (Step 063AKS708). When it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" (step 063 AKS708; Yes), the production control CPU 120 displays a decoration that becomes a jackpot combination as a final stop symbol that becomes a fixed ornament symbol that is a variable display result of the ornament symbol. A combination of symbols is determined (step 063AKS709). In step 063AKS709, the performance control CPU 120 selects the decorative pattern of the jackpot combination as a confirmed decorative pattern by, for example, performing a random number lottery with reference to the decorative pattern determination table of the jackpot combination stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. decide.

In step 063AKS708, if it is determined that the special figure display result is not a "jackpot" (step 063AKS708; No), the production control CPU 120 displays the special figure based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. It is determined whether the result is a "small hit" (step 063AKS710). When it is determined that the special figure display result is not a "small hit" (step 063AKS710; No), the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols that will be a losing combination as a confirmed decorative symbol (step 063AKS711). In step 063 AKS711, the performance control CPU 120 selects the decorative pattern of the losing combination as a confirmed decorative pattern by, for example, performing a random number lottery with reference to the decorative pattern determination table of the losing combination stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. decide.

In step 063 AKS710, when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step 063 AKS710; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the sub side time saving flag is on (step 063 AKS712) .

If it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is not set to the on state (step 063 AKS712; No), the performance control CPU 120 executes the small hit confirmed decorative pattern determination table for the normal state shown in FIG. 13-28(b). By performing a random number lottery using the small win type, a fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) that becomes a small win combination is determined depending on which of the small win type is "small win A" to "small win E". Determine any one of the first to fifth small winning symbols shown in -28(a) (step 063AKS713). Which of the small winning types is "small winning A" to "small winning E" may be specified based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub-side time-saving flag is set to the on state (step 063AKS712; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines the small hit confirmed decorative symbol for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 13-28(c). By performing a random number lottery using a table, depending on which of the small winning types is "small winning A" to "small winning E", as a fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) that becomes a small winning combination. One of the first to fifth small winning symbols shown in FIG. 13-28(a) is determined (step 063AKS714).

The first small winning symbol shown in FIG. 13-28(a) is a decorative symbol showing the number "7" displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a "middle" symbol. This is a combination of decorative symbols in which a red rectangular decorative symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C indicating a message "V" indicating that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. As for the second small winning pattern, a decorative pattern showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a jackpot is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. This is a combination of decorative patterns in which a rectangular decorative pattern is displayed in blue indicating a message "V" indicating that the game is controlled in a gaming state. For the third small winning symbol, a decorative symbol showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a time-saving symbol is displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. This is a combination of decorative patterns in which a rectangular decorative pattern is displayed in red indicating the message "time" indicating that the object is controlled by the state. For the 4th small winning symbol, a decorative symbol showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a time-saving symbol is displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. This is a combination of decorative patterns in which a rectangular decorative pattern is displayed in blue, indicating the message "time" that indicates that the object is controlled by the state. For the 5th small winning symbol, a decorative symbol showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a "7" symbol is displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. This is a combination of decorative patterns in which a white rectangular decorative pattern indicating the message "Small" is displayed. The first small winning symbol and the second small winning symbol are a combination of decorative symbols that suggest that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The third small winning symbol and the fourth small winning symbol are a combination of decorative symbols that suggest that the time saving state is controlled.

In the normal state small hit fixed decorative symbol determination table shown in FIG. 13-28(b), when the small win type is "small win A" or "small win B" where the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 , the confirmed decorative symbol is determined to be the 4th small winning symbol at a higher rate than the 5th small winning symbol, is determined to be the 3rd small winning symbol at a higher rate than the 4th small winning symbol, and is determined to be the 3rd small winning symbol at a higher rate than the 3rd small winning symbol. The second small winning symbol is determined at a high rate, and the first small winning symbol is determined at a higher rate than the second small winning symbol. With such a configuration, the expectation level for the game ball to pass through the jackpot area 063AK19 and be controlled to the jackpot gaming state after the small winning gaming state ends is the same as when the first small winning symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol. is higher than when the second small winning symbol is derived and displayed, and when the second small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative symbol, it is higher than when the third small winning symbol is derived and displayed. It was higher when the 3rd small winning pattern was derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern than when the 4th small winning pattern was derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. is higher than when the fifth small winning symbol is derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the first to fifth small winning symbols is derived and displayed as the determined decorative pattern, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the normal state small hit fixed decorative symbol determination table, as shown in FIG. It is configured so that it can be determined as a small winning symbol. According to such a configuration, in the normal state, by deriving and displaying the third small winning symbol or the fourth small winning symbol that suggests that the time saving state is controlled as a fixed decoration symbol, the player can: Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control is performed to create a sense of expectation that the time saving state will be controlled, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Specifically, in the normal state small hit fixed decorative pattern determination table, as shown in FIG. 13-28(b), the small win type is "small win C" where the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 or "small win C". In the case of "Small hit D", the confirmed decorative symbol is determined to be the 1st small winning symbol at a higher rate than the 5th small winning symbol, and is determined to be the 2nd small winning symbol at a higher rate than the 1st small winning symbol. , the fourth small winning symbol is determined at a higher rate than the second small winning symbol, and the third small winning symbol is determined at a higher rate than the fourth small winning symbol. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation that the game ball will pass through the time saving area 063AK20 and be controlled to the time saving state after the small winning game state ends is higher than when the third small winning symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbol. is higher than when the 4th small winning symbol is derived and displayed, and higher when the 4th small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative symbol than when the 2nd small winning symbol is derived and displayed. , when the second small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern is higher than when the first small winning symbol is derived and displayed, and when the first small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative symbol. is higher than when the fifth small winning symbol is derived and displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the first to fifth small winning symbols is derived and displayed as the determined decorative pattern, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the small hit fixed decoration symbol determination table for time-saving state shown in FIG. It is configured so that it is not determined by a winning symbol. According to such a configuration, when the game ball is in the time saving state, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, although the time saving shift control based on the passing is not performed, the game ball is controlled to the time saving state as a fixed decorative symbol. The 3rd small winning symbol or the 4th small winning symbol suggesting that the winning symbol is displayed is derived, and the player has an expectation that the game ball will be controlled to a time saving state based on the fact that it has passed through the time saving area 063AK20. The structure is designed to prevent players from having problems and suppress a decline in interest in gaming. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to derive and display the third small winning symbol or the fourth small winning symbol that suggests that the time saving state is controlled as a fixed decoration symbol in the normal state, while the fixed ornament symbol in the time saving state can be derived and displayed. By being configured so that the third small winning symbol or the fourth small winning symbol is not derived and displayed as a symbol, a suitable performance can be performed depending on the state.

Returning to FIG. 13-27, after executing the processing of step 063AKS709, step 063AKS711, step 063AKS713, or step 063AKS714, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance control pattern (step 063AKS715). In step 063AKS715, the production control CPU 120 selects a plurality of types of production control patterns prepared (set) in advance (special pattern variation production control pattern) according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command received from the main board 11. ) and set it as the effect control pattern to be used. When the setting for executing the time reduction number notification performance is made in step 063AKS703, in step 063AKS715, a performance control pattern corresponding to the time reduction number notification performance (time reduction number notification performance control pattern) is selected and used. Set as a pattern. When the settings for executing the time-saving rush production control are made in step 063AKS707, in step 063AKS715, a production control pattern corresponding to the time-saving rush production is selected and used as a production control pattern (time-saving rush production control pattern). set.

After executing the process of step 063 AKS715, the production control CPU 120 sets the initial value of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command received from the main board 11. Set (step 063AKS716).

After executing the process of step 063AKS716, the performance control CPU 120 performs settings for starting variable display of decorative patterns and the like on the screen of the image display device 5 (step 063AKS717). In step 063AKS717, the production control CPU 120 transmits a display control command (command) specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern determined in step 063AKS715 to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Variable display of decorative patterns is started in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

After executing the process of step 063AKS717, the production control CPU 120 sets the settings for updating the pending display and active display displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the start of the variable display. (Step 063AKS718).

After executing the process of step 063AKS718, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production process flag to "2", which is the value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step 063AKS719), and executes the variable display start setting process. finish.

FIG. 13-29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S172 of the performance control process process as the variable display performance process regarding the characteristic part 063AK.

When the variable display production process is started, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the production control process timer. (Step 063AKS801). Specifically, in step 063AKS801, the production control CPU 120 updates the timer value of the production control process timer by, for example, subtracting 1, and updates the production control pattern (production control pattern during special figure fluctuation) determined in step 063AKS715. ), it is determined whether the end code has been read out in accordance with the updated timer value, thereby determining whether the variable display time has elapsed.

If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 063 AKS801; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the ready-to-win production period in which the ready-to-win production is executed based on the timer value of the production control process timer. (Step 063AKS802). The reach performance period may be predetermined, for example, in the performance control pattern (performance control pattern during special symbol fluctuation) determined in step 063AKS715. If it is determined that it is the ready-to-win performance period (step 063AKS802; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute the ready-to-win performance (step 063AKS803).

After executing the process in step 063AKS803 or in step 063AKS802, if it is determined that it is not the reach effect period (step 063AKS802; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of time reductions based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, etc. It is determined whether it is the time-saving number notification effect period during which the notification effect is executed (step 063AKS804). The time reduction number notification performance period may be predetermined in the performance control pattern (time reduction number notification performance control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715, for example. If it is determined that it is the time reduction number notification performance period (step 063AKS804; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute the time reduction number notification performance (step 063AKS805).

After executing the process of step 063AKS805, or if it is determined in step 063AKS804 that it is not the time reduction number notification performance period (step 063AKS804; No), the performance control CPU 120, based on the timer value of the performance control process timer, etc. It is determined whether it is the time-saving suggestion performance period in which the time-saving suggestion performance is executed (step 063AKS806). The time-saving suggestion performance period may be predetermined in the performance control pattern (performance control pattern at the time of special symbol fluctuation) determined in step 063AKS715, for example. When it is determined that it is the time-saving suggestion performance period (step 063AKS806; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute the time-saving suggestion performance (step 063AKS807).

After executing the process of step 063AKS807 or in step 063AKS806, if it is determined that it is not the time-saving suggestion performance period (step 063AKS806; No), the performance control CPU 120 will It is determined whether or not it is the time-saving rush performance period in which the rush performance is executed (step 063AKS808). The time-saving entry presentation period may be predetermined in the presentation control pattern (time-saving entry presentation control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715, for example. When it is determined that it is the time-saving entry performance period (step 063AKS808; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute the time-saving entry performance (step 063AKS809).

After executing the process of step 063AKS809, or when it is determined in step 063AKS808 that it is not the time-shortening production period (step 063AKS808; No), the production control CPU 120 adjusts the settings in the production control pattern determined in step 063AKS715, etc. Based on this, other controls are performed to execute effects during variable display including variable display operations of decorative symbols (step 063AKS810), and the effect processing during variable display is ended.

In step 063AKS801, if it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (step 063AKS801; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a symbol confirmation command has been received from the main board 11 (step 063AKS811). If it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has not been received (step 063 AKS811; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the variable display performance process.

If it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has been received (step 063AKS811; Yes), the production control CPU 120 transmits a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123 to control the "left", "center" ”, “Right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the determined decorative symbol as the final stop symbol determined in step 063AKS709, step 063AKS711, or step 063AKS712 is derived and displayed (step 063AKS812).

After executing the process of step 063AKS812, the production control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the waiting time for receiving the winning start designation command (step 063AKS813), and sets the value of the production process flag to a value corresponding to the waiting process for the special symbol. is updated to "3" (step 063AKS814), and the variable display performance process is ended.

FIG. 13-30(a) is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S173 of the production control process process as a special figure waiting process regarding the characteristic part 063AK.

When the special figure hit waiting process is started, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the winning start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS901). When it is determined that the winning start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS901; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the sub side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS902).

When it is determined that the sub side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS902; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the sub side time saving number count value is "0" (step 063AKS903). If it is determined that the sub-side time saving number count value is "0" (step 063AKS903; Yes), the production control CPU 120 clears the sub-side time saving flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS904) to promote right-handed hitting. After clearing the performance flag and setting it to the off state (step 063AKS905), control is performed to end the right-handed hitting promotion performance (step 063AKS906).

After executing the process in step 063AKS906, or if it is determined in step 063AKS902 that the sub-side time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS902; No), in step 063AKS903, the sub-side time saving count value is not "0". If it is determined (step 063AKS903; No), the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production process flag to "0", which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step 063AKS907), and executes the special figure per waiting process. end.

If it is determined in step 063 AKS901 that the waiting time for receiving the winning start designation command has not elapsed (step 063 AKS901; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning start designation command corresponding to the jackpot has been received. (Step 063AKS908).

When it is determined that the winning start designation command corresponding to the jackpot has been received (step 063AKS908; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the jackpot start performance time (step 063AKS909). In step 063AKS909, the jackpot start performance time timer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot start performance time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined jackpot start performance time. After executing the process of step 063AKS909, the production control CPU 120 performs control to start the jackpot start production (step 063AKS910), and sets the value of the production process flag to "6", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot production process. After updating (step 063AKS911), the waiting process per special drawing ends.

In step 063AKS908, if it is determined that the winning start designation command corresponding to the jackpot has not been received (step 063AKS908; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning start designation command corresponding to the small winning has been received. Determination is made (step 063AKS912). If it is determined that the winning start designation command corresponding to the small winning has not been received (step 063 AKS912; No), the production control CPU 120 ends the special symbol winning waiting process.

If it is determined that the winning start designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received (step 063 AKS912; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the small winning start performance time to any one of the first specific time to the third specific time. (Step 063AKS913). Specifically, in step 063AKS913, the performance control CPU 120 determines the small hit start performance time when the small win type is "small hit" by referring to the small hit start performance time determination table shown in FIG. 13-30(b). The value stored in the small win start performance timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is determined to be one of the first specific time to the third specific time depending on which one of "A" to "Small win E" is selected. The small hit start performance time timer value, which is , is set to a value corresponding to the determined small hit start performance time. The small winning type may be specified based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

As shown in FIG. 13-30(b), in this embodiment, when the small win type is "small win A" or "small win B", the small win start performance time is set to the third specific time, When the small hit type is "Small hit C" or "Small hit D", the small hit start performance time is set to the second specific time, and when the small win type is "Small hit E", the small hit start performance The time is set to a first specific time.

Returning to FIG. 13-30(a), after executing the process of step 063AKS913, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start the small hit start performance (step 063AKS914), and sets the value of the performance process flag during the small hit. After updating to "4", which is the value corresponding to the production process (step 063AKS915), the special figure hit waiting process is ended.

FIG. 13-31 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S174 of the production control process process as the small hit production process regarding the feature part 063AK.

When the small hit performance process is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the small hit start performance time set in step 063AKS913 has elapsed (step 063AKS1001). In step 063AKS1001, the small hit start performance timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and the small hit start performance time elapses depending on whether the updated small hit start performance time timer value is "0" or not. Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the small hit start performance time has not elapsed (step 063 AKS1001; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the small win performance process.

If it is determined that the small hit start performance time has elapsed (step 063 AKS1001; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the small hit start performance end flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on ( Step 063AKS1002). If it is determined that the small hit start performance end flag is not on (step 063 AKS1002; No), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to end the small win start performance (step 063 AKS1004), and turns on the small win start performance end flag. state (step 063AKS1005).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1005, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the sub side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1006). When it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is not on (step 063 AKS1006; No), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start the normal passing promotion performance (step 063 AKS1007), and ends the small winning performance processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063 AKS1006; Yes), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start the time saving time passing promotion production (step 063 AKS1008), and ends the small hit production process. do.

In step 063 AKS1002, if it is determined that the small hit start performance end flag is on (step 063 AKS1002; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a win end designation command corresponding to the small win has been received ( Step 063AKS1003). If it is determined that the winning end designation command corresponding to the small winning has not been received (step 063 AKS1003; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the small winning performance processing.

If it is determined that the winning end designation command corresponding to the small hit has been received (step 063 AKS1003; Yes), the production control CPU 120 clears the small winning start production end flag and sets it to the off state (step 063 AKS1009), and passes. After performing control to end the normal time passing promotion performance or the short time passing promotion performance that is being executed as the time promotion production (step 063AKS1010), the value of the production process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end production process. 5” (step 063AKS1011).

After executing the process of step 063 AKS1011, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received either the small hit end designation command 1 or the small hit end designation command 2 as the win end designation command corresponding to the small win. Determination is made (step 063AKS1012).

If it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 1 or the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063 AKS1012; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the passing notification performance time to the third special time ( Step 063AKS1013). In step 063AKS1013, the passing notification performance time timer value, which is the stored value of the passing notification performance time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, is set to a value corresponding to the third special time.

After executing the process of step 063AKS1013, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the sub side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1014). If it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is not on (step 063 AKS1014; No), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start the normal jackpot area passing notification production (step 063 AKS1015), and ends the small hit production processing. do. If it is determined that the sub-side time saving flag is on (step 063 AKS1014; Yes), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start the time saving time jackpot area passing notification production (step 063 AKS1016), and ends the small winning production process. do.

In step 063 AKS1012, if it is determined that neither the small hit end designation command 1 nor the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063 AKS1012; No), the production control CPU 120 specifies the end of the hit according to the small hit. It is determined whether either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 is received as a command (step 063AKS1017).

When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063 AKS1017; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the passing notification performance time to the second special time ( Step 063AKS1018). In step 063AKS1018, the passing notification effect time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the second special time. After executing the process of step 063AKS1018, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start the time saving area passage notification performance (step 063AKS1019), and ends the small hit performance process.

In step 063 AKS1017, if it is determined that neither the small hit end designation command 3 nor the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063 AKS1017; No), the performance control CPU 120 sets the passing notification performance time to the first special The time is set (step 063AKS1020). In step 063AKS1020, the passing notification effect time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the first special time. After executing the process of step 063AKS1020, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start the loss area passing notification performance (step 063AKS1021), and ends the small hit performance process.

FIG. 13-32 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S175 of the performance control process process as the small hit end performance process regarding the characteristic part 063AK.

When the small hit end performance process is started, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the passing notification performance time set in step 063AKS1013, step 063AKS1018, or step 063AKS1020 has elapsed (step 063AKS1101). In step 063AKS1101, the passage notification performance time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and depending on whether the updated passage notification performance time timer value is "0" or not, whether or not the passage notification performance time has elapsed is determined. Determine whether If it is determined that the passing notification performance time has not elapsed (step 063 AKS1101; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the small hit end performance process.

When it is determined that the passing notification performance time has elapsed (step 063AKS1101; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 executes the small hit end designation command 1 and the small hit end designation command 2 as the hit end designation command according to the small hit. It is determined whether any has been received (step 063AKS1102). If it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 1 or the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063 AKS1102; Yes), the production control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command. (Step 063 AKS1103), the value of the production process flag is updated to "3" which is the value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (Step 063 AKS1104), and the small hit end production process is ended.

In step 063 AKS1102, if it is determined that neither the small hit end designation command 1 nor the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063 AKS1102; No), the production control CPU 120 specifies the hit end according to the small hit. It is determined whether either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 is received as a command (step 063AKS1105). When it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1105; Yes), the production control CPU 120 sets the sub side time saving flag to the on state (step 063AKS1106 ).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1106, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 has been received as the winning end designation command corresponding to the small hit. A side time saving count value is set (step 063AKS1107). When receiving the small winning end designation command 3 indicating that the time saving state will be controlled for a period until the variable display is executed 5 times after the small winning gaming state ends, in step 063AKS1107, the sub-side time saving number count value is Set to "5". When receiving the small winning end designation command 4 indicating that the time saving state will be controlled for a period until the variable display is executed once after the small winning gaming state ends, in step 063AKS1107, the sub-side time saving number count value is set. Set to "1".

In step 063 AKS1105, if it is determined that neither the small hit end designation command 3 nor the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063 AKS1105; No), the production control CPU 120 determines that the sub side time saving flag is on. It is determined whether or not (Step 063AKS1108). When it is determined that the sub side time saving flag is on (step 063AKS1108; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the sub side time saving number count value is "0" (step 063AKS1109).

If it is determined that the sub-side time saving number count value is "0" (step 063AKS1109; Yes), the production control CPU 120 clears the sub-side time saving flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS1110) to promote right-handed hitting. After clearing the performance flag and setting it to an off state (step 063AKS1111), control is performed to end the right-handed hitting promotion performance (step 063AKS1112).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1107 or step 063AKS1112, or if it is determined in step 063AKS1108 that the sub-side time saving flag is not on (step 063AKS1108; No), the sub-side time saving number count value is "0" in step 063AKS1109. If it is determined that it is not (Step 063AKS1109; No), the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production process flag to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (Step 063AKS1113), and End the rendering process.

Hereinafter, an example of the performance operation related to the feature section 063AK will be described with reference to FIGS. 13-33 to 13-36.

First, with reference to FIGS. 13-33 and 13-34, an example of the performance operation when a small winning variation is executed in a normal state will be described. Specifically, below, the small hit fluctuation is executed in the normal state, and during the small hit fluctuation, the reach effect of Super Reach A and the time-saving suggestion effect are executed, and the third small hit symbol is introduced as a confirmed decorative pattern. The following is an example of a case where is derived and displayed.

FIG. 13-33(a) shows that in the normal state, a losing symbol (“135”) is displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Indicates a stopped display state. Figure 13-33(b) shows that in the normal state, small winning fluctuations are started, and the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It shows the state in which

FIG. 13-33(c) shows a state in which a reach has been established and an effect of displaying a character image AK6 representing character A on the screen of the image display device 5 is being performed as a reach effect of super reach A. .

In Fig. 13-33(d), the time-saving suggestion effect is started, and a predetermined losing symbol (“767”) is temporarily displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Indicates a stopped display state. FIG. 13-24(e) shows a state in which a variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the time-saving suggestion performance. Figure 13-33(f) shows a state in which the time-saving suggestion symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the time-saving suggestion performance. There is. Figure 13-33 (g) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are re-variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the time-saving suggestion performance. It shows.

In FIG. 13-33 (h), the third small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and the small winning variation This indicates that the process has ended.

In FIG. 13-33(i), control to the small winning game state is started, and as a small winning start effect, an arrow shape pointing to the right is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the message "Aim to the right!" is displayed. A right arrow image AK8 showing the message ``Put the ball here!'' and a small hit start image AK9 showing the shape of the special variable winning ball device 7 and the message ``Put the ball here!'' are executed. It shows the state of being. In the state shown in FIG. 13-33(i), the right-handed driving promotion effect is started in response to the start of the control to the small winning game state, and the right-handed hitting promotion image AK7 showing an arrow pointing in the right direction is displayed as an image. It is displayed on the screen of the device 5.

In the normal state, after the presentation operation shown in FIG. 13-33(i) is executed, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 13-34(a) is executed. FIG. 13-34(a) shows a state in which the normal passing excitement effect is being executed. In the normal passing promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 13-34(a), a jackpot area passage promotion image AK2, a time saving area passage promotion image AK3, and a losing area passage promotion image AK4 are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. , displays the normal pass promotion image AK1 including , and causes the jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26, and the losing area light emitting unit 063AK27 of the special variable winning ball device 7 to emit light, and the speakers 8L and 8R emit the message "Jackpot". Is it short? Is it time saving? Am I a loser?'' A production that outputs a normal-time provocative voice message is performed.

Hereinafter, in the normal state, when the normal passing promotion effect is being executed, the effect operation when the game ball passes the jackpot area 063AK19 will be explained.

In the normal state, in response to the game ball passing through the jackpot area 063AK19, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 13-34(a) ends, and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 13-34(b) is executed. FIG. 13-34(b) shows a state in which the normal jackpot area passing notification effect is executed and the normal jackpot area passing notification image AK10 indicating the message "V" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. ing.

In FIG. 13-34(c), after the small winning gaming state ends, the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and as a jackpot start effect, an arrow shape pointing to the right is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A first jackpot start image AK11 showing the message "Aim to the right!" and a second jackpot start image AK12 showing the message "Put the ball to the attacker!" are being executed. There is. The second jackpot start image AK12 is an effect image that urges the player to win a game ball into the special variable winning ball device 7. In the state shown in FIG. 13-34(c), the right-hand hitting promotion effect is being executed following the small winning game state, and the right-hand hitting promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. has been done.

Next, a description will be given of the performance operation when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 while the normal passing promotion performance is being executed in the normal state.

In the normal state, in response to the game ball passing through the time saving area 063AK20, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 13-34(a) is completed, and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 13-34(d) is executed. FIG. 13-34(d) shows a state in which the time-saving area passing notification effect is executed and a time-saving area passing notification image AK13 indicating the message "Lucky!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

FIG. 13-34(e) shows the screen of the image display device 5 that is controlled from the normal state to the time-saving state in response to the start of the next variable display after the small winning game state ends, and as a time-saving effect. , an effect is executed to display a first time-saving rush image AK14 showing the message "Save time!" and a second time-saving rush image AK15 showing the message "Aim to the right and put the ball in the electric chew!" This indicates the state in which the In the state shown in FIG. 13-34(e), the right-hand hitting promotion effect is being executed following the small winning game state, and the right-hand hitting promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. has been done. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 13-34(e), the time reduction number notification effect is executed in response to the control to the time reduction state, and the time reduction number notification image AK16 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It is displayed in a display mode showing that the number of times is 4.

Next, in the normal state, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21 while the normal passing promotion effect is being executed will be explained.

In the normal state, in response to the game ball passing through the losing area 063AK21, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 13-34(a) is completed, and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 13-34(f) is executed. FIG. 13-34(f) shows a state in which the losing area passing notification effect is executed and a losing area passing notification image AK17 indicating the message "Unfortunate!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

FIG. 13-34 (g) shows that after the small winning gaming state ends, when the gaming state is controlled to the normal state without changing, the next variable display starts, "left", "middle", This shows a state in which variable display is being performed in each of the "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 13-35 and 13-36, an example of the performance operation when a small winning variation is executed in the time saving state will be described. Specifically, below, a case will be described in which a small hit variation is executed in the time saving state, a reach effect of super reach A is executed during the small win variation, and a third small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative symbol. This will be explained using an example.

FIG. 13-35(a) shows that in the time saving state, a losing symbol (“135”) is displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Indicates a stopped display state. In the state shown in FIG. 13-35(a), a right-handed hitting promotion effect is being executed, and a right-handed hitting promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 13-35(a), the time saving number notification effect is being executed, and the time saving number notification image AK16 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 indicating that the number of time saving times is 4. It is displayed in the following manner.

Figure 13-35(b) shows that in the time saving state, small winning fluctuations are started, and the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It shows the state in which In the state shown in FIG. 13-35(b), the display mode of the time saving number notification image AK16 is updated in accordance with the start of variable display, and is displayed in a display mode indicating that the number of time saving times is 3. has been done.

FIG. 13-35(c) shows a state in which the reach is established, the reach effect of the super reach A is executed, and the character image AK6 representing the character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In FIG. 13-35(d), the second small winning pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the small winning fluctuation This indicates that the process has ended.

In FIG. 13-35(e), the control to the small win game state is started, the small win start effect is executed, and the right arrow image AK8 and the start image AK9 are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Indicates the condition. In the state shown in FIG. 13-35(e), in response to the start of control to the small winning game state, the right-handed driving promotion effect continues to be executed, and the right-handed hitting promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. has been done.

In the time saving state, after the performance operation shown in FIG. 13-35(e) is executed, the performance operation shown in FIG. 13-36(a) is executed. FIG. 13-36(a) shows a state in which the time-saving passing promotion effect is being executed. In the time-saving time passing promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 13-36(a), the time-saving time passing promotion image including a jackpot area passage promotion image AK2 and a losing area passage promotion image AK4 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. AK5 is displayed, and without causing the time-saving area light emitting unit 063AK26 of the special variable winning ball device 7 to emit light, the jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25 and the losing area light emitting unit 063AK27 emit light, and the speakers 8L and 8R make a message such as "Is it a jackpot? Loss? A production that outputs a sound encouraging the passage of time to save time is performed, which shows the message "I wonder if it is?".

Hereinafter, in the time saving state, when the time saving time passing promotion effect is being executed, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 will be explained.

In the time saving state, in response to the game ball passing through the jackpot area 063AK19, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 13-36(a) ends, and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 13-36(b) is executed. FIG. 13-36(b) shows a state in which the time-saving jackpot area passing notification effect is executed and the time-saving jackpot area passing notification image AK18 indicating the message “BONUS!” is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It shows.

FIG. 13-36(c) shows that after the small win game state ends, the jackpot start effect is executed under control of the jackpot game state, and the first jackpot start image AK11 and the second jackpot are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A state in which the start image AK12 is displayed is shown. In the state shown in FIG. 13-36(c), the right-hand hitting promotion effect is being executed following the small winning game state, and the right-hand hitting promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. has been done.

Next, in the time saving state, when the time saving time pass promotion effect is being executed, the effect operation when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 or the losing area 063AK21 will be explained. In the time saving state, the same performance operation is performed when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 and when the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21.

In the time saving state, in response to the game ball passing through the time saving area 063AK or the loss area 063AK21, the performance operation shown in FIG. 13-36(a) ends, and the performance operation shown in FIG. 13-36(d) is executed. be done. FIG. 13-36(d) shows a state in which the losing area passing notification effect is executed and the losing area passing notification image AK17 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

FIG. 13-36(e) shows that after the small winning game state ends, when the game state is controlled to the time saving state without changing, the next variable display starts, "left", "middle", This shows a state in which variable display is being performed in each of the "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the state shown in FIG. 13-36(e), the display mode of the time saving number notification image AK16 is updated in accordance with the start of variable display, and is displayed in a display mode indicating that the number of time saving times is 2. has been done. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 13-36(e), the right-handed driving promotion effect is being executed following the small winning game state, and the right-handed hitting promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. is displayed.

As explained above, in the characteristic part 063AK, the small winning symbol (special display result) is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game in the normal state, and is formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 (variable means). If the game ball (gaming medium) passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 (special area) when the big winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, time-saving transition control is performed based on the passage, and the time-saving mode is changed from the normal state to the time-saving state. state (special state), while in the time-saving state, a small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special pattern game, and when the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball is in the time-saving state. When passing through area 063AK20, time saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. Furthermore, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure game in the normal state, and when the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and the time saving state When a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in a special figure game and the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be open, different effects can be executed depending on the case where the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20. . According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed depending on the state.

In addition, in the feature part 063AK, the same effect is produced when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state and when the game ball does not pass through either the jackpot area 063AK19 or the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state. Configured to be executable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

Further, the characteristic part 063AK is configured to be able to perform different performances when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the time saving state and when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the normal state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 063AK, different effects are variably displayed when small winning symbols are derived and displayed in the special pattern game in the normal state and when small winning symbols are derived and displayed in the special pattern game in the time saving state. Configured to be executable during execution. According to such a configuration, suitable effects can be performed depending on the situation.

In addition, in the feature part 063AK, when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in a special pattern game in the normal state, it is controlled to a time saving state as an effect suggesting that the small winning symbol will be derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol. It is configured such that a time-saving suggestion effect that suggests the above can be executed while the variable display is being executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a variety of performances and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the second special symbol game, the price is higher than when the small prize symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the first special symbol game. It is configured to be controlled to shorten the time according to the ratio. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the second special symbol game, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

This invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiments, but it is possible to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may also include a part of the configuration.

In the above embodiment, as a preview preview performance, the display mode of the pending display displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode in normal times, so that the display mode corresponding to the pending display can be changed. In the display, the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4 that is controlled to be in the open state in the small winning gaming state is controlled to be in the small winning gaming state, and is in any of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the losing area 063AK21. It may also be configured to be able to execute a hold display change effect that foretells that the vehicle will pass through a certain point.

For example, by using the hold display change effect, the display color of the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not started yet is changed to blue, green, or red, which is different from the normal white color, so that the hold display Changes in the display mode can be recognized, and the game ball that enters the jackpot area 063AK19 and the time saving area is controlled to be in the small winning gaming state, and the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4 that is controlled to be open in the small winning gaming state is The configuration may be such that it is possible to suggest that the object passes through either 063AK20 or the losing area 063AK21.

Specifically, in the case where the pending display change effect is configured to be executable as a pre-read notice, the pre-read judgment is performed based on the occurrence of a starting prize in the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process. It's fine if you do it. In the pre-reading determination, for example, by performing a random number lottery with reference to the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12(a) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-12(b). , the process of pre-reading and determining whether the variable display result is a "big hit", "small hit", or "loss", and when it is pre-reading and determining that the variable display result is a "small hit", the process shown in Figure 13-14 By performing a random number lottery with reference to the small hit type determination table shown in (b), a process of pre-reading and determining which of the small winning types is to be set as "small winning A" to "small winning E" is performed. Bye. After that, in the starting winning determination process, settings may be made to transmit a starting winning command indicating the result of the pre-reading determination.

The starting winning command that has been set to be sent in the starting winning determination process is transmitted as the main prize by executing the command control process in step S27 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the production control board 12. The starting winning command transmitted from the main board 11 is stored in a starting winning time provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 by executing command analysis processing in step S75 of the production control main process shown in the flowchart of FIG. It only needs to be stored in the command buffer.

In this case, in the pre-read notice setting process executed in step S161 of the effect control process processing, in response to receiving the start winning command from the main board 11, whether or not to execute a pending display change effect as a pre-read notice effect. It is only necessary to decide the execution mode.

In the reservation memory that is stored when deciding whether to execute the reservation display change performance and the execution mode, there are reservations where the variable display result is a "big hit" and a reservation where the variable display result is a "small win" and the small win type is , if the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 and is held in "small win C" or "small win D", then after the end of the variable display that is executed first, that is, the destination By changing from the normal state to the time-saving state before executing the variable display corresponding to the suspension of the target of advance notice, the variable display is Results and variation patterns may vary. In such a case, there will be an inconsistency between the content suggested by the pending display change effect as a look-ahead preview effect and the actual variable display result or variation pattern, causing distrust among players and reducing their interest in the game. There is a possibility.

Therefore, among the stored holds, there is a hold where the variable display result is "Jackpot", and a hold where the variable display result is "Small hit" and the small win type is "Small hit C" or "Small hit D". If any of the above is included, execution of the pending display change effect may be restricted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

For example, in the prefetch notice setting process, there is a hold whose variable display result is "Jackpot" and a hold where the variable display result is "Small hit" and the small win type is "Small hit C" or " If there is no reservation that results in "small hit D", according to the determination ratio shown in the normal time reservation change determination table shown in Figure 13-37 (a), according to the variable display result and the small hit type. , it is sufficient to determine whether or not to execute the pending display change effect and the manner in which it is executed. On the other hand, among the stored holds, there are holds where the variable display result is "Jackpot", and the variable display result is "Small hit" and the small win type is "Small hit C" or "Small hit D". If any of the following is included, the variable display result and the small hit will be displayed according to the determination ratio shown in the normal time reservation change determination table shown in the limit time reservation change determination table shown in Figure 13-37(b). Depending on the type, it is only necessary to determine whether or not to execute the pending display change effect and the manner in which it is executed. Among the stored holds, there is a hold where the variable display result is "Jackpot", and a hold where the variable display result is "Small hit" and the small win type is "Small hit C" or "Small hit D", Whether or not it is included can be determined by checking the contents of the starting winning buffer.

In the normal hold change determination table, as shown in Figure 13-37 (a), when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the hold display change effect is held at a higher rate than when it is determined not to execute (white). The display mode of the display is determined to be blue, the display mode of the pending display is determined to be green at a higher rate than blue, and the display mode of the pending display is determined to be red at a higher rate than green. With this configuration, the expectation of winning a jackpot is higher when the pending display is displayed in red than when it is displayed in green, and when the pending display is displayed in green it is higher than when it is displayed in blue. It is higher when the hold display is displayed in blue than when it is displayed in white (when the hold display change effect is not executed). On the other hand, in the limit hold change determination table, as shown in FIG. 13-37(b), execution of the hold display change performance in which the jackpot expectation level is green or higher is restricted. In the example shown in FIG. 13-37(b), the hold display change effect in which the hold display is displayed in blue can be executed, but it may be limited to only "not executed".

In addition, in the normal time reservation change determination table shown in Figure 13-37(a) and the limit time reservation change determination table shown in Figure 13-37(b), when the variable display result is a "small hit", the variable display We have shown an example in which the display format is determined to be the same as when the result is a "jackpot", but this is just an example, and the variable display result is a "small win" and the small win type is "small win A" or A display mode peculiar to the case of “small win B” (for example, “Jackpot?”), or a case where the variable display result is “small win” and the small win type is “small win C” or “small win D” There may be a unique display mode (“time?”). According to such a configuration, variations in the hold display change effects are increased, and it is possible to attract the attention of the players.

In the above embodiment, the special figure display result becomes "small hit" in the pending memory corresponding to the second special figure game stored after the time saving state ends, and the small win type is set to the game ball in the time saving area 063AK20. Even if it is configured to be able to perform different effects depending on the case where a pending memory that results in a "small win C" or "small win D" passing through is included, and the case where such a pending memory is not included. good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

For example, in the reserved memory corresponding to the second special figure game stored after the time saving state ends, the special figure display result becomes "Small hit", and the small win type is "Small hit C" or "Small hit D". '', the time saving state may be controlled again by any of the remaining second special game game holds (remaining hold) after the time saving state ends (the second special game Execute a return success effect that informs that there is a hold in the hold memory corresponding to the special figure display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D". Bye. On the other hand, the special figure display result becomes "small win" in the reserved memory corresponding to the second special figure game stored after the time saving state ends, and the small win type is "small win C" or "small win D". If there is no hold that is included, the time saving state will not be controlled again by any of the remaining holds (the special figure display result will be "small hit" in the hold memory corresponding to the second special figure game) , there is no pending event where the small win type is "small win C" or "small win D"). As an example, both the successful return performance and the failed return performance are a common performance in which a combination of different decorative symbols is stopped and displayed after a performance that incites whether or not the time-saving state will be controlled again as a common performance. Good to have.

In the embodiment described above, as a performance corresponding to the small winning fluctuation, the game ball is displayed without suggesting that the winning game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, which is controlled to be open in the small winning gaming state. It is configured to be able to execute a jackpot promotion effect that suggests that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 and that the game ball passes through the loss area 063AK21, and also when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state. Based on this, after performing a loss effect that suggests that the game ball did not pass through the jackpot area 063AK19, the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and based on the passing, the game ball enters the time saving state after the small winning gaming state ends. It may also be configured to be able to execute a relief effect that suggests that it will be controlled. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

For example, as a jackpot promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 13-38(a), a message "Jackpot" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and a jackpot suggestion suggesting that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 is shown. It is only necessary to make it possible to execute an effect that displays a jackpot promotion image AK19 including an image AK20 and a loss suggestion image AK21 that shows a message "Lose" and suggests that the game ball passes through a loss area 063AK21. In this case, based on the game ball passing through the time saving area 063AK20, as a loss effect, as shown in FIG. 13-38(b), a loss suggestion image AK21 included in the jackpot promotion image AK19 is highlighted. All you have to do is execute. In the state shown in FIG. 13-38(b), the frame line of the loss suggestion image AK21 is displayed thicker than the frame line of the jackpot suggestion image AK20, which is not highlighted, so that the loss suggestion image AK21 is highlighted. There is. After performing the performance action shown in FIG. 13-38(b) as a loss performance, as a rescue performance, as shown in FIG. 13-38(c), in a part of the area where the loss suggestion image AK21 is displayed, Displays the message "Time saving" and displays the time saving suggestion image AK22 that suggests that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, ends the highlighting of the loss suggestion image AK21, and highlights the time saving suggestion image AK22. All you have to do is perform the performance. In the state shown in FIG. 13-38(c), the frame line of the time-saving suggestion image AK22 is displayed thicker than the frame lines of the jackpot suggestion image AK20 and loss suggestion image AK21, which are not highlighted, so that the time-saving suggestion image AK22 is highlighted.

In the above embodiment, in the special symbol normal processing shown in the flow chart of FIG. The description has been made assuming that when it is determined that it has not been determined to be a "big hit" (step 063AKS107; No), it is determined whether or not to set the special figure display result to be a "small hit" (step 063AKS118). However, this is just an example, and the process of determining whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" and the process of determining whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" are optional. can be executed in this order. For example, after executing a process to determine whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit", if the special figure display result is not determined to be a "small hit" in the process, the special figure display It may be configured to execute processing for determining whether or not the result is a "big hit." Alternatively, by determining whether the special pattern display result is a "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" through a single process, it is determined whether the special pattern display result is a "big hit" or not. The process of determining whether or not the special figure display result is to be a "small hit" may be executed simultaneously.

In the above embodiment, only one game ball among the game balls that entered the big prize opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state flows down to the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and the one game ball enters the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8. It has been explained that the balls other than the game balls are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. However, this is just an example, and the configuration is such that a plurality of game balls among the game balls that have entered the big prize opening 063AK4 in the small winning game state enter the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8. You may. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this case, after one game ball enters the sorting section 063AK18 and passes through one of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21, at least one other game ball may enter the distribution section 063AK18 and pass through other areas among the jackpot area 063AK19, time saving area 063AK20, and loss area 063AK21. In this case, among the plurality of game balls that entered the distribution section 063AK18 in the small winning game state, the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 first passed through any of the jackpot area 063AK19, time saving area 063AK20, and loss area 063AK21. Based on this, the gaming state after the small winning gaming state ends may be controlled. For example, if the game ball that first enters the distribution section 063AK18 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the small hit game state, even if other game balls pass through the time saving area 063AK20 or the loss area 063AK21 after passing through, the first Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the jackpot area 063AK19, the control may be changed to the jackpot gaming state after the small winning gaming state ends.

Or, among the plurality of game balls that entered the distribution section 063AK18 in the small winning gaming state, which of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 did the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 pass through? Based on this, the gaming state after the small winning gaming state ends may be controlled. For example, if the game ball that last entered the distribution section 063AK18 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the small winning game state, other game balls may have passed through the time saving area 063AK20 or the losing area 063AK21 before passing through the jackpot area 063AK19. Also, based on the fact that the last game ball has passed through the jackpot area 063AK19, the control may be changed to the jackpot gaming state after the small winning gaming state ends.

Alternatively, a priority order is set in advance between the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21, and a plurality of game balls that enter the distribution section 063AK18 in the small winning gaming state are placed in the jackpot area 063AK19. , When the game ball passes through multiple areas among the time saving area 063AK20 and the losing area 063AK21, the game after the small winning gaming state ends based on the passage to the area with the highest priority among the areas that the game ball passed through. The state may also be controlled. For example, the priority of the jackpot area 063AK19 may be set higher than the priority of the time saving area 063AK20, and the priority of the time saving area 063AK20 may be set higher than the priority of the losing area 063AK21. In this case, when a plurality of game balls that have entered the distribution section 063AK18 pass through the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21, it is based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the jackpot area 063AK19 with the highest priority. After the small win game state ends, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

In the above embodiment, in the case of the time saving state, when the game ball that won the big prize opening 063AK4 which was controlled to be in the open state in the small winning gaming state passes through the time saving area 063AK20, the time saving transition control based on the passing is performed. It was explained that it was not possible. However, this is just an example, and in the case of the time saving state, when the game ball that won the big prize opening 063AK4, which was controlled to be open in the small winning gaming state, passes through the time saving area 063AK20, based on the passage, It may be possible to extend the period during which the time saving state is controlled by performing time saving transition control and controlling the time saving state for a predetermined period after the end of the small winning game state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this case, based on the fact that the game ball that entered the big prize opening 063AK4 in the time saving state passed through the time saving area 063AK20, an effect is created to notify that the period of time controlled in the time saving state has been extended. It may be configured to be executable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. For example, as a performance to notify that the period during which the time saving state is controlled has been extended, a time saving number recovery performance may be performed to increase the number of time saving times indicated by the number of time saving number notification image AK16.

In addition, in this case, when in the time saving state, a suggestion regarding passing through the jackpot area 063AK19 and a losing area 063AK21 is made without making a suggestion regarding passing through the time saving area 063AK20 (the game ball does not pass through the time saving area 063AK20). (Suggesting that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 without suggesting that the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21) Instead of the time-saving time passing promotion effect, the jackpot area 063AK19 and the time-saving area 063AK20 and the passing through the losing area 063AK21 (suggesting that the gaming ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, that the gaming ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, and that the gaming ball passes through the losing area 063AK21) ) It may also be configured to be able to perform a normal-time passing promotion effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, as an effect corresponding to small winning fluctuations, the game ball that enters the big winning opening 063AK4, which is controlled to be open in the small winning gaming state, enters the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21. , may be configured to be executable during execution of the small winning variation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. For example, if the small win type is "small win A" or "small win B" in which the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, an effect that suggests that the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 is changed to the small win fluctuation. Executed during execution, if the small win type is "small win C" or "small win D" in which the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20, an effect that suggests that the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 is created. Executed during execution of small hit variation, if the small win type is "small win E" in which the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21, a small hit is performed that suggests that the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21. It may be configured to be executed while the fluctuation is being executed.

In the above embodiment, the normal passing promotion performance and the short time passing promotion performance are started in response to the completion of the small winning variation, the completion of the small winning start performance, and the start of opening and closing of the big prize opening. It was explained as follows. However, this is only an example, and the normal time passing promotion performance and the time saving time passing promotion performance may be configured to be able to be started while the small winning variation is being executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In particular, if the normal passing promotion effect is configured to be executable while the small winning variation is being executed, by displaying the normal passing promotion image AK1 during the execution of the small winning variation, the game ball will hit the jackpot in the small winning gaming state. Based on the fact that the small winning game state has passed through the area 063AK19, the expectation level to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the small winning gaming state, and the small winning game based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small winning gaming state. It is possible to improve the game interest by suggesting the degree of expectation to be controlled to a time saving state after the end of the state and the degree of expectation that the game ball will pass through the losing area 063AK21 in the small winning game state.

In the embodiment described above, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, the time saving area passing notification effect is provided which displays the time saving area passing notification image AK13 showing the message "Lucky!" on the screen of the image display device 5. While executing the game, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state, Sorry! The explanation has been made assuming that a losing area passing notification effect is executed in which a losing area passing notification image AK17 showing a message "A losing area passing notification image AK17 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5." However, this is just an example, and the effect executed when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state is different from the effect executed when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state. It may be a performance of For example, when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26 is made to emit light, while when the game ball passes through the time saving area 063AK20 in the time saving state, the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26 An effect may be performed in which the light is not emitted (turned off). Alternatively, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, a notification sound indicating the message "Time-saving!" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while in the time-saving state, the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. When the object passes, an effect may be performed in which the notification sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the above embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 has been described as having the jackpot area 063AK19, the time saving area 063AK20, and the losing area 063AK21, but this is only an example. The special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured to include the time saving area 063AK20, but not include the jackpot area 063AK19 or the losing area 063AK21. According to such a configuration, manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured to include a plurality of time saving areas 063AK20. In this case, in the small winning gaming state, depending on which of the plurality of time saving areas 063AK20 the game ball has passed, the time saving state may be controlled for different periods after the small winning gaming state ends. good. For example, the time saving area 063AK20 is configured to include a first time saving area and a second time saving area, and when the game ball passes through the first time saving area in the small winning gaming state, the small winning gaming state After the small winning game state ends, the time saving state is controlled for a period until the variable display is executed 5 times, and if the game ball passes through the second time saving area in the small winning gaming state, after the small winning gaming state ends. , the time saving state may be controlled for a period until the variable display is executed once. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the plurality of time-saving areas 063AK20 the game ball passes through in the small winning game state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, when in the low probability low base state as the normal state, time saving transition control is performed based on the game ball passing through the time saving area 063AK20 in the small winning gaming state, and the small winning gaming state is The explanation has been made assuming that the time saving state is controlled after the end of the period. However, this is just an example, and when the high-accuracy/low-base state is in the high-accuracy/low-base state, time-saving transition control is performed based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small-hit gaming state, and the small-hitting gaming state is It may be configured such that the time saving state is controlled after the end of the period.

Any part or all of the configurations described above can be combined with each other in any manner.

Each configuration regarding the characteristic portion 063AK may be combined with a part or all of each configuration regarding other characteristic portions as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of the configurations of other features as appropriate.

For example, the feature section 079SG may be introduced into the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 063AK. Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature part 063AK, during the first period of the normal time passing promotion performance, time saving time passing promotion performance, super reach A to super reach C reach performance as predetermined performances, It is possible to display an effect animation whose progress speed is a first speed on the image display device 5 serving as a display means, and in a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the progress speed of the effect is the first speed. It is possible to display an effect animation at a second speed slower than the above speed on the image display device 5, and the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect can be displayed in both the first period and the second period. It may be configured such that the speakers 8L and 8R as the sound output means can output the same speed at the same speed. According to such a configuration, the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, but the predetermined performances include the normal time passage promotion performance, the time saving time passage promotion performance, and the super reach A~ Since the speed of the performance sound corresponding to the reach performance of super reach C does not change between the first period and the second period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 063AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 063AK is:
A gaming machine (e.g. Pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.),
a state control means (such as the CPU 103) capable of controlling a special state (such as a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state;
It has a special area (e.g. time saving area 063AK20 etc.), and has a first state (e.g. open state) in which game media (e.g. game balls etc.) can easily enter, and a second state (e.g. (closed state, etc.); variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can be controlled;
A performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the variable display,
The variable means is controlled to the first state (for example, in FIG. 13-6, FIG. -8, Figure 13-23, etc.),
The state control means includes:
If the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state, based on the passage, the Control from the normal state to the special state (for example, FIG. 13-23, FIG. 13-26, etc.),
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state and the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state, control is performed based on the passage. (e.g., Figures 13-23, 13-26, etc.)
The effect execution means derives and displays the special display result as a variable display result in the normal state, and when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the game medium passes through the special area; In the special state, the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result, and when the variable means is controlled to the first state, different effects can be performed depending on when the game medium passes through the special area. (e.g., FIG. 13-8, FIG. 13-23, FIG. 13-24, FIG. 13-31, FIG. 13-34, FIG. 13-36, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed depending on the state.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above regarding the feature part 063AK,
The variable means has a specific area (for example, jackpot area 063AK19, etc.),
The state control means is capable of controlling the gaming medium to the advantageous state when it passes through the specific area (for example, FIGS. 13-23 and 13-26),
The performance execution means executes the same performance when the game medium passes through the special area in the special state and when the game medium does not pass through either the specific area or the special area in the special state. can be executed (for example, FIG. 13-8, FIG. 13-23, FIG. 13-24, FIG. 13-31, FIG. 13-36, etc.),
You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above regarding the feature part 063AK,
The effect execution means is capable of executing different effects depending on when the game medium passes through the specific area in the special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area in the normal state (for example, FIG. 13 -8, Figure 13-23, Figure 13-24, Figure 13-31, Figure 13-34, Figure 13-36, etc.),
You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(4) In any of the gaming machines described in (1) to (3) above regarding the characteristic part 063AK,
The effect execution means performs different effects when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state. Can be executed during variable display execution (for example, Figures 13-8, 13-9, 13-15, 13-16, 13-19, 13-33, 13-35, etc.),
You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, suitable effects can be performed depending on the situation.

(5) In any of the gaming machines described in (1) to (4) above regarding the characteristic part 063AK,
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, the effect execution means executes a process in the special state as a performance that suggests that the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result. It is possible to perform a performance that suggests that the variable display will be controlled (for example, a time-saving suggestive performance) while the variable display is being executed (for example, Fig. 13-8, Fig. 13-9, Fig. 13-15, Fig. 13-16, Fig. 13 -19, Figure 13-33, Figure 13-35, etc.),
You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a variety of performances and improve the interest in the game.

(6) In any of the gaming machines described in (1) to (5) above regarding the characteristic part 063AK,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special figure game, etc.) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special figure game, etc.),
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the second identification information, the special state is displayed at a higher rate than when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the first identification information. (for example, Figures 13-14),
You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second identification information, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 064AK)
Characteristic section 063AK includes characteristic section 064AK shown below.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 064AK is:
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can perform a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
a state control means (such as the CPU 103) capable of controlling a special state (such as a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state;
It has a specific area (for example, jackpot area 063AK19, etc.) and a special area (for example, time saving area 063AK20, etc.), and has a first state (for example, open state) into which game media (for example, game balls, etc.) can easily enter, and a game state. a second state in which the medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter (for example, a closed state, etc.); and variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can be controlled;
A performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the variable display,
The state control means includes:
The game medium can be controlled to the advantageous state based on passing through the specific area (for example, FIG. 13-23, FIG. 13-26, etc.);
It is possible to control from the normal state to the special state based on the game medium passing through the special area (for example, FIG. 13-23, FIG. 13-26, etc.);
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect (for example, a normal-time passage promotion effect) for suggesting passage between the specific area and the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state. Yes (for example, Figure 13-8, Figure 13-10, Figure 13-31, Figure 13-34, etc.),
If the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the state control means controls the variable means to the special state until the variable means is controlled to the second state. No (for example, Figure 13-23, Figure 13-26, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, suitable control can be performed depending on the state.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above regarding the feature part 064AK,
The performance execution means is
In the normal state, when the variable means is controlled to the first state, executing the special effect (for example, FIG. 13-8, FIG. 13-10, FIG. 13-31, FIG. 13-34, etc.);
In the special state, when the variable means is controlled to the first state, a specific effect (for example, a time-saving passage promotion effect) that makes a suggestion about passing through the specific area without making a suggestion about passing through the special area. ) (for example, Figure 13-8, Figure 13-10, Figure 13-31, Figure 13-36, etc.),
You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, suitable effects can be performed depending on the situation.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above regarding the feature part 064AK,
The effect execution means is capable of executing different effects depending on when the game medium passes through the specific area in the special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area in the normal state (for example, FIG. 13 -8, Figure 13-23, Figure 13-24, Figure 13-31, Figure 13-34, Figure 13-36, etc.),
You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above regarding the feature part 064AK,
The variable means is controlled to the first state (for example, in FIG. 13-6, FIG. 8, Figures 13-23, etc.),
The effect execution means performs different effects when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state. Can be executed during variable display execution (for example, Figures 13-8, 13-9, 13-15, 13-16, 13-19, 13-33, 13-35, etc.),
You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, suitable effects can be performed depending on the situation.

(5) In the gaming machine of (3) or (4) above regarding the feature part 064AK,
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, the effect execution means executes a process in the special state as a performance that suggests that the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result. It is possible to perform a performance that suggests that the variable display will be controlled (for example, a time-saving suggestive performance) while the variable display is being executed (for example, Fig. 13-8, Fig. 13-9, Fig. 13-15, Fig. 13-16, Fig. 13 -19, Figure 13-33, Figure 13-35, etc.),
You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a variety of performances and improve the interest in the game.

(6) In any of the gaming machines described in (3) to (5) above regarding the characteristic part 064AK,
The effect executing means is configured to control the game medium when the special display result is derived as a variable display result and the variable means is controlled to the second state after the variable means is controlled to the first state. It is possible to perform different effects depending on when the game medium passes through the specific area and when the game medium passes through the special area (for example, FIG. 13-8, FIG. 13-23, FIG. 13-24, FIG. 13-31 , Figure 13-34, Figure 13-36, etc.),
You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance executed when the variable means is controlled to the second state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 065AK)
The characteristic part 065AK will be explained. In the feature section 065AK, descriptions of parts (configuration, processing, etc.) that are common to the basic description will be omitted.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the basic description, after being controlled to the jackpot game state, it was possible to control to the high base state (time saving state). In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the feature section 065AK, in the low base state (normal state), the display result of the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 20 is a predetermined "time-saving symbol" among the "normal symbol losses". In this case, the machine is controlled to a high base state (time saving state) regardless of the display result of the variable display of special symbols. As a result, the low base state may shift to the high base state without going through the jackpot game state, so it is possible to provide unexpected gameplay.

In the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the feature section 065AK, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes a "time-saving symbol", the low base state shifts to the high base state even if the variable display of the special symbol is in progress. It looks like this.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the feature section 065AK is capable of executing a predetermined effect that suggests or notifies the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol. By a predetermined effect, it is possible to suggest and notify that the display result of the normal symbol will be a "normal symbol hit" or "time saving symbol", or that the display result of the special symbol will be a "jackpot". Such a predetermined effect can make the player look forward to which display result will be suggested or notified, thereby increasing the player's interest.

(Configuration of characteristic part 065AK)
FIG. 14-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 65AK1 having the characteristic part 065AK, and shows the arrangement layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK differs from the pachinko game machine 1 of the basic explanation shown in FIG. 1 in the arrangement of some components. In addition, here, mainly the parts different from FIG. 1 will be explained, and the same components will be given the same numbers and the explanation will be omitted.

In the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK shown in FIG. You will be guided to the lower side of the gaming area via the second route, which is the route on the right side of the frame surrounding 5, and either win (enter) into each winning opening, or go to the out exit without entering any winning opening. It is captured.

Shooting the game ball so that it passes through the first path on the left side of the image display device 5 is called left-handed hitting, and shooting the game ball so that it passes through the second path on the right side of the image display device 5. This is called a right-handed hit. The area where a game ball hit to the left can be guided is called the left area, and the area where a game ball hit to the right can be guided is also called the right area.

In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, the winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5 and in the left area of the gaming area, similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic explanation, while the winning ball device 6A is provided in the left area of the gaming area. The ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are provided at the lower right of the image display device 5 and in the right area of the gaming area. Therefore, in the high base state where the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) is in the open state or in the jackpot game state where the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is in the open state, the game can be played by hitting right. In a low base state in which the prize opening is not open, the game is played by hitting left-handed.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the feature section 065AK, passage gates 41 are provided in the left and right areas, making it easier to play the Futu game even in a low base state where the game is played by left-handed players. . Thereby, in the low base state, the display result of the normal symbol becomes a "time-saving symbol" and it is possible to secure an opportunity to shift to the high base state.

Further, in the pachinko game machine 65AK1 having the characteristic part 065AK, general winning holes 10 are provided in the left area and the right area. In addition, the general winning a prize opening 10 may be provided in either one area|region.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d are provided as game effect lamps 9. The main lamp 9a is provided at a position above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, the frame lamp 9b is provided so as to surround the gaming area, and the attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3. It is provided near the ball device 7. A movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided above the image display device 5 of the game board 2, and the movable body lamp 9 is provided on the movable body 32.

Next, the operation of the pachinko game machine 65AK1 having the characteristic section 065AK will be explained. FIG. 14-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process process executed in step S26 of FIG. In the normal symbol process process, when the CPU 103 detects that the gate switch 21 is turned on, that is, the game ball passes through the gate 41 (step S411; Yes), the CPU 103 executes the gate switch passing process (step S412). do.

In the gate switch passing process of step S412, the CPU 103 checks whether the count value of the gate passing memory counter (the number of gate passing memories) has reached the maximum value ("4" in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passing memory counter is incremented by 1, and the value of the normal symbol determination random number, which is a software random number, is extracted and stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the gate passing memory number. Also, the number of lights on the ordinary figure reservation display 25C is increased by one. After that, depending on the value of the normal symbol process flag, any one of steps S400 to S404 as shown below is executed.

In the normal symbol normal processing in step S400, the CPU 103 determines that the normal symbol is not in a state in which it is possible to start changing the normal symbol (for example, the normal symbol display 20 is not in a state where the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed, and the variable winning (when the ball device 6B is not in an open state) and the number of gate passing memories is not 0, the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area and the normal symbol shown in FIG. 14-3 Using the determination table, it is determined whether or not to make it a hit (whether or not to make a stop symbol of a normal symbol a winning symbol) and whether to make it a time-saving symbol. If the gaming state is a low base state (if the time saving flag is not set), use the table shown in Figure 14-3 (A), and if the gaming state is a high base state (if the time saving flag is not set), use the table shown in Figure 14-3 (A). example), use the table shown in Figure 14-3(B). Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value ("1" in this example) indicating the normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S401).

In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern setting process of step S401, the CPU 103 sets the normal symbol process timer to a value corresponding to the variable display time (ordinary symbol fluctuation time) until the normal symbol is variably displayed and then derived and displayed. Start the symbol process timer. In addition, control is executed to send a command specifying the start of fluctuation of the normal symbols to the performance control board 12. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value ("2" in this example) according to the normal symbol variation process (step S402).

The CPU 103 executes variable display (variation) of the normal symbols in the normal symbol variation process of step S402. Then, check whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, update the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (in this example, "3") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step S403). .

The CPU 103 stops the fluctuation of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 20 in the normal symbol stop processing of step S403. Then, start the normal pattern process timer by setting a value equivalent to the normal pattern confirmation time (stop pattern display time) in the normal pattern process timer, and when the timer times out, the normal pattern stop pattern becomes a winning pattern. Check if it exists. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a losing symbol), and if it is a time-saving symbol, a process for starting a time-saving state is executed. Further, if it is not a winning symbol (if it is a losing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (in this example, "0") indicating normal symbol normal processing (step S400). If the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal symbol process timer is started by setting a value corresponding to the normal electric accessory release time in the normal symbol process timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (in this example, "4") indicating the normal electric accessory opening process (step S404).

The CPU 103 sets the variable winning ball device (normal electric accessory) 6B in an open state in the normal electric accessory opening process of step S404. When the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed and the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (in this example, "0") indicating normal symbol normal processing (step S400).

FIG. 14-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a normal symbol determination table in which a determination value regarding the display result of the normal symbol that determines the display result of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol normal process of step S400. In this embodiment, the range that the random number for normal symbol determination can take is 1 to 250, but the determination value is set in the normal symbol determination table by comparison with the random number for normal symbol determination.

FIG. 14-3(A) is a normal symbol determination table used in the low base state. As shown in FIG. 14-3 (A), in the low base state, if the random number value for normal symbol determination is 1 or 2, it is determined to be a hit (ordinary symbol hit). When it is determined that the winning ball has won, the variable winning ball device 6A remains open for 5 seconds. If the random number value for normal symbol determination is between 3 and 230, it is determined that it is a loss (ordinary symbol loss). If it is determined that the ball has lost, the variable winning ball device 6A will not be in the open state. In the case of winning a normal pattern or losing a normal pattern, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is 10 seconds, and the pattern confirmation time is 0.5 seconds.

Further, if the random number value for normal symbol determination is between 231 and 240, it is determined that it is a loss (time saving symbol A). When it is determined that it is the time saving symbol A, the variable winning ball device 6A is not in the open state, but is controlled to be in the high base state (time saving state). In the case of time-saving symbol A, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time is 10 seconds.

Further, if the random number value for normal symbol determination is between 241 and 250, it is determined that it is a loss (time-saving symbol B). When it is determined that it is the time-saving symbol B, the variable winning ball device 6A is not in the open state, but is controlled to be in the high base state (time-saving state). In the case of time-saving symbol B, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 15 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time is 10 seconds.

In this way, the time-saving symbols are part of the loss (normal pattern loss), and a part of the determination value corresponding to the normal pattern loss is assigned to the time-saving pattern.

In addition, in the normal symbol normal processing in step S400, after determining (determining) whether or not it is a common symbol, it is determined whether or not to use a time-saving symbol. By doing this, when it is determined that the symbol is a winning symbol and a time-saving symbol due to a random number error, etc., priority can be given to winning a symbol. In addition, in a low base state, it is more advantageous for the player to get a time-saving symbol than to hit a normal symbol, so first decide whether to use a time-saving symbol or not, and then play the normal symbol. It may be determined whether the figure is correct or not.

In this example, two types of time-saving symbols are provided, and the period of the high base state (end condition, number of time-saving symbols) is different between the time-saving symbol A and the time-saving symbol B. , as shown in Figure 14-4 (A), when the display result of the normal symbol becomes "time saving symbol A" in the low base state, the high base state continues until the special symbol variation is executed 50 times (the number of time savings will be 50 times). In addition, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes "time saving symbol B" in the low base state, the high base state continues until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times (the number of time savings becomes 100). Therefore, the time-saving symbol B is more advantageous for the player than the time-saving symbol A.

In addition, in this embodiment, whether or not to use a time-saving symbol in the case of a loss of a regular symbol and the type of time-saving symbol are determined by the random number for determining the regular symbol, but different random numbers may be used to determine the type of the time-saving symbol. It is also possible to determine whether or not to use a time-saving symbol and the type of the time-saving symbol. Moreover, the types of time-saving symbols are not limited to two types, and may be one type or three or more types. When there is only one type of time-saving symbol, the process of determining the display result is facilitated by determining whether or not it is a time-saving symbol using the random number value for normal symbol determination.

As shown in FIG. 14-3 (A), while the symbol confirmation time for winning or losing symbols is 0.5 seconds, the symbol confirmation time for time-saving symbols is as long as 10 seconds. In this way, by increasing the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol, it is possible to notify that the player will move to a high base state (time-saving state) or hit right during the symbol confirmation time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent and reduce the situation where the player is at a disadvantage due to lack of preparation due to a sudden transition to a high base state. Note that the symbol confirmation time may be constant regardless of the display result.

In addition, the variation time in the case of time-saving symbol B is 15 seconds, and the variation time in the case of other display results is 10 seconds. With this, it is possible to predict the display result based on the variation time of the normal symbol. Note that the variation time may be determined depending on the display results, or the variation time for all display results may be the same (for example, 10 seconds).

FIG. 14-3(B) shows a normal symbol determination table used in a high base state. As shown in FIG. 14-3 (B), in the high base state, if the random number value for normal symbol determination is between 1 and 229, it is determined to be a hit (ordinary symbol hit). When it is determined that the winning ball has won, the variable winning ball device 6A remains open for 7.5 seconds. When the random number value for normal symbol determination is 230, it is determined that the winning pattern is a loss (normal pattern loss). If the random number value for normal symbol determination is between 231 and 240, it is determined that it is a loss (time-saving symbol A). If the random number value for normal symbol determination is between 241 and 250, it is determined that it is a loss (time saving symbol B). In the high base state, even if the time saving symbols (time saving symbols A and B) become available, the number of time savings (the end condition for the high base state) is not updated and the control While high base state is not affected. That is, in the high base state, time-saving symbols are treated the same as ordinary symbols losing. If it is determined that the winning ball has lost, the variable winning ball device 6A will not be in the open state.

In the case of the high base state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 1.5 seconds and the symbol confirmation time is 0.5 seconds regardless of the display result. This makes it possible to quickly repeat variations in the normal symbols.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 14-3, the fluctuation time is determined according to the display result of the normal symbol, but the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the normal symbol is determined based on the determined display result of the regular symbol. may be determined. In this case, when the display result is a loss of a normal symbol, the determination ratio of the fluctuation time may be made to differ depending on whether the symbol is a time-saving symbol or not. By doing this, it is possible to suggest whether or not the symbol will become a time-saving symbol based on the variation time of the normal symbol.

As shown in Figures 14-3 (A) and (B), the symbol confirmation time for time-saving symbols in the high base state is 0.5 seconds, while the symbol confirmation time for time-saving symbols in the low base state is 10 seconds. It's getting longer, like seconds. In this way, by lengthening the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the player will move to the high base state (time-saving state) or hit right at the symbol confirmation time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent and reduce the situation where the player is at a disadvantage due to lack of preparation due to a sudden transition to a high base state. In addition, in the high base state, even if the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol, such notification is not necessary, so by shortening the symbol confirmation time, the next normal symbol change can be executed promptly. I can do it. Note that the symbol confirmation time may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, even after the display result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot and the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the time saving state is controlled. As shown in Figure 14-5 (A), when the display result of the first special drawing is a jackpot, there are two types of jackpots: "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B." After entering the gaming state, the high base state continues until the special symbol variation is executed 50 times (time saving number becomes 50 times), and after entering the jackpot gaming state of "Jackpot B", 100 times. The high base state continues until the special symbol variation is executed (the number of time reductions reaches 100). In addition, the display result of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot basically when the base is low. In addition, as shown in Figure 14-5 (B), "Jackpot C" is provided as a jackpot type when the display result of the second special drawing is a jackpot, and the jackpot game state of "Jackpot C" After that, the high base state continues until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times (the number of time saving times becomes 100 times). In addition, the display result of the second special drawing becomes a jackpot basically when the base is high.

As described above, in this embodiment, the end condition (time saving number) of the high base state (time saving state) is such that the display result of the second special pattern is a jackpot compared to the case where the display result of the first special pattern is a jackpot. It is more advantageous if this happens. Thereby, since the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol and shifts to the high base state, the ending condition of the high base state does not become disadvantageous to the player, so that the player's disappointment can be suppressed. Also, when the base is high, the conditions for ending the high base state (time saving state) in the event of a jackpot are more advantageous than the low base state, so once the high base state is reached, it is easier to maintain the high base state for a long time. I can do it.

In addition, in the feature part 065AK, it is sufficient that the game is controlled to at least the time saving state after being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and the number of rounds of "Jackpot A" to "Jackpot C" and the presence or absence of probability change control are arbitrary. good. Further, the jackpot types and the number of time savings shown in FIG. 14-5 are just examples, and the number of jackpot types may be greater or less than those shown in FIG. 14-5, or, for example, the number of time savings may be all the same.

FIG. 14-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol stop processing in step S403 of FIG. 14-2. In the ordinary symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the ordinary symbol confirmed display flag is set (step 065 AKS001). Normal symbols are displayed until the symbol confirmation time elapses after the display result is derived and displayed. That is, the symbol confirmation time can also be said to be the period from when the display result of the normal symbol is derived and displayed until the next variation of the normal symbol starts. If it is the symbol confirmation time, the normal pattern confirmation display flag is set.

If the regular symbol confirmed display flag is not set (step 065AKS001; No), the display result of the ordinary symbol (confirmed ordinary symbol) is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 20 (step 065AKS002), and the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol is stopped. Settings for transmitting the designated general figure stop designation command to the production control board 12 are executed (step 065AKS003). In step 065 AKS003, the production control board 12 is set to send a normal pattern stop designation command according to the display result so that the display result of the normal pattern can be specified. Then, the symbol confirmation period (see Figure 14-3) is set according to the gaming state (high base state, low base state) and the normal pattern display result (step 065 AKS004), and the normal pattern confirmed display flag is set to the on state. (Step 065AKS005). After that, the process at the time of normal symbol stop is ended.

If the normal symbol confirmation display flag is set (step 065AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether the symbol confirmation period for the normal symbol has elapsed (step 065AKS011). In the process of step 065AKS011, for example, it is determined whether or not the timer value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period set in step 065AKS004 is subtracted and becomes 0. If the symbol determination period has not elapsed (step 065 AKS011; No), the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the symbol confirmation period has passed (step 065AKS011; Yes), it is determined whether the display result is a common symbol (step 065AKS012). If the display result is a normal pattern (Step 065AKS012; Yes), set the normal electric accessory opening time to the normal symbol process timer (Step 065AKS013), and set the value of the normal symbol process flag to the normal electric accessory release time. It is updated to a value (for example, "4") indicating medium processing (step 065AKS014), and the normal symbol stop processing is ended.

If the display result is not a common symbol (step 065AKS012; No), it is determined whether the display result is a time-saving symbol (step 065AKS015). If the display result is a time-saving symbol (step 065AKS015; Yes), it is determined whether the time-saving flag is set or not, thereby determining whether the high base state is present (step 065AKS016). If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS016; No), for example, by checking the value of the special figure process flag, it is determined whether or not it is in the jackpot gaming state (step 065AKS017). In this embodiment, in the case of a jackpot gaming state, the time saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so the transition to the time saving state based on the time saving symbol is not performed. There is. In addition, if the special symbol is changing and the display result of the change is a jackpot, the time saving state will be controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the jackpot, so the time saving symbol will be changed. The transition to the time-saving state based on this may not be performed.

If it is not in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS017; No), the time-saving flag is set to ON state (step 065AKS018), and the time-saving number counter is set to the number of time-savings corresponding to the time-saving symbol (see Figure 14-4 (A)). (Step 065AKS019). Thereby, it is possible to shift to a high base state (time saving state). In addition, in response to the transition to the time saving state, settings are made to transmit a gaming state designation command specifying the time saving state to the production control board 12 (step 065AKS020).

If the display result is not a time-saving symbol but a regular symbol loss (step 065AKS015; No), a high base state (step 065AKS016; Yes), a jackpot game state (step 065AKS017; Yes), or step 065AKS020 After executing the process, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (for example, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal process (step 065AKS021), and the normal symbol stop process is ended.

FIG. 14-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process processing (step S76) shown in FIG. 8 of the feature section 065AK. In the production control process processing of the characteristic part 065AK, in addition to the production control process processing of the basic explanation shown in FIG. Notification setting processing (step 065AKS2) is now executed.

FIG. 14-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the ordinary symbol linked production control process (step 065AKS1) executed in the production control process process of FIG. 14-7. The normal symbol linked performance is a performance that suggests and informs the display result of the normal symbol in conjunction with the execution of the variation of the normal symbol. The general map linked production is included in the predetermined production. In the conventional figure interlocking effect control process, control for executing the conventional figure interlocking effect is performed.

In the production control process linked to common figures, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the execution flag linked to common figures is set (step 065AKS031). The flag is set when execution of the Fuzu-zu interlocking performance is started as a predetermined performance. If the general figure linked production execution flag is not set (step 065AKS031; No), it is checked whether the special figure linked production execution flag is set (step 065AKS032). The special figure linked production execution flag is set when execution of the special figure linked production is started. In this embodiment, it is also possible to perform a special symbol-linked performance that suggests and informs the display result of the special symbol in conjunction with the variation of the special symbol (decorative symbol) as a predetermined performance. The special figure linked production will be described later. If the special figure linked production execution flag is set (step 065 AKS032; Yes), that is, if the special figure linked production is being executed as a predetermined production, a new predetermined production (regular picture linked production) is executed. Therefore, the general figure linked production control process is ended.

If the special symbol linked production execution flag is not set in step 065AKS032 (step 065AKS032; No), it is confirmed whether or not a normal symbol variation start designation command has been received (step 065AKS051). If the normal symbol variation start designation command has not been received (step 065 AKS051; No), the normal symbol interlocking production control process is ended.

If the normal symbol fluctuation start designation command is set (step 065 AKS051; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the sub-time saving flag is in the on state or not, thereby determining whether or not the high base state is present. (Step 065AKS052). If it is in a high base state (step 065 AKS052; Yes), the fluctuation frequency of the normal symbol is high and the display result is almost always a hit on the common symbol, so the common symbol linked effect is not executed and the normal symbol linked effect control process is performed. end.

If it is not a high base state (step 065AKS052; No), it is confirmed whether or not it is a jackpot gaming state (step 065AKS053). Whether or not it is a jackpot gaming state is confirmed, for example, by the value of the production control process flag. In that case, when the value of the performance control process flag is 6 or more, it is assumed that the state is a jackpot game state. If it is in the jackpot game state (step 065 AKS053; Yes), in order not to disturb the performance during the jackpot, and because it is controlled to the high base state after the jackpot game state ends, it is possible to play the game without executing the jackpot linked performance. The figure-linked effect control process ends.

If it is not in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS053; No), it is determined whether or not the super reach effect is being executed (step 065AKS056). Here, a variation is being executed according to a variation pattern accompanied by a super reach, and the determination may be made based on whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the variation exceeds the start timing of the super reach. If the super reach reach effect is being executed (step 065 AKS056; Yes), the general figure linked effect control process is ended without executing the normal figure linked effect in order to attract attention to the super reach reach effect. In addition, even if you do not perform the general figure linked effect during the execution of effects other than the super reach effect (notice effects on the image display device 5, movement effects of the movable body 32, effects with high expectations for jackpot, etc.) good.

If the reach performance of super reach is not being executed (step 065AKS056; No), a predetermined performance pattern corresponding to whether or not to perform the normal pattern linked performance and the performance mode in the case of execution is determined (step 065AKS059). In step 065AKS059, as shown in FIG. 14-8(B), depending on the display result of the normal symbol specified from the normal symbol variation start designation command, whether or not to perform the normal symbol linked effect and a predetermined effect pattern are determined.

FIG. 14-8(C) is a diagram showing a predetermined effect pattern. The predetermined performance is a performance that suggests or notifies the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol, the predetermined performance pattern SP1 is a pattern that suggests that both the normal symbol and the special symbol will be a loss, and the predetermined performance pattern SP2 is a pattern that notifies that it will be a "normal symbol", and the predetermined performance pattern SP3 is a pattern that notifies that it will be a "time-saving symbol". The predetermined performance patterns SP4 and SP5 are patterns that suggest that the special symbol will be a jackpot symbol, and the degree of expectation that the special symbol will be a jackpot is higher with the predetermined performance pattern SP5 than with the predetermined performance pattern SP4. In this embodiment, the predetermined performances of all the predetermined performance patterns are started in the same manner, and then the results according to the predetermined performance patterns are notified. Therefore, even if the predetermined performance pattern SP1 indicates a loss, it can be expected that another predetermined performance pattern will be used at the start of the performance.

In addition, after suggesting the display result or the display result of the special symbol, a false pattern suggesting a loss may be provided. For example, a pattern that displays an image such as ``Maybe it will save time?'' to suggest that the display result of a normal symbol will become a time-saving symbol, then displays an image such as ``Unfortunate'' to indicate that the result will not be a time-saving symbol. may be provided.

The predetermined production patterns corresponding to the production linked to the common figure are SP1 to SP3, and in step 065AKS059, the determination ratio as shown in FIG. It is decided which one to use. As shown in FIG. 14-8 (B), when the display result of the normal symbol (normal symbol display result) is "normal symbol hit", the percentage of determination to the predetermined production pattern SP2 is high, If it is a "loss", there is a high probability that the predetermined performance pattern SP1 will be selected, and if it is "time saving symbol A" or "time saving symbol B", especially if it is "time saving symbol B" which has a large number of time savings. has a high rate of being determined as the predetermined effect pattern SP3. Thereby, it is possible to suggest and notify the result of the display of the common map through the common map linked performance (predetermined performance). Note that the determination ratio shown in FIG. 14-8(B) is just an example, and any ratio may be used as long as the result of displaying the common map can be suggested and notified by the common map linked performance (predetermined performance). Further, as the predetermined performance pattern for the common map linked performance, a predetermined performance pattern other than the predetermined performance patterns SP1 to SP3 may be provided.

Subsequently, the performance control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the general pattern linked performance (step 065AKS064). If it is not determined to execute the common figure linked effect (step 065 AKS064; No), the common figure linked effect control process is ended.

If it has been decided to execute the Fuzu-zu interlocking performance (Step 065 AKS064; Yes), the execution time of the Fuzu-zu interlocking performance according to the decision result (predetermined performance pattern) in Step 065 AKS059 is set in the Fuzu-zu interlocking performance timer. The corresponding value is set (step 065AKS078). Then, based on the performance control data corresponding to the predetermined performance pattern, etc., a normal figure linked performance (predetermined performance) is started (step 065AKS079). Then, in response to the start of the common symbol interlocking performance, the common symbol interlocking performance execution flag is set (step 065 AKS080), and the common symbol interlocking performance control process is ended.

If the flag is set (Step 065AKS031; No), the value of the Fuuzu linked production timer is subtracted by 1 (Step 065AKS034), and the value of the Fuuzu linked production timer becomes 0? It is determined whether or not (step 065AKS035). If the value of the common figure interlocking effect timer is not 0 (step 065 AKS035; No), the general figure interlocking effect control process is ended.

When the value of the Fuzu linked production timer becomes 0 (Step 065AKS035; Yes), the Fuzu linked production is ended (Step 065AKS036), and the Fuzu linked production execution flag is reset to the off state (Step 065AKS037). ), the normal map linked production control process ends.

FIG. 14-9(A) is a flowchart showing an example of a special figure-linked effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a special figure-linked effect as a predetermined effect and a predetermined effect pattern when executing it. The special figure interlocking production determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the production control process process shown in FIG. 14-7 before starting the variation of the decorative symbols. In the special figure linked production determination process, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not the regular figure linked production execution flag is set (step 065AKS091). If the flag is set (step 065 AKS091; Yes), that is, if the common map linked performance is being executed as a predetermined performance, a new predetermined performance (special map linked performance) is executed. Therefore, the special figure linked production determination process is ended. If the general map linked production execution flag is not set (step 065 AKS091; No), it is determined whether the sub-time saving flag is on or not, thereby confirming whether or not the high base state is present (step 065 AKS092 ). If it is in a high base state (step 065 AKS092; Yes), the average special figure fluctuation time is short and it is not possible to secure a period for executing the special figure linked effect, so the special figure linked effect is not executed, so the special figure linked effect is not executed. The performance determination process ends.

In addition, since the special figure linked performance determination process is a process executed at the start of variation of decorative symbols, the special figure linked performance is not determined and executed in the case of a jackpot game state or a small win game state. If it is not a high base state (step 065AKS092; No), it is confirmed whether the fluctuation to be started this time is a fluctuation pattern that results in a super reach loss or a super reach jackpot (step 065AKS093). It should be noted that whether or not the variation pattern is a super reach loss or a super reach jackpot can be specifically determined by checking the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. If the variation pattern is not a super reach miss or a super reach jackpot (step 065 AKS093; No), the special figure linked performance determination process is ended. In this way, in this embodiment, if the variation pattern does not involve a super reach, the special figure linked effect is not executed, but even if the variation pattern does not involve a super reach, the special figure linked effect is performed at a predetermined rate. A performance (for example, a predetermined performance of the predetermined performance pattern SP1) may be executed.

If it is a variation pattern of super reach loss or super reach jackpot (step 065AKS093; Yes), a predetermined performance pattern corresponding to whether or not special symbol linked performance is to be executed and the performance mode when executed is determined (step 065AKS094). In step 065AKS094, as shown in FIG. 14-9(B), depending on the display result of the special symbol (decorative symbol), whether or not to perform the special symbol-linked performance and a predetermined performance pattern are determined.

The predetermined production patterns corresponding to the special figure linked production are SP1, SP4, and SP5, and in step 065AKS094, the presence or absence of execution of the special figure linked production and the predetermined production pattern SP1 are determined at the determined ratio as shown in FIG. 14-9 (B). , SP4, or SP5 is determined. As shown in FIG. 14-9(B), when the special figure display result is a "jackpot", the percentage of predetermined effect pattern SP5 is determined to be high, and when the special figure display result is a "loss" , the ratio of the predetermined effect pattern SP4 being determined is high. As a result, the jackpot expectation level (reliability) is higher for the predetermined performance pattern SP5 than for the predetermined performance pattern SP4. Since the predetermined performance patterns SP4 and SP5 are determined when they are variable patterns accompanied by a super reach, when the special figure interlocking performance of these predetermined performance patterns is executed, it is possible to notify that it will be a super reach. Furthermore, with the determination ratio shown in FIG. 14-9, a jackpot may occur even in the case of the predetermined performance pattern SP1, so a surprising performance can be executed. The determined ratio shown in FIG. 14-9(B) is an example, and any ratio may be used as long as the special figure display result can be suggested and announced by the special figure linked effect (predetermined effect). Further, as the predetermined performance pattern of the special figure linked performance, a predetermined performance pattern other than the predetermined performance patterns SP1, SP4, and SP5 may be provided.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it has been decided not to perform the special figure linked performance (step 065AKS095). If it is determined not to perform the special figure linked effect (step 065 AKS095; Yes), the special figure linked effect determination process is ended. When it is decided to execute the special figure linked production (step 065AKS095; No), settings are made to execute the special figure linked production corresponding to the determined predetermined production pattern (step 065AKS096). In step 065AKS096, for example, performance control data corresponding to a predetermined performance pattern is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 as usage data. Then, the special figure linked production execution flag is set to the on state (step 065AKS097), and the special figure linked production determining process is ended.

FIG. 14-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving notification setting process (step 065AKS2) executed in the production control process process of FIG. 14-7. The time-saving notification setting process is a process for notifying the transition to the time-saving state when the display result of a normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol and the high base state (time-saving state) is controlled. .

In the time-saving notification setting process, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received a common symbol stop designation command that specifies that the time-saving symbol has stopped (step 065 AKS101). If the normal pattern stop designation command specifying that the time saving pattern has stopped has not been received (step 065 AKS101; No), the time saving notification setting process is ended.

If the normal pattern stop designation command specifying that the time saving pattern has stopped is received (step 065 AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether the sub time saving flag is in the on state or not, and whether the high base state is present or not. It is confirmed whether or not (step 065 AKS102). If it is in the high base state (step 065 AKS102; Yes), the time saving notification setting process is ended because the control based on the time saving symbol is not executed.

If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS102; No), the sub time saving flag is set to the on state (step 065AKS103). The sub-time saving flag is also set to the ON state when the jackpot game state ends and the time saving state is controlled.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the game is in a jackpot gaming state (step 065AKS104). If it is in the jackpot gaming state (step 065 AKS104; Yes), since the time saving state is controlled after the jackpot gaming state, the time saving notification setting process is ended without notifying that the time saving state has been entered.

If it is not a jackpot game state (step 065 AKS104; No), a right hit display instructing to hit right is displayed at a predetermined position on the image display device 5 (step 065 AKS105).

Then, it is determined whether or not the super reach effect is being executed (step 065 AKS106). If the reach effect of Super Reach is not being executed (step 065 AKS106; No), settings for starting notification of transition to time saving state (time saving transition notification) and notification of right-handed hitting (right-handed hitting notification). (Step 065AKS107).

Furthermore, if the super reach reach effect is being executed (step 065AKS106; Yes), settings are made to start the right hit notification at the start of the next variation (step 065AKS108). As described above, in this embodiment, when the super reach reach effect is in progress, in order to draw attention to the super reach reach effect, the time saving transition notification and the right hit notification are not executed, and the right hit in the next variation is performed. It is designed to carry out notifications. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the reach performance of the super reach from being hindered. In addition, even when performances other than the reach performance of Super Reach (such as a preview performance on the image display device 5, an action performance of the movable body 32, a performance with high expectations for a jackpot, etc.), the time-saving transition notification and the right hit notification are not executed. You can also do this. Further, although there are cases where the transition to the time saving state has already been completed when the next fluctuation starts, the time saving transition notification may be executed in the next fluctuation.

Note that although the time-saving transition notification and right-handed game notification are not executed, the right-handed game display is displayed, which can at least indicate that the game has transitioned to the time-saving state. It is possible to reduce the exposure to

After executing the process of step 065AKS107 or step 065AKS108, the time saving notification setting process is ended.

FIG. 14-11 is a timing chart showing the contents of the performance at the time of time reduction transition. In FIG. 14-11, ON of "special symbol fluctuation" indicates that the special symbol is changing, and OFF indicates that the special symbol is stopping. ON of the "normal symbol fluctuation" indicates that the normal symbol is fluctuating, and OFF indicates that the normal symbol is stopping. ON of the "right-handed game image" indicates that a right-handed game image is displayed on the image display device 5, and OFF indicates that a right-handed game image is not displayed.

FIG. 14-11(A) is a timing chart when the super reach effect is not executed when the time saving symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 14-11(A), when the time-saving symbol stops as a result of displaying the normal symbol during the variation of the special symbol, the time-saving shift notification and the right hit notification are executed. In addition, a right hit image is displayed at the timing when the time saving symbol stops. Then, after the symbol determination time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed, the time-saving control will be started at the start of the next normal symbol variation. In this way, by executing the time-saving shift notification and the right hit notification during the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol before the time-saving control actually starts, the time-saving shift notification and right-handed notification can be executed to save time even if the time-saving state is changed while the special symbol is changing. It is possible to appropriately notify that the player will move to the current state and play the game by hitting right.

FIG. 14-11(B) is a timing chart when the super reach effect is not executed when the time saving symbol is stopped. As shown in Figure 14-11 (B), when a super reach occurs while the special symbol is changing, and the time-saving symbol stops as a result of displaying the normal symbol during the reach effect of the super reach, at the timing when the time-saving symbol stops. Although the right-handed player image is displayed, time-saving shift notification and right-handed player notification are not executed. Then, at the start of the next variation after the end of the variation involving super reach, the right-handed hit notification is executed. In addition, if the next fluctuation start timing is after the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol, the time-saving symbol is already in the time-saving state, so in this example, when the time-saving symbol stops during the super reach reach performance, the next Time-saving notification is not performed at the start of fluctuation. On the other hand, the time saving notification may be executed at the start of the next fluctuation. For example, as shown in FIG. 14-11(B), if the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol passes after the start of the next variation, the time-saving notification may be executed at the start of the next variation.

In addition, if the end timing of the variation of the special symbol being executed when the time-saving symbol stops is before the elapse of the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol, which is the timing at which the time-saving control actually starts, the current special symbol There is no need to rush to execute time-saving shift notification or right-handed notification during fluctuations, so after the start of the next special symbol fluctuation, time-saving transition notification or right-handed notification can be performed during the period before the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. It may also be executed.

Next, an example of the performance operation of the feature section 065AK will be explained. FIGS. 14-12 to 14-14 show an example of the performance operation of the predetermined performance of the feature section 065AK. In FIG. 14-12(A), a downward arrow indicates that the variation of the decorative pattern is being executed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. There is. At the upper left of the image display device 5, small symbols that are always visible to the player are also changed. Further, a predetermined effect area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center portion of the image display device 5. In this embodiment, a predetermined performance (regular figure-linked effect, special figure-linked effect) is executed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. Note that the predetermined effect area 65AK11 may be displayed on the image display device 5 at all times, or may be displayed when a predetermined effect is executed. For example, the predetermined effect area 65AK11 may be erased in a high base state or a jackpot game state in which the predetermined effect is not performed.

When it is decided to execute the predetermined effect, the effect image is scrolled and displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started, as shown in FIG. 14-12(B). In FIG. 14-12(B), a downward arrow indicates that the effect image is scrolled. Thereafter, the performance result according to the predetermined performance pattern will be notified.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP1, as shown in FIG. 14-12(C), an "x" effect image is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and stops. As a result, it is reported that the predetermined performance has failed and the expectation that the display result of the normal symbol or special symbol will be a hit is low.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP2, as shown in FIG. 14-12(D), an effect image of "○" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and stops. As a result, it is announced that the predetermined performance is successful and the normal symbol is a hit.

In the case of the predetermined performance pattern SP4, as shown in FIG. 14-12(E), a performance image of musical notes is displayed in the predetermined performance area 65AK11 and stops. As a result, it is reported that the predetermined performance is successful, that there is a high expectation that the special symbol will be a jackpot, that a super reach will be executed, etc.

In the case of the predetermined performance pattern SP5, as shown in FIG. 14-12(F), a performance image of the characters "heat" is displayed in the predetermined performance area 65AK11 and stops. As a result, it is announced that the predetermined performance is successful, that there is a higher expectation that the special symbol will be a jackpot, that a super reach will be executed, etc.

In the case of the predetermined performance patterns SP4 and SP5, for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-12 (E) and (F), the decorative symbols with the same numbers stop in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the reach and After that, the result of the predetermined performance (a musical note or a performance image of the word "heat") is displayed. By doing this, when the predetermined effect is executed during reach, it is possible to make the player expect a super reach.

Note that the predetermined performance patterns SP1 and SP2 are executed as regular symbol-linked performances, and the predetermined performance patterns SP1, SP4, and SP5 are executed as special symbol-linked performances. Since the common symbol linked performance is executed regardless of the fluctuation of the special symbol (ornamental symbol), it can be performed at any timing during the fluctuation of the special symbol (decorative symbol).

FIG. 14-13 is an example of performance operation when the predetermined performance (ordinary figure linked performance) of the predetermined performance pattern SP3 is executed. FIG. 14-13(A) shows that the decorative symbols are varied in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At the upper left of the image display device 5, small symbols that are always visible to the player are also changed. Further, a predetermined effect area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center portion of the image display device 5.

When it is decided to execute the predetermined effect, the effect image is scrolled and displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started, as shown in FIG. 14-13(B).

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP3, as shown in FIG. 14-13(C), the effect image of "time" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and stops. Thereby, it is notified that the predetermined performance is successful and the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol.

When the time-saving symbol stops, as shown in FIG. 14-13 (D), a right-hitting display instructing a right-handed hit is displayed in the lower right part of the image display device 5, and a "time-saving entry" is displayed in the center part of the image display device 5. A time-saving shift notification is executed in which an image of the characters "!" is displayed. At this time, the number of time reductions is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5. Here, "100 times" is displayed in response to the time saving symbol B being displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 14-13(E), a right-handed hit notification is executed in which an image of the words "Aim to the right!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-13(F), the right-handed hitting notification image is erased and the right-handed hitting notification ends. At this time, the effect image of "time" is also deleted in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. In this manner, in this embodiment, even if the special symbols (ornamental symbols) are changing, if the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol, the state shifts to the time-saving state. In that case, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect that notifies that the time-saving symbol will stop, and a time-saving shift notification or right-handed hit notification as shown in FIGS. 14-13 (D) and (E) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the transition to the time saving state. This allows the player to continue playing the game without being confused.

FIG. 14-14 is an example of a performance operation when a predetermined performance (normal figure linked performance) of the predetermined performance pattern SP3 is executed during a reach performance of super reach. In FIG. 14-14(A), the decorative pattern showing the number "7" stops in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the variation of the decorative pattern is executed in the inner decorative pattern display area 5C. It shows that it is reachable. At the upper left of the image display device 5, small symbols that are always visible to the player are also changed. Further, a predetermined effect area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center portion of the image display device 5.

When it is determined to perform the predetermined effect, the effect image is scrolled and displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11, and the predetermined effect is started, as shown in FIG. 14-14(B). At this time, the super reach effect is started on the image display device 5.

In the case of the predetermined effect pattern SP3, as shown in FIG. 14-14(C), the effect image of "time" is displayed in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 and stops. Thereby, it is notified that the predetermined performance is successful and the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol.

When the time-saving symbols stop during the super reach performance, a right-hitting display instructing to hit right is displayed in the lower right part of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 14-14(D), but the image display device 5 The short time shift notification and right hit notification are not executed, and the reach effect of super reach continues to be executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-14(E), the decorative pattern showing the number "6" stops in the decorative pattern display area 5C inside, resulting in a loss. At this time, the effect image of "time" is also deleted in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-14(F), as the next decorative pattern begins to change, an image of the words "Aim to the right!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to notify the right-hand hit. is executed. At this time, the number of time reductions is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5. Here, "49 times" is displayed in response to the time saving symbol A being displayed. Note that here, the number of times of time saving is subtracted from 50 to 49 as the time saving state is entered during the previous fluctuation and one fluctuation has been completed.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol during the reach effect of super reach, the time reduction transition notification or right hit notification is not executed and the reach effect of super reach takes priority. is executed. When a jackpot is achieved as a result of the super reach, the time saving state is controlled after the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot. Therefore, even if the time reduction transition notification is executed during the reach performance of super reach, the notification may be wasted or the performance may be uninteresting, so priority is given to the reach performance of super reach. If the displayed result is a loss, right-handed hitting notification will be executed the next time there is a change, so it is possible to suitably notify that the time-saving state has been reached or that the right-handed hitting will occur. In addition, if the display result of a normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol during the reach effect of super reach, and the display result of the fluctuation accompanied by the super reach becomes a jackpot, the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol. The corresponding notification (time saving transition notification, right hit notification) may not be executed, or the notification corresponding to the display result of the normal symbol becoming the time saving symbol in the first change after the end of the jackpot game state. It may also be executed.

(Modified example of characteristic part 065AK)
This feature section is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. The processing contents, determination ratios, and methods for determining various effects in the flowcharts shown in the above embodiments and modified examples are merely examples, and the effects similar to those in the above embodiments can be achieved, and the effects shown in the above embodiments can be Any method may be used as long as it can be executed suitably. Further, the performance operation examples shown in the above embodiments are merely examples, and can be modified as appropriate as long as the same performance effects can be achieved. Moreover, all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Further, this characteristic part and other characteristic parts may be combined as appropriate.

In the case where the display result of the special symbol is pre-read and the pre-read preview performance is executed, if the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol, the execution of the pre-read preview performance may be restricted. For example, when the display result of the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol, the pre-read notice performance may not be executed until the time-saving symbol stops and the state shifts to the time-saving state. In addition, if the display result of the normal symbol before the start of fluctuation is read in advance and there is pending data for the normal symbol that will become a time-saving symbol, the pre-read preview performance that foretells the display result of the special symbol may be limited. good. By doing this, by changing the game state after executing the pre-reading notice performance, the fluctuation pattern changes between the time of pre-reading and the actual variation execution, and is consistent with the performance content of the pre-reading notice performance. You can prevent this from happening.

In addition to the jackpot signal (output during jackpot) and special prize signal (output during jackpot and time saving) as external signals to be output to hall computers and data display machines, we provide a time saving signal (output only during time saving). Good too.

In the above embodiment, if the display result of a normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol in the jackpot game state, control to the time-saving state is not performed, but if a jackpot is achieved in a low base state, the jackpot is In the corresponding jackpot game state, the time saving state may be controlled based on the time saving symbol. In this case, the order is the start of the jackpot game state → the start of time-saving control based on the time-saving symbol → the end of the jackpot game state, and the base changes before and after the jackpot game state. Therefore, the setting of the number of time reductions based on the fact that the jackpot gaming state has been controlled may be performed at the start of fluctuation after the jackpot gaming state ends. For example, if you hit a jackpot in a low base state, the number of time savings is 50 or 100, and if you hit a jackpot in a high base state, the number of time savings is 100, then you can save time during a jackpot gaming state. When the symbols stop, the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot game state is set to 100 times. By setting the number of time reductions at the start of variation after the end of the jackpot game state, it is possible to suitably transition the state even if the game state changes during the jackpot. Note that when the jackpot game state is reached, the number of time reductions may be constant regardless of the game state, or the number of time reductions may be determined at a constant rate.

In the above embodiment, the predetermined effects (normal pattern-linked effects, special pattern-linked effects) that suggest or notify the display results of normal symbols or special symbols are performed by scrolling and displaying the effect images in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. (FIGS. 14-12 to 14-14), but any presentation may be used as long as it can suggest or notify the display result of the normal symbol or the display result of the special symbol. Further, the predetermined performance may be a performance that at least indicates whether or not a normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol or suggests/informs the display result of a special symbol.

In addition, in the above embodiment, if the display result of a normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol in a high base state, the time-saving number is not updated, but the display result of a normal symbol in a high base state becomes a time-saving symbol. The number of time reductions may be updated or added when the number of times is reduced. In addition, the determination ratio of the number of time savers and the number of time savers will be different depending on the case where the display result of a normal symbol becomes a time saver symbol in a low base state and the case where the display result of a normal symbol becomes a time saver symbol in a high base state. You can also do this.

In the above example, execution of the time-saving shift notification and right hit notification was restricted in certain cases, such as the reach effect of super reach, but the time-saving pattern was displayed regardless of the content of the effect during execution. When transitioning to the time saving state depending on the situation, a time saving transition notification or a right-hand hit notification may be executed. For example, when executing a time-saving transition notification or right-handed hitting notification on a display means different from the image display device 5, the time-saving transition notification or right-handed hitting notification may be executed regardless of the content of the presentation on the image display device 5. good.

(Means related to characteristic part 065AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to feature part 065AK is:
The special identification information (for example, a special symbol) is displayed variably, and based on the variable display result of the special identification information becoming a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), the special variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 ( A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 65AK1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) in which a gaming medium easily enters a big winning opening),
The normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) is displayed variably, and based on the variable display result of the normal identification information becoming a predetermined result (for example, a common symbol), the normal variable means (for example, the variable winning ball device 6B (No. 2. A variable control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S404) that changes the game medium into a predetermined state (for example, an open state) in which it is easy for the game medium to enter the starting prize opening (2);
a state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 065AKS018) capable of controlling the normal variable means to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the normal variable means is more likely to change to the predetermined state than the normal state;
A production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120) capable of executing production;
The state control means is controllable from the normal state to the special state (for example, step 065AKS018 processing),
The performance execution means includes a specific performance that suggests that the variable display result of the special identification information becomes the specific display result (for example, a predetermined performance of predetermined performance patterns SP4 and SP5, a special figure linked performance) and a variable display result of the normal identification information. It is possible to execute a special performance that suggests that the display result is the special result (for example, a predetermined performance of the predetermined performance pattern SP3, a general map linked performance),
The state control means is capable of controlling the normal state to the special state even if the variable display of the special identification information is being executed when the variable display result of the normal identification information becomes the special result ( For example, the process of step 065AKS018 is executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably transition the state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
a predetermined notification means that performs a predetermined notification (for example, time-saving shift notification, right-handed notification) based on the change of the normal variable device to the predetermined state;
The special identification information may be provided with a predetermined notification restriction means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps 065AKS106 and 065AKS108) that limits the predetermined notification according to the content of the performance during the variable display of the special identification information. .
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined notification from interfering with the performance during variable display of the special identification information.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The effect executing means is configured to, in the normal state, cause a variable display result of the normal identification information to be the predetermined result, a variable display result of the normal identification information to be the special result, and a variable display result of the special identification information to be the predetermined result. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests which of the following will be a specific display result (for example, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect of predetermined effect patterns SP1 to SP5. Figs. 14-12 and 14-13). You can do it like this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the display results of both the normal identification information and the special identification information.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The state control means is capable of controlling to the special state based on being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 14-5),
When starting variable display of the special identification information after being controlled to the advantageous state, the control is performed based on being controlled to the advantageous state depending on whether the special identification information is the normal state or the special state. The conditions for ending the special state may be different.
According to such a configuration, the state can be suitably transitioned.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
When the variable display result of the normal identification information is the special result, the time from when the variable display result is displayed until it is finalized is longer than when the variable display result of the normal identification information is the predetermined result (for example, 14-3(A)).
According to such a configuration, the state can be suitably transitioned.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
In the case of the normal state, the time from when the special result is displayed as a variable display result of the normal identification information until it is finalized is longer than when the special state is in the state (for example, Fig. 14-3 (A), ( B)).
According to such a configuration, the state can be suitably transitioned.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to a characteristic part may be combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of the configurations of other features as appropriate.

The embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of this invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 079SG)
Next, the feature section 079SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 079SG) in the embodiment of this invention will be explained. FIG. 15-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 079SG. As shown in FIG. 15-1, the audio control board 13 in the feature section 079SG has an audio synthesis board that works together with the performance control CPU 120 to generate sounds (performance sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is equipped with an IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 that amplifies the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and an audio data ROM079SG133. Based on the production control command, the sound number data is output to the voice synthesis IC079SG132, and the voice synthesis IC079SG132 generates a sound corresponding to the sound number data.

When sound number data is input from the performance control CPU 120, the sound synthesis IC079SG132 generates sounds and sound effects for each of the speakers 8L and 8R individually according to the input sound number data, and sends them to the amplifier circuit 079SG134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesis IC079SG132, and outputs the amplified sound to each speaker 8L and 8R.

The audio data ROM079SG133 stores control data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R for outputting a sound corresponding to the performance executed by the performance command to which the sound number data corresponds in association with the sound number data. . In other words, these control data include the output mode (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sounds such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from each speaker 8L and 8R during the performance period (for example, decorative pattern variable display period). is a collection of data including audio data etc. described in chronological order.

FIG. 15-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the feature section 079. The display area of the image display device 5 in the feature portion 079SG is formed into a rectangular shape with a height L and a width L from side to side when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decorative symbols, a ready-to-reach effect, an operation promotion effect described later, and a still image display effect. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reservation storage display area 079SG005D in which the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed by the number of reservation displays in an outlined circle, and a second reservation storage number of special symbols can be displayed in white. A second display area 079SG005Sa is configured including a second hold storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed depending on the number of circular hold displays, and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop that indicates the gaming status.

That is, a portion of the entire display area of the image display device 5 excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

Note that the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb display game-related information (pending display, telop display, fourth symbol This is the display area where the number of reserved memories is displayed. In other words, the second display area 079SG005Sa and third display area 079SG005Sb in the feature section 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 displays a fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first special symbol pending memory number, and a display of the second special symbol pending memory number. 3 display area 079SG005Sb.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The horizontal width is formed to have the same length as the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. Further, the third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and horizontal width are extremely shorter than the height H and the horizontal width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. There is.

Therefore, in this feature section 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F occupying the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. .

As shown in FIG. 15-2(B), in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, the performance control CPU 120 executes a pending display operation process (see FIG. 8-13), which will be described later. As a result, each pending display can be displayed rotating around the vertical axis at a constant speed (for example, rotational speed V3).

As shown in FIG. 15-2(C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the performance control CPU 120 executes the telop operation process (see FIG. 15-13), which will be described later, so that the telop display area 079SG005T changes according to the gaming state and the performance being executed. A message (for example, if a specific reach effect is in progress, a message according to the state of the effect such as "In XX mode!") is moved from the left to the right at a constant speed (for example, movement speed V3). It can be displayed simultaneously.

Furthermore, when the characters included in the message according to the gaming state reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and the display ends, they are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T, and are moved from the left to the right again. be moved in a direction. Therefore, when a message corresponding to the gaming state is being moved and displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message corresponding to the gaming state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can It is now easier to recognize the current gaming status.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, a form is provided in which the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the hold display in the first hold memory display area 079SG005D and the second hold memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are at different fixed speeds. It may also be possible to rotate and move.

As shown in FIG. 15-2 (D), the fourth symbol 079SG005J has an upper symbol 079SG005Ja and a lower symbol 079SG005Jb, and the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb flash alternately at a constant cycle. This indicates that special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, for these upper pattern 079SG005Ja and lower pattern 079SG005Jb, if the variable display result is a loss, both will be turned off (turned OFF) at the end timing of the variable display, while the variable display result will be a jackpot or a loss. In this case, both lights are turned on (turned ON) at the end timing of the variable display.

In addition, the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are based on the timing at which a new pending memory occurs and the timing at which a new variable display starts. This is a display in which only the number changes. In other words, the display of the first special figure pending memory number and the display of the second special figure pending memory number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U. , unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of variable display.

Next, the display control section 123 in the feature section 079SG will be explained. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 is capable of displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on instructions from the performance control CPU 120, and can display multiple types of image data. By arranging the images and displaying the images on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When not displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. The predetermined image is not displayed on the production screen by controlling the image based on the data not to be displayed on the production screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 15-3(A) to 15-3(D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 15-3(A), image data 1 displays the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and displays the fourth This is data drawn to display the pattern 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn to display a small pattern of the image data 1 decorative pattern in the first display area 079SG005F (left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 15-3(B), image data 2 is data drawn in order to display images of a chance-up effect, a still image display effect, and an operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. .

As shown in FIG. 15-3(C), image data 3 is data drawn to display a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 15-3(A) to 15-3(C), these image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3 have display priorities for displaying the images on the image display device 5. is set. As for the display priority, image data 1 is set to be the highest and image data 3 is set to be the lowest (display priority of images in the image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3). . That is, in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, an image based on image data 2 is displayed as a lower layer image than an image based on image data 1, and an image based on image data 3 is displayed as a lower layer image. The image is displayed as a lower layer (lowest layer) image than the image based on image data 1 and the image based on image data 2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15-3(D), in the image display device 5, an image based on image data 2 is displayed with priority over an image based on image data 3, and an image based on image data 1 is displayed with priority over an image based on image data 3. The image based on image data 2 and the image based on image data 3 are displayed with priority.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 15-3 (D), when an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3 are displayed on the image display device 5 at the same time, image data 3 Since the image based on the image data 3 is displayed as the lowest hierarchical image, the image based on the image data 3 may be at least partially difficult to see or become invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, although details will be described later, images based on image data 1 and image data 2 are always displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images whose progress speed is constant, while images based on image data 3 The image based on the image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a moving image or a still image at a plurality of advancing speeds based on data stored in the CGROM in advance.

In particular, with this feature section 079SG, the details will be described later, but during the super reach reach effect, the video of the reach effect can be displayed at the normal progress speed V1 and the progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than V1. It becomes. This is because the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V1 and the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, only the data for the effect video to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and by performing predetermined processing on this data, a part of the effect video for the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may also be possible to display it.

In this way, in this feature section 079SG, by setting the video progress speed, which is the speed at which the performance video changes, to V1, the non-slow motion period, where the progress speed of the ready-to-reach performance perceived by the player is the fast first speed, and the video By setting the progressing speed to V2, which is slower than V1, a slow motion period is set in which the progressing speed of the ready-to-reach effect recognized by the player is at a second slow speed. In other words, a slow-motion video that is a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance in this feature section 079SG is slow is that the video progresses compared to a non-slow-motion video whose video progress speed is V1, which is displayed before the slow-motion video. It is fine as long as it is slow.

Note that this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach effects (see Figures 15-18 to 15-25), but this invention is not limited to this. Rather, for example, the content of the effect video displayed on the image display device 5 as a super reach effect is the same as the content of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 15-18 to 15-25, but the video progress speed By executing a super reach performance that does not change from V1 to V2, that is, a slow motion period, the super reach performance shown in Figures 15-18 to 15-25 becomes a slow motion period. It may be made easier for the player to recognize.

In other words, when performing a super reach effect in which the content of the effect video is the same but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the effect video at the second speed slower than the first speed in this invention This means that by displaying a video with the same content at a video progression speed V2 that is slower than the video progression speed V1 in a non-slow motion super reach performance, The displayed performance video corresponds to this.

As described above, in this feature section 079SG, by slowing down the video progress speed of the performance video, a slow motion performance is created in which the progress speed of the reach performance that the player feels is slow, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is Although the output of the output does not change from the playback speed V3, the present invention is not limited to this. By conversely speeding up the playback speed of the sound output from the game effect lamp 9 and the light emission period of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo slow motion that makes the player feel that the progress speed of the ready-to-win performance has slowed down may be constructed.

In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 079SG is equipped with a plurality of performance output means including a display means capable of displaying a performance video, and the speed of progress of the performance by at least one performance output means among these performance output means. Any technique may be used as long as it can make the player recognize that the performance being executed is slow motion during the slow motion period by making the difference between the slow motion period and the non-slow motion period.

Note that this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which the display of the reach effect animation is always executed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion The period may be such that the progress speed of the display of the reach effect animation can be changed (for example, the progress speed may gradually decrease over time, or the progress speed may increase or decrease within a predetermined range).

FIG. 15-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this feature section 079SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 15-4(A) is just an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 15-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be set arbitrarily according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", a "big hit", or a "small hit", as shown in Figure 15-4 (B), for example. Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates the predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 15-4(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may not be included. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 15-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 15-5, in this feature section 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 15-6(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 079SG, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 079SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 079SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more judgment values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 079SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 079SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 15-6(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this feature section 079SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the first special figure game and the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 15-7(A) shows an example of the structure of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 079SG determines whether the jackpot type is one of multiple types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 079SG using FIG. 15-7(B), in this feature section 079SG, as jackpot types, high accuracy control and time saving control are performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "probable variable jackpot C" are executed and shift to a high probability high base state, and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, only the time saving control is executed and the state changes to a low probability high base state. A transitional “non-probable jackpot” is set.

The jackpot game state based on "probable variable jackpot A" is a jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). The jackpot game state based on the "probable variable jackpot B" is a jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds). The jackpot game state based on the "probable variable jackpot C" is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed in two rounds (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds). Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. The "non-probable variable jackpot" is sometimes referred to as the 2-round (2R) non-probable variable jackpot.

Also, although not particularly illustrated, the small winning game state in this feature section 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the opening time is the same as that of the variable jackpot C. This is the open period (0.1 seconds in this feature part 079SG). Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

The high-precision control and time-saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming states of Probable Variable Jackpot A, Probable Variable Jackpot B, and Probable Variable Jackpot C are continuously executed until a jackpot occurs again after the corresponding jackpot gaming state ends. . Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot A or variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. This occurs continuously, resulting in a so-called consecutive home situation.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 079SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-7(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 15-7 (A), the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot type of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the type of jackpot may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 15-8 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 079SG. In this feature part 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach effect is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach effect is executed. Note that although this feature section 079SG only provides one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include multiple normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. It may be provided. Furthermore, a plurality of super reach variation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . .

Incidentally, the variation patterns in this feature section 079SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small win".

As shown in FIG. 15-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach in this feature part 079SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, as described later, the types of these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, etc. Then, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and the random number MR3 for determining the type of variation may be provided. The type of variation pattern may be determined first from the random number value, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 15-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 079SG. In this feature section 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 15-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α3 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-5 (Super Reach β3 jackpot fluctuation pattern). In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A or a probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the corresponding jackpot variation pattern determination table A to change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot). (variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

As shown in FIG. 15-9, the numbers of determination values assigned to PB1-2 to PB1-5 are different between the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 to PB1-3, 300 to PB1-4, and 500 to PB1-5. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 to PB1-3, 315 to PB1-4, and 515 to PB1-5. In other words, in this feature section 079SG, when the variable display result is a variable jackpot, the percentage of PB1-3 and PB1-4, which are the super reach β system variation patterns, is higher than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. Since the variation pattern in the variable display is determined as follows, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special win fluctuation pattern determination table, and use the special win fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the fluctuation pattern as PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern). do.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 variation pattern), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern determination table B for the loss, and Using the variation pattern determination table B, change the variation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α2 deviation), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern determination table C for the loss, and Using the variation pattern determination table C, change the variation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α2 deviation), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α3 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (Non-reach deviation pattern for time saving), PA2-1 (Normal reach deviation pattern), PA2-2 (Super reach α2 deviation pattern), PA2-3 (Super reach α3 deviation pattern), and PA2 It is determined from PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is off) and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β3 is out).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 079SG is "off", the special figure is The rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1). This makes it possible to prevent the game from being delayed and shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 15-8, the reach performance of Super Reach α1 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first reach performance, which will be described later, is executed. This is a reach performance where the display result is a jackpot, and the reach performance of Super Reach α2 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PA2-2) executes the first half and the second half of the first reach performance, which will be described later. This is a reach effect in which the variable display result is off after the change, and the reach effect of Super Reach α3 (the reach effect executed with the variable display in variable pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach effect described later. This is a ready-to-win performance in which a second ready-to-win performance, which will be described later, is further executed after the first half and the second half of the performance are executed, and the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss.

As for the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, as shown in Figures 15-8 and 15-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the more variable the display. It is set so that the percentage of the result being a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is high. In other words, for the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3, the percentage of the variable display result being a jackpot after being executed up to the second reach effect is the percentage when the first reach effect is executed. The variable display result is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, the reach performance of Super Reach β1 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PB1-4) is a reach performance in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot after the first half of the third reach performance, which will be described later, is executed. Yes, the reach performance of Super Reach β2 (the reach performance executed with the variable display of variable pattern PA2-4) has a variable display result that is off after the first half and the second half of the third reach performance, which will be described later, are executed. This is a reach performance, and the reach performance of Super Reach β3 (the reach performance executed with variable display in variable pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) executes the first half and the second half of the third reach performance, which will be described later. After that, a fourth ready-to-win presentation, which will be described later, is further executed, and the variable display result is a ready-to-win presentation in which the result is a jackpot or a loss.

Regarding the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, as shown in Figures 15-8 and 15-9, the longer the special figure variable display time, the more variable the display. It is set so that the percentage of the result being a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is high. In other words, for the variable displays of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5, the percentage of variable display results that are executed up to the 4th reach effect and the variable display result becomes a jackpot is The variable display result is set higher than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the second reach effect is always executed after the first reach effect, and the fourth reach effect is always executed after the third reach effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the second ready-to-win performance and the fourth ready-to-win performance may be executed alone.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, during variable display, each reach effect can be executed in combination of the first reach effect and the second reach effect, and can be executed in combination with the third reach effect and the fourth reach effect. Although possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to these, and the reach effects can be combined with combinations other than these combinations (for example, the first reach effect and the fourth reach effect, the second reach effect and the third reach effect). A case may also be provided in which this is executed in combination with a reach effect, etc.).

In addition, in this characteristic part 069SG, as shown in Figure 15-9, the fluctuation patterns of the super reach β system (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are generally the same as those of the super reach α system. The percentage of variable display results that will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is set higher than the variation patterns (variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3). Although not limited to, some of the fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach β series (variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are the fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach α series (variation patterns PA2- 2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) may have a lower jackpot expectation.

The RAM 102 in this feature section 079SG includes a game control data holding area 079SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 15-10 includes a first special symbol reservation storage section 079SG151A, a second special symbol reservation storage section 079SG151B, a regular symbol reservation storage section 079SG151C, and a game control flag setting section 079SG152. , a game control timer setting section 079SG153, a game control counter setting section 079SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 079SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , and are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 079SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, but it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 079SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal figure reservation storage section 079SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 079SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 079SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 079SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting section 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, such as data storage for performance control as shown in FIG. 15-11(A). Area 079SG190 is provided. The performance control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 15-11(A) includes a performance control flag setting section 079SG191, a performance control timer setting section 079SG192, a performance control counter setting section 079SG193, and a performance control buffer setting section 079SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 079SG191 includes a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 079SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 079SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 079SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting section 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 079SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. 15-11(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 079SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning prize designation command (the first starting opening winning prize designation command or the second starting opening winning prize designation command) and the pending memory number notification command (the Two commands (1 pending memory number notification command or 2nd pending memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are associated with the starting opening winning designation command and the pending storage number notification command. , storage areas (entries) for separately storing the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory are secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are determined later when the start condition is met and variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition has been met, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" are It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when ending the process.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A when a starting winning is made to the first starting winning opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 079SG194A. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , pending storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in FIG. 15-11(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 15-11(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning determination process of the feature section 079SG executed in step S101 in FIG. 6 will be explained based on FIGS. 15-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 079SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079SGS101; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value is (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154, for example. When the first special symbol pending memory number is not the upper limit value at step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 079SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbol pending memories has reached the upper limit value at step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 079SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 079SGS105). For example, the CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 079SG154. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 079SGS105 (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 079SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 079SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step 079SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (step 079SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 079SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 079SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 079SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning prize designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 079SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, the holding storage is stored in the effect control board 12. Settings for transmitting the number notification command are performed (step 079SGS113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115), and then the process of step 079SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS116), and then the starting opening is won. Finish the process. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 15-13 is a part of a flowchart showing the production control process processing in this feature section 079SG. In the production control process processing, the production control CPU 120 executes the prefetch notice setting process (step S161), and then updates the pending display in the first pending storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second pending storage display area 079SG005U, and Hold display operation processing (step 079SG162) for operating (rotating display) the hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop movement process (step 079SGS163) and the fourth symbol display process (step 079SG164) that executes the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J, one of steps S170 to S177 is executed depending on the value of the production control process flag. Execute the process.

FIG. 15-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 079SGS271; Y), the buffer number of the first special symbol pending memory in the reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of start winning is set to "1-0" to "1-4". Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A are stored for one buffer number each. Shift to the upper position (step 079SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is a third variable display result designation command or a fourth variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot B or probability variable jackpot C, a stop symbol other than "7" It is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is determined from among the chance numbers "334", "778", etc. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Then, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), proceed to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y). executes a chance-up performance determination process (step 079SGS278), and determines whether or not to perform a chance-up performance in the latter half of the first ready-to-reach performance or the second half of the third reach-based performance.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 15-15, if the variable display result is a failure, the decision is made to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 20%, and the decision is made not to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 80%. decide. Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 80%, and it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 20%. That is, in the variable reach display of the feature section 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the jackpot expectation level is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-27 and 15-32, only one performance pattern is provided as a performance mode of chance-up performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of performance patterns may be provided as the performance mode of the chance-up performance, and the expected degree of jackpot may be different depending on which performance pattern the chance-up performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this feature part 079SG, there is only one timing to start the chance up performance as shown in FIGS. 15-27 and 15-32, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of performance start timings may be provided, and the expected degree of jackpot may be varied depending on from which performance start timing the chance-up performance is started.

Further, after determining whether to execute or not execute the chance-up effect in step 079SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079SGS279). If the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279; Y), the notification performance (big hit notification performance or miss A still image display effect for determining a performance pattern of a still image display effect that displays the still image displayed at the end of the second reach effect on the image display device 5 during a period until the start of the notification effect (notification effect). The determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 15-16(A), if the variable display result is a failure, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100%. If pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a jackpot, the still image display performance pattern will be determined to pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80% and pattern SG-2 at a rate of 20%. do.

As shown in FIG. 15-16(B), the still image display effect pattern SG-1 freezes the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach effect. The still image display effect pattern SG-2 is a performance pattern that is displayed as a still image after the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 is displayed as a still image at the end of the second reach performance. , is a production pattern that changes the color of the still image.

In particular, pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot, so when the second reach effect is executed, the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the color of the still image changes.

In addition, if it is not the variation pattern of super reach α3 in step 079SGS281 (step 079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) ( Step S079SGS282). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than super reach β3 (step 079SGS282; N), the process proceeds to step 079SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach β3 (step 079SGS281; Y ), executes an operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining a performance pattern of an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B during execution of the fourth reach effect, and proceeds to step 079SGS283. .

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 15-17(A), if the variable display result is a failure, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect to pattern SS at a rate of 80%. -1 is determined, and pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-2 at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 15-17(B), the operation promotion performance pattern SS-1 is a performance pattern in which an image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The effect pattern SS-2 is an effect pattern in which the image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a larger size than the pattern SS-1.

In other words, the operation promotion performance in the feature section 079SG is performed when an image of the large size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (the operation promotion performance is executed in pattern SS-2). (in the case where the image of the push button 31B of normal size is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5) is higher than the case (in which case the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1). Since the variable display result has a high probability of becoming a jackpot (a jackpot notification effect is executed), the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion effect is executed. This allows players to increase their interest in gaming.

In step 079SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute each effect such as the above-mentioned chance-up effect, still image display effect, operation promotion effect, etc., and the effect control pattern (process table) according to the effect pattern and variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079SGS284).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 079SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the fluctuation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the fluctuation pattern designation command; however, the performance control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 079SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display production process (step S172) (step 079SGS288).

In addition, in the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer every time the variable display performance process is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction times out. Determine whether or not. If the process timer after the subtraction has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer after the subtraction has timed out, the process data At the same time as the switching is performed, the next process timer is started, and the presentation device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data.

Next, the performance mode of variable display of super reach α1 to α3 and super reach β1 to β3 in this feature section 079SG will be explained based on FIGS. 15-18 to 15-35.

First, regarding the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 shown in Figures 15-18, 15-19, and 15-26 (A) to 15-26 (G), when the variable display starts, the image display In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, a moving image such as a variable display of decorative patterns is started at a normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right (the moving speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progressing speed of V3. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R start playing BGM, sound effects, etc. according to the variable display at the normal playback speed of V4.

In addition, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts blinking at a constant cycle. Ru. Hereinafter, the blinking or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in this feature section 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are all synchronously blinking or lighting. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

As shown in Figures 15-18, 15-19, and 15-26 (A) to 15-26 (C), when the timing of the development of the reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first half of the first reach effect is reached. The execution period begins, and a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A is started. When the battle performance progresses and the first half of the first reach performance execution period reaches the second half, a video in which the friendly character A attacks the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 described above to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which the attack of friendly character A towards enemy character A is displayed in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is a variable display of super reach α1, when the first half execution period of the first reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 15-18 and 15-26 (E) to 15-26 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, after a video of friendly character A's successful attack and enemy character A falling down is displayed as a jackpot notification effect, the decorative symbols stop at the jackpot combination and the jackpot game state is controlled. will be notified. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-26 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

During the jackpot notification performance, the video of the part where ally character A's attack is successful is displayed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to Figure 15-26 (E)), and the subsequent enemy character The display of the moving image of the part where the robot collapses is executed at the advancing speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 15-26 (F)). Then, the video of the part where it is announced that the decorative symbols stop at the jackpot combination and are controlled to the jackpot game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Figure 15-26 (G) ).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of Super Reach α2 or Super Reach α3, when the first half execution period of the first reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 15-19 and 15-26 (D) , the attack of the ally character A is not successful, and the period shifts to the second half execution period of the first reach performance.

As shown in Figure 15-19 and Figures 15-27 (A) to 15-27 (B), when the second half of the first reach effect is executed, the battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, in the second half execution period of the first reach effect, when the effect video of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, a chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 15-27 (B). . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1 similarly to the effect video of the battle effect.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first reach performance execution period approaches, a video of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

Furthermore, during the period in which friendly character A attacks enemy character A in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F) In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach α2, when the second half execution period of the first reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 15-19 and 15-27 (E) to 15-27 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, as a failure notification effect, after the attack of ally character A fails and is defeated by enemy character A, the decorative symbols stop at a failure combination and the variable display result is a failure. will be notified.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the video display is executed at the normal progress speed V1 in the part where the attack of ally character A fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a failure. Ru.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R , the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-27 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguished display of the fourth symbol (display of the lights out of both the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb) ) is carried out.

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach α3, as shown in Figures 15-20, 15-21, and 15-27 (D), during the second half execution period of the first reach effect, Character A's attack is successful and enemy character A is defeated. Then, the process shifts to the first half execution period of the second ready-to-reach performance.

As shown in Figures 15-20, 15-21, and 15-28 (A) to 15-28 (B), when moving to the first half execution period of the second reach effect, ally character A and enemy character B The battle performance progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first half of the second reach performance comes to an end, as shown in Figures 15-20, 15-21, and 15-28 (C), an image is The display of concentrated lines starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, and at the same time, the display of the moving image of the friendly character A attacking the enemy character B starts in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

Additionally, during the period in which friendly character A attacks enemy character B in slow motion (during the period in which the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, while the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, the blinking cycle of the gaming effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is faster). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 15-28(D), the number of concentrated lines as the effect production described above is gradually increased and displayed.

In other words, in the second half execution period of the second reach performance, as the progress speed of the battle performance video decreases to V2, the number of concentrated lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases and the game effect lamp 9 blinks intensely. Therefore, by increasing the number of concentrated lines and blinking the game effect lamp 9, it is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the performance result of the battle performance (Which one is executed, the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance). It is possible.

After the execution period of the second half of the second reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 15-20, 15-21, and 15-28 (E), it is displayed at the end of the battle effect as a still image display effect. The image that was displayed (in this feature section 079SG, the image immediately before the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F switches from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the rotation of the telop from left to right The movement in the direction is executed without changing while maintaining the proceeding speed V3, and the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R without changing while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is carried out without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 changes according to the progress of the battle production video. The cycle returns to the previous cycle when the speed decreased to V2.

In addition, if pattern SG-2 is determined as the performance pattern for the still image display performance, as shown in Figures 15-29 (A) to 15-29 (E), the battle performance will be used as the still image display performance. The colors of the last displayed image are reversed. After the still image display effect in which the color is reversed ends, a jackpot notification effect is displayed stating that ally character A's attack hits enemy character B, and after enemy character B falls down, the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. be notified. In particular, when the decorative symbols stop at a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-29 (F), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

As shown in Figure 15-20, the jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2 is that the video in which the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B is displayed at the progress speed V1. However, the moving image of the enemy character B falling down is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, a moving image in which the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination after the enemy character B falls down is displayed at the progressing speed V1. In particular, when the decorative symbols stop at a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect will not be reversed and the image shown in FIG. 15-30 (A) will be displayed as the still image display effect. ) ~ As shown in Figure 15-30 (D), there is a case where the jackpot notification effect is executed as described above, and a case where the jackpot notification effect is executed as shown in Figures 15-30 (F) ~ Figure 15-30 (H). There are times when a performance is performed.

The jackpot notification performance when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SG-1 is the same as the jackpot notification performance when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SG-2, as shown in Figure 15-20. In this example, a moving image in which the attack of friendly character A hits enemy character B is displayed at a advancing speed of V1, but a moving image in which enemy character B falls down is displayed at advancing speed V2. Then, after the enemy character B falls down, the progress speed is displayed at V1. During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-30 (E), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

In addition, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the failure notification effect is such that the attack of ally character A does not hit enemy character B, and conversely, the attack of enemy character B hits ally character A. After the ally character A falls down due to a hit, the decorative symbols stop at a wrong combination, and it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled.

As the failure notification effect, as shown in FIG. 15-21, a moving image of ally character A's attack without hitting and being defeated by enemy character B is displayed at a progressing speed of V1. During the failure notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-30 (I), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are extinguished) ) is carried out.

Next, regarding the variable display of super reach β1 to β3 shown in Figures 15-22, 15-23, and 15-31 (A) to 15-31 (H), when the variable display starts, the image In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, an effect animation such as a variable display of decorative patterns is started at a normal progress speed V1. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right (the moving speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progressing speed of V3. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R start playing BGM, sound effects, etc. according to the variable display at the normal playback speed of V4.

In addition, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb start to alternately light up (blink) at a constant cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts blinking at a constant cycle. Ru.

As shown in Figures 15-22, 15-23, and 15-31 (A) to 15-31 (C), when the timing of the development of the reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first half of the third reach effect The execution period begins, and a battle performance between ally character B and enemy character A is started. As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first half execution period of the third reach performance begins, a video of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 described above to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period in which the attack of ally character B towards enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period when the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is the variable display of super reach β1, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 15-22 and 15-31 (E) to 15-31 (G). Then, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a jackpot notification effect, a moving image of friendly character B's successful attack and enemy character A falling down is displayed, and then it is announced that the jackpot game state will be controlled. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-31 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 is changed to the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

During the jackpot notification performance, the video of the part where ally character B's attack is successful is displayed at the normal progress speed V1 (corresponding to Figure 15-30 (E)), and the subsequent enemy character The display of the moving image of the part where the robot collapses is executed at the advancing speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 15-30 (F)). Then, the video of the part where it is announced that the decorative symbols stop at the jackpot combination and are controlled to the jackpot gaming state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (Figure 15-30 (G) ).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β2 or Super Reach β3, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 15-23 and 15-31 (D) , the attack of ally character B is not successful, and the execution period shifts to the second half of the third reach performance.

As shown in Figures 15-23 and 15-32 (A) to Figure 15-32 (B), when the third reach effect transitions to the second half execution period, the battle effect between ally character B and enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, in the second half execution period of the third reach effect, when the effect video of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, a chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 15-32 (B). . The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1 similarly to the effect video of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed with priority over the effect animation of the chance-up effect, while the effect animation of the chance-up effect is displayed with the decorative pattern (the image shown in FIG. 15-32(B) It is displayed with priority over "7" displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display device 5. For this reason, in this feature section 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up performance, the player can recognize that the variable display is in progress by visually recognizing the small symbols, and also display the performance video of the chance-up performance. By displaying the symbols with priority over the symbols, it is possible to reliably secure an area on the image display device 5 for displaying the performance animation of the chance-up performance.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, the performance video of the chance-up performance is displayed with priority over the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design is displayed with priority over the performance video of the chance-up performance. may also be displayed with priority. By doing this, the player can easily recognize from which decorative symbol combination the reach effect that is currently being executed has developed, thereby improving the game's interest.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the first reach performance execution period approaches, a video of the friendly character B attacking the enemy character A starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. Ru. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period in which the attack of ally character B towards enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (during the period when the progress speed of the battle production video is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

If the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β2, when the second half execution period of the third reach effect ends, the display will be displayed as shown in Figures 15-23 and 15-32 (E) to 15-32 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, as a failure notification effect, after the attack of friendly character B fails and is defeated by enemy character A, it is reported that the variable display result is a failure.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the video display is executed at the normal progress speed V1 in the part where ally character B's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a failure. Ru.

In addition, during the failure notification performance, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-32 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are extinguished) ) is carried out.

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach β3, as shown in Figures 15-24, 15-25, and 15-32 (D), during the second half execution period of the third reach effect, Character B's attack succeeds and defeats enemy character A. Then, the process moves to the execution period of the first half of the fourth reach performance.

As shown in Figures 15-24, 15-25, and 15-33 (A) to 15-33 (B), when moving to the execution period of the first half of the 4th reach effect, ally character AB and enemy character B The battle performance progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the effect animation of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. In addition, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle performance progresses and the second half of the fourth reach performance first half execution period approaches, the image display device 5 changes as shown in FIGS. 15-24, 15-25, and 15-33 (C). In the first display area 079SG005F, display of a moving image in which ally character B attacks enemy character B is started. When the display of the video is started, the progress speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video changes from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B attacking the enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period when friendly character B attacks enemy character B in slow motion (during the period when the progress speed of the battle production video in the first display area 079SG005F is V2). In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right are executed while maintaining the progress speed V3, and the speakers 8L and 8R output BGM, performance sounds, etc. is output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, while the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternate blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, the blinking cycle of the gaming effect lamp 9 becomes shorter (the blinking cycle becomes shorter). faster).

In other words, in the second half execution period of the fourth reach performance, the progress speed of the video of the battle performance decreases to V2, and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 becomes more intense. It is possible to effectively draw a player's attention to the performance result (Which of the jackpot notification performance and the loss notification performance is executed).

Then, as the second half of the fourth ready-to-reach performance progresses, the operation promotion performance is executed. When the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-1, the push button 31B is displayed at the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 together with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba that imitates the shape of the push button 31B. The display of the meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period and the effect image 079SG005E is started, and the updated display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged updated display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the periphery of the image display device 5 are started. As mentioned above, the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on image data 2 (see Figure 15-3), so they are displayed at a constant rate regardless of the progress speed of the battle effect. Displayed as a video of progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 15-33 (D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the period for accepting operation of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by an updated display of the meter 079SG005M, while the effect image 079SG005E is enlarged. Update display progresses. In addition, since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player will be able to visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E, and when the operation promotion effect is not executed. The visibility of the battle performance is reduced. Since the execution period of the operation promotion performance is included in the second half of the fourth reach performance, the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion performance.

As shown in Figures 15-33 (D) and 15-33 (E), the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion performance, but the end timing of the operation promotion performance (push At the timing (timing when button 31B operation reception ends), the scene does not progress to the point where it is known whether or not the attack of friendly character B will hit enemy character B. In other words, the jackpot notification effect or the failure notification effect will not start. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 15-34(A) to 15-34(E), when the performance pattern of the operation promotion performance is determined to be pattern SS-2, the first display on the image display device 5 In the center of the area 079SG005F, a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B starts to be displayed as an operation promotion image imitating the shape of the push button 31B, together with an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb whose size is larger than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba. The update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. As mentioned above, the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on image data 2 (see Figure 15-3), so they are displayed at a constant rate regardless of the progress speed of the battle effect. Displayed as a video of progress speed.

As shown in FIG. 15-34 (D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the period for accepting operation of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by an updated display of the meter 079SG005M, and at the same time, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb Most of the battle production images are hidden. Note that the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is an image having a larger size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and has a transmittance of 0%, as described above. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation promotion performance is included in the second half of the fourth reach performance, the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion performance.

As shown in Figures 15-34 (D) and 15-34 (E), the battle performance continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion performance, but the end timing of the operation promotion performance (push At the timing (timing when button 31B operation reception ends), the scene does not progress to the point where it is known whether or not the attack of friendly character B will hit enemy character B. In other words, the jackpot notification effect or the failure notification effect will not start. It has become.

Then, if the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or if the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is If the game ends), the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance is executed from the timing when these players operate the push button 31B or from the timing when the operation promotion performance ends.

As the jackpot notification performance after the operation promotion performance, as shown in Figures 15-24 and 15-35 (A) to 15-35 (C), a video of friendly character B's attack hitting enemy character B is shown. Although the animation is displayed at the advancing speed V1, the moving image of the enemy character B falling is displayed at the advancing speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B falls is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-35 (D), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is restarted. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display of the combination of decorative symbols and small symbols indicating a jackpot, and a lighting display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are illuminated) ) is carried out.

In addition, as a failure notification performance after the operation promotion performance, as shown in Figures 15-25 and 15-35 (E) to 15-35 (G), the attack of friendly character B hits enemy character B. First, on the contrary, after the enemy character B's attack hits the ally character B and the ally character B falls down, it is announced that the jackpot game state will not be controlled. In particular, when the failure notification effect is executed, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa, an image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 15-25, as the failure notification performance, a moving image is displayed at a progressing speed V1 until the attack of the ally character B does not hit and the decorative symbols stop with the combination of failures. During the failure notification performance, the rotation of the pending display and the movement of the telop from the left to the right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the advancing speed V3, and the sound is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. , BGM, performance sounds, etc. are output without changing while maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-35 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss, and the display on the image display device 5 changes from the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to display. In addition, after the end of the variable display, during the pattern confirmation period, a stop display in combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, and an extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are extinguished) ) is carried out.

In addition, Figure 15-26 (H), Figure 15-27 (H), Figure 10-29 (F), Figure 15-30 (E), Figure 15-30 (I), Figure 15-31 (H), Figure As shown in FIG. 15-32 (H), FIG. 15-35 (D), and FIG. 15-35 (H), in this feature section 079SG, the telop (message) is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end timing of the variable display. Although a form in which the included telop display area 079SG005T is displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the end timing of the variable display, the display of the telop display area 079SG005T itself on the image display device 5 is However, the display of the telop (message) itself in the telop display area 079SG005T may not be performed.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, in the variable display of super reach α3 and super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during a slow motion period other than immediately before the notification performance. Furthermore, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened also during a part of the period (non-slow motion period) in which the display of the ready-to-win effect animation is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-19 to 15-25, each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance is During the first half execution period, the videos of each reach performance are displayed on the image display device 5 at a progress speed of V1, and the second half of each of the first reach performance, second reach performance, third reach performance, and fourth reach performance is displayed. During the partial execution period, the moving images of each reach effect are displayed on the image display device 5 at a progressing speed V2. For this reason, while the video of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2, the degree of emotional empathy of the player towards the ally character displayed during the reach effect is increased, and jackpot notification is announced. Since it is possible to increase expectations for the execution of the performance, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. On the other hand, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance, BGM and performance sounds from speakers 8L and 8R are Since the output is still output at the normal playback speed of V4, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, the sound output device in this feature section 079SG includes a voice synthesis IC079SG132, an amplifier circuit 079SG134, and speakers 8L and 8R, so it is easy to reproduce the variable display including when performing a reach effect, when playing a jackpot game, etc. Performance sounds such as high-quality BGM (songs) and sound effects can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R at appropriate volumes, making it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 15-20, 15-21, 15-24, and 15-25, during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach performance, the game effect Since the lamp 9 flashes at a shorter period than usual, the performance effect can be improved by flashing the game effect lamp 9 at a shorter period during the period when the progress speed of the performance video is V2.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, a mode is exemplified in which the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the blinking period of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second ready-to-win performance or the fourth ready-to-win performance. By doing so, the player can recognize from the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 that the notification effect will be executed soon, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, an example is given in which the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the second half of the second reach performance and during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the flashing cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing from the first ready-to-win effect to the fourth ready-to-win effect.

In addition, as shown in Figures 15-19 to 15-25, during the execution period of each of the first reach effect, second reach effect, third reach effect, and fourth reach effect, the progress of the effect video of the reach effect. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, the rotation speed of the hold display and the moving speed of the caption are both constant at V3, and the playback speed of the performance sound output from speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, an example is given in which the rotation speed of the pending display displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the moving display speed of the caption are both V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. The rotational speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each reach effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 15-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, so each reach effect is During execution, the player can more easily recognize the ready-to-reach effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 15-18 to 15-25, in the period other than during the reach effect, the rotating display of the pending display is rotated at rotation speed V3 in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U. This is executed, and in the telop display area 079SG005T, the moving display of the telop is executed at the moving speed V3. In other words, the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the telop are executed at the same speed as during the reach effect, so that the player can It is possible to prevent these pending displays and telops from becoming difficult to recognize.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-2 (C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and end the display, and at the same time the telop display area 079SG005T ends. Since it is displayed again at the left end of 079SG005T and moved again from the left to the right, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the entire telop is always displayed moving in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this. There may be a timing when a part of the displayed telop becomes invisible to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 15-20, 15-21, and 15-28, in the second half execution period of the second reach effect, the display of the effect animation of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, and the image By executing the effect presentation of displaying concentrated lines on the display device 5, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect during the latter half execution period of the second ready-to-reach presentation, thereby improving the interest in the game. In particular, in this feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-28(C) and 138(D), the number of saturated lines displayed increases as the battle performance progresses, so the number of saturated lines displayed increases. The increase makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second ready-to-win performance ends and the jackpot notification performance or miss notification performance is executed.

In this feature section 079SG, the effect production according to the present invention is exemplified as a display of concentrated lines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The output of a specific sound effect from 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as effect effects, and the second reach effect ( As the battle performance) progresses, the effect level of the effect performance is increased one after another (for example, increasing the range of motion of the movable body 32, increasing the volume of a specific sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, The vibration of the controller 31A or the push button 31B may be increased, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be vibrated, etc.).

In addition, as shown in Figure 15-26 (G), Figure 15-29 (E), Figure 15-30 (D), Figure 15-31 (G), and Figure 15-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect. When the decorative symbols stop at a jackpot combination, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden and the first display area 079SG005F is displayed. Since the image of the jackpot notification performance is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the visibility of the jackpot notification performance in the second display area 079SG005Sa is further increased, and the player is made aware that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. It's easy to do.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, when executing the jackpot notification effect, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. In a state where the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the first In the second display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed overlappingly with the first pending storage display area 079SG005D, the second pending storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T).

At this time, the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are made transparent or displayed in a reduced size, or the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U are displayed in a reduced size. The visibility of the jackpot notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the pending displays displayed in the pending display area.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-29, in the second half execution period of the second reach effect, the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F. As shown in FIG. 15-21, during the still image display effect execution period, the rotation display of the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and Since the moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, it is possible that a suspended display is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect, or that the telop is being displayed moving. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the pending display, and by stopping the rotating display of the pending display and the moving display of the caption, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the pending display and the display of the caption. .

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 15-16 and 15-29 (A) to 15-29 (B), when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, the color of the still image is inverted. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is being performed by inverting the color of the still image.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as a form of changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as a still image display effect, a form of inverting the color of the still image has been exemplified, but this invention is not limited to this. Examples of ways to change the color of a still image include, but are not limited to, changing the color of a still image to black and white, changing only part of the color of a still image, and adding new colors to a still image. It may be added.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 15-29(B), when the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed by executing the still image display effect in pattern SG-2, Since the pending display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the colors of the fourth symbol displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not reversed, the player can see what is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. By comparing the hold display, telop, fourth symbol, etc. with the still image, it is possible to easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

In addition, in each variable display of the super reach in this feature part 079SG, there is a pattern in which the first reach effect or the third reach effect is executed and then the second reach effect or the fourth reach effect is executed, and a pattern in which the first reach effect or the third reach effect is executed. There is a pattern in which the variable display ends after the execution of the performance, transitioning to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance, so the display of the reach performance video progresses during the first reach performance or third reach performance. Whether or not to move to the second reach performance or fourth reach performance after being executed at speed V2, and display of the performance video of the reach performance during the second reach performance or third reach performance are executed at progress speed V2 Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the player is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled after the game is played, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in Figures 15-19, 15-20, 15-21, 15-23, 15-24, and 15-25, during the first reach performance and the third reach performance, the The production in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character during the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance and the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance are performed at the same time. Since it is executed at speed V1, the progress speed when transitioning from the first half execution period of the first reach performance to the second half execution period of the first reach performance or from the first half execution period of the third reach performance to the second half execution period of the third reach performance is different from the progress speed of the performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character during the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance, thereby excessively increasing the expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. You can prevent this from happening. Furthermore, Figure 15-18, Figure 15-20, Figure 15-22, Figure 15-24, Figure 15-25 and Figure 15-26 (E) to Figure 15-26 (G), Figure 15-29 (C) ~ Figure 15-29 (E), Figure 15-30 (B) ~ Figure 15-30 (D), Figure 15-31 (E) ~ Figure 15-31 (G), Figure 15-35 (A) ~ Figure As shown in 15-35 (C), in the jackpot notification performance of this feature section 079SG, while displaying a video when an enemy character collapses due to a hit by an attack of an ally character is executed at a progress speed of V2, Figure 15-19, Figure 15-21, Figure 15-23, Figure 15-25 and Figure 15-27 (E) to Figure 15-27 (G), Figure 15-30 (F) to Figure 15-30 (H ), as shown in Figures 15-32 (E) to 15-32 (G), and Figures 15-35 (D) to 15-35 (F), in the failure notification effect, a video is displayed when an ally character falls down. is displayed at the progress speed V1, so when the loss notification effect is executed, the display of the effect video of the loss notification effect is not executed at the progress speed V2, which may cause player dissatisfaction. It can also be prevented from becoming excessively high, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the variable display result of super reach is a failure notification effect is executed, the display of the effect animation of the failure notification effect is executed at the progress speed V1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a part of the variable display of the super reach, the presentation moving image of the loss notification presentation may be displayed at a proceeding speed V2 slower than V1. By doing this, it is possible to create variations in the performance of the failure notification performance and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, this feature section 079SG exemplifies a form in which the progress speed V1 of the performance video during the jackpot notification performance is the third speed in the present invention, and the progression speed V2 of the performance video during the jackpot notification performance is the fourth speed in the present invention. However, this invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in this invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V1. Furthermore, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 15-24 and 15-25, the operation promotion effect is executed when the video of the reach effect is being displayed at the progress speed V2 during the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect. Therefore, the performance effect of the fourth reach performance can be enhanced by the operation promotion performance.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the display of the effect video of the fourth reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 while the operation promotion effect is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. During execution of the operation promotion performance, the display of the performance video of the fourth ready-to-reach performance may be performed at the progress speed V1. Furthermore, it is possible to execute a suggestion performance that suggests that the operation promotion performance will be executed before the operation promotion performance is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestion performance, the performance video of the fourth reach performance is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may also be executed.

In addition, as an operation promotion effect of the feature section 079SG, in addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a meter 079SG005M that notifies the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is now displayed in the first display area 079SG005F. While these operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or operation promotion image 079SG005Bb and meter 079SG005M are displayed, the display of the fourth reach effect animation at the progress speed V2 is continued, but the notification effect does not progress. . Furthermore, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. With this, the same jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect is executed. Therefore, the notification effect is not executed at a timing before the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B ends (until the operation promotion effect ends), so if the push button is not operated by the player, the notification effect is It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled during the operation reception period of the push button 31B.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, although the detection means in this invention is illustrated as the push button 31B, this invention is not limited to this, and the detection means may be other than the push button 31B, such as the stick controller 31A. In addition to the operation means described above, sensors capable of detecting the player's actions, such as a motion sensor or a touch sensor, may be used.

Also, Figure 15-18, Figure 15-20, Figure 15-22, Figure 15-24, Figure 15-26 (E) to Figure 15-26 (G), Figure 15-29 (C) to Figure 15-29 (E), Figure 15-30 (B) to Figure 15-30 (D), Figure 15-31 (E) to Figure 15-31 (G), Figure 15-35 (A) to Figure 15-35C). As shown, in the jackpot notification performance in this feature section 079SG, the video of the part where the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progress speed V1, while the video of the part where the enemy character collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2. will be displayed at On the other hand, Figure 15-19, Figure 15-21, Figure 15-23, Figure 15-25, Figure 15-27 (E) to Figure 15-27 (G), Figure 15-30 (E) to Figure 15- 30 (G), Fig. 15-32 (E) to Fig. 15-32 (G), Fig. 15-35 (D) to Fig. 15-35 (F), as shown in Figs. The moving image is displayed at the advancing speed V1, and is never displayed at the advancing speed V2. In other words, when a jackpot notification performance is executed, a part of the performance video of the jackpot notification performance is displayed at the progress speed V2, thereby giving the player the impression that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. can.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot in this invention, a still image display effect can be executed in pattern SG-2 (a still image display effect in which colors are reversed). Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted as a still image display effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, an example is given in which the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 is used as a special effect in this invention, but this invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in this invention is , effects other than the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow color, etc.) may be possible.

In addition, the operation promotion effect of this feature part 079SG is pattern SS-1 in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and a pattern SS-1 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F. This can be executed in any of the performance patterns including pattern SS-2 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, which is larger in size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, is displayed as the operation promotion image. When the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be viewed through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while in pattern SS-2 When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is hidden by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, so the operation promotion effect is more difficult than when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. The visibility of the battle performance of 4 reach performance is low. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 15-17, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot is the same as when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the variable display result is lower than the rate of hitting a jackpot, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2 is used to perform the operation promotion performance, thereby improving the interest in the game. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 15-24, 15-25, and 15-33 (C) to 15-33 (E), when displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba as an operation promotion effect, the operation promotion image While displaying 079SG005Ba, the display of the animation of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb changes the progress speed V2 (slow motion ), the visibility of the performance video (battle performance) of the 4th reach performance is shown as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion performance is pattern SS -2, in addition to displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, by displaying a dedicated background image over the entire display area of the image display device 5, the production video (battle (direction) may be completely invisible. In addition, during the period in which the 4th reach performance video (battle performance) is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to the operation promotion performance pattern SS-2, the 4th reach performance video (battle performance) The display may be performed at the progress speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in this feature section 079SG, as super reach effects, a second reach effect can be executed after the first reach effect, and a fourth reach effect can be executed after the third reach effect. Furthermore, as the variable display of super reach, there is a variable display of super reach α1 that notifies the jackpot after the first half execution period of the first reach effect, and a variable display of super reach β1 that notifies the jackpot after the first half execution period of the third reach effect. Display, variable display of super reach α2 that executes the second half execution period of the first reach performance after the first half execution period of the first reach performance and informs of the failure, and the second half of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance Variable display of super reach β2 that executes a partial execution period and informs of failure, variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the second reach effect after the first reach effect exchange partial execution period, third reach effect exchange partial execution period It is possible to perform a variable display of Super Reach α3 that transitions to the 4th Reach performance after , and as shown in Figures 15-18 to 15-25, from the execution period of the first half of the 1st Reach performance to the latter half of the 1st Reach performance. When transitioning to the execution period, When transitioning from the first half of the first reach performance to the first half of the second reach performance, When transitioning from the first half of the third reach performance to the second half of the third reach performance , when transitioning from the second half execution period of the third reach performance to the first half execution period of the fourth reach performance, the performance video of each reach performance is executed at the progress speed V2, and from the first half execution period of the first reach performance to the first half execution period. When transitioning to the execution period of the second half of the reach performance, when transitioning from the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance to the execution period of the first half of the second reach performance, from the execution period of the first half of the third reach performance to the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance When transitioning from the second half execution period of the third reach performance to the first half execution period of the fourth reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as in other periods. Therefore, when transitioning from the first half part execution period of the first reach performance to the second half execution period of the first reach performance, when transitioning from the second half execution period of the first reach performance to the first half execution period of the second reach performance, the third reach performance When transitioning from the execution period of the first half of the performance to the second half of the third reach performance, and when transitioning from the execution period of the second half of the third reach performance to the first half of the fourth reach performance, the player is given a sense of discomfort. You can prevent it from getting stuck. Furthermore, by displaying the effect animation of each ready-to-win effect at the progress speed V2, it is possible to easily recognize the branching of the ready-to-win effect drawn by the player.

In addition, in the variable display of the super reach of this feature part 079SG, a form in which two reach effects can be executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of the super reach can perform three or more reach effects. It may be possible to perform a reach effect, or it may be possible to perform only one reach effect.

Although the characteristic part 079SG of this invention has been explained above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic parts, and even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the gist of this invention, this invention will not affect the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature section 079SG, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a third reach effect, and a fourth reach effect are provided as reach effects for super reach, and in all of these reach effects, a part of the effect video of the reach effect is provided. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the display of the animation is executed at the proceeding speed V2 (slow motion), the present invention is not limited to this. A pattern in which the effect video is always displayed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the effect video is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Furthermore, the content of the effect may be different between a ready-to-win effect in which a part of the effect video is displayed at the progress speed V2 and a ready-to-reach effect in which the display of the effect video is not performed at the progress speed V2. By doing this, it is possible to create variations in the reach performance of the super reach, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is always played at a constant playback speed (playback speed V4) regardless of whether or not the presentation video is being displayed at the progress speed V2. Although the output format is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example 079SG-1, there are a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a third reach effect, and a fourth reach effect. In the first half of the execution period of the second half of each reach performance, the playback speed V4 is set from speakers 8L and 8R as in the first half execution period of each reach performance of 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance. While the production sound is output in V4, in the second half (slow motion period) of the execution period of the second half of each reach performance of the 1st reach performance, 2nd reach performance, 3rd reach performance, and 4th reach performance, The effect sound may be output at a different playback speed (for example, playback speed V5 slower than V4). By doing this, the performance effect of the performance sound for the reach performance can be improved by varying the playback speed of the performance sound while the display of the performance video for the reach performance is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the performance effect of the performance sound for the reach performance can be improved. You can improve your interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 and 15-34, the first display area 079SG005F is visible during the execution period of the reach effect by displaying the effect image 079SG005E, displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, etc. Although it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, this invention is not limited to this. As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Furthermore, in the case where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, as shown in FIGS. 15-36 and 15-37, after the reach effect ends, , the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-36(A) to 15-36(D), when the second reach effect is being executed, when the second reach effect is finished together with the still image display effect, As part of the jackpot notification performance or the loss notification performance, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), the results are shown in FIGS. 15-36(E) and 15-36(F). As such, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot game state will be controlled as a jackpot notification performance, or that the jackpot game state will not be controlled as a loss notification performance.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-37(A) to 15-37(D), when the fourth reach effect is being executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player presses the push button 31B. When the operation promotion effect ends without operating the button 31B, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as part of the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the second display. The image is enlarged and displayed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is hidden by the effect image 079SG005Ea), the results are shown in FIGS. 15-37(E) and 15-37(F). As such, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot game state will be controlled as a jackpot notification performance, or that the jackpot game state will not be controlled as a loss notification performance.

Note that the effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 15-36 and 15-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. 15-3 (B), and the drawing range is expanded as an image based on the image data 2. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce only the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F without reducing the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

In this way, in this modification 079SG-2, while the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, as shown in FIGS. 15-36 and 15-37, After the end of the reach effect or the end of the fourth reach effect, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F as part of the notification effect, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is reduced. does not change, so by changing the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the timing of the notification effect, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb changes. By not changing, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the pending display, telop display, variable display of the fourth symbol, etc.

Furthermore, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image that is drawn as an image of the second image data shown in FIG. The visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by being enlarged toward the display area 079SG005Sb. It is possible to accurately reduce only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F, and the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be drawn from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by being executed toward the area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the areas corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be made difficult to change.

Furthermore, although this modified example 079SG-2 exemplifies a form in which the operation promotion performance is executed during the fourth reach performance, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion performance is part of the notification performance. It may be executed as a part.

In addition, when performing the operation promotion effect as part of the notification effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-38(A) to 15-38(F) as a modification example 079SG-3, it is similar to the modification example 079SG-2. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging and displaying the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 15-38 (D). do.

Note that by displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG. 15-2(A), it is possible to avoid a decrease in visibility due to the effect image 079SG005Ea.

Thereafter, the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the player operating the push button 31B, or the operation promotion performance is completed without the player operating the push button 31B, or the jackpot gaming state It is reported that the system is not controlled.

As described above, in this modified example 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced due to the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data Since the visibility of the push button 31B does not decrease, the operation promotion effect can be made more prominent than the fourth ready-to-reach effect, and the player can be effectively urged to operate the push button 31B.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the variable display result is always a jackpot, but this invention The invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example No. 079SG-4, if the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always It may be possible to have a variable probability jackpot (or even a variable probability jackpot A that is most advantageous for the player). Furthermore, as a performance pattern when the still image display performance is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state again after the loss notification performance is executed once. It may also be possible to perform a revival effect that notifies the user of the situation. In addition, in the case where the revival effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the jackpot type will be a variable jackpot or a non-probable variable jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot). There may be a case where the game is controlled to a jackpot game state and a case where it is controlled to a jackpot game state of variable jackpot. By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot notification effect will be executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. .

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, a message indicating the gaming status is displayed as an example of the telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this. The displayed telop may include a message indicating whether or not the variable display being executed or the variable display that has not yet started will be controlled to a jackpot game state, the title of the reach effect being executed, etc. good.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, a mode is exemplified in which a telop can be displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T according to the state of the performance being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T The telops displayed are those that can identify the gaming status, the expectation level that the variable display result will be a jackpot in the variable display being executed (jackpot expectation level), explanation of the performance being executed (especially the reach performance), and the reach performance. It may also be a preview performance that can be executed from a timing earlier than the above.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 and 15-34, during the period when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the operation promotion effect (operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion The display of image 079SG005Bb) has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is executed after the moving image of the reach effect returns from the progress speed V2 to the progress speed V1. Good too.

Furthermore, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 and 15-34, an example is given in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed on the image display device 5 as operation promotion effects. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion performance includes not only displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, but also displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. As a pre-display effect, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of each push button 31B are displayed overlappingly, thereby creating an operation promotion image. An effect may be performed in which 079SG005Ba or operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed.

In addition, when performing the effect in which the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5 as a precursor effect of the operation promotion effect, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5. The moving display speed may be reduced as the image approaches the center of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation promotion effect will be executed, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-20, 15-21, 15-24, and 15-25, when displaying the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although a mode is illustrated in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (emission colors) of the game effect lamp 9 is different from when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1. It's okay. For example, when the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in multiple colors, while the video of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. When playing, the game effect lamp 9 may be able to emit light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the moving image of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the game interest from decreasing due to the emitted light color of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-20, 15-21, 15-24, and 15-25, when displaying the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although a mode is illustrated in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) may be shortened, the present invention is not limited to this. When the moving image of the ready-to-win effect is displayed at the progress speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be made longer. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the display of the moving image of the reach effect and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-26, 15-29, 15-30, 15-31, and 15-35, the performance mode of the jackpot notification performance includes the end of the reach performance. Later, an example is shown in which decorative patterns are oscillated and displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a oscillating manner in a combination that indicates a jackpot. The timing may be during the reach performance.

Further, the present invention provides a gaming machine in which a player can select at least a part of the effect sounds such as BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player. May be applied to By doing this, if the player has set the output of the effect sound that matches his/her preference, when the video of each reach effect is being displayed at the progress speed V1, the speaker 8L , the effect sound output from 8R remains unchanged and is played back at the playback speed V4, so even though the player himself has selected the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the effect sound is played back at the playback speed V4. It is also possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to slow playback.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, as an end suggestion performance in this invention, it is possible to execute a performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance and the second half execution period of the third reach performance, and the performance Although we have exemplified a form in which the variable display result is always a failure when executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. After the effect in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is temporarily switched to the display of the normal background image before the reach effect, and then the variable display result shows that the jackpot is achieved. (For example, a case where a revival effect is performed) may be provided.

In addition, when performing the resurrection effect in this way, the game effect lamp 9 is lit and flashed before the animation of the resurrection effect is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the resurrection effect is displayed to the player. It may be made to recognize that it will be executed. Further, as a presentation mode of the resurrection presentation, for example, the ally character may attack the enemy character again and defeat the enemy character. In particular, when performing a resurrection effect, a part of the video of the resurrection effect (for example, a video of a scene where an enemy character collapses) is displayed at a progress speed of V2 to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. Good too.

Further, although a plurality of characteristic parts and modifications are disclosed in this specification, the gaming machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more of these plurality of characteristic parts and modifications. You may.

For example, the pachinko game machine 1 of the feature section 079SG may be a pachinko game machine in which the jackpot probability can be changed by changing setting values as shown in FIGS. 1 to 9. In such a case, for example, in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1, a pattern is provided in which the variable display results are out of order, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to a high setting value (for example, 6) that is advantageous to the player. is set, even if the variable display results are off in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 at a higher rate than when other setting values are set in pachinko game machine 1. good. By doing this, the fact that the variable display result is off in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 can be used as a suggestion that a high setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, in the variable display of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach β1, it is possible to suppress the decrease in player's interest due to the variable display result being wrong, and to draw the attention of the players to the fact that the variable display result is wrong. It becomes possible.

In addition, in the feature section 079SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game machine that plays a predetermined game is defined as a game machine that plays at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, it may be a slot machine or a general game machine as long as it performs the following.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the feature part 059AK may be combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other feature parts such as the feature part 063AK, the feature part 065AK, and the feature part 079SG, as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other features, as appropriate. For example, in addition to controlling the time-saving state by displaying the time-saving symbols in a stopped state as in the characteristic part 059AK, the small winning game state ends based on passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 as in the characteristic part 063AK. After that, the time saving state may be controlled for a predetermined period. In addition to this, like the characteristic part 065AK, even when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol, the time-saving state may be controlled. According to this, the chances of being controlled to be in a time-saving state are increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, for example, the time-saving inciting effect in the characteristic part 059AK, the normal time passing inciting effect and the time-saving time inciting effect in the characteristic part 063AK, the predetermined effect in the characteristic part 065AK, and the reach effects of super reach A to super reach C, etc. It may also be a predetermined effect in 079SG. Then, during the first period of the predetermined performance, a performance video in which the progress speed of the performance is the first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a display means, and the predetermined performance after the first period can be displayed. In the second period, it is possible to display on the image display device 5 an effect video in which the progress speed of the effect is at a second speed slower than the first speed, and the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect can be displayed during the first period. It may be configured such that the speed related to the performance sound can be outputted by the speakers 8L and 8R as the sound output means at the same speed in both the period and the second period. According to this, although the progress speed of the performance video of the predetermined performance changes between the first period and the second period, the speed related to the performance sound does not change between the first period and the second period. This can prevent you from feeling uncomfortable.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game machine frame, 4A First special symbol display device, 4B Second special symbol display device, 5 Image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative symbol display area, 6A Winning ball device , 6B variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker, 9 game effect lamp, 10 general winning hole, 11 main board, 12 performance control board, 13 audio control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay Board, 21 Gate switch, 22A First starting port switch, 22B Second starting port switch, 23 Count switch, 25A First holding indicator, 25B Second holding indicator, 25C Normal figure holding indicator, 30 Batted ball operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 passage gate, 81, 82 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 Random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control section.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
a firing means capable of firing a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
A guidance display that uses an image display to prompt the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. a means for displaying information;
guiding means that emits a guiding light to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path by moving a light emitting part of the light emitting means;
Sound output means capable of outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission,
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The first guide display is easier for the player to recognize than the second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, performing the second guidance display in a first period of a predetermined period in which a start effect for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed; performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display during a second period that is later than the first period during the predetermined period;
Continuing the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display in a period after the predetermined period;
Continuing the second guidance display in the special state after the control of the advantageous state has ended;
The guide means is
The light emitting means is caused to emit light in a manner different from the guide light emission during the first period, the light emitting means is turned off before the second period starts, and the first light emitting means is turned off when the second period starts. The guide light is emitted in conjunction with the guide display,
performing the guide light emission multiple times in the second period;
The sound output means includes:
When the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions is performed, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is outputted;
When the last guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions is performed, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is not outputted;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images